JP2020054533A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: A privilege advantageous to a player is imparted by privilege imparting means when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on display means where identification information for indicating the determination result by determination means is displayed. A performance that is varied corresponding to the number information is executed by performance execution means, and the number information to be subtracted or added at one time is set by setting means for each number of times, corresponding to the number of times that the number information determined by number determination means is subtracted or added. As a result, the number information to be subtracted or added at one time is set corresponding to the number of times that the number information is subtracted or added, thereby increasing a player's interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 170

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a variable effect in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner in order to indicate the result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball into a winning opening. Among such gaming machines, there are those that aim to improve the interest in the game of the player by suggesting to the player that the lottery result has been won according to the content of the variable effect to be executed. .

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and When identification information for indicating the determination result of the above is displayed, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to execute an effect that is variable according to the number information Effect execution means, number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times the number information is to be subtracted or added, and corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-times determining means, the number information to be subtracted or added to one at a time. And setting means that can be determined as

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the effect execution unit determines a predetermined lower limit of the number information when a determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result. The effect corresponding to the value or the upper limit value is configured to be executable.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the setting unit is configured to subtract or minimize the minimum number information among the number information to be subtracted or added at one time. After determining the number of times information is added, the number information to be subtracted or added to the remaining number is set based on the number information that can be subtracted or added.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result specific to the display means When identification information for indicating is displayed, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect that is variable in accordance with the number information, A number determining means for determining the number of times the number information is to be subtracted or added; and determining the number information to be subtracted or added to once for each number of times corresponding to the number of times determined by the number determining means. Possible setting means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect execution means is configured to be able to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined lower limit or upper limit of the number information when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. Things.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means determines the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or the number of times the minimum number information is added, out of the number information to be subtracted or added at one time, and then determines the number information that can be subtracted or added. Is set to the number information to be subtracted or added to the remaining number of times on the basis of.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XIIa-XIIa line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board and the operation unit along the line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9. (A) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a displacement control device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a displacement control device. (A) is a rear view of the contact member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operation member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XXIa-XXIa line | wire of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a launch production unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board and a launch production unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a launch production unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a launch production unit. (A) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of the arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 25. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the launching unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34B. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35B. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the cover member taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36B. 28A is a plan view of the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a plan view of the rear transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of the translation member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (e) are plan views of the translation member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (A) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion of the transmission arm member accompanying the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a time-based change of the time. It is a front perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an enlarging / reducing unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back of the scaling unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of a telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of a telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of a telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of a telescopic displacement member and a shielding design member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an effect member. It is a rear view of an effect member. FIG. 74A is a rear view of the effect member, and FIG. 74B is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the production member taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a horizontal slide member. FIG. 8 is a partial sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a path forming member of the wiring guide member. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is an exploded back perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is an exploded back perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate production means, and a decoration means. It is sectional drawing of the game board and operation unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial front enlarged view of a first decorative member in a range XCVII of FIG. 2. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the scaling unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. With the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. With the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. It is sectional drawing of the game board and launch unit in 6th Embodiment in the line | wire corresponding to XXVII-XXVII line | wire of FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a substrate box in a 7th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a board box. (A) is a front view of a board box, (b) is a side view of a board box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a rear perspective view of a box cover. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXb in FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (A) is a front perspective view of the main control device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device. FIG. 113 is a partial enlarged front perspective view of the main control device in a portion CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a front view of the main control device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), (b) is a side view of the main control device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114 (a), (C) is a side view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the board box when the key is operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box when the key is operated to the on position. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115 (b). is there. FIG. 115A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along a cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 115B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along a cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. FIG. (A) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along a cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along a cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115 (a). FIG. FIG. 116A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along a cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116A, and FIG. 116B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along a cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a partial enlarged rear view of the board box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along section line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121 (a). (A) is a front view of the board box in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the board box in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a La-La sectional view of the variable winning device, (b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of a back cover body showing a state in which a switching member is operated so that a game ball is distributed to a special discharge channel, and (b) is a non-operating channel solenoid, and It is a figure showing the state where the guidance piece of the switching member closed the opening face of the entrance of the discharge channel. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a button continuous hit production start screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a button continuous action upper limit reaching screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a button continuous hit effect result screen 1, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a button continuous hit effect result screen 2. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a screen which was continuously struck after reaching the upper limit in a button continuous production, and (b) was an example of a display mode of a pursuit screen during a button continuous production. It is a figure and (c) is a figure showing the contents of an effect setting. (A) is a diagram showing an icon displayable area, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion mode display screen of an icon display effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a screen on which the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect result of the icon display effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen which shows another pattern of an icon display effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a button effect start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a normal pattern when a button effect is pressed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a delay pattern at the time of pressing a button effect, and (b) is an example of a display mode of a delay pattern 0.8 seconds after a button effect is pressed. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when an effective period passes during button production delay standby. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a collective effect start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a character acquisition screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a collective effect end screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of a last acquisition chance screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a last GET screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a weak attack screen during a battle effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a strong attack screen during a battle effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a boss defeat screen in a battle effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a boss escape screen of a battle effect, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a battle effect co-op screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of a pseudo off performance of 14 seconds, and (b) is a figure showing an example of restart from a pseudo off stop. It is the timing chart which showed the button operation content and the flow of the production in the continuous hit production. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of each mode of button production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each mode of the collective effect. It is a timing chart showing a flow of a battle effect. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the pseudo-offset effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first collision type selection table in the first control example. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a second random number table in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a variation pattern selection table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in a first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving / probability change table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a variable effect pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing contents of a normal effect pattern table in the first control example. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the effect pattern table for time saving and probable change in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a continuous-hit effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an upper limit number selection table in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the end number selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect result selection table in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a random display effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the effect icon storage area in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display order selection table in a 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the permutation storage area in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table in the first control example. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display number selection table in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the delay effect selection table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the collective effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character number selection table in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the battle effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the HP selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final remaining HP selection table in the first control example. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a battle mode selection table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface BD. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot operation setting processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormal process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning information related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a stop process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation mode setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hitting effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the delay effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the battle effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the second half battle effect setting processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time-saving and probable change effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the random display effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal effect execution management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit-related command process for a display performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed V production command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an error command process to be performed. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices of the pachinko machine in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the injection device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the effecting member is located at the operating position, and (b) is a state in which the effecting member performs the dividing operation in the state where the effecting member is located at the operating position. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device is driven and a granular member is being injected in a state in which the injection is performed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the effecting member moves to the standby position and the granular member returns to the storage area, and (b) shows a state in which the rotating member is driven. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device is driven and a granular member is being injected. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically the various apparatuses which the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example, and the effect content. It is the timing chart which showed typically the situation of various apparatuses of a pachinko machine in the case of performing a series of character effects in the second control example as time elapses. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the operation control of the launcher at the time of starting in the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the operation control of the firing accessory at the time of a series of special effects production in the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed typically the abnormality discrimination result and the flow of the effect to be performed during the series of the role effect in the second control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the accessory operation table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the abnormality determination table in the second control example. It is. 9 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which showed initial operation processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation mode setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the character effect effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory effect production management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality determination process during production performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality determination process during 2nd effect performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal effect execution management processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the operation effect management processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a button continuous-stroke production start screen in the first modification, and (b) is an example of a display mode of a screen prompting a specific operation during a button continuous-stroke production. FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed after reaching the upper limit in the first modification, and (b) is an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed before the upper limit is reached. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode immediately before the end of the validity period without performing a specific operation in the first modified example, and (b) is a display mode when the validity period ends without performing a specific operation. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the above. It is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of a pachinko machine in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the end command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a display variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the press command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the timer setting process performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the production timer update process performed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the four variation pattern selection tables in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal four tables in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the four tables for time saving and probable change in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart which showed special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart which showed special design change start processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th example of control. It is a flow chart which showed the special symbol lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th example of control. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the result command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen in a modified example of the first control example, and (b) is a diagram of an obtainable character display screen of a chance UP pattern in a modified example of the first control example. It is a figure showing an example. It is the figure which showed an example of the acquirable character display screen of the combination in which the big hit is determined in the modification of the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character storage area in the modification of a 1st control example. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the character lottery table in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the number lottery table in the modification of the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the battle effect setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the arrangement | positioning setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the number setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of a 1st control example. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the modification of icon display production. It is a figure showing regulation contents of a magnification selection table in a modification of an icon display effect. It is a flow chart which showed random display production setting processing A performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modification of icon display production. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the demonstration effect state in the effect modification of the launch role. (B) is the figure which showed an example during the demonstration effect state end process in the effect modification of the launch role. (A) is a figure showing the state where the firing combination in the effect modification of the firing combination is located at the reference position. (B) is the figure which showed the state in which the launcher in the effect modification of the launcher was located at the preparation A position. (C) is the figure which showed the state in which the launcher in the effect modification of the launcher was located at the preparation B position. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect production management processing B performed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modification of the effect of the special character. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation mode setting process B performed by the MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of the production of the launching object.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the near side of the drawing is referred to as a front (front) side, and the far side of the drawing is referred to as a rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. 1) on the back side (or front side).

  The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like. Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and the time-saving state occurs during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability increases).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  The change in the state of the electric accessory 640a between the open state and the closed state is caused by an opening / closing operation of an opening / closing plate that has a rotating shaft at a lower end and that rotates and displaces in a manner of inclining or standing toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided along the upper surface of the opening and closing plate to the second winning opening 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening and closing plate is connected to the game area. By closing the space between the second winning opening 640 and the second winning opening 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per one time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed at a position visible behind the central portion of the game area (behind the window of the base plate 60). In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is provided on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The three middle and lower symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time.
Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 may be increased during the probability change or during the working hours by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability changing or the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. If the hemisphere is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be two, for example.

  Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left or right of or below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first winning opening 64 in front view, or may be on the left side of the left and right center of the game area.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can be always won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning accessory 640a is provided. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim for

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is more advantageous for the player to set the state and aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  Note that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the player can aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handing" or the second by "left-handing". The winning opening 640 can also be aimed. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the “right-handed” cannot aim at the first winning opening 64, and the ball shot “left-handed” does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). To "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow by adding a game property that changes the way the ball is hit.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided substantially at the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. For example, it may be on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, on the left or right of the variable display device unit 80, or on the upper side.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the second winning port 640.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the open / close plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. .

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, and the like.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is visible through the opening 511a. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape having a front side opened from a bottom wall 511 and an outer wall 512 erected from an outer edge of the bottom wall 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

  The rear case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A supporting plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a projecting toward the front side in a shape fittable with a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw to be fastened.

  The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and fastening screws are inserted into the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

  The shape of the positioning projection 513a is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a smaller shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. When the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is correspondingly formed in a rectangular shape.

  As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the window 60 a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 having a shape, a ball falling unit 150 configured to allow a ball discharged from a game area to flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) are fired toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured by assembling the launching effect unit 300 and the like that are configured as possible, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that the peripheral edge portion thereof is opposed to and fixed to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured to make it easy for a player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Thereby, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure disposed on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

  For example, even when the ball downflow unit 150 is provided on the back side of the base plate 60, the base plate 60 can be seen through and the back side can be seen, so that the ball flowing down the ball downflow unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the ball flow-down unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect provided by the visually recognized ball, but the details will be described later.

  If there is a part that the player does not want to see, a countermeasure such as attaching a seal member having low light transmittance (or light impermeability) may be used.

  The center frame 86 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

  The launch production unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partition member 310 that partitions the range in which the granular member 320 can fly is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is 86 can be fired inward. Therefore, it is possible for the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window of the center frame 86 to effectively visually recognize the granular member 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. it can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed on the upper inside of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 disposed symmetrically on the left and right inside of the rear case 510. Is provided.

  Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 at a position above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is disposed on the left and right positions of the opening 511a. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in a time series. 7 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 8 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the overhang state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state. FIG. 9 illustrates an enlargement / reduction unit 600 in an enlarged state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in an effect standby state.

  10 shows the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the production standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production upper end state. In FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production upper end state, and the right displacement rotation unit is shown. The unit 800 is in the effect lower end state.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production upper end state (see FIG. 10) and the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes from the production standby state, a collision may occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the displacement rotation unit 800 By controlling the state change from the effect standby state to be executable on condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are overlapped in a front view. Can be avoided.
Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be capable of descending displacement in a state where the rendering members 700 are collectively arranged at one place, and after the descending displacement, in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. The operation members are controlled so that the constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state where the members are arranged in the above-described manner, and the area visually recognized in a front view is increased (see FIG. 9).

  After that, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 reassemble again (see FIG. 8), ascend and displace in a state where they are collectively arranged at one place, and return to the effect standby state shown in FIG.

  The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10, and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured so that the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced from the effect standby state in a direction having not only the vertical component but also the horizontal component.

  In the present embodiment, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc portion S1a having an arc shape centered on each center point C1, and an advancing / retreating path portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common arc portion S1a to the right, left, and outside.

  In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a. In FIG. 11, the left horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, while the right side slide member 840 is arranged at the right end. The horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

  Therefore, when the left horizontal slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. It is possible for the player to visually recognize as if it is rotationally displaced about the center point C1 disposed near the center.

  That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotary effect body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom of the effect using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

  12 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7, and FIG. 13 (a) and FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIV-XIV of FIG.

  7 and 9, the game board 13 is not shown, but FIGS. 12 to 14 show a state in which the game board 13 is assembled on the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

  FIGS. 12A and 13A show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward. In FIGS. 12B and 13B, the granular member 320 is emitted and scattered. An example of the state in which it was done is illustrated.

  The effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is arranged such that the central portion of the collective arrangement is higher than the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 in the effect standby state shown in FIGS. Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310.

  On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the effect member 700 is arranged close to the rear of the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is invisibly shielded.

  Since the displacement trajectory of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, the firing production unit 300 is configured to execute the operation production of firing the granular member 320 on the partitioning member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the granular member 320 is disposed below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is fired along a path that rises and slopes forward. , Is struck against the front wall portion of the partition member 310 and rises while rebounding within a range formed by the partition member 310.

  This allows the player to see the granular member 320 as if it were coming to his side, so that the attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

  In addition, with such a configuration, the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the components provided in the game area such as the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom in arrangement.

  In other words, a position immediately below the partition member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted as the standby position of the granular member 320 that is emitted toward the partition member 310 of the present embodiment. However, in this case, since the launch effect unit 300 is disposed in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure an arrangement space for a guide path through which the ball entering the first winning opening 64 flows. It may become difficult and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning port 64 to deal with it.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the partitioning member 310 is disposed at the forefront position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is disposed obliquely rearward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64 can be secured. The guide route of the ball can be arranged without any problem, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the first winning port 64 cannot be freely arranged.

  When the control for firing the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 12A, as shown in FIG. 12B, the granular member 320 scattered inside the partitioning member 310 and the third symbol display device 81 It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the combination of the two-dimensional display and the three-dimensionally displaced movement of the granular member 320.

  When the control for firing the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13A, the scattering of the granular member 320 inside the partitioning member 310 and the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 are performed as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player along with the change. In this case, for example, the timing of the scattering of the granular member 320 and the timing of displacing the effecting member 700 of the scaling unit 600 in a discrete manner are matched, so that the granular member 320 on the front side of the scaling unit 600 that changes state. Can be visually recognized, and the force of the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be enhanced.

  Here, as a method of producing an effect in accordance with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is also conceivable.

  However, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by the enlargement / reduction unit 600 as in the present embodiment. Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display, and it is considered to be difficult to produce an effect effectively.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the partitioning member 310 that forms the range in which the granular member 320 that performs operation in conjunction with the state change of the scaling unit 600 scatters is provided on the front side of the scaling unit 600. Therefore, even in the situation where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 covers most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult for the player to see the granular member 320.

  Further, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from becoming harder to see than when the granular member 320 is configured with a large member.

  Therefore, even when most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the scaling unit 600, the effect of the scaling unit 600 can be improved.

  Further, the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the scaling unit 600 can be used for the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

  That is, similarly to the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800 has a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect standby state; see FIG. 7), The state can be changed between a state in which the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (a lower end state of the effect, an upper end state of the effect, see FIGS. 10 and 11). The effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattered granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattered granular member 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 are executed. be able to.

  In this case, in the scaling unit 600, it has been described that the effect can be effectively produced by scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the displacement in the mode in which the effect member 700 is discrete. The air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing member 854 by scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing member 854 disposed in the It can be visually recognized as if it were rotating at high speed), and the effect of producing the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, an effect in which the scattering of the granular member 320 is visually recognized in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect in which the scattering is visually recognized in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. And can also be used for

  As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the launch effect unit 300 and is disposed immediately above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is disposed on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the horizontal slide member 840 continues to be displaced right above from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit 800 may collide.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the forward / backward route section S1b is set as a route that can avoid collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing / retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the injection device 400 of the launching effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting and to be able to be displaced upward beyond the first light irradiation device 330 for setting the rear end line BL1, so that a large displacement width of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. .

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, it is arranged so that an interval can be secured between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310, but until the space between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 is ensured even during transport. I am not considering it. Therefore, at the time of transport, it is desirable to maintain the effecting member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range and to restrict the partitioning member 310 and the effecting member 700 from being arranged close to each other.

  Returning to FIG. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement restricting device 180 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510. The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be able to change its state by manual operation from the back of the rear case 510, and restricts the downsizing of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state in the restricted state.

  By employing the displacement restricting device 180, even when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment, shipping and transport of the pachinko machine 10 can be facilitated.

  Specifically, conventionally, means for suppressing displacement of the movable auditorium by filling a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) in a range where the movable auditorium is displaced, and extracting the cushioning material after arriving at the game hall. As a result, there is a case where the movable accessory is prevented from being displaced during shipping or transport. However, when the opening at the center of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no penetrating portion for extracting the cushioning material, so that the game board 13 and the rear case 510 are not provided. Without disassembly, the cushioning material cannot be removed, and the burden on the game hall may be large.

  As a countermeasure, the present embodiment employs a displacement forming device 180. Thus, without releasing the fixing of the game board 13 and the rear case 510, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be changed between the restricted state in which the vertical displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is restricted and the released state in which the restriction is released. Can switch. Hereinafter, first, details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described, and then details of the state change will be described.

  15A is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 15B is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 15C is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180. FIG.

  15 (a) and 15 (b) show the displacement restricting device 180 in the released state, and FIG. 15 (c) shows the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state. As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c), the displacement restricting device 180 switches between the restricted state and the released state when the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes and retracts from the contact member 181. In the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d extends to the inside of the rear case 510 and is configured to be able to engage with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 18 (a) is a rear view of the contact member 181. 18 (b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18 (c) is a front view of the operation member 183.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement restricting device 180 includes a contact member 181 disposed in contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6) and a contact member disposed on the rear side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 fastened and fixed to the 181 and guiding the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operation member 183 guided by the guide member 182 for displacement, and an arrangement between the operation member 183 and the contact member 181. A coil spring 184 that is provided so as to be able to apply a biasing force toward the rear side to the operation member 181.

  With the operation member 183 being formed in a substantially elliptical shape that is long in the left and right directions in rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 that house the operation member 183 also have a substantially elliptical shape that is long in the left and right direction in rear view. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement restricting device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is long on the left and right when viewed from the rear.

  The contact member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase a holding force by increasing a contact area with the rear case 510, and is used to hold the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the rear side. A wall portion is extended, a through-hole 181a is formed at the left and right ends, and a fastening portion projecting from the rear case 510 is inserted through the wall portion. It includes a tubular holding portion 181b protruding to the side and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183.

  The guide member 182 has a main body portion 182a that extends in the front-rear direction in an elliptical annular shape along the outer circumference of the contact member 181 and a screw through which a fastening screw inserted into a fastening portion inserted through the insertion hole 181a is inserted. An insertion portion 182b, a fastening portion 182c into which a fastening screw inserted into the abutting member 181 is screwed, a retaining portion 182d that protrudes radially inward at a rear end of the main body 182a, and a main body 182a. A ridge 182e projecting radially inward at the upper and lower inner portions in the front-rear direction.

  From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be disposed between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, and can be held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the setting of the fastening direction limits the situations in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side (the side covered by the rear case 510) of the contact member 182. Therefore, when the displacement restricting device 180 is mounted on the rear case 510, the fastening screw cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement restricting device 180 is detached from the rear case 510.

  Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement restricting device 180 to the rear case 510 is inserted from the rear side of the guide member 182 into the screw insertion portion 182b, the rear side of the rear case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). ), And the displacement restricting device 180 can be easily removed from the rear case 510.

  The operation member 183 includes a main body 183a formed in an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, having a rear view outer shape, and having a front side opened, and a front edge of the main body 183a. 183b projecting radially outward from the groove, a groove 183c recessed in the flange 183b, a cylindrical portion 183d protruding cylindrically from the center of the bottom of the main body 183a to the front side, and the cylinder An arc-shaped ridge 183e projecting toward the front side in an arc shape having a larger diameter than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 with the portion 183d as a center, and a position where it can be engaged with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. And an engaging portion 183f that is configured to be able to constitute a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

  An elliptical seal is attached to the back surface of the operation member 183. This seal has a concave shape at one end in the short direction (see FIG. 15 (a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent a wrong vertical posture during assembly. can do.

  By making the main body 183a elliptical, it is possible to easily prevent the operating member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even when the operation member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by contacting the main body 182 a of the guide member 182.

  The flange portion 183b is formed to be larger in rear view than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, so that the operation member 183 can be prevented from falling off from the guide member 182. That is, the operation member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182.

  The groove 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the ridge 182e of the guide member 182, and has a role of smoothly performing the longitudinal displacement of the operation member 183. In the present embodiment, since the protrusion 182e is formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side, the groove part 183c is also formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side. Thus, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly in which the operation member 183 is erroneously turned upside down.

  The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be insertable into the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. In a state where the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the contact member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to regulate the vertical displacement of the rendering member 700, as described later.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183 d can be used both as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the rendering member 700 of the scaling unit 600 and a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arc-shaped ridge 183 e is disposed so as to be able to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is opposed to the large-diameter cylindrical part of the cylindrical holding part 181 b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction.
When the operation member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped ridge 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other prior to the other portions, so that the load generation area can be increased, and the local area is large. It is possible to prevent a load from occurring.

  The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is formed not in a circular shape but in an arc shape in which a circle is interrupted, and an engaging portion 183f is provided at the interrupted position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the engagement portion 183f from being too far away from the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184.

  The state change of the operation member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is urged to the rear side by the coil spring 184. When the operating member 183 is pushed to the front side against the urging force, the operating member 183 includes the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is actuated and the latch mechanism is pressed for more than the minimum stroke on which the latch mechanism acts, the state is alternately switched between the above-described restriction state and the restriction release state.

  As described above, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, not only when the operation member 183 is intentionally operated but also when the pachinko machine 10 is applied with a large external force, the operation member 183 becomes the above-described minimum. If the displacement is changed by the stroke, the displacement restricting device 180 may change its state unintentionally.

For example, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, if the state of the displacement restricting device 180 is unintentionally changed due to a shock at the time of shipment or a vibration at the time of transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is set to the effect standby state (the effect member 700). May be displaced from the state where is disposed at the upper displacement end.
In a state where the rendering member 700 displaced from the rendering standby state is disposed close to the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13), when receiving a shock at the time of shipment or vibration at the time of transportation, the rendering member 700 is divided into the partitioning members of the launch rendering unit 300. There is a risk of collision with 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is disposed at a position (a position eccentric to the right) away from the position (center position) where the urging force is applied to the operation member 183, and the operation member The gap between the groove 183c of the guide member 183 and the ridge 182e of the guide member 182 is set to be large, and the posture maintaining ability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

  Accordingly, the attitude of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be inclined in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force can be suppressed.

  The relationship between the displacement restricting device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 opened, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). 21 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XXIa-XXIa in FIG.

  Note that FIG. 21A illustrates the restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 21B illustrates the released state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the opening / closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12. Is configured to be touched. This position is opposite to the side (opening / closing end side, right side) on which the worker who works by opening the inner frame 12 enters, so that when the inner frame 12 is opened, the displacement control device is not intended by the worker. Touching 180 can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the above-described latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operation member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load pushing the operation member 183 is used for moving the operation member 183 back and forth, but also for changing the attitude of the operation member 183.

  For example, when the right side of the operation member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side portion is sufficiently moved back and forth, a situation in which the posture of the operation member 183 changes and the left side portion is not sufficiently pushed in may sufficiently occur.

  Therefore, for the purpose of switching the state by pushing the displacement regulating device 180, it is easier for the operator to push the forming portion of the latch mechanism in pinpoint, because the displacement required for the displacement regulating device 180 is easily generated. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulating device 180.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180, and the worker enters from the right side to restrict the displacement. Since the device 180 is operated, the worker can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum amount of operation. Therefore, the operator can easily execute the operation of pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism in pinpoint.

  Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed in occurs in a mode in which the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) faces the pushed side. Therefore, as the pushing amount increases, the pushing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operation member 183.

  In the regulation state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to regulate the displacement of the transmission gear 650. Thus, it is possible to prevent the state of the scaling unit 600 from changing.

  Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (the rotation direction about the longitudinal axis) is orthogonal to the displacement direction (the longitudinal direction) of the operation member 183, the operation member 183 applies a load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. Can be prevented. Accordingly, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated without making the latch mechanism forming portion a strong configuration.

  As described above, the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained by setting the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricting state. Therefore, the application of the displacement restricting device 180 is not limited to the time of conveyance. For example, after installation in a gaming machine store, during maintenance, by maintaining the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 with the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, maintenance of the later-described displacement rotation unit 800 can be performed safely and easily.

  That is, when the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotating unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the scaling unit 600 during the maintenance work of the displacement rotating unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the state (arrangement) of the scaling unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement restricting device 180, so that collision between the scaling unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 is prevented. Can be.

  Before the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulation state, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched to the regulation release state by pushing the operation member 183 of the displacement regulation device 180. (See FIG. 21B). Thereby, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can execute an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

  Here, before turning on the power, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restriction released state by looking into the open front end side (right side). It is described that it is configured to be able to confirm whether the

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is disposed on the front side of the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that it is viewed from the right side. In, the operating member 183 is hidden by the shape of the bottom wall 511.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the restriction of the displacement restricting device 180 is released, the operating member 183 is disposed so as to protrude more rearward than the shape of the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operation member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

  Therefore, the operator does not need to open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 fully with respect to the outer frame 11 as a checking operation before turning on the power, and slightly moves the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. When viewed in the direction of opening and peeping from the right side, by visually recognizing that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511, it can be confirmed that the displacement restriction device 180 is in the restriction release state.

  In this embodiment, since the rear case 510 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and the operation member 183 is formed from a red transparent resin material, the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

  Here, the case where the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A) will be described. . In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement control device 180 is in the control state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) indicates that the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has not changed in the operation at the time of power supply introduction. And the position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  By showing the position detection error display to the clerk at the gaming machine store, it is possible to notice that the state of the displacement restricting device 180 may not be changed. This error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of a change in the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and does not detect the state of the displacement restricting device 180.

  That is, in the present embodiment, without providing a program for additional error display or a display material, a warning regarding the state of the displacement restricting device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the scaling unit 600. Can be output. Thereby, the design cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, while the power is turned on, the pushing operation of the operation member 183 is configured to be disabled, and it is required to turn off the power once. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation member 183 may be configured to be able to be operated even during power-on.

  Further, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operation member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the pushing operation may be disabled by friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion may be provided at the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the rear surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged in front and rear to limit the displacement of the operation member 183.

  An example of a different situation in which the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed in during maintenance at a gaming machine store will be described. In the present embodiment, the pushing operation of the operation member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 matches the front and rear of the cylindrical portion 183d.

  For example, at the time of maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the state of the displacement restriction device 180 changes to the restricted state. In this case, the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement trajectory of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, when the driving force is generated after the maintenance and the transmission gear 650 is displaced, the displacement is changed to the cylindrical portion 183d. Is limited to

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is limited, and by performing an error display (notifying an abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. Can be notified to the clerk of the gaming machine store, but the details will be described later.

  Accordingly, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be determined using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 without separately providing a device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180.

  The operation of the displacement restricting device 180 can be performed before or after the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary to not only open the inner frame 12, but also to open the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is preferable that the operation of the device 180 be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launching effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for exciting the game. These effect devices will be described in order from the launch effect unit 300.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300. As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161 in the fired production unit 300 in an assembled state. In other words, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

  Since the partition member 310 is formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player, and the player who visually recognizes the range surrounded by the center frame 86 Thus, an effect can be executed in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular members 320 are overlapped and visually recognized.

  FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the launch effect unit 300. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is illustrated in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the launch effect unit 300 includes a partition member 310 that is disposed inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and that forms a box shape whose lower side is open, A plurality of granular members 320 arranged to be displaceable inside the member 310, an injection device 400 disposed so as to close a lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not fall off from the partition member 310, and a partition member A first light irradiating device 330 disposed on the right side of the partition member 310 and a second light irradiating device 340 disposed on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

  The partitioning member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a front plate portion 311 that is a plate portion disposed on the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And a bottom plate in parallel with the front plate 311 is disposed on the rear side of the front plate 311 to face each other, and has a closing wall extending toward the front so as to close a gap from the left, right, and upper portions of the bottom plate. The rear partition 313 and the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) formed integrally below the rear partition 313 and formed between the front plate 311 and the rear partition 313. A rear section lower portion 314 whose path can be configured between the curved plate portion 312 and a modified penetration portion 315 formed through the rear section lower portion 314 is provided.

  Although the size of the partition member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 is substantially the same as the size of the partition member 310 in front view. It is formed so that That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate 311 are formed so as to have substantially the same shape.

  Thus, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can be shared for the purpose of hiding the edge of the partitioning member 310. A special component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not required, and the edge of the partition member 310 is visually recognized overlapping with the display by the third symbol display device 81 while reducing the number of members. Can be avoided, so that the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered. However, if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 are scattered too much, and the number of the granular members 320 is extremely large for a powerful effect. More is needed. Therefore, when the space is formed as a narrow space to some extent, a powerful effect can be executed by visually recognizing a small number of the granular members 320 with high density.

  On the other hand, if the space is too narrow, the granular member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE <b> 1 is ensured to be substantially the same as the front-rear width between the left and right central portions 312 b of the curved plate portion 312 and the lower back section lower part 314. Therefore, as compared with the case where the front-rear width is reduced, it is possible to avoid the clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and abrupt deceleration during injection.

  Further, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the back section lower portion 314 than the left and right center portions 312b, the left and right portions 312b are closer to the moving path of the granular member 320 near the left and right center portions 312b. , The moving path of the granular member 320 can be narrowed.

  That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the moving path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left and right central portion 312b, and the granular member 320 is located in the internal space IE1. It is easy to reach the vicinity of the center. Thereby, the granular member 320 can be easily made visible to the player.

  In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches near the center of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. This allows the player to visually recognize as if the granular member 320 has exploded and scattered in all directions from the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, so that the dynamic performance of the granular member 320 is powerful. Can be improved.

  The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side and inclined downward toward the center in the left and right direction.

  Thus, regardless of where the granular member 320 is disposed in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 that is displaced downward by its own weight can be displaced downward on the back side while being moved toward the left and right center sides.

  Further, the degree of the downward inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured such that the downward inclination toward the left and right central sides is steeper than the downward inclination toward the rear side. Accordingly, as a tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320, a displacement toward the left and right center side can be generated prior to a displacement toward the back side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400 to be described later, the granular members 320 tend to be simultaneously displaced to the rear side at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) during the downward displacement. Can be avoided.

  In addition, the degree of the downward inclination toward the rear side of the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is sharper than the degree of the downward inclination toward the left and right central sides of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from being densely packed on the way down.

  On the other hand, in the lower rear section lower part 314, the plate part disposed to face the rear side of the curved plate part 312 is substantially the same as the left and right central part 312 b of the curved plate part 312 in a side view (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with an inclination angle of a mode in which the distance between the left and right central portions 312b is slightly increased toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the rear partition lower part 314 with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (slightly larger) the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 ejecting the granular member 320.

  Therefore, the incident angle of the granular member 320 with respect to the lower rear section 314 becomes the same regardless of the emission direction of the granular member 320 that can change from side to side, so that the resistance given to the granular member 320 from the lower rear section lower 314 is substantially uniform. can do.

  The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and has a short portion extending vertically at both left and right ends, and a long portion extending left and right curved in a manner connecting the upper ends of the short portions. Is provided. The penetrating direction is formed so as to incline obliquely upward from the back side to the front side with respect to the plate surface of the back section lower part 314 (see FIG. 12A). As a result, the acute angle portion (the lower portion of the deformed through portion 315 in FIG. 12A) of the rear section lower portion 314 constituting the deformed through portion 315 is not arranged to face the emission direction of the granular member 320.

  This can reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute angle portion at the time of injection of the granular member 320, so that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a local load on the granular member 320 and the rear section lower part 314, and It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the rear section lower part 314 from being cracked or chipped.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 in an enlarged manner, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively soft (at least softer than the resin material forming the partitioning member 310) resin material and has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). And a non-penetrating concave portion 321 formed in a quasi-regular polyhedron) and formed along a plurality of parallel straight lines.

  The non-penetrating recess 321 makes it possible to reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and to deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the center of the shape. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the flesh remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be deviated toward the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

  Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to the posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

  In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received on the surface on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed (see FIG. 25), so that the granular member 320 can be easily prevented from being damaged or chipped. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed to the injection direction side when the load is injected from the injection device 400, the surface on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed may collide with the front plate portion 311. Can be. Thus, the load at the time of collision with the front plate portion 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

  The first light irradiating unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the rear side of the rear partition portion 313, an illuminated substrate 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and an illuminated substrate 332. A lid 333 that is disposed on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 331, and is formed between the fixed plate 331 and the fixed plate 331 so as to be able to accommodate the electric decoration substrate 332.

  Light irradiating portions 332a such as LEDs are disposed on both left and right sides of the electric decoration substrate 332, and light having an optical axis in the left and right direction is irradiated from the light irradiating portions 332a. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmittance, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portions 332a. Thereby, the light can be visually recognized as the light divided into particles.

  Of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 332, the light emitted to the right may illuminate the right path (right-handed flow path) of the game area where the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are disposed. Serve two purposes. The light irradiated to the left side will be described later.

  The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmittance (or light impermeability), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portions 332a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into particles, and the electric decoration substrate 332 is fixed to the fixed plate unit 331 and the cover unit 333 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 332a. And can be prevented from being visually recognized.

  The second light irradiating unit 340 includes a fixed plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the rear side of the rear partition portion 313, an illuminated substrate 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate portion 341, and an illuminated substrate 342. A lid 343 disposed on the left side and fastened to and fixed to the fixed plate 341 and formed between the fixed plate 341 and the fixed plate 341 so as to be able to accommodate the illuminated board 342.

  The fixing plate 341 is formed of a resin material having low light transmission (or light non-transmission), while the lid 343 is formed of a colorless and light transmission resin material. For this reason, the illumination board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is long and protrudes leftward. Thus, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and the left side surface of the illuminated board 342 can be prevented from being visually recognized in front view.

  Thus, it is possible to irradiate the light through the transparent lid 343 while avoiding the illuminated substrate 342 from being viewed.

  The illumination board 342 is provided with light irradiating sections 342a such as LEDs on both left and right sides. Light having an optical axis directed forward is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the left side surface. One purpose is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while keeping this light from illuminating the left path of the game area.

  Here, a configuration different from the configuration in which the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a of the right-side electric decoration substrate 332 is positively directed to the game area is adopted because the game performance of the pachinko machine 10 (normally, A left-handed game is played, and a right-handed game is played during probable changes, during reduced hours, and during big hit games). This will be described below.

  In the gaming area of the present pachinko machine 10, since the degree of freedom of the ball flow path on the left side of the game area is high, during a normal game, the firing intensity of the ball is adjusted so that the ball flows down the desired path. Is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity at the left side of the game area is too high, the visibility of the ball is deteriorated, which hinders the adjustment of the emission intensity of the ball, and may cause the player to be dissatisfied.

  On the other hand, when a ball is fired to the right side of the game area, basically, the player hits the ball with the maximum firing intensity. The fired ball is suppressed in momentum by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom in selecting the flow path of the ball on the downstream side is extremely low, so that the ball is exclusively passed through the same path.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide route DL1 (see FIG. 2) having a width through which one ball passes is formed downstream of the second winning opening 640, and enters the second winning opening 640. All the balls that did not travel pass through the guide route DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged downstream thereof.

  As described above, since it is not necessary to adjust the launching intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball is deteriorated on the right side of the game area (particularly, where the guide route DL1 is formed), the game is not hindered. Since it is unlikely to produce any effect, it is possible to perform an effect with a high emission intensity in this range.

Under such circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the electric decoration substrate 332 arranged on the right side, the light irradiation unit 332a is arranged so as to direct light to the game area, while the electric decoration substrate 342 arranged on the left side. In the above, the light irradiation unit 342a is arranged so as not to direct light toward the game area.
This makes it possible to execute an effective light emission effect while suppressing the occurrence of complaints from the player.

  Light having an optical axis directed rightward is emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side surface. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixing plate 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation unit 342a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into particles, and the electric decoration substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate unit 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. It can be prevented from being viewed. The target illuminated by the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side will be described later.

  26A is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. FIG. 26A and 26B, the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the light irradiating unit 332a disposed on the left side of the first light irradiating device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 and a light on the back side of the partitioning member 310. An LED through which the axis passes.

  Thereby, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310 but also light to other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) disposed on the back side of the partition member 310. The effect of irradiating can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and the rear side of the partition member 310 It is composed of only the LED whose optical axis passes.

  Thereby, while suppressing the light emission intensity into the inside of the partition member 310, the irradiation intensity of light toward other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 is reduced. Can be improved.

  In the second irradiation device 340, the comfort of the game in the normal state can be improved by suppressing the light emission intensity into the partition member 310. That is, in the game in the normal state, the line of sight of the player is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the vicinity of the first winning opening 64, In many cases, the player looks at the range on the left from the center of the game area.

  In this case, when light is emitted from the second irradiation device 340 to the inside of the partitioning member 310, the light shines at a position close to the front of the game area, so that the player who sees the left side of the game area has a backlight. And the visibility of the game area may be deteriorated for the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light irradiating unit 342a of the second irradiating device 340 is moved to the back side, and the game area is separated from the light irradiating unit 342a. Influence on the visibility of the game area can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiating unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 illuminates the inside of the center frame 86 with high intensity in a front view while reducing the degree of illuminating the game area. An effect can be performed. Therefore, an effect of illuminating the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) can be executed without lowering the visibility of the game area.

  FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is not illustrated. The directions of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is disposed on the left side and the rear side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding a later-described vertical substrate unit 167 that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. Accordingly, the light emission effect can be performed while avoiding the light from the light irradiation unit 342a from entering the light guide plate 161. Therefore, the light effect performed by the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a and the light guide plate 161 emit light. Direction and can be separated.

  When the light guide plate 161 is adopted as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may emit light unintentionally depending on the light irradiation path, and there is a possibility that the staging effect may be reduced. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to illuminate the light guide plate 161, there is a possibility that it is necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which causes a reduction in the degree of freedom of production. I was

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the light from the light irradiation unit 342a travels while avoiding the light guide plate 161, the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the light emission effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

  Returning to FIGS. 24 and 25, the description will be continued. The injection device 400 is a device disposed below the partition member 310 and on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310 rides.

  28, 29, and 30 are exploded front perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32, and 33 are exploded rear perspective views of the injection device 400. 28 and 31 schematically show the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the front side. FIGS. 30 and 33 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the rear side. In the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes, as fixed members, a fixed member 350 that is fastened and fixed to the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixed member 350 that is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixed member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between the fixing member 350 and an electric wiring or transmission arm member 470 which is fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and will be described later. And an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 formed at the center thereof.

  A fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partition member 310 is inserted into the partition member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen the fastening screw with a screwdriver and remove it. However, a state in which the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). In this configuration, the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

  Therefore, as a preparation before removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, an operation of removing the firing unit 300 from the game board 13 can be performed. This prevents a situation in which the fixing member 350 is accidentally removed from the partition member 310 and the granular member 320 is discharged from the fixing member 310 in a state where the firing unit 300 is assembled to the game board 13. be able to.

  The injection device 400 is configured to be displaceably disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the fixed member 350, and is configured to be capable of linearly displacing by inserting a plurality of metal bars MB <b> 1 fixed to the front side of the intermediate member 401. A linear motion member 410, a collision member 420 disposed above the linear motion member 410, supported so as to be displaceable along the direction of displacement of the linear motion member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface on the top; A contact member 430 that is disposed below the moving member 410 and that is configured to be able to change its state between a state in which it can contact and a state in which it cannot contact in the displacement direction of the linear member 410.

  The injection device 400 is formed so as to be displaceable between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 so that a load can be transmitted to the translation member 410 and the contact member 430 and can be rotated by the space forming member 360. A front transmission member 440 which is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface and has gear teeth formed thereon, and a drive which is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

  The injection device 400 is rotatably supported on a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 as a member that is displaceably disposed on the rear side of the space forming member 360. A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by an action, and a lid member 480 that is rotatably supported on a straight line extending in the left-right direction as a rotation axis and that is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470.

  The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the arrangement range of the component members is divided into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360 by the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360. The driving force of the driving motor MT1 is generated in an intermediate range in which the driving gear 450 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is disposed, and the driving force is shifted to the front side and the rear side. Respectively, the displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

  From such a design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are each provided with an opening for transmitting a driving force. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (substantially elliptical shape).

  Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the front area of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear area of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described below in the order of the front area and the rear area. The details of the configuration in the middle range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

  First, a description will be given focusing on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-described opening 402, a plurality of columnar protrusions 403 protruding from the upper end to the front side in a columnar shape, and the columnar protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged in symmetrical positions so as to fix a plurality of metal bars MB1, and a columnar projecting front side near the lower end. And the lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claws 411 formed on the lower end of the linear motion member 410.

  The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed so as to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical projection 403 and the claw 411 when the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. Accordingly, the linear motion member 410 is constantly urged by the coil spring SP1, and before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range, the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position by the urging force. The coil spring SP <b> 1 is disposed diagonally below the linear member 410, but has the purpose of concentrating the urging force of the coil spring SP <b> 1 on the side where the granular member 320 is likely to accumulate.

  The linear motion member 410 includes the above-described claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so as to be able to insert the metal rod MB1, a trapezoidal protrusion 413 projecting from the upper end at the center in the left and right directions in a trapezoidal shape, A linear ridge 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower ridge formed as a ridge shorter than the ridge 414 below the ridge 414. 415, and a displacement restricting portion 416 protruding from the lower end portion at the left and right center toward the front side.

  The trapezoidal protrusion 413 is formed so as to be able to contact the collision member 420 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal protrusion 413 can contact the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal protrusion 413 does not contact the collision member 420. You.

  The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive a load from other components when transmitting the load, and will be described later in detail.

  The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion that comes into contact with the buffer member 352 of the fixed member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement restricts the displacement of the linear motion member 410 (the upward displacement end is set).

  The collision member 420 has a curved plate portion 421 forming an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate-shaped member extending from the rear end of the curved plate portion 421 in parallel to a plane on which the linear motion member 410 is displaced. A plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in a long hole shape extending along the extension direction of the plate portion 422, and a displacement direction of the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 at the lower left and right central portions of the plate portion 422. And a buffer member 424 that is fixed at a position to be opposed to and is disposed so as to be able to contact the trapezoidal projection 413.

  The columnar projection 403 is inserted into the guide hole 423. That is, the columnar projection 403 is also used as a part that supports the upper end of the coil spring SP1 and a part that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

  The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, a nylon resin or a urethane resin can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 424 and the trapezoidal projection 413 of the linear motion member 410 abut can be reduced by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projection 413 is not damaged or chipped. Can be suppressed.

  The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular long plate shape, and has a support hole 431 formed at one end of the long plate as a circular opening through which the support column 405 can be inserted, and another end of the long plate. And a hook-shaped protrusion 433 projecting toward the rear side with a circular cross section and a hook-shaped protrusion 433 projecting toward the front side with a hook-shaped cross section at a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting portion 432. Prepare.

  The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is rotatably supported by the support column 405 so as to be rotationally displaceable.

  The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive a load from other components when transmitting the load, and details thereof will be described later.

  The fixing member 350 can receive a motor fixing portion 351 to which the above-described drive motor MT1 is disposed and fixed, a buffer member 352 arranged to be able to abut on the displacement restricting portion 416, and a tip of the circular protrusion 403. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 which are formed as recesses, and which can be fastened and fixed by screwing fastening screws inserted from the front side into through holes on the inside thereof into female threads formed on the circular projections 403; And a guide portion 354 that is formed of an inclined surface that narrows from three directions, that is, the front side and the left and right sides, and that guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

  The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, a nylon resin or a urethane resin can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 352 and the displacement regulating portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other can be reduced by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage or chipping of the displacement regulating portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are disposed at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 abuts at the displacement end in the biasing direction. Accordingly, as described later, even when the linear motion member 410 is displaced at high speed by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load applied to the linear motion member 410 at the time of sudden stop is obtained. Can be absorbed by deformation of the buffer members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

  The cylindrical projection 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release the connection, it is necessary to turn and remove a fastening screw inserted into the connecting recess 353. On the other hand, since the fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, a driver can be inserted into the fastening screw in a state where the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). It is configured so that it cannot be done.

  Thereby, in a state where the game board 13 and the launch production unit 300 are assembled, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fastening screw is loosened by mistake and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 is loosened. Can be.

  Next, a description will be given focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting from a substantially center position of the back plate portion toward the front side, and a back portion. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of a plate-like portion extending frontward at the upper left and right ends of the face plate portion, and disposed below the left and right inner sides of the guide inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 projecting from the back plate portion to the front side, and are formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right end portions, are arranged on the same line, and are sized to support the lid member 480. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP <b> 2 wound around the left support pillar 364 and generating a biasing force toward the side where the lid member 480 is retracted, and a columnar projecting rearward at the upper left of the opening 361. Cylindrical projection 3 It includes a 6, a.

  The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. In accordance with this, a wall having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft 362 extends from the rear plate of the space forming member 360 to the front. With this wall portion, the inside front transmission member 440 and rear transmission member 460 can be covered.

  The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the falling granular member 320 is brought into the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed to be able to be guided toward.

  The projecting support portion 364 is formed such that the projecting end contacts the rear surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. On the flush upper surface, the collision member 420 supports the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position.

  The support pillar 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, on the right side, it is formed in a small-diameter cylindrical shape protruding left and right outward, and on the left side, it is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inside diameter capable of receiving the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489.

  The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that is rotatably supported by the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. By fixing a screw having a large diameter at the head to the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off.

  The transmission arm member 470 is a long member formed in a substantially U-shape in appearance, and is provided with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 366, and is supported by the cylindrical protrusion 366. The hole 471, a columnar protrusion 472 projecting from one end in the long direction toward the front side in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471, and orthogonal to the axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the long direction. A transmission projection 473 projecting in a columnar shape along a plane.

  The columnar projection 472 extends forward through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and is formed to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the columnar projection 472 changes with the change in the attitude of the rear transmission member 460, and the attitude of the transmission arm member 470 changes, which will be described later in detail.

  A restricting member 370 is provided on the back side of the columnar protrusion 472. That is, the restricting member 370 is a plate-like member fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and holds down the cover plate 371 that covers the movement path of the columnar protrusion 472 from the back side, and the electric wiring. Or a plurality of holding claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling.

  The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the rear side of the transmission arm member 470, and regulates the displacement of the cylindrical projection 472 toward the rear side (the rear side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). This can prevent the columnar projection 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, and thus prevent the engagement between the columnar projection 472 and the rear transmission member 460 from being released. it can.

  The holding claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing the electric wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the rear side plate of the space forming member 360. As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement fluctuation of the electric wiring (for example, a change in the arrangement of the electric wiring due to vibration or the like) from occurring, and it is possible to secure an entry path for other constituent members. The horizontal slide member 840 and the wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced along a path including a position close to the device 400.

  The transmission protrusion 473 is a part that is inserted into the lid member 480 and transmits a driving force to the lid member 480.

  The lid member 480 is a member that is configured to be capable of moving in and out of the partition member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310, and that is formed into a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extension plates 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing / retracting portion 481, and a plurality of coaxially received support columns 365 at the extension ends of the extension plate 485. Receiving portion 486, a transmission hole 487 pierced in a curved elongated shape in the left extension plate portion 485, into which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape surrounding the right reception portion 486. It is formed in a disk shape having a portion, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support pillar portion 365 can be inserted in a state surrounding the receiving portion 486, and the fastening screw Right hip which is retained by It includes a member 488, a cylindrical portion to be inserted into the left side of the receiving portion 486, a left cover member 489 having a long hole shape portion continuous to continuously transfer hole 487, a.

  The left cover member 489 is formed with functionally formed contact surfaces 489a to 489c instead of being formed like a drill hole along the axial direction, which will be described in detail later.

  The cross-sectional shape of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape about the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured so as to be directed toward the axis, the radius of the circular arc and the formed length are changed according to the left and right positions instead of the shape obtained by simply dividing the pipe. This design intention will be described.

  First, the advancing / retracting portion 481 includes an overhang portion 482 which travels on the approach side at the center position in the left and right direction. The overhang portion 482 is formed so that the overhang width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. Accordingly, when the overhang portion 482 and another component member (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) abuts, a load directed to the left and right outer sides with respect to the component member. And the components can be driven to the left and right outside.

  Second, as described above, the advancing / retreating portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advance / retreat portion 481 is shortened at the left and right center positions where the overhang portion 482 is formed.

  Accordingly, a position shift that can occur at a position where entry into the deformed through portion 315 (the center in the left and right direction of the overhang portion 482) can be suppressed to a small degree, so that the retreating portion 481 cannot enter the deformed through portion 315. Can be suppressed.

  Third, the radius of the arc is increased near the left and right outer sides of the advancing / retracting portion 481, as opposed to the left and right center positions of the overhang portion 482. The main purpose is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in the present embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) disposed on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays right and left outside due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

  This way of staying is not completely left-right uniform, but may be left-right non-uniform. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if a sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly staying granular members 320 will collide with the advancing / retreating portion 481. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is increased near the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular members 320 are likely to stay. Thereby, the distance between the advance / retreat portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 can be secured sufficiently long in advance, so that even if the manner in which the granular member 320 stays is not uniform, the granular member 320 and the advance / retreat portion 481 are separated. Collisions can be avoided.

  Other design concepts will be described. When the extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, the end face on the entry side is formed to be concave toward the retreat side. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the extension plate portion 485 from colliding with the staying granular member 320.

  In addition, even when the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the entry side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 can be bent by the concave forming portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310. The granular member 320 can be gathered on the upper part of the collision member 420 by having a size that allows it to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

  The receiving section 486 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylindrical shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half pipe shape). This is a design in consideration of assembly.

  28 and 31 will be described again. The support pillar portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction, particularly on the right side. Therefore, when both the receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape, the support pillar portion 365 supports the lid member 480. It is necessary to divide the advance / retreat portion 481 in order to assemble the column portion 365.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured so that the lid member 480 can be moved forward and backward with respect to the partition member 310, while preventing the granular member 320 from being discharged from the partition member 310. That is, the deformed through portion 315 cannot be increased without limitation, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed through portion 315 is limited.

  Here, if the shape is collapsed to such an extent that the lid member 480 cannot pass through the odd-shaped through portion 315, the forward / backward displacement cannot be performed. On the other hand, when the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed by combining a plurality of members, the shape may be lost due to factors such as an assembly error.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is made different between the left and right, so that the division of the advance / retreat portion 481 becomes unnecessary. As an assembling process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is disposed axially outside (left side) of the support column portion 365, and the left receiving portion 486a is inserted into the support column portion 365 while the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support pillar portion 365.

  At this time, in the right receiving portion 486b, the support pillar portion 365 is arranged to face the open side of the half cylinder. A fastening screw is inserted through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489, and is screwed into the extension plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480, thereby fastening and fixing the left cover member 489 to the extension plate portion 485. can do.

  After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the cover member 480 is space if the screw head of the fastening screw which is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column 365 is undetachable. It can be rotatably supported on the forming member 360.

  With reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, the design concept of the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described. 34 to 36, displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in time series.

  FIG. 34A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVb in FIG. FIG. 34C is a side view of the cover member 480, and FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG.

  35A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVb in FIG. FIG. 35C is a side view of the cover arm 470 and the cover member 480, and FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG.

  FIG. 36A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIb in FIG. FIG. 36C is a side view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36B.

  FIGS. 35 and 36 show a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance / retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. In detail, FIG. 36 shows a state in which the cover member 480 is disposed at the entry side end within the displacement range. In FIG. 34, the cover member 480 is disposed at the retreat side end within the displacement range. FIG. 35 illustrates a state where the cover member 480 is disposed at an intermediate position of the displacement range.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. More specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (the plane illustrated in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (the plane illustrated in FIG. 34B) ) Are orthogonal.

  Therefore, without any countermeasure, it is normal that the contact area changes with the change in the posture of the transmission projection 473 that contacts the left cover member 489. For example, when the inner side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending in parallel with the axial direction of the lid member 480, the long direction of the transmission protrusion 473 extends in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. It is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts at a position closer to the right of the left cover member 489 (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470) in a state where the transmission protrusion 473 is inclined.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, in a state where the long direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 contacts the width direction of the left cover member 489. Can be

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 35 (c), and 36 (c), the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponds to the change in the posture of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can be brought into contact with the left and right width directions.

  That is, the left cover member 489 is compared with the first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 when the cover member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side, and the first contact surface 489a. The second contact surface 489b formed with a small inclination with respect to the left and right direction, and the inclination with respect to the left and right direction is formed with a smaller inclination than the second contact surface 489b, and the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side. And a third contact surface 489c that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in the state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the shape of the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 in the left-right direction gradually decreases as the first abutment surface 489a is maximized and approaches the rotation axis of the lid member 480. Designed to.

  More specifically, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial direction of the cover member 480 with the rotation of the transmission arm member 470. The inclination of the left cover member 489 at the contact position with the upper side surface of the opening is designed by the inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 in the contact state.

  Accordingly, in the contact state between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at a timing when a large load is generated, that is, when the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against the gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is set in the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

  Accordingly, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the approach side, the inclination angle of the transmission projection 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). The contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489 is reduced, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, so that the transmission protrusion 473 may be overloaded. is there.

  As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the ratio of the weight of the lid member 480 applied to the transmission protrusion 473 out of the weight of the lid member 480 is reduced. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 36B, in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advancing / retracting portion 481 occupying most of the weight of the lid member 480 is the rotation axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in a direction in which the lid member 480 is displaced toward the approach side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

  In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, at least the biasing force is attained. Part can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480.

  Accordingly, compared to the case where most of the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 when the cover member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the approach side, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473. Can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission projection 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, the distance between the contact position between the transmission projection 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the cover member 480 in the process of displacing the cover member 480 from the retracted position to the approach side position is determined by the following equation. When the member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side, it is configured to be longest.

  In addition, the first contact surface 489a is formed such that a normal line at a contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc around the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to follow (the inclination angle becomes smaller), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

  Accordingly, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes longer, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

  As a device of the shape of the transmission projection 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34C, the transmission projection 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, the transmission protrusion 473 is formed with a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction from the front side to the back side to a position exceeding the center in the width direction.

  As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), FIG. 35 (b) and FIG. 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing / retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane over the left and right. Is done.
Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing / retracting portion 481 and the overhang portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction.

  Note that the radius of the overhang portion 482 of the cover member 480 at the left and right center positions is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the overhang portion 482 having the maximum approach width collides with the curved plate portion 312, so that the cover member 480 is slightly over-rotated (to the extent caused by a design error for each member). In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding with each other and being damaged.

  Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, the description will focus on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, the rotation of the drive gear 450 causes the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 to rotate. The transmission member 460 integrally rotates about the shaft 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following, a description will be given assuming that rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (when viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is a forward rotation.

  The front-side transmission member 440 and the rear-side transmission member 460 are provided with a configuration for securing a relative position and securing rigidity on the side opposed to each other, and are used for driving force transmission on opposite surfaces. A shape part is formed. Details of the shape used for transmitting the driving force will be described below.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. . The directions of the arrows XXXVIIa and XXXVIIb are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front side transmission member 440 has a substantially disk-shaped main body plate portion 441, and projects axially on the center side from the edge of the main body plate portion 441. A groove forming portion 442 to be recessed, a support hole 443 which is a circular opening formed at a center portion of the main body plate portion 441 so as to allow the shaft portion 362 to be inserted, and a gear formed in the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 covering the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed to be able to enter a detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32); And a transmission projection 446 projecting parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442.

  The groove forming portion 442 has a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protrusion 432 so that the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is formed such that the front transmission member 440 rotates forward with the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 arranged in the first groove portion 442a. The second groove 442b in which the protruding portion 432 is guided by the second groove 442b, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove 442a with respect to the second groove 442b, and having a diameter larger than the reference arc of the first groove 442a. And a fourth groove 442d connecting the third groove 442c and the first groove 442a.

  The second groove 442b and the fourth groove 442d have a common role of connecting between the first groove 442a and the third groove 442c, but the angles of formation are not common. That is, compared to the second groove 442b, the fourth groove 442d has a smaller formation angle range, and the change in the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 is sharp. Designed to be.

  The transmission projection 446 is not formed in a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a that is formed in a straight line connecting the center and one point on the outer diameter side along the projection direction. Thus, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction orthogonal to a straight line that is a reference for the groove 446a.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with a diameter similar to the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and the main body plate portion 461. And a groove forming portion 462 in which a groove is recessed inside, and a shaft portion 362 formed at a center portion of the main body plate portion 461 with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than an outer diameter of the shaft portion 362 on the base side. And a non-contact opening portion 463 formed so as to avoid contact.

  The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is radially enlarged in a range in which a groove portion to be recessed is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced from the rotation axis.

  In the present embodiment, the center of gravity is calculated when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440 that are integrally rotationally displaced are viewed as an integral object, and the arrangement of the weight portion 461a and The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. Thus, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

  The groove forming portion 462 has a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the columnar protrusion 472 so that the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is formed by a first groove portion 462a formed along the first arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by the forward rotation (clockwise rotation in rear view), and a first groove formed on the opposite side of the first groove 462a with respect to the second groove 462b. There is provided a third groove 462c formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove 462d connecting the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

  The second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, but their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 462d is significantly larger than that of the second groove portion 462b (about 180 degrees), and the groove and the non-contact opening portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460 are formed. It is designed so that the change in distance between is slow.

  Hereinafter, an example of a displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described. First, the outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

  FIGS. 38, 39, 40, and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 38, 39, 40, and 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 is made visible. Further, for easy understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated by an imaginary line as a schematic diagram of such a degree that a change in length can be grasped.

  38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 has flowed down toward the collision member 420 and stopped, FIG. 39 shows a production standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. FIG. 41 illustrates a firing state, which is a state immediately after the injection device 400 has executed a firing effect. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still riding on the collision member 420, but the granular member 320 immediately scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the translation member 410, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side. Note that a state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the entry side displacement end will be described as an effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

  In the effect standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the approach side, the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. Thus, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the player's eyes can be kept away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed below the granular member 320.

  In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the columnar protrusion 403 contacts the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as described later, the displacement of the translation member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

  In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retreat side, the collision member 420 is jumped up by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical projection 403 is guided by the guide hole. 423 stops at a position where it contacts the lower inner surface. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The flow of the granular member 320 that has been bounced off and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided to the collision member 420 side after being brought to the left and right center sides by the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

  In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is disposed relatively upward, so that the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixed member 350 and the collision member 420 And the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 has a shallow depth.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly in shape. In the present embodiment, the number of granular members 320 that cannot be received unevenly is accommodated in the partition member 310.

  Accordingly, for example, even when the granular member 320 starts to return to the right side of the collision member 420 by a large number, when the granular member 320 returns thereafter, the collision member 420 is returned by the previously returned granular member 320. Since a slope that descends toward the left side is formed on the right side, the granular member 320 that has returned later flows to the left side along the slope. That is, it flows to the left side in a state of flowing on the granular member 320.

  This can reduce the left-right deviation of the granular member 320 that accumulates on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420, so that the deviation in the arrangement of the granular member 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each firing effect is reduced. can do.

  Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is disposed at an intermediate position in the displacement section, and the lower linear member 410 is at one point with the trapezoidal protrusion 413. It just abuts. Therefore, the posture of the collision member 420 is allowed to change by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. That is, the posture change is allowed in a manner of rotating about an axis parallel to the axis of the one columnar projection 403.

  As described above, for example, when the granular member 320 starts returning to the right side of the collision member 420 by a large number, the collision member 420 changes its posture such that the right side is lower than the left side. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to guide the granular member 320 that flows down near the left and right center positions of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its attitude, the left and right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 match in front view, and the right and left center position of the guide portion 354 is adjusted. It is conceivable that whether the flowing granular member 320 flows down to the left or right is almost uniformly distributed to the left and right depending on the difference in the contact point between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

On the other hand, when the posture of the collision member 420 is changed, the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left and right center position of the guide portion 354, and flows down the adjustment left and right center position of the guide portion 354. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421.
This makes it easier for the granular member 320 that has returned later to flow down to the side where the retained granular member 320 is less, so that the granular member 320 can be more easily distributed almost equally to the left and right.

  Note that a change in the posture of the collision member 420 is not always allowable. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the columnar protrusions 403 are arranged at both upper end positions of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is hung at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

  Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the columnar protrusions 403 are respectively disposed at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Is restricted, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the translation member 410, the load is an urging force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in a direction parallel to the long direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the collision member 420 during the period from the firing standby state to the firing state. Accordingly, when the stagnation state of the granular members 320 (the left and right deviation of the number of particles) is the same, the manner of the scattered granular members 320 that scatter under the load from the collision member 420 can be stabilized.

  As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular member 320 is scattered, and then flows down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. And returns to the effect standby state again. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for enabling this state change will be described in detail below.

  FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (f) and FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (e) show the translation member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the front transmission member when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. FIG. 440 is a plan view.

  Note that in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (f) and FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outer shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Except for the parts related to each other's load transmission, the protrusion 414 and the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, the protrusion 432 of the contact member 430, and the hook shape The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside is transparently illustrated, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

  Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparent, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof. Are shown without being hidden.

  To facilitate understanding of the relationship with the drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  42 and 43, the linear member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 accompanying the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component” in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43). Changes in the arrangement in () are illustrated in chronological order. Hereinafter, description will be made in order.

  FIG. 42A shows the arrangement of the components in the effect standby state of the injection device 400. As shown in FIG. 42A, in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in the state where the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate in the forward rotation. By detecting a switch from a state where the section 445 is not arranged to a state where the detected section 445 enters, it is possible to determine that the injection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

  FIG. 42B illustrates the arrangement of the components in a state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the ridge 414 of the translation member 410 and starts pushing down the translation member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, between FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. 42 (b), since the direct-acting member 410 and the front-side transmitting member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420, the vibration or load is transmitted directly to the front transmission member 440 even if the collision member 420 slightly vibrates. Is configured to be shut off.

  FIG. 42C illustrates the arrangement of the components in a state in which the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the translation member 410 and the collision member 420 starts to be released.

  From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (c), the translation member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced downward integrally. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , Indirectly to the front transmission member 440.

  On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in a direction in which the linear member 410 is pushed down, and the linear member 410 is transmitted to the transmission member 440 at a contact position with the transmission member 440. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, the influence of the load or vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotation displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

  The effect on the positive rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, an effect of making the speed controlled as the rotational displacement different from the actual speed, and an effect of obstructing the rotational displacement and causing the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat are exemplified.

  FIG. 42D illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the end position of the first groove 442a of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 starts to tilt. Is done.

  The contact member 430 is a member that does not receive an urging force from another urging unit and changes its posture according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442. 42D and thereafter, the number of members to be displaced by the front transmission member 440 is increased to two, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, but the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is the same as the direction of displacement by its own weight. Accordingly, the state of the load applied to the front transmission member 440 is substantially the same as the state before FIG. 42D in which only the linear motion member 410 is displaced.

  FIG. 42 (e) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42 (e), in a state where the translation member 410 is arranged at the lower end position, the translation member 410 and the contact member 430 are still separated from each other.

  After the state shown in FIG. 42E, the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 The load required for the posture change can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. Thus, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  FIG. 42 (f) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the end position of the second groove 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 finishes tilting. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (f), the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 are still separated from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the projecting portion 432 of the abutment member 430 is provided. Is placed in the third groove 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (change in posture is prevented).

  Therefore, regarding the subsequent contact between the linear member 410 and the contact member 430, compared with the case where the linear member 410 and the contact member 430 contact each other at a speed in the facing direction, the contact between the linear member 410 and the contact member 430 is increased. Embodiments can be softened.

  FIG. 43 (a) illustrates the same state as FIG. 42 (f) for easy understanding. In FIG. 43B, as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 and the contact member are contacted. The arrangement of each component in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 has come into contact with the hook-shaped protrusion 433 is illustrated.

  Note that the state from the state illustrated in FIG. 43A to immediately before the state illustrated in FIG. 43D corresponds to a firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

  The lower protruding ridge 415 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are provided with protruding portions that protrude toward the opposing sides at the distal ends on the opposing sides. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slip at the contact position between the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, and to stably contact the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433. Can be in contact.

  In the state shown in FIG. 43B, the end position of the detected part 445 of the front transmission member 440 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and this state is switched to the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). Is output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in the state where the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate in the forward direction. The detection unit 445 detects a switch from the state in which the unit 445 is disposed to the state in which the unit 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, so that it is determined that the injection device 400 has shifted to the firing standby state. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43B, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by the contact member 430. An urging force due to the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) is generated in the linear motion member 410, and a load is applied to the abutting member 430 in a direction in which the abutting member 430 is erected. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is restricted by being prevented by the groove forming portion 442.

  The contact between the projecting portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is a contact between a surface that is curved in a circular shape (an outer surface of the projecting portion 432) and an arc-shaped surface (an inner surface of the third groove 442c). The resulting load is directed to the center of the circle.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is generated toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440. In addition to preventing the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, the displacement of the protrusion 432 can be restricted regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

  Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) can be maintained even after the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is released. Thereby, for example, heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed as compared with a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 needs to be always energized in the firing standby state, so that the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 is reduced. Can be improved.

  This is, for example, when the drive of the injection device 400 is controlled in conjunction with the display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the restriction on the setting of the length of the display effect from the standby state to the fire state. Is advantageous from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

  FIG. 43 (c) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the end position of the third groove 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 starts to rise. Is done.

  Since the position of the groove forming portion 442 in contact with the protruding portion 432 changes from the third groove portion 442c after the state of FIG. 43C, the direction of the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is the front transmission. It will be shifted from the rotation axis of the member 440.

  Therefore, in order to release the power supply to the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the state of waiting for the firing, the drive motor MT1 is switched from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). Must be de-energized.

  In FIG. 43D, the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 is retracted from the displacement trajectory of the lower protrusion 415 of the linear member 410, whereby the restriction on the upward displacement of the linear member 410 is released. The arrangement of each component in a state where the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward by the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is flipped upward is shown. The state shown in FIG. 43D corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

  Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the rising direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force is generated by the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the translation member 410 is not restricted by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the translation member 410 is not included. The biasing force (see FIG. 38) also works to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

  In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 provided via the linear motion member 410 Since they are configured the same in the upright direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in such a manner as to assist each other.

  In FIG. 43 (e), the arrangement of each component in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the end position of the fourth groove 442d of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 has finished standing up is illustrated. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43E, the position of the groove forming portion 442 in contact with the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove 442a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is applied to the front transmission member 440. The effect on rotation can be reduced.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d). It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is erected in subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without any countermeasure, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be hindered by the displacement in which the contact member 430 rises.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 has finished standing, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a, and the contact member 430 is separated from the contact member 430 via the projecting portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being hindered by the displacement in which the contact member 430 rises.

  When the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward from the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), and it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state, and the MPU 221 (so that the state change shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of firing effects. 4) is designed.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the injection device 400, the firing execution control of rotating the front transmission member 440 once in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, an effect is produced in which the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear moving member 410 that is raised by the urging force of the coil spring SP1, and the granular member 320 is scattered.

  In this effect, the granular member 320 is scattered in the field of view of the player, so that it is possible to improve the attention of the player in a flashy manner. At a timing near the end of the subsequent long reach, if a big hit occurs, the state shifts to the firing state and the granular member 320 is scattered to produce an effect, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot (if it is a miss), if the effect of scattering the granular member 320 is executed, there is a risk that the player may mistake the jackpot as a jackpot, which is not preferable.

  In addition, when the state does not shift to the firing state (in the case of a disconnection), if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all, the result of the long reach during the execution from the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 indicates a big hit. The player will be able to know whether the game is going to be missed or not, which may reduce the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of a disconnection, after the injection device 400 is set to the firing standby state, the drive of the drive motor MT1 is controlled in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is reversely rotated. It is configured to be able to return to the effect standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

  That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), by controlling the drive of the drive motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction (clockwise), each component is displaced in the reverse direction of the time series described above. Can be done.

  In this case, before the displacement starts in the direction in which the contact member 430 rises (see FIG. 42 (e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to make the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430. Is released (see FIG. 42 (f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing when releasing the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430.

  Also, after FIG. 42 (e), the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the rotation of the front transmission projection 440 to rotate. Since it works in the assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required for the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  The upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 in this case is not instantaneous based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

  This can prevent the linear motion member 410 from bouncing off the collision member 420, so that the effect that the granular member 320 scatters is not executed, and the injection device 400 is set in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42A). Can be restored.

  In order to set the state shown in FIG. 42A after the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, the detection sensor SC4 is detected after detecting that the detected part 445 has retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward until it is detected that the detected groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

  Thereby, both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for preventing the granular member 320 from scattering can be performed assuming that the preliminary operation accompanying the driving of the drive motor MT1 is the same. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect so that the player can easily understand whether the big hit or not is large, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the success / failure result due to a difference in driving sound.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43 (c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized, and the drive noise of the drive motor MT1 can be temporarily eliminated. . This makes it difficult to grasp from the driving sound whether the driving direction is the same or the reverse direction, as compared with the case where the driving direction is changed from the state where the driving of the driving motor MT1 is continued. .

  Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is driven prior to the hit notification timing in the effect, and the drive sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the drive direction. be able to.

  Thereby, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the hit notification timing without risking that the player knows the hit / failure result by the drive sound, so that the drive motor MT1 in the firing standby state can be started. The stop timing can have a range. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in a state immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in a state sufficiently before the firing state, there is no hindrance to the subsequent effects. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 is excessively rotated contrary to the control and unintentionally fired.

  FIGS. 44A to 44F are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

  In FIG. 44, the change in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component” in the description of FIG. 44) due to the forward rotation (clockwise) of the rear transmission member 460 is shown. It is illustrated in chronological order. Hereinafter, description will be made in order.

  FIG. 44A illustrates the arrangement of the components in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 42A). As shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the end position of the third groove 462 c of the rear transmission member 460, and the cover member 480. Are arranged at the displacement end positions on the approach side.

  Since the lid member 480 receives the biasing force from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) toward the retreat side, a load is generated in a direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is generated. The transmission to the rear transmission member 460 may affect the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without any measures.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44 (a), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 comes into contact with the third groove 462c of the groove forming part 462, and via the contact point. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the contact between the circular curved surface and the arcuate surface causes the load generated by the contact to go to the center of the circle.

  Accordingly, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 is directed to the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, so that the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the columnar protrusion 472 is The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

  In FIG. 44 (b), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement terminal position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 44 (c), a state in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at an intermediate position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at an approximately intermediate position of the displacement range. Is shown in FIG.

  Since the change in the posture of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460, the driving force for the change in the posture rotates the rear transmission member 460. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction to push down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this urging force pushes the columnar projection 472 upward. , The urging force of the torsion spring SP2 also works to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470.

  In the present embodiment, the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are: Since both are configured to be the same in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in such a manner as to assist each other.

  In FIG. 44 (d), a state in which the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement terminal position on the retracted side. Is shown in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 44D, the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end on the retreat side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged in a non-contact manner.

  Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that a load is applied to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the cover member 480 to the approach side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of accumulation of fatigue in the transmission arm member 470. .

  In FIG. 44 (e), a state in which the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at a position midway along the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side. Is shown in FIG.

  After the state shown in FIG. 44E, a firing standby state (see FIG. 43B) is configured. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side, and is configured to be able to avoid collision with the granular member 320 (see FIG. 41) to be emitted.

  In FIG. 44 (f), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement terminal position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  The injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41) from the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f). Then, by continuing the normal rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

  Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44 (f) is a state after the execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. e)). Therefore, of the driving force of the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38), the amount of the driving force distributed to the front transmission member 440 can be extremely reduced.

  Thus, even when a large driving force is required because the direction of displacement of the lid member 480 is a direction opposing the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is required. Can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that contact the rear transmission member 460, and therefore a sufficient driving force can be secured.

  FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. In FIG. 45, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 is made visible.

  In FIG. 45, the translation member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in a manner similar to that described with reference to FIGS. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the columnar protrusion 403 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparent, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof. Are shown without being hidden.

  In FIG. 45, in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the ascending side (for example, the effect standby state, see FIG. 42A), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction, and the front transmission is performed. A state is shown in which the transmission projection 446 of the member 440 abuts the lower projection 415 of the linear member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the limit is set for the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the drive in the forward rotation direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, while in the drive in the reverse rotation direction, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 of the linear motion member 410 is regulated, and further continuous driving is regulated.

  If the drive of the drive motor MT1 is continued in a state where the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and may be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction is limited. Is provided to avoid damage to the drive motor MT1, but details will be described later.

  FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion members 410, the arrangement of the collision members 420, and the arrangement of the protruding portions 432 of the abutting members 430 with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a time-based change in the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  Note that FIG. 46 does not show the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement change of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  In FIG. 46, the horizontal axis indicates a guideline of the forward rotation angle from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42 (a) and 44 (a)). That is, 0 degree corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (d), 42 (e), 219 degrees correspond to FIGS. 42 (f) and 43 (a), 228 degrees correspond to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees correspond to FIG. 43 (c). , 287 degrees correspond to FIG. 43 (d), and 295 degrees correspond to FIG. 43 (e).

  In FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees correspond to FIG. 44 (d). , 304 degrees correspond to FIG. 44 (e), and 360 degrees correspond to FIG. 44 (f).

  In FIG. 46, the rotation angles of the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are described on the horizontal axis with the effect standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degree), and the above-described components corresponding to the angles are described. The state change in is described. The change in the arrangement of each component due to the drive control in the forward rotation corresponds to the change in the right direction in FIG. 46, and the change in the arrangement in each component due to the drive control in the reverse rotation corresponds to the left direction in FIG. Respond to changes.

  As shown in FIG. 46, before the firing state (angle is 287 degrees), the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced upward by reversely rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is: It is slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced upward after reaching the firing state. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of the upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

  After the firing state is exceeded, since the collision member 420 has already been lifted, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is regulated on the way (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

  For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. However, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the arrangement is such that the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, it is suspected that the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle 360 degrees). In other words, when the detected portion 445 is not disposed on the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the drive is performed in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 forward. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

  By this rotation, the injection device 400 is once returned to the effect standby state, and thereafter, the execution of each effect is controlled. Thus, after a situation in which the control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted, thereby preventing a situation in which the drive motor MT1 generates heat. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the granular members 320 (see FIG. 38) from the firing state (angle 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470 begins to change (angle 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at such a rotational speed that stabilizes.

  For example, if the arrangement is stable two seconds after the launch, by controlling the drive so that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds / rotation), the granularity in the middle of the flow is reduced. It is possible to avoid a situation where the member 320 is bitten by the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

  The rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at a quadruple speed. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 to the entry side can be started at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts flowing down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular member 320 is disposed in the traveling direction of the lid member 480.

  In this state, by stopping the drive in the effect standby state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480. Therefore, the granular members 320 are collected to the left and right central sides along the shape of the lid member 480. Can be. Thereafter, by controlling the drive of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 due to the displacement of the lid member 480 to the retreat side, and the collision member 420 Ride on.

  As described above, by controlling the rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 to be different from each other, a plurality of types of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 can be configured.

  Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the emitted granular member 320 (the arrangement and the displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be changed. , Can enhance the effect.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launching effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for exciting the game. Next, the scaling unit 600 will be described.

  47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 47 and 49 show the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the scaling unit 600 includes a rendering member 700 configured to be capable of moving up and down in the left-right direction and capable of emitting light, and a hemispherical illumination fixedly disposed apart from the left and right sides. Device 613.

  By performing a light-emitting effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, light is emitted to the player from the near side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7), and an effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light is executed. be able to.

  FIG. 51 is a front exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600. 51 and 52, the rendering member 700 is shown in an assembled state. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the distal end portion of the lower arm member 630 connected to the rendering member 700 is disposed on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. For convenience, it is arranged on the rear side of the rear plate portion 611.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes a left-right elongated main body member 601 fastened and fixed to a bottom wall portion 511 of a rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 having a design surface disposed on the side, a pair of upper arm members 620 rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocking with each other in a meshing relationship, and an intermediate portion between the upper arm members 620. , A pair of lower arm members 630 whose posture changes with the rotation of the upper arm member 620, a drive motor MT2 fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2 A transmission gear 650 rotatably supported by the main body member 601 and engaged with the left upper arm member 620 so as to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2; Annulus assembled to 1, provided with a torsion spring SP3 loading the biasing force of the upward to the upper arm member 620, and the presentation member 700 coupled to a distal end of the lower arm member 630, a.

  The main body member 601 is formed in a left and right long plate shape, and is a pair of left and right guide holes 602 arranged in a straight line on the left and right, and a pair of cylindrical members projecting from both left and right symmetric positions in both front and rear directions. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arc-shaped holes 604 formed in an arc with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as a central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 protruding in a cylindrical shape from the left side to the rear side; An arc-shaped hole 606 drilled in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as a central axis, and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 with the detection groove facing the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side. And a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

  The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as an elongated hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 is inserted.

  A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 protruding from the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620, and rotatably supports the upper arm member 620. The upper arm member 620 is undetachably supported by screwing a screw with a large diameter into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603.

  The portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 protruding from the rear side is inserted into the wound main body of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

  One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by a projecting portion 601a projecting from the back side of the main body member 601 in the shape of a letter, and the other arm is pressed by the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. Engaged. Thereby, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the biased portion 625, and thus the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

  The arc-shaped hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Thus, the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engageable.

  The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. The transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to fall off by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605.

  The arc-shaped hole 606 is a through hole for passing the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. The upper arm member 620 is undetachably supported by the transmission gear 650 by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the end of the cylindrical projection 654 of the transmission gear 650.

  The detection sensor 607 has a detection groove into which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is disposed at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, or disposed at other positions. It is configured to be able to determine whether or not it has been performed.

  The front cover member 610 is formed of a resin material having low light transmittance, is a thin member fastened and fixed to the main body member 601, and includes a rear plate portion 611 formed at the left and right central portions, and a rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 formed outside the left and right sides from a connection position with the left and right upper end portions and extending beyond the rear plate portion 611 to the front side, and fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 so as to emit light. And a hemispherical lighting device 613 to be used.

  The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visible. On the back side of the rear plate portion 611, the rear end portion 611 projects to the rear side with a dimension slightly longer than the front-rear width of the gear portion 622, avoiding the movement trajectory of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, and contacts the main body member 601. An overhanging contact portion 611a is provided.

  This makes it possible to stabilize the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 to the main body member 601 and to displace the upper arm member 620 in a space separated by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. it can. In other words, a change in posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture that bends with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both axial sides, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

  The front plate portion 612 is a plate-shaped portion that is disposed on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured to prevent a player from visually recognizing the structural portions of these members. And a sliding surface 612a formed as a pair of left and right sides as a plane parallel to the front plate part of the front panel part, and a wiring part formed as a concave part opened to the rear side in the plate part projecting from the upper left end part to the rear side. A concave portion 612b.

  The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened and fixed to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1 formed of the shape and the material with low friction can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 is a planar plate surface formed along a locus displaced with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

  The shape of the pressing member PC1 on the side facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the state when the pressing member PC1 contacts the sliding surface 612a is a point contact. It is configured to be. Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

  The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount by which the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the front side exceeds the permissible amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 contact each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. You.

  In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set based on the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the rendering member 700. That is, the allowable amount of the displacement amount of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a size that the rendering member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not contact the partition member 310.

  That is, according to this embodiment, the slide member 612 abuts against the pressing member PC1 and restricts the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side, so that the effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is separated from the partition member 310. Contact can be prevented.

  The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large plane, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, it is sufficient that at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 is formed in a planar shape, and the shape of the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, as in the right part of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed so as to be limited to an arc shape as a trajectory of the pressing member PC1, and the other portion protrudes to the rear side (the design part on the front side is (It may project toward the back side due to the effect of being disposed closer to the back side), or the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may have the same planar shape as the left side portion of the present embodiment. good.

  Note that, in addition to the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 being limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the cylindrical protrusion 654. Displacement to the front is regulated by the fastening screw fixed. That is, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, it is possible to avoid a large load locally.

  The wiring passage concave portion 612b is a concave portion that functions as a passage for electric wiring that passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. That is, the electric wiring that has reached between the rear case 510 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612 b, passes through the base end side through hole 635 a of the lower arm member 630, and then to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the effect member 700.

  In this way, by setting the insertion path of the electric wiring into the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the rendering member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction with the displacement. Even in this case (in the present embodiment, the distance is about half the width of the left and right sides of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent a situation in which the electric wiring is loosened and hangs down.

  The hemispherical lighting device 613 is a device that includes a hemispherical lens member and irradiates light emitted from a light emitting unit such as an LED disposed on the back side to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In the present embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward in the center in the left-right direction.

  This facilitates improving the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613, as compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 is directed in the front-back direction. it can. For example, it is easy to put light in the field of view of the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or to make light easily noticeable by irradiating the projecting member 700 in the extended state or the expanded state with light. Or you can.

  The upper arm member 620 is formed in a long plate shape, and is formed as a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, so that the support hole 621 is configured to be able to pass through the cylindrical shaft portion 603. A gear portion 622 formed on an arc centered on the support hole 621 and configured to be meshable with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620; and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circular shape at a longitudinal end. A connecting portion 623 configured to allow insertion of the cylindrical protrusion 631 and an upper hole formed only on the upper arm member 620 on the left side and having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650. A transmission hole 624 is formed, and a biased portion 625 protruding from the rear side of the upper arm member 620 and having a hook-shaped tip is provided.

  The transmission hole 624 includes a transmission portion 624 a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621, and a margin that continuously extends from one end of the transmission portion 624 a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. 624b.

  The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion for receiving the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion for interrupting the transmission of the driving force, which will be described in detail later.

  The biased portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and increases the biasing force in the direction of displacing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 through the biased portion 625. The arm member 620 receives.

  Further, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted by the engagement between the hook-like portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

  The lower arm member 630 is configured substantially symmetrically from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path through which the electric wiring passes, and is a circle protruding from the middle position in the long direction to the back side in a cylindrical shape. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 projecting rearward from the left and right outer position with respect to the columnar protrusion 631 and a left and right inner position with respect to the columnar protrusion 631; And a plurality of circular holes 634 formed through a pair of circular arcs centered on the supporting hole 633.

  The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a large-diameter head screw is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is supported on the upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

  The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via a collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and a female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632 has a rear side. The lower arm member 630 is undetachably supported by the main body member 601 by screwing a screw having a large diameter from the head into the main body member 601.

  The support hole 633 and the arc-shaped hole 634 are used for connection with the rendering member 700. Due to the relationship with an arrangement portion 635 described later, the thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is configured such that the lower portion is thicker than the upper portion. Thereby, when the effecting member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the effecting member 700 can be supported so as to hold the effecting member 700 from the left and right at a thick portion, so that it is effective to change the posture of the effecting member 700 to the forward tilting posture. Can be regulated.

  Further, the lower arm member 630 on the left side is provided with an arrangement portion 635 formed to be open to the rear side to form a space for passing electric wiring in the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and a back surface of the arrangement portion 635. And a thin lid portion 636 which is disposed on the side and functions as a lid for the disposing portion 635.

  The disposing portion 635 includes a base end side through-hole 635a formed in the front-rear direction at the end on the side of the columnar protrusion 632.

  The base side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing electric wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electric wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 is guided from the front side through the base side through hole 635 a to the arrangement portion 635, and escapes from the arrangement portion 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630.

  The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in a production standby state, a lower meat portion 637 disposed below the boundary is formed to be recessed to the rear side. Is done. In other words, the upper side with the tangent as a boundary is formed as a thin plate portion.

  In the lower arm member 630 on the right side, the lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction. The lower meat portion 637 forms an upper wall portion of the placement portion 635 in the lower arm member 630 on the left side, is configured to be able to guide electric wiring therein, and is provided as a lid on the guide path. The thin lid portion 636 is reinforced by fastening.

  Since the electric wiring is guided to the direction member 700 side through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636), members arranged before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, The contact between the upper arm member 620) and the electric wiring can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from being entangled or rubbed with these members, thereby preventing the electric wiring from being damaged.

  The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 formed of the same member and assembled from the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to abut on the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 before and after via the pressing member PC1. Note that the main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, but have a slight gap, and when the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the rear side, the lower arm member 630 comes into contact with the displacement member so as to limit the displacement. Is the same as that of the front pressing member PC1.

  That is, the lower arm member 630 is configured such that the pressing members PC1 are assembled on both front and rear sides and can be brought into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1, so that the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the front-rear direction. The displacement can be easily limited, and the resistance generated against the vertical displacement when the displacement is limited can be easily reduced.

  The distal end of the pressing member PC1 that is assembled from the rear side to the rear side is disposed closer to the rear side than the rear end of the upper arm member 620. Thus, even when the distal end of the pressing member PC1 is displaced rearward enough to contact the main body member 601, the upper arm member 620 can be prevented from contacting the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from abutting on the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed in front and rear.

  This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is easily unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the distal end of the lower arm member 630 is disposed near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are in front and rear. Since it is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be easily displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 or the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself.

  The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular body portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 engraved in a gear shape radially outside the semicircular body portion 651, and a semicircular body portion. A support hole 653 formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted on the central axis of the semicircular body 651 and a cylindrical shape protruding from the outer diameter end of the semicircular main body 651 to the front side. And a plate-like detection target 655 formed at a circumferential end of the semicircular main body 651 in a plate shape thin enough to enter a detection groove of the detection sensor 607. It has a thickened portion 656 formed to increase in thickness between the support hole 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position of the thickened portion 656 on the support hole 653 side.

  The gear 652 is disposed in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the drive force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

  The cylindrical projection 654 passes through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is disposed inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. Accordingly, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the columnar protrusion 654 with the rotation of the transmission gear 650. The cylindrical protrusion 654 is inserted through a collar member having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a female screw formed at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is provided with a large-diameter fastening screw. By being screwed, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

  The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions configured to be able to engage with the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). Since the regulated hole 657 is disposed on the support hole 653 side (a position close to the support hole 653), the displacement regulating device 180 is moved from the transmission gear 650 to the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state (see FIG. 21A). The transmitted load (moment) is configured to be reduced.

  Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickened portion 656 is set as a portion that needs to withstand a load generated by engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, by forming the portion where the engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 cannot occur to be thin, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced.

  FIG. 53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, effect member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the distal end of lower arm member 630, and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of plate-shaped main body 710. A rotating plate 730 provided between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-shaped main body 710 and rotatably supported with respect to the functional plate portion 720; and between the rotating plate 730 and the functional plate portion 720. A telescopic displacement member 740 that is provided and configured to be capable of performing the same displacement as the magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and a drive gear MG3 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720 A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720 to execute a light emitting effect, and an effect stand-by state fastened to the distal ends of the plurality of telescopic displacement members 740, respectively. Dude includes a plurality of shielding design member 760 to be combined so as to shield the passage of light at the front side of the light emitting effect device 750, a.

  The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 projecting from the symmetrical position to the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary projections 712 projecting from the position above the arc centering around 711 to the back side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and a pair of cylindrical projections A through hole 713 formed in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 provided below the through hole 713 and opened only on the front side, and a pressing member provided on the back surface of the plate And a member PC1.

  The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring DK1 guided through the lower arm member 630 and between the arrangement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. . In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714. Thus, even in a limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 comes into contact with another member or is visually recognized by a player.

  The wiring guide member 714 has a function of guiding the electric wiring DK <b> 1 and also has a lower surface of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 because the upper surface is formed by an inclined surface which is inclined downward toward the rear side. It also has a function to soften the contact.

  That is, the upper side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is disposed to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the rendering member 700 is displaced upward, and the rendering member 700 is displaced rearward. Even in this case, the wiring member 714 abuts on the rear plate 611, so that the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side during the upward displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring member 714.

  Similarly to the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is slidably disposed on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in the present embodiment, the pressing member PC1 disposed at the upper end and the wiring guide member 714 disposed at the lower part can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 during the upward displacement of the rendering member 700. With this configuration, it is possible to separate the positions where the load for maintaining the attitude of the effect member 700 is generated.

  FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate section 720. In the description of FIG. 55, FIG. 53 and FIG.

  The functional plate portion 720 is formed in a substantially plate shape from a resin material, has a cylindrical portion 721 protruding rearward at the center portion in a cylindrical shape, and has an inner portion penetrating therethrough, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along a coaxial arc shape, a sensor arrangement portion 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. The motor fixing portion 724 having a large opening and formed to be able to fasten and fix the drive motor MT3, the radial long hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721, and the radial long hole 725a. A plurality of (five in the present embodiment) guide holes 725 each including a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b that intersect at right angles, and extend radially outward on an extension of the radial elongated holes 725a. Plurality (in this embodiment, ), And a pair (books) projecting from both ends in the width direction of the extending plate portion 726 from the rear side end of the flat portion disposed at the extending base end of the extending plate portion 726. In the embodiment, the extension plate portion 726 includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions 727, and a pair of columnar protrusions 728 that protrude from the vicinity of the radially outer end to the rear side in a columnar shape.

  The tubular portion 721 is arranged such that the rear end portion is in contact with the plate-shaped main body 710, and is fixedly fastened to the plate-shaped main body 710 in a state in which an internal through hole communicates with the through hole 713 of the plate-shaped main body 710. Is done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-shaped main body 710 from the back side of the plate-shaped main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into a female screw formed at the back-side end of the tubular portion 721.

  As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body 710, and a through hole is formed at the center thereof. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through the through hole. .

  The electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 fastened and fixed to the sensor arrangement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be turned on.

  The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detected portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to protrude to the front side. The detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7, and The posture can be determined.

  The guide hole 725 is a group of through holes formed with a width in which the guided protrusions 741 b, 741 c, and 742 a of the telescopic displacement member 740 can be arranged, and extends along a straight line extending radially from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. A long hole 725a is formed along a straight line orthogonal to a straight line used as a reference for the long hole 725a on both sides of the outer end of the long hole 725a. And a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b formed at the bottom.

  The radial slot 725a and the cross slot 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusion 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. , But the details will be described later.

  The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the rear end thereof can contact the plate-shaped main body 710. In the contact state, a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the plate-shaped main body 710 is screwed into a female screw formed on the distal end side of the columnar projecting portion 728, so that the functional plate portion 720 is 710 is fastened and fixed.

  In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730. That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used as both a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-shaped main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

  FIG. 56 is a front view of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotating plate 730. In the description of FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, FIG. 53 and FIG.

  The rotating plate 730 is formed in a substantially disc shape from a resin material, and has a cylindrical portion 731 formed in a central portion so as to protrude toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and penetrates the inside of the cylinder, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 drilled along a coaxial arc shape, and a long through hole formed at a position on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. And a plurality of (five in this embodiment) guide holes 733, and extending claw portions 734 extending in a claw shape in a radially outward direction at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733.

  The cylindrical portion 731 is designed such that the inner diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 to detect the sensor SC7. And a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape meshable with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

  The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure a rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 of less than about 120 degrees.

  Each of the guide holes 733 is formed in the same shape, and has a small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape with the center axis of the cylindrical portion 731 as a center, and the center of the cylindrical portion 731 is smaller than the small-diameter arc portion 733a. A large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the shaft and a connecting portion 733c for connecting the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

  Although the aspect of the connecting portion 733c is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the change in the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle is formed so as to change in accordance with the position. You. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle near the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

  Accordingly, the resistance generated when transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740 can be reduced, and the rendering effect can be improved by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

  The extension claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise in a front view, is configured to be able to engage with a telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the front side, and is formed toward the back side in the thickness direction. A rear claw portion 734a and a front claw portion 734b formed on the front side with respect to the back claw portion 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the rear claw portion 734a and the front claw portion 734b are separated from each other at a substantially middle position of the thickness of the extension claw portion 734.

  The extension claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740. The front-side claw 734b and the rear-side claw 734a correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b, respectively, in which the protruding tip positions from the expansion / contraction member 740 are different in front and rear, respectively. It is guided radially inward, but details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the extension claw 734 is configured such that the extension claw 734 disposed on the lower side has a longer extension length than the extension claw 734 disposed on the upper side. Formed. In the present embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be reduced.

  That is, even if the telescopic displacement members 740 are configured in the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity differs for each telescopic displacement member 740 because the relationship between the direction in which displacement is possible and the direction of gravity is different. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. The first guided protrusion 743b of 740 is disposed, and there is a possibility that the guide to the radial inside by the extended claw 734 may fail.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging down of the telescopic displacement member 740. Guidance inward in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably executed.

  On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced under the influence of its own weight, the displacement is in the direction approaching the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730, so that the extension claw portion 734 is guided radially inward. Is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary, but is formed to be shorter, thereby reducing material cost and reducing the size of the rotating plate 730. Can be.

  The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 are appropriately referred to.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) Is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59B is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

  FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b) show a state in which one of the five sets of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which is arranged at the top, is collectively arranged. 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the same set is shown in a state where it is discrete.

  Since the telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism constituted by a plurality of long members arranged in two layers in front and rear, in the following description, a plurality of telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged on the front side of the telescopic displacement member 740. The plane on which the long member can be displaced is also referred to as a front plane, and the plane on which a plurality of long members disposed on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as a rear plane.

  The expansion and contraction displacement members 740 are disposed in two layers in the front and rear directions, and a pair of base end members 741 rotatably supported at lower ends thereof, and rotatably supported at upper ends of the base members 741. A pair of first elongate members 742, a pair of second elongate members 743 that are rotatably supported at upper ends of the first elongate members 742, and an upper end of the second elongate members 742. A tip adjusting member 744 having a guide slot 744a that extends linearly so as to be able to be guided.

  The base member 741, the first elongate member 742, and the second elongate member 743, which are configured as a front and rear pair, are designed to have the same length in the elongate direction and the same support position as the pair.

  The base-side member 741 has a transmitted projection 741a protruding in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the member on the rear layer plane side to the back side, and a circle from the back surface on which the columnar projection 741a protrudes to the front side. A guided projection 741b protruding in a columnar shape and inserted through a member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of a first elongate member 742 protruding in a columnar shape from the upper end of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. And a guided protrusion 741c inserted into a through hole formed in the base member.

  The transmitted projection 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730, and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730.

  The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are disposed in the guide holes 725 of the functional plate 725, and are guided in the longitudinal direction. The guided protrusion 741b is disposed in the radially long hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is disposed in the crossed long hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

  The first elongate member 742 is rotatably supported at a substantially middle position in the elongate direction so as to be relatively rotatable about a longitudinal axis, and is protruded in a cylindrical shape from the lower end portion of the member on the back layer plane side to the front side to form a front layer plane. A guided protrusion 742a is inserted through the upper end of the base-side member 741 on the side.

  The guided protrusion 742a is disposed in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the functional plate 725, and is guided in the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

  The second elongate member 743 is rotatably supported by a longitudinal axis at a substantially intermediate position in the elongate direction, is protruded in a columnar shape from the upper end of the member on the front layer plane side to the front side, and A pair of members projecting from the upper end of the member on the layer plane side so as to be flush with the front end surface of the member on the layer surface side on the front layer with a diameter of about the member width, and projecting in a cylindrical shape from the projecting tip to the front side. A support projection 743a and a first guided projection 743b projecting from a substantially middle position of the member on the rear layer plane side to the back side in a cylindrical shape are provided.

  The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear claw 734a of the extension claw 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load directed radially inward by this guide (see FIG. 56).

  The distal end adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side, and has a length extending along the linear direction with a width capable of inserting the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743. It has a pair of guide long holes 744a formed in a hole shape, and a second guided protrusion 744b projecting in a columnar shape from the center position in the long direction to the back side.

  The second guided protrusion 744b has a protruding tip disposed forward of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front claw 734b of the extended claw 734 of the rotating plate 730. With this guide, a load directed radially inward is received (see FIG. 57).

  The second guided projection 744b has a protruding tip shape that is not circular, and is inclined so as to approach as the rotating plate 730 having a rotation center on the transmitted projection 741a side rotates counterclockwise in rear view. The surface (the left surface in FIG. 59 (b)) on the side facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) is provided with an inclined surface that is chamfered.

  Due to this inclined surface, even when the arrangement of the expansion / contraction member 740 is slightly shifted in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the resistance at the time of contact with the extension claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 from becoming excessive. Can be.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), in a case where the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged and in a case where the telescopic displacement members 740 are separated, the telescopic displacement members 740 are disposed at the distal end of the second long member 743. The support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer end portions or inside inner end portions of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjusting member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction) of the tip adjustment member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

  The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjusting member 744, extends toward the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extending tip toward the side covering the expansion / contraction member 740. A substantially triangular member in a front view having a shape portion extending in parallel to a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the expansion / contraction member 740 is displaced from the extension end thereof. is there.

  The shielding design member 760 is configured so that a colored (red in the present embodiment) reflective sheet is attached to the front and back to invisibly shield the back side decorative member 752, and at the right end, along the back of the member. And an extended plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side in a form in which the plate surface is formed.

  Like the main body of the shielding design member 760, a colored (red in the present embodiment) reflective sheet is attached to the front and back of the extension plate portion 761, and the shielding plate is disposed on the right side in the front view (in the clockwise direction). The design member 760 is disposed so as to face the rear side of the left end portion, and is configured to contact when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the rear side, thereby suppressing the displacement.

  The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be shifted to the rear side from the rear surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. Contact (collision) can be avoided.

  This effect becomes more remarkable as the arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is further away from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760. However, at least the displacement of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the dimension allowed for the shielding design member 760. By disposing the extension plate portion 761 apart, the extension plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shield design member 760 abut on each other along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shield design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

  The shape of the front surface of the extension plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a plane whose normal line is directed in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the inclined surface is configured so as to be closer to the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

  Thus, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state in which the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the uppermost shielding design member 760 is slightly displaced to the rear side with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760 in front view. Even when displacing to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, the position in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the right in front view along the front slope of the extended plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760. The deviation can be corrected. Accordingly, it is possible to easily adjust the relative front-back position of the adjacent shielding design members 760.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760 is such that a member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 is disposed on a rear layer plane. A member that supports the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is disposed on the front layer plane, and the middle portion of the pair of second long members 743 intersects in a front-to-back manner so that the left side portion becomes the right side portion. In comparison, the configuration is such that the shielding design member 760 can be easily inclined to the posture arranged on the front side.

  Since the structure of the telescopic displacement member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is on the right side (the side where the extension plate portion 761 is formed). It is configured to be easily inclined to the posture arranged on the front side in comparison.

  Due to the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the rear surface side of the shielding design member 760 opposed to the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) Can be avoided.

  In a state in which the five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged collectively (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are located on the left side (in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The displacement of the extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 toward the rear side is suppressed.

  According to this configuration, in the shielding design member 760, the extended plate portion 761 abuts on the shielding design member 760 on the right side (clockwise direction in front view), whereby the positional shift to the front side is suppressed. Therefore, by disposing the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the five sets of shielding design members 760 in the front-rear direction.

  With reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the interlocking operation between the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described. 60 and 61 are front views of the function plate section 720. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an example of the arrangement of the outer shape of the transmitted protrusion 741a and the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is illustrated. You.

  60 shows a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58). In FIG. 61, the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise by about 120 degrees in a front view, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are separated. (See FIG. 59).

  In the present embodiment, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide holes 725, and the transmission projections 741a arranged in the guide holes 733 with the rotation of the rotating plate 730 correspond to the rotating plate. By displacing in the direction approaching the rotation axis side of 730, the state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes.

  In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c, 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate portion 720, so that the shielding design member 760 is stretched toward the outer diameter based on the position of the guided protrusions 741c, 742a. It is configured so as to be displaceable so that it comes out, but details will be described later.

  Returning to FIGS. 53 and 54, the description will be continued. The light emitting effect device 750 includes an electric decoration substrate 751 having an opening in the center, and a decoration member 752 disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrate 751 and formed of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed at the center of the electric decoration board 751, and the decoration member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting toward the front side, so that an area where the drive motor MT3 is provided can be secured.

  The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. As the opening 751a becomes larger, the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring can be more easily arranged. However, since the arrangement area of the LED as the light emitting means is limited, the smaller the opening 751a is, from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. desirable.

  Since no LED can be provided in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is easily viewed darkly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a measure is taken by dividing the configuration of the decorative member 752 into two parts.

  That is, the decorative member 752 includes a light-transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is assembled to the light-transmitting member 752a from the front side and has a mirror-like viewing surface (for example, silver-plated coating). Mirror surface member 752b).

  An opening is formed in the center of the light transmitting member 752a, and the mirror member 752b is closed at the center so that the mirror member 752b can be arranged at the position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in a front view. . Thereby, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the reflected light by light irradiation from another direction (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613) can be visually recognized by the player. , The front side portion of the opening 751a can be prevented from being viewed dark.

  The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 will be described. FIGS. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the descending displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 62 to 64, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

  FIG. 62 illustrates the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 illustrates a descending state where the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 illustrates the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Illustrated.

  63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the effect standby state to the extended state. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is disposed at the boundary position between the transmission portion 624a of the upper arm member 620 and the margin 624b.
In other words, the state where the columnar protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmitting portion 624a and is located at a position where the downward displacement of the effect member 700 can be started is the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the effect member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed on the pachinko machine 10, for example. The state is switched in accordance with the execution of the effect that is performed, and before the suggestion effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin 624b side.

  As described above, the extra portion 624b is a shape portion that continuously extends from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc around the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. In the state shown in FIG. 606 is disposed in a position overlapping with the front-back direction.

  Therefore, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 via the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed to the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, regardless of whether the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized or not, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated, and thereby the lower arm member 630 connected to the upper arm member 620 can be connected. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be restricted.

  In addition, even if the above-mentioned production that suggests that the production member 700 is displaced downward is a production mode in which the production member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state. The state is controlled to change.

  In this case, immediately after the effect member 700 is notified to the player not to be displaced downward, in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

  Thus, when an effect indicating that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is performed, it is possible to avoid a subsequent effect relating to the effect member 700 from being predicted due to a difference in drive sound of the drive motor MT2. .

  The extra portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in a direction to raise the effect member 700. That is, in the driving mode of raising the effecting member 700, the effecting member 700 is already disposed at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the displacement of the cylindrical projection 654 thereafter is limited to the margin. The displacement is sufficient to slide along 624b.

  And, no matter where the columnar projection 654 is located in the margin 624b, there is no difference in the function of regulating the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, it is permissible that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar protrusion 654 is reduced, and the rotation that can stop the transmission gear 650 immediately after the detected plate 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when the effect member 700 is displaced upward is not limited to the speed, and can be set to be large. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set to be large.

  In addition, even when the ascending speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654, the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed toward the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical projection 654 in the rotation direction. Therefore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the cylindrical projection 654.

  Further, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the ascending displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, but the details will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends disposed in the guide holes 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the effect standby state. A larger value is set in the range from the lowering state to the overhang state than in the lowering state.

  As described above, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 due to the downward displacement of the rendering member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the rendering member 700 is severely displaced in the width direction. It can be visually recognized as if it were, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize as if the displacement speed of the rendering member 700 is increasing sharply. Can be improved.

  65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the descending displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. In FIG. 65, for easy understanding, FIG. 65 (b) is additionally illustrated as a view in which the illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted.

  FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b) show an effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 shows a state in which the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and FIG. The extended state of the scaling unit 600 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. That is, in the present embodiment, before performing the effect indicating that the effecting member 700 is displaced downward, the drive motor MT2 is stopped while the detected plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. However, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is controlled in accordance with the execution of the suggestion effect described above, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, The enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to the effect standby state.

  Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side that causes the effect member 700 to be displaced upward, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. Is released, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position where it slightly enters the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical projection 654 in the effect standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 can be stopped. , The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700 can be regulated.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or reduced. Control is performed such that the drive of the drive motor MT2 is stopped after a time delay sufficient for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be disposed at the end of the margin 624b.

  Thus, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the position of the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the end of the margin 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even when the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly shifted, since the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

  The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise in rear view from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), and is a position shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the restriction hole 657.

  Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, after the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed in to bring the displacement restricting device 180 into the restricting state (see FIG. 15C), the transmission gear 650 is moved. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction of raising and displacing the effect member 700 by drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG.

  Since the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the driving of the drive motor MT2 is continued, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is defective. Can be.

  Based on this determination, the abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error of the displacement failure of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). Can be aware that the displacement restricting device 180 may remain in the restricted state.

  Thus, the information about the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be transmitted to the clerk of the gaming machine store using the notification such as the error display regarding the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to be large. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 at the time of raising and displacing the 700 is too high, the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended by the upper arm member 620 becomes too high, and the lower arm member 630 is moved to the upper arm member 620. Possible collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the rendering member 700 is displaced toward the rendering standby state is set in a direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward), so that a downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. The vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 can be reduced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the upper side shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 is formed. Can increase the contact area in the event of collision with the upper arm member 620. This can prevent a large load from being locally applied to the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and can prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

  As described above, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently large contact area, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward is excessively high. Even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the lower arm is controlled by the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is regulated by the columnar protrusion 654 as described above. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thus, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the production member 700 are displaced downward from the production standby state against the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 by the driving force of the driving motor MT2. Corresponding to the state of

  In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary projection 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position between the arc-shaped holes 634 of the lower arm member 630. In the state shown in FIG. 67, as in the state shown in FIG. 700 auxiliary protrusions 712 are arranged at the ends of the arc-shaped holes 634 of the lower arm member 630.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the degree to which the posture is stabilized). That is, the degree of the lower arm member 630 holding the effect member 700 can be increased in the effect standby state or the extended state as compared with the lowering state.

  In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect of the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical projection 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotation direction is not regulated (see FIG. 66), the rendering member 700 is rotated in the rotation direction around the right cylindrical protrusion 711. Posture may change.

  In the present embodiment, the rendering member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical projection 711, but in a direction of rotation about the right cylindrical projection 711. The displacement direction of the left cylindrical projection 711 when the orientation member 700 changes its posture is in the short direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the change in the posture of the effect member 700 is not restricted by the lower arm member 630 and may occur visually, and may give a sense of incongruity to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the extended state, the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation about the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. Thus, the change in the posture of the effect member 700 can be effectively limited by the lower arm member 630, and the posture of the effect member 700 can be prevented from changing to such an extent that it can be determined.

  In addition, in the protruding state, the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the right side are arranged at the end positions of the arc-shaped holes 732, so that the auxiliary projections 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 abut on the right side. It is possible to prevent the effecting member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear centering on the cylindrical projection 711 of FIG. Note that, as described above, the posture change in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view is restricted by the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 being along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 on the left.

  Similarly, in the protruding state, the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the end positions of the arc-shaped holes 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary projections 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 causes It is possible to prevent the rendering member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear centering on the cylindrical projection 711 of FIG. Note that the posture change in the clockwise direction in the rear view is limited by the displacement direction of the right cylindrical projection 711 along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630 as described above.

  Further, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the rendering member 700 in the rotation direction (rotation direction about the axis extending in the front-back direction), but also tilts (rotation direction about the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress a change in posture and a change in posture in a horizontal swing direction (a rotation direction about an axis extending in the vertical direction).

  For example, the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the cylindrical protrusions 711 disposed above the cylindrical protrusions 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the lower left and right sides, the posture change in the tilt direction of the effect member 700 can be achieved. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed above the cylindrical protrusion 711 is disposed in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (at the base of the arc-shaped hole 634), the inclination of the effect member 700 is reduced. The load generated by the change in the orientation in the direction can be endured by the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630.

  Further, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the long main body of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 lowers through the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is regulated.

  As described above, when the load due to the change in the orientation of the rendering member 700 is applied to the long main body of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives a load in the bending direction along the long direction, the lower arm member 630 is By utilizing the configuration for restricting the displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700.

  Further, as described above, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (downward) of the cylindrical projections 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700, and the production member 700 It is possible to suppress a change in posture in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

  In the present embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the rendering member 700. In the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

  This can minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in a mode in which the effect member 700 falls forward around the connection portion with the lower arm member 630, and can be connected to the lower arm member 630. The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the orientation member 700 changes posture in a manner of falling down around the connection portion can be minimized.

  That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes may occur in the rendering member 700, the longitudinal direction displacement of the rendering member 700 is suppressed regardless of any of the plurality of posture changes. Therefore, it is possible to cope with any posture change.

  Accordingly, even when the space between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) is reduced, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from rubbing against or colliding with the partition member 310. Since it can be avoided, it is possible to make it difficult for the rendering member 700 to be damaged, the design part to be degraded, the partition member 310 to be damaged or abrasion to cause a decrease in visibility (a drop in transparency), and the like.

  In a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 abuts on the shape of the main body member 601 in the rotation direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the drive of the drive motor MT2 is continued, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced only by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

  In the present embodiment, in the protruding state shown in FIG. 67, the driving force slightly exceeding the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from rebounding upward. Controlling.

  Accordingly, the effecting member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is set to a relatively large value (for example, a size that can lift the effecting member 700).

  On the other hand, when the upward movement of the effect member 700 is started, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that an excessive load can be avoided on the drive motor MT2.

  For example, in the case of starting the upward displacement, after the driving force for stably disposing the effecting member 700 at the lower end position is released, the effecting member 700 starts to be displaced upward by the urging force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the driving motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the driving motor MT2 starts), the driving force can be applied to the rendering member 700 after the displacement starts.

  Thus, the burden on the drive motor MT2 can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced upward.

  65 to 67, a change in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the inner surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1 is illustrated by a hidden line. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the electric wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner side of the arc-shaped hole 634, and is guided inside the wiring guide member 714. It is passed through the through hole 713 to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 67, the tension of the electric wiring DK1 which may be caused by the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the rendering member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electric wiring DK1 arranged beforehand inside the wiring guide member 714. I am trying to do it. Accordingly, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed near the wiring guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

  The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thus, the load on the electric wiring DK1 from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shape of the lower arm member 630 where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electric wiring DK1. For example, when the rendering member 700 is displaced upward from the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape of the lower arm member 630 where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is different from the electrical wiring DK1. DK1 is configured to be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

  Thereby, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably put in and out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be stably caused.

  As shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 67, the auxiliary projection 712 disposed in the arc-shaped hole 634 which is disposed on the front side of the thin lid 636 and most of which is hidden by the thin lid 636 is in an extended state. Only the position is visible at the rear view (see FIG. 67).

  The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700, it is necessary to screw a fastening screw into (or remove) the auxiliary projection 712.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the scaling unit 600. Thereby, assembling efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Further, as a result of performing the assembly and the maintenance in a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at a halfway position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect member 700 and other components are damaged.

  Next, a displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 due to a state change will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of the enlargement / reduction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be changeable by the arrangement of the effect member 700.

  FIG. 68 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. 68 and 69, the illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

  68 and 69 illustrate a state where the enlarging / reducing unit 600 is being lowered. As shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, in the state in which the expansion / contraction unit 600 is moving down, the effecting member 700 is not controlled to expand and displace until the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow the enlarged displacement.

  In other words, the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the size of the rendering member 700 from being excessively large when viewed from the front, so that the posture change amount allowed for the rendering member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). Can be increased.

  At a position in the middle of the expanding displacement of the effect member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered by the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in a front view, the light transmitting member 752a is disposed at a position (gap position) not covered by the rendering member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is disposed at a position not covered by the rendering member 700. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where the eye is visible.

  Thereby, the visibility of the light emitted from the LED or the like disposed on the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a can be improved, and the shielding design can be transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 on the mirror member 752b, the effect of the mirror member 752b can be improved.

  For example, as a production mode of the mirror member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LED of the electric decoration substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the ground color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment) is applied to the mirror member 752b. Can be reflected to be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the illuminated board 751, the color reflected from the mirror member 752b and visually recognized is a mixture of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LED. Color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror member 752b can be changed by light passing through a portion other than the mirror member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

  Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after the shielding design member 760 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68, control may be performed to return to the collective arrangement state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. By switching in small increments in the opposite direction, the shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction.

  When the shielding design member 760 is controlled to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a disposed at the distal end of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the state of the enlarged displacement up to the middle position is the distal end adjustment member. 744 is located at an intermediate position between the guide slots 744a. Accordingly, the distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

  In a case where the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or a case where the shielding design members 760 are expanded and displaced to the maximum in the radial direction while achieving such a displacement, the support protrusion 743 a arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743. Are located at both ends of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, so that the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned (see FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b)). ).

  Further, the intermediate position allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the position may be slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or may be a position slightly before the position where the maximum displacement occurs.

  Here, in the state of being displaced slightly from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 is viewed overlapping with the shielding design member 760 that is arranged to be opposed in front view), the extended plate Since the portion 761 plays a role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, similar to the main body of the shielding design member 760, the red reflecting sheet is attached to the extension plate 761, so that the red color of the extension plate 761 can be visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even in this case, it can be configured such that it is difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extension plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

  Note that, unlike the present embodiment, in a state in which the effecting member 700 is displaced to a position slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extension plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 which is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be made to stand out.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the light transmitting member 752a is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

  In this case, even if the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlapping allowance with the extension plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 is shielded. Since the design members 760 are visually recognized in red, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the shield design members 760 as if they are at least partially continuous.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make it stand out. Effect can be improved.

  70 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

  70 and 71 illustrate the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlarged state of the effect member 700. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effecting member 700 is controlled to be capable of being enlarged and displaced until the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter.

  Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 when viewed from the front is maximized, and the amount of change in posture allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22) is minimized. The contrivance for suppressing the change in the posture of the effect member 700 is as described above.

  In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is disposed so as to be retracted from the decorative member 752 in a front view. Therefore, when light is emitted from the LED of the illuminated substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the appearance of the light on the mirror member 752b can be changed to the case where the effecting member 700 is arranged at a middle position of the enlarged displacement.

  In other words, the reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed, and the ground color (in this embodiment, silver) of the mirror surface member 752b can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, when the expansion / contraction member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is enlarged and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized even in a control mode in which the same color light is continuously emitted from the LED of the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53). It is possible to change the color of light to be visually recognized by the player in time series.

  More specifically, for example, in the case where white light is emitted from the illuminated substrate 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized near the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member 750 is associated with the enlargement displacement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the ground color (silver) of the mirror member 752b is easily recognized at the end position of the enlarged displacement. Thus, the color of light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the emission color.

  In this embodiment, the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not controlled in a continuous manner, but only in a state where the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. , Is controlled to execute the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700.

  That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect members 700 are collectively arranged. Thus, it is possible to prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with another component such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

  It should be noted that, in consideration of avoidance of collision with other components, or a configuration in which a problem does not occur in displacement due to collision with other components, the enlarged displacement is performed during the vertical displacement of the rendering member 700. Control may be performed as possible.

  With reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, the radially reduced displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described. FIGS. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a) are rear views of the effecting member 700 showing the time-dependent reduction displacement of the effecting member 700. FIG. FIG. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is the upper surface of the effect member 700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75 (a). FIG.

  In FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), FIG. 73, FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 75 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the plate-shaped main body 710 is omitted, and FIG. As shown, a state in which the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise in rear view is illustrated. In FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 75 (b), the illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

  FIG. 72 (a) shows a state where the shielding design member 760 of the rendering member 700 is discrete at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72 (b) shows the shielding design member 760 of the rendering member 700. A state of being enlarged and displaced to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is shown.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the transmitted projection 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small-diameter arc portion 733a of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c, and in the state shown in FIG. The transmitted projection 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at a position halfway of the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730.

  FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side has started to abut on the back side claw 734a of the rotating plate 730, and in FIG. The first guided protrusion 743b of the expanding and contracting displacement member 740 is guided by the rear claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730, and reaches a position immediately before the collective arrangement state.

  Because the influence of gravity is different between the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side, the displacement mode of the expansion / contraction member 740 and the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the member arranged on the upper side and on the lower side. It differs depending on the member.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in a state where the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 disposed on the upper side are disposed close to the rotating plate 730 side by their own weight, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side rotates its own weight. Since it acts in a direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in a direction away from the rotating plate 730 to an extent allowed in the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741 a.

  This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extension claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the position of the collective arrangement state. Accordingly, the timing at which the shielding design members 760 reach the collective arrangement state is not five at the same time, but at least the upper three are earlier than the lower two.

  Thereby, the displacement of the effect member 700 to the collective arrangement state can be stably performed. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are disposed first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collective arrangement state, so that the lower telescopic displacement member When it collides with 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates on the lower elastic member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause early damage.

  On the other hand, when the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first as in the present embodiment, and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state. Since the self-weight is generated in a direction opposing the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of collision with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Thereby, accumulation of fatigue due to collision between the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed.

  In FIG. 74, the transmitted projection 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is disposed at the boundary between the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacement member 740 is pushed and cut off by the back side claw portion 734a, and is brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the distal end adjustment member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw portion 734b.

  FIG. 75 illustrates the state of the collective arrangement of the effect members 700. That is, the state in which the rotating plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated.

  FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of effect member 700 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the state where the rendering members 700 are collectively arranged, the surface on the center axis side of the rear claw portion 734a abuts on the first guided projection 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740 is increased. The displacement outward in the direction is regulated.

  In addition, the surface on the center axis side of the front claw portion 734b abuts on the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the radial displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b abut in the radial direction with the front-rear width in the protruding direction, so that the arrangement of the second elongate member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744 can be improved. The posture can be stabilized.

Further, the front surface of the tip adjusting member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726.
In this sliding process, the projecting tip of the second guided projection 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotation direction. (The closer to the collective arrangement state, the more inclined toward the front side.) The inclined surface 734c can apply a load to the second guided protrusion 744b toward the front side.

  Accordingly, in a configuration in which the tip adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extension plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, as the rotating plate 730 rotates and the rendering member 700 approaches the collective arrangement state, the leading end is adjusted. The tip adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726.

  Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotating plate 730 from excessively increasing, the load sandwiched in the front-rear direction is applied to the tip adjusting member 744 in a manner to gradually increase the position and posture of the tip adjusting member 744 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the position and posture of the shield design member 760 in the front-rear direction can be stabilized, and the shield design member 760 can be closely arranged without any gap in the collective arrangement state.

  With reference to FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 75 (b), it will be described that the inclination applied to the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided projection 744b. The configuration of the shielding design member 760 is common, and the configuration of the telescopic displacement member 740 for displacing the shielding design member 760 is also common.

  As described above, the shielding design member 760 is on the side where the extended plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59 (a)) is formed in the width direction (the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged on the top, FIG. 74). (See (b)) so that it is easier to tilt the posture so that it is disposed on the rear side as compared to the opposite side.

  This is due to the manner in which the second elongated member 743 is formed, and this inclination also occurs in the tip adjustment member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the posture of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided projection 744b is lower than the tip position of the first guided projection 743b (projecting direction is along the front-back direction). The position tends to shift to the clockwise direction side (the left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the uppermost part, see FIG. 74 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the rotating plate 730, the extended claw portion 734 is disposed to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and is opposed to the second guided protrusion 744b in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view. Rotationally displaces so that a load can be applied.

  That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front side claw portion 734b or the front side surface (see FIGS. 56 and 57) of the inclined surface 734c abuts on the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b is formed. Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in rear view, the inclination degree of the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be reduced (the inclination can be eliminated). Accordingly, it is possible to easily eliminate the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760 at the position of the collective arrangement of the rendering members 700.

  The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the rendering member 700 shown in chronological order in FIGS. 72 to 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small-diameter end (reduced-side end) of the allowable displacement range (see FIG. 74). Then, the inclination of the posture of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and thereafter, a posture change that eliminates (corrects) the inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be generated.

  That is, while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the body inclination of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 abut (collision) by maintaining the inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760. ) Can be easily avoided, but after the approach of the shielding design members 760 is completed, the inclination of the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is eliminated (corrected), so that the shielding design member is eliminated. The plate portion arranged at the forefront of the 760 can be arranged flush, and it is possible to easily produce a sense of unity of the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state.

  The state shown in FIG. 74B is illustrated as a state in which the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 has been maximized. The posture shift on the opposite side of the posture shift in FIG. 74B is configured so as not to easily occur due to the front-back arrangement of the second elongated member 743. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 that is arranged to face.

  In addition, an auxiliary projection 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extension plate 726 is configured to be able to abut on the reduced side wall portion in the enlargement / reduction displacement of the tip adjustment member 744. Since the auxiliary protrusion 727 is formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the extension plate portion 726, the auxiliary protrusion 727 comes into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduced side end of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

  As a result, not only can the posture be corrected by engagement with another shielding design member 760, but also the stabilization of the posture when the tip adjustment member 744 has reached the reduced side end of the displacement range can be achieved by itself. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launching effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for exciting the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

  Since the displacement rotation unit 800 has a pair of units arranged symmetrically and has a symmetrical shape with each other, the configuration of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the left will be described below, and the description of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the right will be described below. Omitted. In the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIGS. 77 and 78 show an effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG.

  FIG. 79 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIGS. 79 and 80, the horizontal slide member 840 is illustrated in an assembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 that is inserted into the metal rod MB2 and is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal bar MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 by a member such as a screw, and a configuration in which the metal bar MB3 is inserted and slidable in the left and right direction. As the horizontal slide member 840 and the vertical slide member 820 are displaced in the vertical direction, the driving force of the drive motor MT4 is changed horizontally via the vertical slide member 820. A transmission means 860 configured to be capable of transmitting to the ride member 840; a wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 so as to be rotationally displaceable at an upper end position on the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820; 870 and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding electric wiring.

  The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of fixed portions 811 at both ends on which the metal bar MB2 is disposed, a slide guide portion 812 formed to guide a transmission member 830 disposed on the front side, and a long side on the rear side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape and capable of guiding the cylindrical projection 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the rear side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813 And a falling-off prevention plate 814 provided on the back side to prevent the falling-off of the head.

  The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate portion 821 to the back side, and a circle from a substantially center position of a region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to the back side. At the left end of the flat plate portion 821, there are a columnar protrusion 823 projecting in a columnar shape, omitted portions 824 a and 824 b having a size large enough to allow a connector portion of an electric wiring to be inserted and having no wall portion formed. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape (or a tubular member is provided) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a metal rod MB3 that can be inserted through the upper and lower central portions of the flat plate portion 821 And a pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed at the same time (or a cylindrical member is disposed), and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. Drop-off prevention member 82 configured to be possible And a shaft support portion 828 formed in a columnar shape on the back side of the flat plate portion 821 so as to be able to support the two-stage pinion 861, and a cylinder extending horizontally from the upper end to the left and right in the horizontal direction (leftward in FIG. 79). And a support projection 829 projecting in a shape.

The wall portion 822 is a portion for configuring the area in which the electric wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced inside to ensure the durability of the electric wiring.
The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as interrupted portions of the wall portion 822 include a first omitted portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omitted portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the back side.

  The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate-like shape on the rear side at the upper portion thereof, and is fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a is provided so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9.

  The transmission member 830 includes a main body 831 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a female screw formed at an upper end of the main body 831 at a distal end of the cylindrical protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820. A hole 832 formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into the hole is inserted therein, and a plate portion in which the hole 832 is formed, and a rear surface formed in a region defined by a wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are formed linearly in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 are provided.

  The columnar projection 823 has both a role as a part into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 832 is screwed and a role as a winding center of the electric wiring as described later.

  The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally controlled, the transmission member 830 is vertically displaced. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 moves up and down.

  FIG. 81 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 is formed in a substantially circular plate shape, and has a metal bar MB3 inserted therethrough to restrict displacement in the left-right direction, and a back surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 fastened and fixed to the upper side to form a guide path for electric wiring; a circular member 847 arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and formed in a circular plate shape in a front view; An electric decoration board 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841 and the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. And an intermediate member 857 fitted into the opening of the wing member 854 from the front side so as to adjust the center opening diameter of the wing member 854 to the opening diameter of the collar member C8. Comprises a central design member 858 columnar member can be inserted through the outer diameter to the center opening of the intermediary member 857 is projected from the rear side.

  The main body plate member 841 has a drive motor MT5 fastened and fixed to the rear side, a drive gear MG5 disposed on the front side, a rod arrangement portion 842 on which the metal rod MB3 is disposed, and a lower side of the rod arrangement portion 842. A rack gear portion 843 on which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

  The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the horizontal displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed in a shape that bypasses the electric wiring. This can prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, but will be described in detail later.

  The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and is configured such that the wing member 854 and the drive gear MG5, which are formed to be meshable with each other, are assembled from different directions from front to back.

  The circular member 847 has a receiving portion 848 formed in a cup shape having a size large enough to receive the wing member 854 toward the rear side, and a cylindrical projecting portion from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. Cylindrical projection 849 to be formed.

  The receiving portion 848 includes a through-hole portion 848a that is formed so as to be cut out so as to have a shape overlapping with a column centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5, and the gear portion 855 of the wing member 854 is formed through the through-hole portion 848a. It is exposed to a position where it can be seen in rear view.

  In this manner, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the driving gear MG5, and the driving force is transmitted with the rotation of the driving motor MT5, and the rotation of the wing member 854 is controlled. The rotational drive of the wing member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so as to be possible even in the effect standby state.

  The cylindrical projection 849 has a linear cutout 849a at the tip. This is a shape portion for facilitating the maintenance of the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radially projecting portion 858b of the central design member 858, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. In the description of FIG. 83, FIG. 81 and FIG.

  The illuminated substrate 850 includes a circular opening formed by an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, a deformed opening 851 formed by a long opening extending upward, and the deformed opening 851. The front side light emitting means 852a includes a plurality of LEDs and the like disposed on the front side near the opening 851, and includes a plurality of LEDs and the like disposed on the back side at the outer diameter end of the illumination board 850. And a rear side light emitting means 852b.

  In the modified opening 851, the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be arranged inside the opening. In the assembled state, the gear portion 855 of the wing member 854 is arranged on the back side of the modified opening 851.

  The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the odd-shaped opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotating shaft of the drive gear MG5. Thus, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the illuminated substrate 850, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-shaped member 854 can be easily meshed with the drive gear MG5.

  The front side light emitting means 852a is configured by an LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-back direction. Accordingly, light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a near the rotation axis of the wing member 854.

The back side light emitting means 852b is configured by an LED or the like whose optical axis is directed outward in the radial direction. Accordingly, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b.
By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the plate of the circular member 847, the light can travel to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing member 854. In the present embodiment, since a plurality of elongate irregularities formed along a circular arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing member 854 are densely formed on the plate back surface of the circular member 847, In contrast, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized in a front view.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing member 854 is not disposed on the front side of the electric decoration board 850, The position where the light is visually recognized can be moved outward in the radial direction. In other words, while using the illuminated substrate 850 having a diameter smaller than the outermost diameter of the wing member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the illuminated substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outer side of the outermost diameter of the wing member 854. The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

  This makes it possible to execute an effect of visually recognizing light outside the wing-shaped member 854 in the radial direction without increasing the size of the electric decoration substrate 850. In the present embodiment, as described later, when the wing member 854 rotates at a high speed, the back side of the wing member 854 becomes a shadow, and it may be difficult to effectively perform the light emission effect in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the radial outer side of the rotation trajectory of the wing member 854, but it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LED and the like. In other words, since it is necessary to increase the area of the illuminated substrate, the manufacturing cost of the substrate increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while maintaining the size of the electric decoration substrate 850 smaller than the rotation trajectory of the wing member 854, only the visual recognition position of the light is positioned radially outward from the rotation trajectory of the wing member 854. Can be displaced. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect without increasing the manufacturing cost.

  81 and 82 will be described again. The decorative member 853 is a member formed of a light-impermeable resin material and fixed coaxially to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decoration member 853, so that an effect of changing the appearance of light between the inside and the outside of the decoration member 853 can be effectively performed.

  For example, by emitting blue light from the front side light emitting unit 852a and irradiating red light from the rear side light emitting unit 852b, an area that appears to emit blue light and an area that appears to emit red light are provided. Can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

  The wing-shaped member 854 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the center in the front-rear direction, and extends radially outward at equal circumferential intervals around the circular opening 854a. Blade portion 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at an intermediate position between adjacent blade portions 854b. And.

  The circular opening 854a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

  The wing member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is driven to rotate by the drive motor MT5. However, a detection sensor for detecting the attitude of the wing member 854 is not provided, and the drive motor MT5 The attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 is controlled by the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the position of the center of gravity coincide with each other, and minimizes idling after the drive motor MT5 is de-energized. Thus, the deviation between the attitude of the wing member 854 assumed by the driving time and the actual attitude of the wing member 854 can be reduced. Note that the driving motor MT5 may be configured by a stepping motor so that the attitude of the wing member 854 can be detected.

  The intermediary member 857 is formed so as to be able to fit into the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 849 of the circular member 847. Thereby, the intermediate member 857 can be rotatable around the cylindrical projection 849.

  The central design member 858 includes a central protruding portion 858a protruding in a columnar shape from the center portion to the back side, a radial protruding portion 858b protruding radially outward of the central protruding portion 858a, and a circular main body portion. And a design ridge 858c protruding upward from above.

  The central protruding portion 858a is a portion that is inserted through the cylindrical protruding portion 849 in a posture that allows the radial protruding portion 858b to enter the notch 849a. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by inserting the inserted fastening screw.

  In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design ridge portion 858c can be brought into contact with the wing member 854 to function to adjust the rotation mode of the wing member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design ridge portion 858c and the front surface of the wing member 854 are arranged close enough to be rubbed, the stop posture of the wing member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the resistance increase at the time of rubbing. Can be planned.

  Thereby, as a drive control mode of the wing-shaped member 854, a drive mode in which rotation is continued for a long time and a drive mode in which rotation of about one rotation is intermittently performed (irregular operation at the start of rotation is produced). Drive mode), the intermittent stop posture of the wing member 854 in the latter drive mode can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIGS. 79 and 80, the description will be continued. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to mesh with a two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The rack member 862 includes a rack member 862 and a falling-off preventing member 863 for preventing the rack member 862 from falling off from the vertical sliding member 820.

  The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a meshing with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion having a longer pitch circle radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. And a large-diameter pinion 861b, and the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

  The rack member 862 is formed to be long in the left and right directions, a gear portion 862 a formed as a rack gear meshable with the small-diameter pinion 861 a of the two-stage pinion 861, and a long side opposite to a position where the gear portion 862 a is formed. And a columnar projection 862b protruding in a columnar shape from the end to the front side.

  In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed of gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , The ratio with the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the lateral displacement of the rack member 862 to the lateral displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

  The columnar projection 862b is formed with an outer diameter that can be arranged inside the transmission guide 813 of the base member 810. The thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear end of the rack member 862 does not fall off when the columnar protrusion 862b is disposed on the transmission guide 813. The thickness is set such that the columnar projection 862b does not fall off the transmission guide portion 813 even if the columnar projection 862b is shifted toward the rear side until it comes into contact with the plate 814.

  Thus, when the falling-off prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state, the rack member 862 can be prevented from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813.

  In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth having the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 has a small diameter pinion 861a and a large diameter. The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

  Therefore, the displacement amount of the horizontal slide member 840 can be increased as compared with the displacement amount of the rack member 862. Accordingly, the lateral displacement width of the horizontal slide member 840 can be secured large while keeping the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, but the details will be described later.

  FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 are appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member formed of a resin material, and has a long main body portion 871 formed in a long curved shape and having one side opened, and the long main body portion 871. A support hole 872 that is formed in a circular shape at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 that is arranged close to the support hole 872 and is also formed in the same direction to allow electric wiring to be arranged. A plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open end of the elongated main body 871 and a resin mold for forming the claws 874 can be extracted. And a circular protruding portion 876 protruding from the vicinity of the other end in the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body 871 in a circular cross section in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872.

  The long main body portion 871 is a portion where the electric wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and has a narrow portion 871a with a reduced width at an intermediate portion. The electric wiring is arranged along the elongate direction of the elongate main body 871, and is guided to the outside from the other end in the elongate direction (the end opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed).

  The aperture portion 871a functions as a portion that gently sandwiches the electric wiring disposed on the open side of the long main body portion 871 to such an extent that no disconnection occurs and prevents the electric wiring from being displaced excessively. The diaphragm portion 871a can prevent the electric wiring arranged on the open side of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the diaphragm portion 871a.

  The support hole 872 is formed to have a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted, whereby the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

  The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when passing to the vertical slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the amount of displacement of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. Thereby, the load applied to the electric wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

  The claw portion 874 prevents the electric wiring arranged in a manner to be housed on the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from dropping from the long main body portion 871. In addition, a space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 having a minimum area, so that the electric wiring is opposite to the open side of the long main body portion 871. It can be prevented from coming out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in the present embodiment).

  The circular projecting portion 876 has an outer diameter and a projecting length that can be arranged in the guide concave portion 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 constitutes an internal path by preventing the wiring arm member 870 from dropping out of the guide concave portion 886, and by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881. A path forming member 882 fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape with one side opened, and is opened and closed to the rear side at a vertically separated position by fastening and fixing a prevention plate 881 to the open portion. A path that passes through the upper open portion 883 and the lower open portion 884 that is formed.

  That is, the path forming member 882 includes a wall 882a that protrudes to one side at the edge, and an upper opening 883 that forms an upper opening of the path by lacking the wall 882a, and a lower end of the path forming member 882. The lower opening portion 884 pierced in the wall portion 882a in such a size that the connector of the electric wiring can be inserted into the wall portion 882a, and from the wall portion 882a to the upper opening portion 883 in a range not overlapping the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extending portion 885 to be extended, a guide recess 886 recessed in a long groove shape in a range not overlapping with the extending portion 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a lower portion than the lower edge of the guide recess 886. And a columnar projecting portion 887 which is formed in a cylindrical shape on the side of the prevention plate 881 and into which a fastening screw inserted into the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

  On the back side of the path forming member 882, a space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be vertically displaced is formed, and the horizontal slide member 840 that is displaced in the left and right direction with the displacement has the wall portion 882a closest to the front side. At the position where it is disposed (position near the lower end of the displacement), it enters the rear side of the wall portion 882a (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  That is, the horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at the position near the lower end of the displacement, on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that forms the path through which the electric wiring is guided. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from abutting or rubbing against the horizontal slide member 840 while allowing the electric wiring and the horizontal slide member 840 to overlap in a front view.

  In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper open portion 883, and of the displacement of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement of the path of the wiring guide member 880 in the width direction is caused by the extension portion 885. And the prevention plate 881. Further, the length of the route of the wiring guide member 880 in the width direction is designed to be shorter than the sum of the lengths of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 in the width direction. Thus, in the assembled state, it is possible to restrict the circular projecting portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from dropping out of the guide concave portion 886.

  The lower opening 884 functions as a wiring hole through which electric wiring arranged to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 passes to the back side.

  The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connection recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. And

  The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion for limiting displacement of the electric wiring and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

With reference to FIGS. 86 to 89, a description will be given of a displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG.
FIGS. 86 to 89 illustrate a state in which the displacement rotation unit 800 changes state from the effect standby state to the effect upper end state in a time series.

  FIG. 86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). 87A is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87B is a displacement rotation unit 800 along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87A. 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 89A is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77. 9 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a displacement rotary unit 800 in LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb line in FIG. 89 (a).

  FIG. 86 shows an effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8 and the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the middle right end state and the production upper end state, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged in the middle right end state and the production upper end state. 89 shows a left end state on the way disposed at the left end of the displacement path, and FIG. 89 shows an effect upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800.

  In FIG. 86 (a), FIG. 87 (a), FIG. 88 (a) and FIG. 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide concave portion 886 and a cylindrical projection. The outer shape of the portion 887 is shown by imaginary lines, and the illustration of other shape portions is omitted, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized. In addition, by partially breaking the shape near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during vertical displacement.

  In FIG. 86 (b), FIG. 87 (b), FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 89 (b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the horizontal slide member 840 is It is illustrated by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 for the purpose of illustrating only the lateral displacement width.

  86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 due to the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electric wiring DK2 is guided from the lower open portion 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880 to the inside of the wiring guide member 880, and passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, and then to the wall 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided to the horizontal slide member 840 through the enclosed space, and the details of the displacement will be described later.

  The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured so that the vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocated vertically. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect standby state, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, since the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. That is, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine this.

  In the effect standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement trajectory of the horizontal slide member 840, it is possible to prevent the lateral displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 from being restricted to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced to the full left and right sides.

  From the effect standby state, the drive motor MT4 is drive-controlled in a direction to raise and displace the vertical slide member 820, and the state in which the detected plate portion 825a is disposed on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the middle right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Accordingly, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the middle right end state by the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

  In the middle right end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the ascending direction and the right direction from the effect standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is displaced only in the ascending direction, and the posture is maintained.

  That is, in the middle right end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical concave portion 886a of the guide concave portion 886, so that the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance in the front-rear direction between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rightward displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the middle right end state is executed without the posture change of the wiring arm member 870. You. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid collision between members due to a shift in displacement timing, which is likely to occur when the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are both displaced.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b) and FIG. 87 (b), the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820. In this displacement, the displacement direction is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but the displacement is performed in the left-right direction beyond the left-right width of the transmission guide portion 813.

  This is because the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862 a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 have teeth on the two-stage pinion 861. Are combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radii of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 to the displacement width of the horizontal slide member 864.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) to the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b is 9:16. The lateral slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction by the left-right width obtained by multiplying the change amount by the constant (that is, 16/9 = about 1.78).

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the left end state on the way, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced right and left outward as much as the effect standby state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where the horizontal slide member 840 overlaps with the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-back direction.

  In such an arrangement, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes as shown in FIG. That is, in the process from the middle right end state to the middle left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is connected to the connecting concave portion 886c formed on the back side of the front vertical concave portion of the guide concave portion 886. The distance between the support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction is reduced as compared to the effect standby state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Also, at the time of the downward displacement, the reverse is established (after the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 does not occur, the horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction).

  Thus, even if the displacement timing of the horizontal slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870 occur, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 collide.

  The wiring arm member 870 is disposed at the left end (outside end in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the displacement is only vertical displacement and a change in posture in the front-rear direction. That is, irrespective of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer end portions that are hardly noticed by the player, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 are guided. The electric wiring DK2 can be prevented from entering the field of view of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), in the period until the displacement rotation unit 800 reaches the effect upper end state, the circular projecting portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 (see FIG. 84) The guide recess 886 is disposed in a rear vertical recess 886b formed on the back side of the connection recess 886c, and a support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870, and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( 84 (see FIG. 84) is maintained in a minimum state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position by using the wiring arm member 870 configured to be able to change the posture in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820. With such a configuration, there is an advantageous effect that a space for disposing the constituent members can be secured.

  For example, in the case where the electric wiring DK2 is disposed at a position closer to the rear, the lateral displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is limited. More specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the effect standby state is set to the right (left and right inner). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is disposed at a position closer to the right (right and left inner side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the displacement rotation unit 800 is downsized to avoid contact. May need to be dealt with. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

  Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is disposed at a position closer to the front, the lateral displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be sufficiently ensured, while the game board 13 disposed on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the device decreases.

  In the present embodiment, since the displacement rotation units 800 are arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric accessory 640 a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640 provided particularly in the right area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid or the like is likely to be low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the electric wiring DK2 so that the electric wiring DK2 can be displaced in the front-rear direction by the wiring arm member 870, it is possible to prevent the horizontal slide member 840 from being restricted in the left-right direction while playing the game. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom of arrangement of the constituent members on the back side of the board 13.

  That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is to be retracted to the left and right outer sides, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed on the front side, so that the electric wiring DK2 is disposed on the front side of the horizontal slide member 840. Is prevented from being limited by the electric wiring DK2.

  In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced left and right inward, and in the upper position where the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is to be arranged, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged on the rear side, so that the electric wiring DK2 is located near the back, leaving a space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging members arranged on the game board 13 as a configuration of a solenoid or the like for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

  A state change of the electric wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. Here, the state change of the electric wiring DK2 means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in a state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

  In the electric wiring DK2, the upper part (the side close to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding part DK2b extends up and down only and is not preferably curved. In particular, at the time of the downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 into the front side of the columnar projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86 (a)), so the rigidity is lower than that of the lower winding portion DK2b. Is preferably higher.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a resin-made cable tube is wound around the upper part of the lower winding part DK2b so that the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the part where the winding is displaced.

  In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the cable tube is disposed between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2, thereby avoiding abrasion between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. I have.

  Further, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to be directed vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of the downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from undergoing unnecessary bending deformation.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electric wiring DK2 is disposed so that the upper winding part DK2a is wound around the cylindrical projection 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal sliding member 840, and The winding portion DK2b is arranged so as to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 below the wiring arm member 870.

  The upper winding part DK2a of the electric wiring DK2, which is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823, can be displaced in a manner to expand and contract in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. It is composed of

  Of the electric wiring DK2, the lower winding part DK2b arranged to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 is displaced in a manner to expand and contract in the radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar projecting portion 887. It is configured to be possible.

  That is, the plane where the displacement of the electric wiring DK2 between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 occurs is different from the plane where the displacement of the electric wiring DK2 occurs below the wiring arm member 870. In the present embodiment, the planes are orthogonal to each other, and the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 is the first omitted part 824a, the second omitted part 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

  The electric wiring DK2 is suppressed from being displaced by the portion arranged inside the long main body part 871 of the wiring arm member 870 being sandwiched by the throttle part 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of electric wiring DK2 with respect to wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electrical wiring DK2 in accordance with the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be independently completed in each of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b. Therefore, they will be separately described below.

  First, the displacement of the upper winding part DK2a will be described. The upper winding part DK2a includes a part that is wound counterclockwise centered on the columnar projection 823 from the point passing right through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870, and the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

  The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the columnar protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, so that the effect is in the effect standby state that spreads out most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)). In, the wall portion 822 is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged at no load (or at a position where a slight gap is left). Thereby, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 822 in the effect standby state can be reduced.

  When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pulled, and the radially inward centered on the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the extra length caused by the displacement of the upper winding part DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the left, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left, so that the upper winding part DK2a is pushed, and the upper winding part DK2a is radially outwardly centered on the cylindrical protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, a guide piece 844a that is inclined downward toward the left from the left end of the wiring guide member 844 is provided so as to protrude, so that the upper winding part DK2a is outward (the vertical slide member 820, the wiring guide member 844, The upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 822.

  Next, the displacement of the lower winding part DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise around a cylindrical projecting portion 887 from the point that hangs downward from the wiring arm member 870 in a left side view (a direction viewed from the left and right outer sides) (the cylindrical projecting portion 887). (The part that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rotation direction) up to a position where the lower opening 884 (see FIG. 85) is disposed.

  The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as a limit. In), the wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. Thereby, the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall portion 882a in the effect standby state can be reduced.

  When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upwardly due to the vertical slide member 820 being displaced upward from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, so that the lower winding part DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the extra length generated by the displacement of the lower winding part DK2b radially inward centering on the columnar projecting portion 887. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side disposed on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed, and the wiring member 870 is displaced downward in the radial direction with the cylindrical projecting portion 887 as the center. The side winding part DK2b is displaced. At this time, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is located between the cylindrical projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (the cylindrical portion). The lower winding part DK2b can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall part 882a.

  In the present embodiment, the space in which the lower winding part DK2b is arranged is arranged below the lower end position of the displacement range of the horizontal slide member 840. This can prevent the size of the space in which the lower winding part DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being limited by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840, so that the lower winding part DK2b can be attached to the rear case 510 (FIG. 5). (See FIG. 2) can be displaced by using the front-to-back width to the full.

  Therefore, a large space for accommodating the lower winding part DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, so that the length of the lower winding part DK2b can be made sufficiently long and the wiring arm member 870 The allowable vertical displacement can be lengthened.

  FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 provided on the front side of a window 60 a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of flow frames whose front sides are opened from the resin member. And a spherical falling unit 150 formed in a road shape and disposed at a lower portion on the back side of the base plate 60.

  The ball falling unit 150 is formed to be able to receive a ball that has flowed down the lower end LB1 of the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 near the upper end of the fixed plate portion 151 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. A first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving member which is a long box-shaped member having an open front side and which is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 151 from the rear side in such a manner as to be connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151. It has a flow path member 153 and a plurality of protrusions 154 projecting inward from the inner portions of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the sphere.

  The plurality of ridges 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right sides at intervals of about the diameter of the sphere for each of the left and right walls. Thus, the flow of the ball flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 can be reduced.

  The functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be described. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have a function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 to a ball discharging path (not shown), and also have a function of entering the second winning port 640. There is a function to improve the effect by making the later game ball visible to the player. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

  In the second winning opening 640, a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a ball is provided near the lower edge shown in FIG. Thereby, the payout of the prize balls and the hold display on the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately executed, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easier to notice a situation in which a payout is not performed due to a problem on the gaming machine store side.

  Note that, as described below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. The timing of paying out the prize balls or the timing of displaying the hold may be delayed.

  The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is an intermediate flow path LM1 (see FIG. 7) that is disposed inside the left and right direction of the guide route DL1 through which the ball that has deviated from the second winning port 640 flows downward and in a front view. 27).

  The intermediate flow path LM1, like the guide flow path DL1, is formed so as to be able to guide vertically downward while displacing the sphere zigzag left and right. That is, the sphere flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the sphere flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to flow in the same manner, so that the sphere in the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during the right-handed game. , It is difficult to determine whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

  Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down at the time of the right-handed game is information directly connected to the profit of the player, and information of a nail (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60 is provided. This is a part where individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 occur according to the state.

  In the present embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or before the ball enters the second winning opening 640. Since a nail that the ball collides with is planted, whether the ball easily flows down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during a right-handed game is determined for each pachinko machine 10. different.

  The ball that has not entered the second winning opening 640 during the probable change or the time reduction during which the right-handed game is performed flows down the guide route DL1 and unless the ball enters the general winning opening 63 arranged downstream thereof. It is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (is a useless ball).

  From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond. The degree of freedom of the position of interest is higher in the case of paying attention to the guide route DL1 than in the case of paying attention only to the second winning opening 640 because the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It is clear.

  Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency of the ball flowing down the guide route DL1 is checked, and the frequency of the ball entering the second winning port 640, the frequency of the useless ball in the right-handed game, and the like are calculated. It is expected to consider whether or not to continue the game in consideration of.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing down the guide route DL1 and a ball flowing into the second winning port 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. As a result, it is possible to make it seem as if the frequency of ball entry into the second winning opening 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage continuation of the game.

  On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning opening 640 and has been ejected from the game area, so it flows downward vertically as it is, and the specific winning opening 65a in front view. If it flows down to a position that overlaps with, it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a, and there is a possibility that the game may be hindered.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the ball is caused to flow down to the left and right inside by the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, so that the ball reaches the position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in front view. (See FIG. 2). Accordingly, it is possible to easily distinguish a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a from a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

  The first receiving channel 152 extends from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in front view, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in front view, and extends through the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side of. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving channel 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, it is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a player who is not paying attention to the right-handed path can be made to recognize whether or not there is a ball in the second winning opening 640.

  This allows the player to recognize the presence or absence of a ball in the second winning opening 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the user looks away from the third symbol display device 81 for viewing the second winning opening 640, an important display is executed, and a situation in which the player misses the display can be avoided, and a comfortable game can be prevented. Can be provided.

  The sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows downward and obliquely to the left on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridge 154, the staying time of the flowing ball can be extended. This makes it easier to increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area in front view.

  Further, by securing a long left and right width of the flow path of the ball, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 easily intersects with the flow path of the second receiving channel member 153. Thereby, the ball flowing down inside the second receiving channel member 153 can easily enter the field of view of the player.

  92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate rendering means 160, and the decoration means 170. FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate rendering means 160, and the decoration means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate rendering means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the rear side, and is configured to be able to contact the front side and the upper side of the light guide plate 161. An upper support member 162 formed of an impermeable resin material and positioning the light guide plate 161 and a center frame 86 formed of a light transmissive resin material and pressing a lower portion of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 configured to be fastened and fixed, a spherical flow path constituent member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and that is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and that forms a spherical flow path; A plurality of left and right support members 165 which are formed of the above resin material and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner as to press the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 from the back side, A horizontal board unit 166 that is fixed to the center frame 86 in a state where the center board 86 is formed in a state in which the center frame 86 extends upward to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the upper support member 162. A vertical board unit 167 which is arranged along the left inner wall of the center frame 86 from the front side and fastened and fixed.

  The decoration means 170 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material and arranged at the center of the upper part of the center frame 86 in the left and right directions, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 formed of a light-transmissive resin material. And a second decorative member 174 disposed on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86, and a front side of the right frame portion of the center frame 86 on the right side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light transmitting resin material. And a third decorative member 177 to be arranged.

  The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 configured to be fastened and fixed to a central portion thereof, a blank member 173 configured as a separate member as a blank portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10, Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a horizontally long groove 171a formed in the back side thereof. The horizontally long groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width in which the illuminated substrate of the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 can be arranged.

  The first decorative member 171 is disposed at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction on the upper portion of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, inside the center frame 86, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the part 86a. Therefore, the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state can be visually recognized by the player without being shielded by the light guide plate 161.

  With reference to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontal substrate unit 166 will be described. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. In FIG. 96, the vicinity of the horizontally long groove 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. In the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, light-emitting means 166a such as LEDs are disposed on the front and back sides of the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is emitted vertically along arrows D1a and D1b. On the back side of the first decorative member 171, the light that has reached the reflective shape portion 171 b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171 a can be clearly recognized.

  Thus, even in a state where the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal substrate unit 166, the light emitting effect mode (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depending on the formation range or the formation shape of the reflection shape part 171b. Can be viewed differently.

  In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface where the LEDs are arranged on the upper surface. It is arranged in two horizontal rows: a row corresponding to the top and bottom, and a row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Of the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the upper row and the lower row are arranged inside the horizontal groove 171a, and the rear row is arranged outside the horizontal groove 171a.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light to the reflection shape portion 171b with the LEDs arranged in the upper row and the front row of the lower face, and to use the LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower face as another emission target. Light can be applied.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161 and the emitted LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166 b such as an LED arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to light the light guide plate 161.

  The upper support member 162 is disposed between the front and rear two rows of the LEDs disposed on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166. Thus, light emitted from the front and rear two rows of LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

  The horizontal substrate unit 166 is disposed immediately above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in front view. This makes it possible to clearly separate the light emitted to the display area side and the light emitted to the game area side without being emitted to the display area side.

  The central decorative member 172 is disposed at the same front and rear position as the reflection shape portion 171b, while the front and rear surfaces are formed as flat surfaces. Accordingly, even when light is emitted from the horizontal substrate unit 166, it is possible to avoid strong light reflection, and maintain visibility.

  In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decoration member 172, and the type of performance (for example, the type of specification, so-called another specification) of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by the number of the star shape. It is configured to be able to. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, in the case of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 having different types of performance, the pachinko machine 10 is replaced by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

  The blank member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and has a shape different from the shape formed on the reflection shape portion 171 b (in the present embodiment, a striped groove) as the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate. ) Is formed so that the appearance of reflected light is different from that of the reflection shape portion 171b.

  FIG. 97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is irradiated in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that has reached the reflective shape portion 171b travels to the front side by reflection or refraction, and is shimmered. The light that has reached the margin member 173 while being viewed faintly is not reflected mainly, but is mostly transmitted and proceeds as it is.

  This allows the shape of the margin member 173 to be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal substrate unit 166 travels in the up-down direction. It can be visually recognized as if it were. In other words, it can be visually recognized as if a light emitting effect is being performed by arranging LEDs on the back side.

  The second decoration member 174 includes a shielding member 175 in which a thin plate member (sheet-like member) with low transparency is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decoration member 174. . Thereby, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be hard to visually recognize.

  Thereby, the game area (particularly the left side) formed on the front side of the base plate 60, and the formation area of the light guide plate 161 in front view (including the area overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81 before and after). Can be clearly divided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

  The third decorative member 177 has a three-dimensional structure in which a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns are formed three-dimensionally on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal shaped parts arranged to be displaced back and forth are combined on the back side. A plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 are formed.

  The three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material similarly to the third decorative member 177, and is disposed in a space disposed between the light guide plate 161 disposed portion of the center frame 86 and the guide path DL1. You.

  Thus, it is possible to execute not a light effect visually recognized in a plane but a three-dimensional light effect between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide route DL1. That is, it is possible to execute a light emission effect having a depth in a front view.

  For example, when light is applied to the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from the rear side, which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front-rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in front view is irradiated. Brightness changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, the front-side light emitting unit 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the back side. The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, the number of types of light effects can be easily increased as compared with the case where light is emitted from a light emitting unit such as an LED that is fixedly arranged to the three-dimensional decoration member 178.

  Further, for example, when light is irradiated to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the left or right direction or the up and down direction, the position in the front-rear direction of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in front view is irradiated. Which position becomes brighter changes. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated.

  In the present embodiment, the first light irradiating device 330 of the launch effect unit 300 is assumed as a means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). The first light irradiating device 330 functions to block at least a part of the light directed to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the light radiated from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 due to its arrangement.

  Thereby, the degree of the form of the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depending on the display effect form of the third symbol display device 81 can be suppressed. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game via the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is performed. It is possible to easily avoid that the color of light visually recognized by the user becomes purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is configured to be visible in front view, and the entire sphere is configured to flow down the same path. However, the ball flow-down unit according to the second embodiment is described. At 2150, the flowing sphere is configured to flow down any of the plurality of paths. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 illustrates an example of the appearance of the granular member 320 immediately after firing. As shown in FIG. 98, the spherical falling unit 2150 is different from the spherical falling unit 150 described in the first embodiment in that the spherical falling unit 2150 is formed to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 to the left. And a third receiving channel 2155 having a size that allows a ball to flow down.

  The third receiving flow channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side, is set to have a smaller inclination angle than the first receiving flow channel 152, and has a lower end (left end) set to the left side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, and an inclined portion 2155 a. And a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a in front view.

  The falling velocity of the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is lower than the flowing velocity of the sphere in the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallowness of the inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the arrangement of the inclined portion 2155a is near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in front view. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be brought into the player's view for a long time.

  Thus, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to enter the field of view of the player playing the game while visually checking the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, the attention to the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without discomfort.

  The guiding of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the second winning port 640 similarly flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, and flows along the second receiving channel member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152. The switching unit switches between flowing down in the first direction D21 flowing down and flowing down in the second direction D22 flowing down along the third receiving flow path 2155.

  In the present embodiment, the flow resistance of the sphere flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the ridge 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153. Therefore, when the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, that ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

  Such a situation is likely to occur when a plurality of balls continuously enter in a short period of time, for example, when a plurality of balls consecutively enter the second winning opening 640. Therefore, by visually recognizing the situation in which the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can grasp that a plurality of balls have consecutively entered the second winning port 640.

  The mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, an opening / closing plate configured to be switchable between a state in which the ball is allowed to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state in which the ball is allowed to flow down by using driving means such as a solenoid is disposed in the ball downflow unit 2150. Alternatively, an electromagnet disposed so as to be able to generate a magnetic force at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22 is provided, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the ball to flow down. The route may be switched.

  According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the flow path of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to stop the ball or make the ball return. Unlike the ball that flows down the game area, changing the flow path of the ball that has entered the second winning port 640 does not affect the subsequent game results, and therefore the ball using the magnetic force as described above. Can be switched.

  As described above, when switching the flow path of a sphere with an apparatus using electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) controls whether the sphere flows in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22. it can. Therefore, it is possible to associate the result of the lottery by the ball entering the second winning opening 640 with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22.

  For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 at 60% of the case where the lottery by the ball entering the second winning port 640 is a big hit, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the jackpot of the player who has visually recognized that the ball is flowing down 2155.

  In this case, the line of sight of the player is most easily collected at the lower end position of the first receiving flow path 152 serving as a guide path to the third receiving flow path 2155, and as a result, the discharge sphere flowing down the ball flowing down unit 2150 (game Attention to the ball already ejected from the area) can be improved.

  As described above, the flow of the ball down the third receiving channel 2155 may be caused by a high frequency of ball entry into the second winning port 640 or an expected value of a jackpot in a lottery by entering the ball into the second winning port 640. Is high.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and the control is performed so that the granular member 320 is fired when the passage of the sphere is determined. .

  As described above, in order to fire the granular member 320, it is necessary to previously change the state of the injection device 400 from the effect standby state (see FIG. 38) to the firing standby state (FIG. 40). take time. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes some time until the ball reaches the discharge unit 2155b from there. The injection device 400 is controlled so as to change its state using the falling time.

  Accordingly, it is possible to perform control such that the granular member 320 is fired at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this manner, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay that is expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after entering the second winning port 640. As compared with the case where the control is performed in the above-described manner, it is possible to easily match the falling timing of the ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320.

  For example, the flow rate of the ball may decrease due to the oil adhering to the ball adhering to the first receiving channel 152. In this case, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay. With such control, the firing of the granular member 320 is performed before the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155, and the effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, at the same time that the detection sensor SC <b> 21 determines that the ball has passed, the control is performed so that the granular member 320 is fired, so that the player can wait until the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, the effect of a series of effects is improved, in which a powerful effect that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161 by firing the granular member 320 is executed. it can.

  Note that the arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the ball flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially viewed from the front. , The above-described series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his / her gaze.

  Control that does not fire the granular member 320 when a sphere passes through the detection sensor SC21 may be combined. For example, if a large hit occurs in the case where the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, control may be performed so that the possibility of the above-described probability variation big hit increases.

  In this case, the type of effect after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 can be increased, so that the player with respect to the third receiving channel 2155 at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. Can be prevented from losing attention.

  In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, the attention to the subsequent display effect on the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Note that a detection sensor having a function similar to the function of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, it may be arranged at a place where a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. In this case, the effect of firing the granular member 320 can be executed at the timing of the passage of the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the benefit given to the player by passing the game ball becomes more advantageous.

  A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is configured to be displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrical and discrete, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment. In the radial displacement, a section that is not symmetrical in the left-right direction can be formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is a front view of a scaling unit 3600 according to the third embodiment. It should be noted that the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 is different from the first embodiment only in the rendering member 3700, and the configurations of the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 are common. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 99 illustrates a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the rendering member 3700 is arranged at an intermediate position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement / reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, the use of five shielding design members 760 is the same as in the first embodiment, but, of the shielding design members 760, two lower and one upper left While the sheets are radially enlarged and displaced at the same length, one upper sheet and one upper right sheet are still in the collective arrangement state (not radially displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotating plate 3730. The rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as the rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some of the guide holes 733 are changed to different guide holes 3733.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the rotating plate 730 includes another guide hole 3733 instead of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 in a front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-described small-diameter arc portion 733a, the large-diameter arc portion 733b, and the adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

  The adjustment connection portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connection portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to a position near the intermediate position, and is provided on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 or the clockwise adjacently provided guide hole 733). At a position close to the separate guide hole 3733), it is formed so as to suddenly approach toward the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a.

  That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c is radially enlarged and displaced from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c The expansion / contraction member 740 guided in the radial direction does not generate radially enlarged displacement while being guided in the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be shifted. The operation caused by the dislocation of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 99, by arranging the shielding design member 760 horizontally asymmetrically, the position of the center of gravity of the rendering member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the horizontal direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position is still in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the rendering member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position by that much.

  As a result, a load in the direction for correcting the displacement of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, is generated on the effect member 3700 by its own weight. By this load, it is possible to cause the rendering member 3700 to change its posture in the rotational direction about the longitudinal axis, so that the shielding design member 760 is moved in the radial direction around the rotating axis of the rendering member 3700, and in the rotational direction. Can be displaced in the direction in which.

  Accordingly, directions not intended only from the shapes of the functional plate portion 720 (see FIG. 55), the rotating plate 3730, and the telescopic displacement member 740 (see FIG. 59), which are members for displacing the shielding design member 760 (that is, the direction). , The rotational design direction).

  In the present embodiment, only the connection portion 733c and the adjustment connection portion 3733c are different, and the other portions have the same shape of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same for the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

  Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in the collective arrangement state, or is disposed at the radially enlarged displacement end position, so that the shielding design member 760 is left and right. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and the vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. Accordingly, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained in a shifted state, and occurrence of a failure can be prevented.

  An effect example using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed simultaneously but individually performed. However, the purpose is to avoid collision with another configuration. .

  In the present embodiment, the device is controlled so that the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the rendering member 3700 can be simultaneously executed after adopting a device for avoiding a collision with another configuration. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to radially expand and displace the shielding design member 760 while lowering the rendering member 3700.

  In this case, in addition to the descending displacement of the rendering member 3700 and the radially expanding displacement of the shielding design member 760, the return of the center of gravity G31 of the rendering member 3700 occurs. It is possible to cause a change in posture in a direction opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise in front view) assumed from the state.

  As described above, since the rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be added to the radially expanded displacement of the rendering member 3700, a simple configuration specialized in radially expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760. , And as a result, a complicated movement can be obtained in which displacement in the rotation direction is added. Thereby, the effect by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

  The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described, but in the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480, is completed prior to the displacement of the translation member 410. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a time-based change in the arrangement of the setting portion 432 and the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  Note that FIG. 101 does not show the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement change of each configuration, but shows a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the translation member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, the downward displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side, so that the player is not obstructed by the lid member 480, The displacement of the granular member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIGS. 12A and 38).

  In this situation, the linear member 410 is reciprocated between the angle of 66 degrees and the angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, so that the granular member 320 can be vibrated (finely displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, since the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

  Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the translation member 410 can reciprocate. Accordingly, it is not necessary to switch the driving direction of the driving motor MT1, so that control can be facilitated.

  Further, in such a mode in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (smallly displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) applied to the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. Can be.

  The mode in which the collision member 420 is displaced to vibrate (finely displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, it is preferable that the other vibration device is disposed below the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent another vibration device from receiving a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

  A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the normal rotation direction from the effect standby state, but in the fifth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 accompanying rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a time-based change in the arrangement of the setting portion 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 102, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement change of each configuration is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the translation member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is fired, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see the vicinity of the angle 290 degrees).

  Therefore, at least a part of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although it is conceivable that the granular member 320 may impede the rotation of the lid member 480 by colliding with the lid member 480, in the present embodiment, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotation shaft side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to inhibit the rotation of the lid member 480.

  If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven in the normal rotation direction while the granular member 320 rests on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retreating side (the smaller diameter side in FIG. 102), so that the granular member 320 collides. It falls on member 420.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the translation member 410 is released, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the translation member 410. .

  Further, when the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if the speed is set to a high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

  In this case, at the time of firing, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the approach side, the emission of the granular member 320 is hindered at the center in the left and right where the overhang portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left and right direction is performed. You can make them visible as if they were the Lord.

  That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is launched can be changed between the firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated forward and the firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated reversely. Thereby, a variation can be given to the firing direction of the granular member 320, and the production effect can be improved.

  The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 or the second light irradiation device 340 includes a flat substrate and irradiates light in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction has been described. An illumination board on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are bent is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launch unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is not illustrated. The directions of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the first light irradiation device 6330 includes, in addition to the electric decoration substrate 332, a front end near the front end of the electric decoration substrate 332, and a back end near the electric decoration substrate 332. A second illumination board 6334 is provided to be inclined away from the 332.

  The second illuminated substrate 6334 includes a light emitting unit such as an LED arranged so as to be able to emit light from at least the front side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct light to the partition member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of illuminating the granular member 320 scattered in the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310.

  The second light irradiating device 6340 includes, in addition to the illuminated substrate 342, a rear-side end near the rear-side end of the illuminated substrate 342, and a front-side end is inclined and separated from the illuminated substrate 342. A second illuminated substrate 6344 to be provided.

  The second illuminated substrate 6344 includes a light emitting unit such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the rear side surface. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct light to the effecting member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, and the effect of the light emitting effect can be improved.

  The arrangement of the illuminated substrate is not limited to this. For example, only the second illuminated substrates 6334 and 6344 may be employed, and the illuminated substrates 332 and 342 may be omitted, or another combination may be employed. In addition, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second electric decoration substrates 6334 and 6344, or light may be emitted from both sides.

  For the purpose of obliquely irradiating the light, a device capable of changing the attitude of the light emitting means may be configured without using a method of increasing the number of the illuminated substrates. Further, a light emitting means may be arranged at the intersection of the illuminated substrates 332, 342 and the second illuminated substrates 6334, 6344 so that light irradiation is possible.

  A substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the schematic configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. 107A is a front view of the board box A100, and FIG. 107B is a side view of the board box A100.

  Note that arrows F and B, arrows L and R, and arrows U and D in FIGS. 105 to 107 indicate the front-back direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the board box A100, respectively. The same applies to the following drawings, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The pachinko machine A10 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and a non-openable connection between the box cover A200 and the box base A300 (the caulking structure). The main control device is provided with a sealing unit A400 to be connected by the sealing unit A400, and a sub cover A500 provided at an end of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 opposite to the sealing unit A400 connected by the sealing unit A400. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

  The rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is an axis for rotatably supporting the substrate box A100 on the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is a short direction (arrows U and D) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200). Direction) and is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (the directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200).

  The rotation axis A410 is located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) (the side opposite to the first connection wall part A220 with the covering part A270 to be described later) in front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). (R direction side). In addition, the rotation axis A410 may be provided on the other longitudinal direction side (the arrow L direction side) opposite to one longitudinal direction side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  In the main control device A110, a switch device A120 and a key device A130 are provided (mounted). The main control device A110 is configured such that a switch device A120 and a key device A130 are further provided (mounted) on the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same other configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other description is omitted.

  The switch device A120 is operated (turned on) when the operation unit A122 is pushed from the initial position, and is turned off when the depression is released (the operation unit A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A110 (main control device 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (a change in the pressing force) when the operation unit A122 is pressed to the operation position (the position where the switch device is turned on), and the main control is performed based on the click feeling. The operator can detect the completion of the input to the device A110.
Therefore, this is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

  In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed at an initial position (hereinafter, referred to as an "off position"), and the inserted key A140 is rotated (right-rotated in the present embodiment) at the off position to a predetermined position (hereinafter, "on"). Key A140 is turned (turned to the left in this embodiment) by being placed at the position (referred to as "position"), and turned off by being placed at the off position and the key A140 is switched off (mode). Switch).

  In the present embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the off position, while the key A140 cannot be removed at the on position.

  Further, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A130. For example, in the present embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) for initializing the main control device A110 (performing RAM erasure), In a state in which A130 is turned on, a mode in which the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter, referred to as “setting change”), as described later, is exemplified. .

  Here, as described above, since the board box A100 (the box cover A200 and the box base A300) is connected so as not to be opened, it is necessary to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130). Requires opening the board box A100, which is troublesome.

  On the other hand, according to the board box A100 in the present embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is not necessary to open the board box A100, and the labor can be reduced. Details will be described later.

  Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation unit A122, the inserting direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into holes opened in the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from the front side, and the portions projecting to the rear side are soldered. A130 is provided on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  In this case, an external force is applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (for example, a force for displacing the operation unit A122 and the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (insertion direction), and a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R). When a force in a parallel direction is applied and the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is tilted, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 have one leg (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). While a tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). For this reason, the legs A121 and A131 may be broken or bent, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may be peeled off, possibly leading to disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, means for solving such a problem is adopted in the board box A100. Details will be described later.

  Main controller 100 includes a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of seven-segment displays (not shown), and such seven-segment displays are mounted on printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display on the seven-segment display via the box cover A200.

  Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

  First, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the ON position, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed down to the operation position while the pachinko machine A10 is pressed. Turn on the power. Thus, the setting is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting is changed each time the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

  In the present embodiment, first to sixth six values are defined as set values, and these values are circulated (for example, the set value is changed from the first value to the first value by pressing down the operation unit A122). 6, the setting value advances to the first value when the operation unit A122 is pressed down from the state set to the sixth value.)

  The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed down (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device is displayed. The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In the present embodiment, the set values are also displayed on the 7-segment display.

  The information on the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the set value, and may include other information. As other information, a current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), a previous setting value, and the like are exemplified. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, the amount of information that can be displayed can be secured (increased) as compared with, for example, the case of using a seven-segment display. As a result, the operation state can be easily grasped, and operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed. In addition, by using the device for displaying information related to the game (the third symbol display device 81), the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The display of the set value may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 and the seven-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the seven-segment display device may not be displayed.

  After changing the desired setting value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the off position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (set values are determined). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, and upon detection of the off-edge, power recovery processing is executed, and the normal mode with the set (changed) set value is started.

  After changing the desired set value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without disposing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 at the off position (that is, while maintaining the key A140 at the on position). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 in a state where the key A140 of the key device A130 is located at the off position, the normal mode with the set (changed) set value is also started.

  In the setting change mode, the RAM is erased. Such RAM erasure is determined when the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is located at the off position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include a timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, and a timing when the key A140 is located at the off position. That is, the timing at which the RAM is erased can be set as appropriate.

  Also, during the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the setting value can be changed by pushing the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not arranged at the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off while the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is removed from the key device A130. If the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on in a state where the pachinko machine A10 is placed in the off position, the start in the normal mode is not performed, an error state is set, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display simultaneously with or instead of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the confirmation of the set values set in the setting change mode is performed by first turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10, disposing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 at the ON position, and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. As a result, a setting confirmation mode for confirming the set value is activated, and the set value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

  The display of the set value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the seven-segment display device may not be displayed.

  In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is located at the off position. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode is ended. Further, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, the power recovery process is executed upon the detection, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is started.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, and the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on with the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 being in the off position. The normal mode with the set value is started.

  In the present embodiment, when the change of the set value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined mode. As the predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, “7”) is blinked at fixed time intervals is exemplified.

  In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side so that 4-digit display is possible, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, “01” in the setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, “02” is displayed, respectively, and the set value is displayed in the last two digits (two) (for example, the first value is “01”, and the second value is “ 02 ",... And the sixth value" 06 "are displayed).

  Next, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) of the board box A100 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXa in FIG. FIG. 110 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 has a front wall portion A201 formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape in a front view, and four sides of the front wall portion A201 from the back side (in the direction of arrow B). And wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, and left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) which are erected and formed in a plate shape. In the form of a box, the back side of which is open by the walls A201 to A205. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  Two steps are formed on the standing front end surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The first step (first step) is formed on the inner space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the second step is formed on the outer side (opposite to the inner space) of the first surface. A surface (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height from the front wall A201 is smaller), and the surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter, “seat surface A206”). ).

  The seating surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view in which the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. At four corners of the seating surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected to each other), a fastening hole A206a in which an internal thread is threaded is formed in the inner periphery. Is done.

  Therefore, main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) has an outer edge side of its front surface in contact with seat surface A206, and screw ASC (FIG. 1) inserted into insertion hole A112 of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119). 117 (b) and FIG. 118 (b)) are screwed into the fastening holes A206a, so that they are fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and to the board box A100. Is stored.

  A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engagement piece A207 extends from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 to the rear side (arrow B direction) and extends in one direction (arrow R direction) from the standing end of the base portion. It is formed into a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300 as described later.

  The front wall portion A201 is formed with a part that is recessed toward the back side (the direction of arrow B) on a part thereof. The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall portion A210 that is located rearward of the front wall portion A201 (toward the main control device 110), and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is formed by a front wall portion. The front wall portion A201 is formed by plate-shaped walls (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

  That is, the front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the board box A100 is located on the first area formed by the front wall part A201 and on the side closer to the main control device A110 than the first area. And the second region formed by the wall portion A210.

  The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms an operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and is a substantially rectangular rectangle in front view (a length in the arrow L and R directions with respect to a length dimension in the arrow U and D directions). It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimension is elongated, and is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

  The operation wall portion A210 is disposed on one side (on the rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) with respect to the longitudinal center of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

  The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side on one side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow L direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 to the front wall portion A201, and from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to be inclined (downward inclined) in a direction approaching main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, a space connected to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall part A210 can be formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall part A220. As a space combining the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210, the entire space (a space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be enlarged.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both the expansion of the space on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and the securing of the space inside the substrate box A100.

  The second connecting wall portion A230 has one side on one side in the short direction (arrow U direction side) of the operating wall portion A210, and the third connecting wall portion A240 has another side in the longitudinal direction of the operating wall portion A210 (arrow R). (Direction side) are walls connected to the front wall portion A201, respectively, and are disposed in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

  The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and a main control device A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to enable connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

  The opening A250 has a shape in front view corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (in this embodiment, substantially square in front view), and is substantially the same as the operation wall portion A210 in the longitudinal direction (the directions of the arrows L and R). It is arranged in the center. A guide wall A251 is erected around the opening A250 from the front (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation unit A122 in the pushing direction (the direction of the arrow B) and the displacement in the direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). It is a portion for regulating (falling), and is formed in a substantially square frame shape in a front view surrounding the opening A250, and its inner peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

  In the present embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the height of the operation wall A210 from the tip of the operation unit A122 pushed to the operation position (the position to be turned on). The dimension is set such that the tip is at a lower position (the tip of the operation portion A122 projects outward (toward the arrow F side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the pushing operation of the operation unit A122 from being hindered by the guide wall A251, and to improve the operability of the operation unit A122.

  However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is higher than the front end of the operation portion A122 pushed into the operation position (the position where the guide wall A251 is turned on). It may be set to a position (the tip of the operation part A122 is immersed inward (in the direction of the arrow B) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation unit A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) into the operation position due to careless operation of the operator or contact (interference) with other members.

  Further, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is set such that the tip of the operation portion A122 pushed into the operation position (the position where the guide wall A251 is turned on) is substantially the same as the standing end from the operation wall portion A210. The dimensions may be set at the same height position. When the operation unit A122 is pushed in, the finger touches the standing end of the guide wall A251, so that the worker can recognize that the operation unit A122 has been pushed to the operation position based on the contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

  A cover portion A270 protrudes from the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112 (a)), and is formed upright from the operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape. Part A271 and a plate-like end wall part A272 that closes (forms an end surface) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall part A271, and a part of the key device A130 on the distal end side is housed in the internal space. You.

  The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions protruding radially outward from two opposing portions (positions having phases different by approximately 180 degrees) of the base portion A271a. A section 271b. The entire peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protruding portion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (the directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same cross-sectional shape as the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protruding portion A271b) (that is, a shape in which two opposing portions of the circle are projected radially outward). (See FIG. 110 (b)).

  The opening A260 is formed in the projecting distal end surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end wall portion A272. Thus, the end wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. In other words, the end wall portion A272 is formed as a plate (cantilever) having a base end fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) free.

  Here, the opening A260 is provided only in an area (an area necessary for allowing the displacement) corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is formed. More specifically, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (on the side opposite to one side) is formed in a shape in which the phases are approximately 180 degrees different from each other and coupled.

  As a result, an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding distal end of the peripheral wall portion A271 and formed substantially in an annular shape when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow B) is formed on the end surface wall portion A272. Then, a square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and formed in a substantially triangular shape as viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) is formed. The square portion A272b is disposed in a position that tapers inward in the radial direction when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), and is formed at two positions that differ in phase by approximately 180 degrees.

  Note that the key A140 has a size in which the radius of rotation of a portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of rotation of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation are different. Therefore, the opening A260 is an opening having a size (radius) different from the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 protrude from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. The first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are ridges extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

  Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 at the off position, and One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge portion of the key A140 at the ON position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions where the phases are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees.

  In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on an extension of the other end). Are respectively formed. The display unit is a part that indicates information on the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and displays “OFF” and “ON”. That is, the key A140 having the edge directed to one end of the first ridge A211 is disposed at the off position (see FIG. 115A), and the key A140 having the edge directed to one end of the second ridge A212. A140 is located at the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (arranged) in series (one line) along the edge of the front wall portion A201.

  Erect walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283, and a fourth standing wall A284, and is opened by these standing walls A281, A282, A283, and A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, when main controller A110 is stored in substrate box A100, switch device A120 is surrounded by standing wall A280.

  The first standing wall A281 is disposed between the opening A250 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are opposed to each other with the opening A250 therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A281. The fourth standing wall A284 is disposed between the opening A250 and the lower wall part A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first standing wall A281.

  As for the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283, one side is connected to the first standing wall A281, and the other side is connected to the lower wall part A203. That is, the first standing wall A281 is connected to the lower wall part A203 via the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 has one side connected to the second standing wall A282 and the other side connected to the third standing wall A283.

  The standing wall A290 includes a first standing wall A291, a second standing wall A292, and a third standing wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by the standing walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). (B)). Therefore, when main controller A110 is stored in board box A100, key device A130 is surrounded by upright wall A290.

  The first standing wall A291 is disposed between the opening A260 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 are arranged to face each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A291.

  The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 have one side connected to the first standing wall A291 and the other side connected to the lower wall part A203, respectively. That is, the first standing wall A291 is connected to the lower wall part A203 via the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 has one side connected to the second standing wall A292 and the other side connected to the third standing wall A293.

  The standing wall A290 is formed to have a size that surrounds the periphery of the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). In detail, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 becomes the inner surface (straight line) of the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The outer surface (arc) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed respectively with the inner surface (straight line) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203.

  The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290 are formed on the rear surface (the inner surface, on the arrow B side) of the operation wall portion A210. Surface), and the upright end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the upright walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are seat surfaces A206. It is arranged at the same height position as.

  Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 have the leading end surfaces of the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A283 and A293 connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and the standing walls A281 and A293. , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (forming the same plane). Thereby, when main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to box cover A200 (seat surface A206), first upright walls A281, A291, second upright walls A282, A292, and third upright wall. The standing end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are in contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimension (the dimension in the direction of the arrow U, D) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is the length dimension (the arrow L, arrow L) of the first standing wall A281. R dimension). Therefore, as described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 is brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the upright wall A280 (the second upright wall A282 and the third upright wall A283), the second upright wall is set. A282 and the third standing wall A283 may be deformed, and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are connected to each other by the fourth standing wall A284, so that the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are connected to each other. The deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, the tilt of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, by disposing the fourth standing wall A284 at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume near the fourth standing wall A284 increases. This is equivalent to the partial formation of a portion having a large plate thickness, and due to a difference in shrinkage ratio with other portions, molding defects at a portion having a large plate thickness and the vicinity thereof are reduced. Cause.

  On the other hand, the standing height of the fourth standing wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the standing heights of the first standing wall A281, the second standing wall A282, and the third standing wall A283. Thereby, while ensuring the function of suppressing the deformation of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 is reduced, and the molding defect due to the difference in the shrinkage ratio is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as described later, such a switch is provided in response to the tilting of the switch device A120 in the direction of arrow D. The outer surface of the device A120 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, and the inclination thereof can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, the inclination of the device A120 at an angle smaller than that in the case of contacting the lower wall portion A203). .

  The first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 of the standing walls A280 and A290 have the standing front end side (arrow B). (Direction), tapered surfaces A280a and A290a which are inclined surfaces approaching the outer surface side are formed, respectively. Thereby, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the standing tip of each of the standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is gradually reduced toward the standing tip side, and accordingly, each standing wall A281 is accordingly reduced. , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293, the area of the standing end surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

  Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are provided on the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 of the standing walls A280 and A290. May be provided.

  An erect wall A208 is provided upright on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the above-described standing walls A280 and A290, a standing wall A209 is provided on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The standing wall A208 is formed in a box shape connecting the plate members on four sides and opening the side opposite to the front wall portion A201, and is provided with an arithmetic unit (MPU201, FIG. 9) mounted on the main control unit A110 (printed circuit board A119). 4). The upright wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape having an open side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, and is mounted on the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119). Is formed at a position corresponding to. Therefore, when main controller A110 is stored in board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU 201) is surrounded by standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by standing wall A209.

  Here, the plurality of upright walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 respectively surrounding the plurality of objects are arranged such that the height position of one or a plurality of upright standing walls is equal to that of the remaining upright walls. The height position is set to be different from the height position of the tip surface. In the present embodiment, the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 is retracted from the height position of the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). On the side where you do). Accordingly, even when there is a dimensional tolerance of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variation in flatness). As compared with the standing wall A209, the standing end surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be more easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to secure the close contact of the standing wall surrounding the object of high importance with the printed circuit board A119.

  Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111A is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111B is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 has a rear wall portion A301 formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape viewed from the front, and stands from four sides of the rear wall portion A301 toward the front side (the direction of arrow F). And a wall portion (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303) provided in a plate shape, These walls A301 to A305 form a box shape with the front side opened. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion where the engagement piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (in the direction of arrow D).

First, the phase of the connection between the box base A300 and the box cover A200 is shifted in the opposite direction (the direction of the arrow L) of the extending portion of the engaging piece A207 by the length of the extending portion. Face the box at the shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged parts A307, and then the box cover A200 is moved to the box base A300 by the extension direction of the extending part of the engaging piece A207 ( The slide displacement is performed in the direction of arrow R).
As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the back side (the direction of the arrow B) of the engaged portion A307, and the two are engaged (the displacement of the box cover A200 in the direction of the arrow F is regulated).

  Next, main controller A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of the main control device A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device A110, and FIG. 113 is a main control device in a portion CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). It is a partial expansion front perspective view of control device A110.

  FIG. 114 (a) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (b) is main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114 (a). 114 (c) is a side view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114 (a).

  In FIGS. 112 to 114, only main components of various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are shown for simplification of the drawings and for easy understanding, and other drawings are omitted. .

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main control device A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistor, capacitor, transistor) mounted on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and a circuit (pattern) connecting the electronic components is made of a conductor such as copper foil. The insertion hole A112 is formed at four corners.

  The printed circuit board A119 has a front surface (a surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, a surface on the arrow F direction side) facing the rear surface of the box cover A200 (the front wall portion A201). Is stored in.

  In this case, at least the regions AS1 and AS2 of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 where the standing end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 in the box cover A200 abut (FIG. 114). (See (a)), no electronic component is mounted or a circuit is not formed, and such regions AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. Note that FIG. 114 (a) shows only a portion of the region where the seating surface A206 is in contact with the standing walls A280 and A290.

  The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation unit A122 so that the operation unit A122 can be displaced (pushed in), and a coil spring that is provided inside the main body A123 and applies an urging force for returning the operation unit A122 to the initial position. Biasing means (not shown)), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123, the contact of which is switched according to the displacement of the operation unit A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare.

  The main body A123 includes a base A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a columnar protrusion A123b protruding from the front of the base A123a (the surface on the side of the arrow F). The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). When main controller A110 is stored in board box A100, the front of protrusion A123b and the back of operation wall A210 (the surface in the direction of arrow B) face each other.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the base A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base A123a and from which the legs A121 protrude) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base A123a where the legs A121 protrude) and the front of the printed circuit board A119. In other words, the base A123a may be disposed so as to be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B side) of the operation wall portion A210 may be configured to abut.

  The leg A121 protrudes from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a of the main body A123, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. Thus, the switch device A120 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The key device A130 includes a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows the rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a matching key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 is provided inside. Contact that switches depending on the state of the cylinder part A132 (the rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b). (Not shown), and legs A131 electrically connected to the contacts.

  The main body A133 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and has a base portion A133a that holds the cylinder portion A132 on the inner circumferential side (inside) thereof, and two portions on the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the base portion A133a (positions having phases different by about 180 degrees). ) Is provided with a pair of protrusions A133b that protrude radially outward from the base A133a, and an end A133c that forms an end surface on the distal end side (arrow F direction side) of the base A133a.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133, from which the legs A131 protrude) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and the portion where the legs A131 protrude) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be provided by being raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

  The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position (step B arrow side) lower than the end surface formed by the end portion A133c (the surface on the arrow F direction side). A circular opening when viewed from the front is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (the inner cylinder A132a) through the opening. .

  When main controller A110 is stored in substrate box A100, a part of the main body A133 on the distal end side (in the direction of arrow F) is stored in the inner space of covering portion A270.

  Specifically, the outer diameter of the base A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the projecting shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is set to The base A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall part A271 so as to have a size equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271 in the part A270. The protrusion A133b of A133 is stored on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271, respectively.

  In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface (the end surface, the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end surface wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. In addition, you may comprise so that the front surface of the end part A133c and the back surface of the end surface wall part A272 may contact.

  The leg A131 protrudes from the back surface of the base A133a of the main body A133 (the surface in the direction of the arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The support member A134 has an opening formed substantially at the center thereof, a base portion A134a into which the main body A133 (the base portion A133a and the protrusion portion A133b) is inserted, and two opposing sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b are provided, and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c are provided extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. Formed.

  The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is greater than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension end surface of the extension portion A134b (the surface in the direction of the arrow B). Is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the side of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, a leg A134b1 is protruded from the extension end surface of the extension portion A134b. The support A134 is disposed on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and self-supported by the leg A134b1 being inserted from the front side into a hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 and a portion projecting to the rear side being soldered. As a result, the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, and the inclination of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be suppressed by the support body A134.

  Note that a gap may be provided between the extension end surface of the extension portion A134b (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F). That is, the support member A134 may be disposed so as to be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat radiation of the key device A130 can be improved by the amount of the gap.

  On the other hand, the extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a may be the same as the extension length of the extension portion A134c from the reinforcement portion A134c. That is, the extension end surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to be in contact with the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the inclination of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more firmly suppressed. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

  Also, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed in a cross-sectional shape bent into a substantially U-shape or a substantially S-shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It is good also as a structure which performs. That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by using the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since the soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may be performed. The leg A134b1 can be more firmly prevented from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support body A134 that supports the tilt of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

  The width of the leg A134b1 is set to a value larger than the thickness of the plate-like body constituting the support body A134 (dimensions in the directions of the arrows L and B, the horizontal direction in FIG. 114B) (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1). The hole of the printed circuit board A119 into which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. Thus, when the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased and the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, the deformation or breakage of the base of the leg A134b1 (the connection portion with the extending portion A134b) can be suppressed.

  However, the width of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

  In addition, since the reinforcing portions A134c are formed on two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to restrict the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. Accordingly, the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole can be increased, and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that the tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more securely regulated (suppressed).

  Next, a detailed configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated to the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a board box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated to the on position. 116 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 116 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 115 (b). It is the elements on larger scale side view of board | substrate box A100 seen in arrow CXVIb direction.

  FIG. 117 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along a cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 117 (b) is a substrate taken along a cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the box A100, and FIG. 118 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A100 taken along section line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115 (a). It is a fragmentary enlarged sectional view of substrate box A100 in a section line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

  FIG. 119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along a section line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is a substrate taken along a section line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of box A100.

  In FIGS. 117 to 119, for simplification of the drawings and for easy understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and a single hatching is applied to the cross section to schematically illustrate the switch device A120 and the key device A130. It is shown schematically.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the board box A100, a covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 protrudes. An opening A260 is formed in the end wall part A272 that forms the front end surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

  For example, when the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by an unauthorized person due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding on the front surface (outer surface, the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion A210) to reach the opening A260 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire slides on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. Further, the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire can be made to abut against the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall for restricting sliding of foreign matter such as wire. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening A260 can be suppressed.

  The cover part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the key device A130 on the tip side.

  Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign matter such as the wire passes (a gap between the end wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c, and a peripheral wall portion A271). Path formed by the gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b), and a wire or the like passing through a gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c against which a tip of a foreign matter such as a wire abuts. A wall against which the tip of the foreign object abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to suppress improper addition of the foreign matter such as the inserted wire to the main control device A110 (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support member A134 (the left-right dimension in FIGS. 117A and 117B) is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117A and 117B). (Left-right dimension).

  Thereby, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the support A134 can face the inner surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign matter such as the wire passes (formed by a gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion A133b). The path is bent so that the front end of the foreign matter such as wire passes through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion A133b. For foreign matter such as wire whose traveling direction has been changed by abutting on the upper surface of the support A134, the inner walls of the upright walls A291, A292, A293 and the lower wall A203 are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress improper addition of the foreign matter such as the inserted wire to the main control device A110 (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  A protrusion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, a protrusion A133b is formed on the main body A133, and a base portion A133a of the main body A133 is provided on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

  Thereby, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b (the surface on the side of the arrow L, R) and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b (the surface on the side of the arrow L, R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

  That is, when foreign matter such as wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign matter such as wire passes (in the circumferential direction due to the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion A133b). Along the wall between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b along the circumferential direction along the wall where the tip of the foreign matter such as wire abuts. Can be formed in the path, i.e., the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress improper addition of the foreign matter such as the inserted wire to the main control device A110 (see FIG. 118A).

  In the switch device A120, the outer diameter of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum size (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). Thereby, the upper surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion A123b can face the inner surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210. Therefore, the gap between the inner surfaces of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A250, a path through which the foreign matter such as the wire passes (the path between the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the operation portion A122 and the protrusion A123b). The wall formed by bending the gap formed by the gap between them and a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts (a wall where the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire passes through a gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation unit A122, ie, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b and the foreign material such as wire whose traveling direction has been changed by abutting on the upper surface of the protrusion A123b travels along the inner surfaces of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall A203). Can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to suppress improper addition of the foreign matter such as the inserted wire to the main control device A110 (see FIGS. 118A and 118B).

  As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the leading end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the key device A130 on the tip side.

  Thus, the inner surface of the cover A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the key A140 (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R). Therefore, for example, an inadvertent operation or a rough operation of the operator on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, a collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, and the like, When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the cover 170, so that the tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted).

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from dropping off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or poor contact.

  The covering portion A270 has an end wall portion A272 formed at the protruding tip (in the direction of arrow F), and the end wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. Thus, the area of the opening A260 (the area of the opening A260 in a front view (viewed in the direction of the arrow B) and the cross-sectional area of a path through which a foreign matter such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100 and improperly adding to the main control device A110.

  In particular, in the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, rectangular portions A272b extend radially inward from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, only the area where the key A140 is allowed to be displaced (the area corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140) is opened on the protruding tip surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F) of the covering part A270. All other regions of the front end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) are set as the end surface wall portion A272. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and to make it difficult to insert a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260. Further, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire passes therethrough. It can be difficult to do.

  As described above, in order to form the opening A260 in a deformed shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other and combined), the end wall portion A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which the pair of square portions A272b project from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. It is formed in a suitable shape. In this case, the end wall part A272 (annular part A272a and square part A272b) is a cantilever having a constant thickness dimension (the base end is fixed to the peripheral wall part A271 and one end (extended tip) is free). ), So that the shape can be simplified and its formability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end surface wall portion A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the peripheral wall portion A271 on the protruding tip side (in the direction of arrow F) is the opening A260. Configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to prevent the key device A130 from tilting. (Regulation) Yes.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the protruding tip side (the direction of the arrow F) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge (portion forming the opening A260) of the end wall portion A272. Can be abutted. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of the external force described above can be brought into contact with the end face wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted), and breakage of the box cover A200 (covering portion A270) can be suppressed.

  In addition, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271. Therefore, as described above, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of the arrow L and R) and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of the arrow L and R) face each other. (See FIG. 118A).

  Therefore, for example, an inadvertent operation or a rough operation of the operator on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, a collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, and the like, When an external force in the rotation direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the protrusion A133b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrow L, R) is used as the inner surface of the protrusion A271b in the circumferential direction (the surface on the side of the arrow L, R). ) Can restrict the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from dropping off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or poor contact.

  Here, for example, the operator may inadvertently or violently operate the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or operate the operation unit A122 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, due to a collision of the key A140 with another member, an external force in a direction (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R) perpendicular to the pushing direction or the inserting direction is applied to the operation unit A122 or the key A140. When actuated, the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 is tilted, and the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) may be deformed and damaged by the contact thereof. .

  On the other hand, standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210, and these standing walls A280 and A290 have their standing end surfaces ( The surface on the side of arrow B) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the side of arrow F) (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

Accordingly, the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 is improved by the upright walls A280 and A290 being set up (functioning as ribs), and the support portion (deformation suppression) supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 is provided. The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as (means).
As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  When the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290, and the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is pressed. The tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted). In other words, the portion that contacts the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses the tilting is shared not only by the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also by the upright walls A280 and A290, and the load is correspondingly increased. Can be dispersed. Also from this point, breakage of the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the standing end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if foreign matter such as wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as walls against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts (a wall that restricts further progress). Thereby, it is possible to suppress improper addition to main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed together with the lower wall A203 so as to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (see FIG. 118B). In other words, the area AS1 where the front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface in the direction of arrow F) abut. , AS2 have a substantially rectangular frame shape and are formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114A).

  Therefore, the path through which foreign matter such as wire enters the inside of the substrate box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the standing walls A280 and A290. That is, even if a foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, the movement of the foreign matter out of the space surrounded by the upright walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall A203 is regulated. Can be. Thereby, it is possible to suppress improper addition to main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Further, the upright walls A280 and A290 are formed so as to surround the periphery of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203, so that the upright walls A280 and A290 are upright (function as ribs). ), The rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 can be further improved, and the directions of the external forces applied to the operation portion A122 or the key A140 (that is, the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R can be changed). (Even when an external force in any direction in the plane including the external force acts), it is possible to reliably exert the function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  The first standing wall A291 is disposed so as to be orthogonal to the key A140 at the off position and parallel to the key A140 at the on position. The third standing wall A293 is disposed so as to be orthogonal to the key A140 at the ON position and parallel to the key A140 at the OFF position. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppression means) supporting the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270 can be efficiently exhibited by the standing wall A290.

  That is, of the external forces in the directions parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R, the external force in the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R is applied to the key A140. While the load received by A290 (the withstand load that the upstanding wall A290 should exert as a support) is maximized, an external force is applied in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle from the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 is rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the load received by the standing wall A290 (the standing wall A290 exerts as a support portion) by the amount of the external force escaping by the rotation. Should be reduced). As a result, by setting the posture of the standing wall A290 to the above-described arrangement, the function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 is efficiently exhibited by the standing wall A290. be able to.

  The standing walls A280 and A290 (the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A283 and A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, so that the standing walls can be utilized by utilizing the rigidity of the box cover A200. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the standing walls A280 and A290 as supporting portions (deformation suppressing means) supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, breakage of the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  In the printed circuit board A119, the surface to which the electronic components are connected by solder is the surface facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the standing wall A280. , A290, and the areas AS1 and AS2 where the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abuts (see FIG. 114 (a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed. , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

  Therefore, the standing end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A280 and A290 are easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, and the standing walls A280 and A290 are connected to each other. The formation of a gap between the printed circuit board A119 and the printed circuit board A119 can be suppressed. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign matter such as wires inserted from the openings A250 and A260 abut.

  The first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 of the standing walls A280 and A290 have tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, respectively. The area of the surface (the surface on the side of arrow B) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). Thus, the surface pressure at the standing tip end surface brought into contact with the printed circuit board A119 can be increased, and the insertion of foreign matter such as wire from between the printed circuit board A119 and the standing walls A280 and A290 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces (surfaces facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) on the standing front end side of the standing walls A280 and A290, the formability is improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the substrate box A100.

  That is, the shape of the standing walls A280 and A290 is reduced by reducing the area of the standing front end surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) gradually approaching the outer surface side toward the standing front end side (direction of arrow B). By making the change gradual, the fluidity of the resin in the mold can be ensured. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the standing end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 abut on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( FIG. 117 (a) and FIG. 117 (b). Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-described groove. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to pass between (penetrate into) the front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the substrate box A100.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 protrude from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the side of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210. One end of each of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base portion A271a or the protruding portion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 ( b)).

  Accordingly, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 come into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the inclination of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be further reduced by utilizing the rigidity of the ridges A211 and 222. It is possible to reliably suppress the damage of the covering portion A270.

  In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (on an extension of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) respectively. Thereby, the function as an instruction line for indicating a position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display unit can be shared by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, the position where one end of the first protruding ridge A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protruding portion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface of the key A140 at the off position (the surface held by the finger). (See FIG. 115 (a)), and one end of the second ridge A212 is covered with the covering portion A270 (of the peripheral wall portion A271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 at the off position, and the key A140 covers the end surface in the direction of the arrow U (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) with the covering portion A270 (the end surface wall portion A272). ), The first ridge A211 is positioned on an extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the ON position is set. When the key A140 is tilted in a direction (arrow L direction) in which an external force acts on the key A140 in the direction A to bring the end surface on the arrow L direction side into contact with the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), The second ridge A212 is located on an extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of the external force, a portion where the load is input from the end face of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) (the end face of the key A140 abuts). ) Can be efficiently reinforced by the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212. As a result, breakage of the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

  It is to be noted that the external force in the opposite direction (force for displacing the key A140 in the direction of the arrow D) acting on the key A140 in the off position can be suppressed by the second connecting wall portion A230 (FIG. 115 (a)). )), The first connecting wall portion A220 can suppress the external force (the force for displacing the key A140 in the direction of the arrow R) acting in the opposite direction to the key A140 at the ON position (FIG. 115). (B)).

  That is, as described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in front view, and the other side (arrow D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the short direction (arrows U and D). Direction side) is open (the connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is located at one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) from the center of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region) in the longitudinal direction (the directions of the arrows L and R), and the third position from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

  Therefore, the presence of the space on the open side and the space on the side of the third connection wall portion A240 causes the hand or other configuration of the worker in those spaces to collide with the key A140, and causes the key A140 to move with the arrow D. An external force displacing in the direction or the arrow L direction is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 on the side that suppresses the tilting of the key device A130 against such external force (the side that receives the key device A130), it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. It can be done efficiently.

  As described above, the square portions A272b of the end surface wall portion A272 are disposed at two places where the phases are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the lengths of the two sides (the outer edge and the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the shape in a front view is formed as a scalene triangle).

  In detail, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the square part A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 has a side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140. Is longer (larger), and the square portion A272b farther from the first connection wall portion A220 (opposite to the key A140) with respect to the key A140 at the off position has a gripping surface for the key A140. The length of the side (outer edge) on the side facing is shortened (smaller) (see FIG. 115A).

  Therefore, in other words, the square part A272b on the side close to the first connection wall part A220 has the length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 at the ON position. Is shorter (smaller), and the length of the side (outer edge) of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the ON position is longer (larger) in the square part A272b farther from the first connection wall part A220. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

  As described above, the presence of the space on the open side and the space on the side of the third connection wall portion A240 causes the hand or other configuration of the worker in those spaces to collide with the key A140, and the key A140. Where the external force for displacing the key A140 in the arrow D direction or the arrow L direction is likely to be applied, according to the square portion A272b in the present embodiment, the side on the side receiving the key A140 to which the external force in the arrow D direction or the arrow F direction is applied Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the square portion A272b is efficiently increased, and the tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. In addition, the surface pressure can be suppressed, and the damage to the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

  The front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the substrate box A100 is located on the first area formed by the front wall part A201 and on the side closer to the main control device A110 than the first area. The openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region formed by the second region formed by the portion A210.

  Thereby, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface (the first region formed by the front wall portion A201) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the first region and the second region are connected. The steps (the first connecting wall portion A220, the second connecting wall portion A230, and the third connecting wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. Thereby, as compared with the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first region), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be made longer for a person who commits fraud, and The openings A250 and A260 are difficult to visually recognize, making it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260.

  Here, in consideration of heat radiation from main controller A110, board box A100 has a distance between main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front of printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of box cover A200 (internal space). )) Must be secured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far away from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

  In this case, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), so that the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily ensured, and as described above, the openings A250 and A260 are formed. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted from A260 into the inside of the substrate box A100. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, work is performed on a step (the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) connecting the first region and the second region. The operator's (operator) 's hand interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction approaching the main control device A110 from the front wall portion A201 toward the operation wall portion A210. The space on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall part A210 can be enlarged by the amount of the inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall part A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  When viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L and R) that is orthogonal to the other direction (arrows U and D). 115 (a) and FIG. 115 (b).

  The key device A130 is arranged such that the attitude of the key A140 at the off position is the attitude along the above-described other directions (the directions of the arrows U and D) (see FIG. 115A). That is, the key A140 in the off position has a surface to be gripped by a finger in the longitudinal direction (the directions of the arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key A140 when viewed from the front (in the direction of the arrow B). Of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) is along the short direction (directions of arrows U and D).

  Thereby, a space can be secured on the desired side (the right side and the left side in FIG. 115A) of the surface of the key A140 that is in the off position and held by the finger. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or when the key A140 is pulled out from the key device A130, a finger (for example, a thumb and an index finger) holding the key A140 connects a step (the first connection wall) connecting the first region and the second region. Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) from the center of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region) in the longitudinal direction (the directions of the arrows L and R). As described above, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed so as to be inclined downward, so that when the key A140 is gripped with a finger and operated (rotated from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is rotated. It is possible to prevent a finger different from the finger to be gripped from interfering with a step (the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) connecting the first region and the second region. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  For example, when grasping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and the thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be arranged using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220, and from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the key A140, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

  When the key A140 at the ON position is gripped by the index finger and the thumb, the little finger or the ring finger is used to form the operation wall portion A210 (second region) into a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in front view and to operate the key device A130 for operation. The wall portion A210 (the second region) is located on one side from the longitudinal center, and is arranged using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210. When the key A140 is operated (rotated) from the off position to the on position, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow R direction side) described above. it can.

  In the switch device A120, the position of the projecting distal end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation unit A122 at the initial position (the height of the operation unit A122 from the operation wall unit A210) is the projecting position of the covering unit A270. It is set to a position (small dimension) lower than the position of the front end surface (the front surface of the end wall portion A272, the surface on the side of the arrow F direction) (the height standing from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, interference between the operation unit A122 and the finger when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

  The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (a first connection wall portion A220 and a third connection wall) on one side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow L direction side) and on the other side (the arrow R direction side 9). A portion (A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on one side in the short direction (arrow U direction side), and on the other side (arrow D direction side) in the short direction. Has no connection surface.

  Thereby, the other side (the direction of arrow D) in the short direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, the opening allows the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) to communicate with the external space. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the key device A130, pulled out from the key device A130, rotated from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Using the above-mentioned open space (external space) as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little fingers and ring fingers) different from grasped fingers (for example, thumb and forefinger). Can be. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  Here, as described above, in consideration of heat radiation from the main controller A110, the board box A100 has a distance between the main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200). (Internal space) must be secured.

  In this case, a step connecting the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240). The first connecting wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connecting wall portion A230 and the third connecting wall portion A240 are formed by the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed, and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, and the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are moved. By making it non-inclined (by making only the first connection wall portion A220 to be inclined down), the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 for responding to heat radiation from the main control device A110 can be secured.

  As described above, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the other (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. The operation wall portion A210 (the second region) has a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and is closer to one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) than the longitudinal center of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region). ), The key device A130 is arranged close to the key device A130.

  The third connection wall A240 is formed on the other longitudinal side (opposite to the first connection wall A220) of the operation wall A210 (second region), so that the third connection wall A240 is formed. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, it is possible to prevent a robot arm handling the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 during manufacturing.

  FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, and shows a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In FIG. 120, some of the components (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) are omitted for simplification of the drawing and easy understanding. Reference numerals are shown only for the main components.

  As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, as described above, hinges 18 (rotation shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable on the front side of the front side with the side provided with the opening and closing axis.

  Here, when the hinge 18 is used as an opening / closing axis and the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front, the release angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, about 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 120). When the opening angle can be ensured), the worker stands at the position facing the front of the substrate box A100, and the switch device A120 and the key device are operated in the manner described above (the manner described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119). A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

  On the other hand, when the release angle cannot be made sufficiently large (for example, the release angle can be secured only about 45 degrees, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 11 are inserted into the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 by the release. 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured even when the user needs to operate the key device A130 by inserting his / her hand from between the switch device A12 and the key device A130.

  That is, the substrate box A100 is configured so that the longitudinal direction (for example, the directions of the arrows R and L in FIG. 115A) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis). And the short direction (arrows U and D in FIG. 115 (a)) is oriented in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis), and one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115 (a)). (The L direction side) is positioned at the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

  Thereby, when the hand is inserted from the space between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 (the front surface of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second region), The thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb are formed into a space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (that is, the operation wall portion A210 (second region) is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and the key device is formed). The space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by locating the A130 on one side of the longitudinal center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). Can be arranged using.

  In this state, the operation unit A122 can be operated (pressed) with the thumb or the index finger with respect to the switch device A120, and when the key A140 is rotated with respect to the key device A130. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger holding the key A140, a space secured by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward can be used. As a result, operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

  The above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed in a state where the substrate box A100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 from the state illustrated in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be located on the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening / closing axis, the substrate box A100 is further opened to the front side (to the front in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening / closing axis. Is also good. This allows the operator to stand at a position facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 or the switch device A120 or the like in the manner described above (the manner described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119). The key device A130 can be operated, and its operability can be ensured.

  In this case, various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, solenoid 209) are connected to main controller A110 (input / output port 205) through openings AOP1 to AOP8. The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which one end is connected is connected to the one symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and FIG.

  Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted irrespective of the state of connection of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be easily illicitly operated. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of the plurality of electrical connection lines, the operation (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 There is a possibility that the property may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. Thereby, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, at least the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line, one end of which is connected to the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113, is the main control device A110. If it is connected to the (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected, disconnected, or both connected and released) ), Operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

  That is, unless predetermined electrical connection lines (electrical connection lines connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) are connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130. The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be suppressed from being illegally operated.

  On the other hand, when the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is ensured, and injustice can be suppressed. Connects other electrical connection lines (a payout control device 111, various switches 208, a solenoid 209, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110). Operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 even when the main control device A110 is released (disconnected) from the main control device A110, thereby improving workability (securing versatility). ) Can be achieved.

  That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening / closing axis, the main control device A110 is rotated (the main control device is connected to the electrical connection line). In order not to limit the rotation of the device A110), it is necessary to release (remove) the electrical connection line.

  Therefore, in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed unless all the electrical connection lines are connected to the main control device A110, the main control device A110 is moved to a predetermined position (switch device). It is necessary to reconnect the main control device A110 to the electrical connection line that has been released (disconnected) from the main control device A110 after being rotated to a position where the A120 and the key device A130 are easy to operate.

  In particular, when the main control device A110 is separated from the rear surface of the inner frame 12 by displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, the main control device A110 is released (removed) through an extension line. It is necessary to reconnect the electric connection line to the main control device A110, which is troublesome.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if predetermined electric connection lines (electric connection lines connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) are connected to the main control device A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, other electric connection lines (dispensing control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display) are provided. It is not necessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line for connecting the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110 via an extension line.

  As a result, it is possible to arrange the main control device A110 at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily operated, and to save time and workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Can be improved.

  Next, a substrate box A2100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the entire back surface of the end wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface has been described. However, the end wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment is provided with a ridge A2273 projecting from the back surface. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 121A is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A2100 taken along a section line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121A. It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). FIG. 121 (b) shows only a portion viewed in cross-section to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 121, a ridge A2273 protrudes from the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B side) of the end wall portion A2272 in the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment. The ridge A2273 is a portion (protrusion) extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is an outer edge of the end wall portion A2272 (a protruding end protruding radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). (A side edge).

  In detail, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is a position facing (facing) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, and a range (position) along the outer edge of the square portion A272b. A range between the position AP1 and the position AP3 including the AP2, and a range between the position AP4 and the position AP6 including the position AP5) and one side of the rectangular portion A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). (The range between the position AP3 and the position AP4) along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (the side where the overhang dimension is larger), and within this range (the range between the position AP1 and the position AP6). It is formed continuously.

  The projecting dimension of the end wall part A2272 (annular part A272a and square part A272b) of the ridge A2273 from the back is set to a constant value in a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and from the position AP3 to the position AP2. The value is gradually changed to a larger value toward the position AP2, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP2 to the position AP1, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the protrusion dimension is gradually changed to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6. Is set. The position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

  As described above, the ridge A2273 is protruded from the end wall portion A2272, so that the rigidity of the end wall portion A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R), and the key device A130 is tilted. When the key A140 comes into contact with the inner edge of the end wall A2272, it is possible to prevent the end wall A2272 from being damaged.

  Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the rear surface of the end face wall A2272 and the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133). ) Can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the board box A2100 through such a gap.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and is formed between the rear surface of the end wall A2272 and the front of the end A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. The value is set to a value substantially equal to the facing distance between them. Therefore, the protruding tip of the ridge A2273 (in the direction of the arrow B) comes into contact with the front surface of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

  This eliminates a gap between the back of the end wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133), and foreign matter such as wire is inserted into the inside of the board box A2100 from the gap. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, at the positions AP2 and AP5, since the projecting dimension of the ridge A2273 is set to a large value, the elastic deformation of the square portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever) having a free outer edge side is used. Thus, the ridges A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and in the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly adhered to the front of the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the board box A2100 from the gap between the back surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). .

  Further, as described above, the protruding end (the direction of the arrow B) of the ridge A2273 is in contact with the front surface of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130. When the key A140 is inserted into the device, even if the end wall portion A2272 is erroneously pressed in the insertion direction by the key A140, the deformation of the end surface wall portion A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side of the end wall portion A2272 (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) from being damaged.

  Next, a substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, a switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged on a side (arrow R direction side) closer to the rotation axis A410 than a center of the board box A100 (box cover A200) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L and R directions). Although the description has been given of the case, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are disposed farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of a board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine A3010. FIG. 122 (b) shows a state where the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range). In FIG. 122B, only main components are schematically illustrated to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the position where the operation wall portion A210 is formed, and the opening A260 (covering portion A270, key) in the operation wall portion A210. The arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) are different, but the other configurations are the same, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the board box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (the arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. The three sides of the service wall A210 are connected to the front wall A201 by the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240.

  An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering portion A270), and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250, A260. Is done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is disposed farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the direction of the arrow L).
That is, the arrangement is opposite to the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

  Here, the movable range (rotatable range) of the substrate box A3100 when it is rotated around the rotation axis A410 is a first position (disposed at the time of a game) disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. 120 (see FIG. 120), a second position (in which the front of the box cover A3200 (the operation wall A210) faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010 is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back of the inner frame 12. That is, the position is set to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, a range of approximately 180 ° up to the position shown in FIG.

  As a result, the board box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually recognizing information (for example, information on setting change, setting values) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. )be able to. As a result, the operation can be performed while confirming the display (information), so that the operation states of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily grasped based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, the pachinko machine A3010 (the inner frame 12) can be arranged on the back side (that is, a position where it is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside, see FIG. 120). (Switch device A120 and key device A130 are illegally operated).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are disposed (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are in the same direction (arrow). The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position where a desired posture (in the present embodiment, a posture in which both surfaces are substantially parallel) is desired. In addition, it is preferable that the angle formed by the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 be set in a range of approximately 0 ° to approximately 45 °.

  In other words, the board is placed at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 (the front surface of the operation wall A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. The box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to eliminate the necessity to take an unreasonable posture such as turning a hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010. .

  As a result, the operation of operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming the information (for example, information on setting change) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be more easily performed, and the operability is improved and the erroneous operation is performed. Can be more reliably achieved.

  In addition, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side (the arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the key are provided on the operation wall portion A210. Apparatus A130 is provided.

  Thereby, the board is located at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are disposed (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. When the box A3100 is displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (the inner frame 12) (the right side in FIG. 122 (b)). Can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (the operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (the key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (the inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (the operation unit A122), and the operation frequency of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 whose operation frequency is higher than that of the key device A130 is located farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, closer to the first connection wall portion A220). Will be arranged. Thereby, the switch device A120 that is frequently operated can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (the inner frame 12) (the right side in FIG. 122B). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the finger operating the switch device A120 (the operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (the inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Further, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also required when the switch device A120 (the operation portion A122) is operated. It can be used as a space (space for avoiding interference between fingers and box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point as well.

  Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment has the substrate box A3100 up to the above-described second position (the position where the front of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122 (b)). When the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (that is, fix the substrate box A3100 at the second position). ). Accordingly, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the board box A3100 by hand, so that operability can be improved.

  In addition, as the restricting means, a means for fixing (holding) the substrate box A3100 at the second position using the magnetic force (attraction force) of the magnet (the first force is applied by applying a force exceeding the attraction force). And a projecting member arranged at the projecting position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed urging means (for example, a coil spring), which is arranged at the projecting position. The projecting member engages with the substrate box A3100 arranged at the second position and regulates the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (the urging means from the projecting position) When the protruding member is immersed against the urging force, displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position is permitted.

  Next, a substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged in a posture along the vertical direction (the directions of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is The pachinko machine A4010 is arranged in a posture along the width direction (left and right direction, directions of arrows L and R). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 123A is a front view of a board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123B is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine A4010. FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) substrate box A4100 is shown by a broken line. In FIG. 123 (b), only the main components are schematically illustrated to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (arrangement position and direction) and the number of the rotation axes A4410, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 protruding from the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 in directions away from each other. The pair of rotation axes A4410 are located on one side in the short direction (arrows U and D directions) of the substrate box A4100 (the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, the direction of the arrow U), and in the longitudinal direction (arrows) of the substrate box A4100. (L, R directions) It is formed in a posture protruding outward from both ends along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are coaxially arranged.

  Here, the movable range (rotatable range) of the substrate box A4100 when it is rotated around the rotation axis A4410 is a first position (disposed at the time of a game) disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. From the position (the position shown by the broken line in FIG. 123 (b)), it is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the rear surface of the inner frame 12 (the direction of arrow B), and the front of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. A second position facing upward (direction of arrow U) is set within a range of approximately 90 ° up to a second position (that is, a position where the board box A4100 projects most to the rear side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)). .

  Accordingly, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and its release side (the side opposite to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed to the side where the worker is present, and the switch device A120 In addition, the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 can face the rear surface of another component provided on the inner frame 12. Therefore, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can have different components facing each other, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where they are difficult to operate. As a result, improper operation (the improper operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 hits another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact, the substrate box A4100 is formed so as not to be placed at the first position. Thereby, forgetting to remove the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key A140 that has been forgotten to be obtained from being illegally acquired.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the second position of the board box A4100 is located below the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. When the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in the state in which the substrate box A4100 is moved, the substrate box A4100 can be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to make the operator easily recognize that the board box A4100 cannot be placed at the first position.

  When the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is closer to the front of the operation wall A210 than the front wall A201 of the box cover 4200. Preferably, the shape is such that it penetrates into Thereby, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be prevented from being illegally operated.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 is decelerated by the protrusion 154 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the flow resistance of the ball may be increased by disposing an adhesive member on the inner surface, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the ball may be adjusted by magnetic force. You may.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is provided on the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may be provided on the movable accessory side. The displacement restricting device 180 may be arranged on the back side of the effect member 700 so that the width of the protrusion to the back side can be changed by a pushing operation.

  In this case, by configuring the main body 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 to be able to pass through the rear case 510 in a state where the overhang width is long, the displacement of the rendering member 700 can be restricted. it can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by configuring the operation member 183 so as to cancel the insertion into the rear case 510 in a state where the overhang width is shortened. The displacement restricting device 180 is also displaced with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement restricting device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, it is possible to make the displacement restricting device 180 visible to a player.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the displacement restricting device 180 is caused by the manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be provided with a driving device, and the arrangement of the operation member 183 may be switched electrically. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the regulation release state prior to the initial operation from power-on, it is possible to prevent the displacement unit 180 from starting displacement while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulation state. can do. Thus, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

  Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be provided around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided without driving the displacement restricting device 180, and when the displacement restricting device 180 is determined to be in the restricted state by this detection sensor. In this case, control may be performed so that the driving of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is not started.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 510 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or may be a combination thereof.

  For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the effect member 700, it is only necessary to prevent a change in the arrangement of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided on the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the effect standby state, and When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is extended, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with the concave portion provided in the lower arm member 630, thereby preventing a change in the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 in the left-right direction. Can be.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is provided as an example of the device that restricts the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed above the game area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by disposing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displacing the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, the wall surface of the partition member 310 may be rubbed, and the granular member 320 may be prevented from being broken or the partition member 310 from being damaged.

  For example, it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacing the inner space IE1 beyond the lid member 480 by shipping in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the approach side (the effect standby state). Therefore, the range of the partition member 310 with which the granular member 320 can contact at the time of shipment can be limited, and the amount of displacement of the granular member 320 can be suppressed, thereby avoiding the occurrence of cracks due to collision between the granular members 320. it can.

  Further, as another example, the granular member 320 that is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 and is configured to be able to protrude into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310 and is disposed in the internal space IE1 in a protruding state. May be provided so as to limit the displacement of the projection.

  The overhanging member is configured to be able to be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and is configured to be switched between the overhanging state and the non-extending state each time the pushing operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming machine store, the overhang member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the overhang member can be improved.

  Note that the state of the state change of the projecting member is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism similarly to the displacement restricting device 180, or the state may be changed by engagement or disengagement between claws.

  Further, as another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping in a state where the internal pressure of the partition member 310 is increased. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming machine store, and the pressure in the partition member 310 is reduced before the pachinko machine is operated, whereby the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made free.

  Further, as another example, a ferromagnetic metal powder may be mixed with a resin serving as a material of the granular member 320 to form a magnet, and a magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Thereby, at the time of shipment, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, during operation, by removing this magnet, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made free.

  The magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be provided on a part of another movable role, and as an example, a magnet may be provided on the cover member 480.

  In the embodiment in which the ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed into the granular member 320, for example, the operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the partitioning member 310 after the execution of the firing effect (for example, to bring the magnet close to the partitioning member 310). By arranging the effect for the effect, the effect of stopping the particulate member 320 in the air (visually as if it is floating) can be included in the firing effect.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is fixed to the rear case 510 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, an insertion hole formed on the same straight line as the center axis of the regulated hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged at a predetermined end position is formed in the rear case 510. A metal rod or a resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole and fixed with a tape or the like. After arriving at the gaming machine store, a clerk of the gaming machine store pulls out the metal rod or the resin rod. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

  On the other hand, according to this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is contaminated with the tape for fixing, or the metal bar or the resin bar cannot be discarded for the delivery of the pachinko machine 10 to another store. May need to be done.

  In addition, when the storage of metal bars or resin bars is left to each gaming machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and when the products are delivered to other stores without metal bars or resin bars, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured. May not be possible. It can be recognized that an improvement of this viewpoint is the displacement restricting device 180 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width of the left and right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the back partition lower portion 314 are substantially the same is described. is not. For example, the front / rear width between the left / right central portion 312b and the rear partition lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front / rear width between the left / right portion 312a and the rear partition lower portion 314. In this case, the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased below the internal space IE1 irrespective of the left and right positions, so that the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced. The probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged by collision can be reduced.

  Further, for example, the front-rear width of the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower part 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can enter the internal space IE1 without lowering the momentum of the granular member 320 to be ejected.

  Further, the front and rear width of the internal space IE1 does not need to be constant. For example, the shape of the ejected granular member 320 may be tapered toward the moving direction (upward). In this case, since the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, it is possible to easily avoid locally generating an excessive load on the partition member 310. Further, by moving the tapered direction toward the front side, the scattered granular members 320 can be easily moved toward the front side.

  Further, for example, a bulge-like portion that protrudes toward the back side may be provided at a position that is a part of the front plate portion 311 and that is projected to reach the injected granular members 320 collectively. good. The bump-shaped portion may be provided with a separate member fixed to the rear surface of the front plate portion 311 or may be formed of metal so that a part of the front plate portion 311 can be formed so as to protrude to the rear side. You may comprise so that a convex part may be provided in a type | mold.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed in a soccer ball shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be spherical, rugby ball shape, or star shape (a shape in which a projection is formed three-dimensionally). Since a gap can be generated between the members by configuring the members with a certain size, the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when a firing effect is performed.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the emission device 400 is arranged below the rear surface side of the light guide plate 161 and configured to emit the granular member 320 obliquely forward and upward. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the injection device 400 may be at the left and right positions of the light guide plate 161 or at the upper position. Even in this case, an effect of firing the granular member 320 obliquely forward can be executed. When the injection device 400 is arranged at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the effect standby position.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed of a single-color (in this embodiment, red) resin member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be formed by two-color molding or by combining two members of different colors. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by performing color coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, the color layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

  Further, the number of the granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having a size similar to that of the collision member 420 may be employed as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape similar to the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. Thereby, the manner in which the granular member 320 flies and the appearance is changed between the case where the firing effect is executed in a state where the curved shape is properly fitted and the case where the firing effect is executed in a state where the curved shape is not fitted. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the granular members 320 are arranged so as to be scattered in the internal space IE1 and gather on the collision member 420 by gravity has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is provided an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (the position side of the effect standby state), and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. May be. In this case, it is possible to avoid that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

  Examples of the urging means include a spring, an elastic rubber member, a mesh member having fixed ends, an elastic sheet partially covering the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

  The relationship between the urging means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the granular member 320 and the urging means are adhered may be used, or the granular member 320 is not adhered but not separated. The biasing means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being disposed away from the granular member 320.

  Further, the urging means is not limited to an object that can contact the granular member 320. For example, in the same manner as the gravity acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, a pressure adjusting means for adjusting the pressure in the internal space IE1 may be employed. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the air pressure in the internal space IE1.

  For example, when the pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1. When the air pressure in the internal space IE1 is reduced in such a manner that gas is extracted from the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating displacement) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. In addition, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, but may be set to any side, up, down, left, right, front and back.

When a change in air pressure is caused, it is preferable to close the deformed through portion 315.
It is possible to easily provide the lid member 480 with a function of closing the deformed through portion 315. For example, a flexible, thin, highly deformable deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480, and when the lid member 480 enters the irregularly shaped penetration portion 315, the lid is The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Accordingly, the deformed through portion 315 can be closed or opened in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the deformed through portion 315.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the protruding ridge 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface on the side facing the transmission projection 446 at the right end may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement trajectory of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displaced lower end position while the transmitting protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, and can be maintained while being in contact with the curved surface. It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the biasing force of the maximum.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right central portions of the collision member 420 are configured to have a curved shape protruding upward has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be in the shape of a hill whose center is sharp and descending in the left-right direction, or may be in the form of a ridge. In this case, as compared with the curved shape, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharpness at the center in the left-right direction. Therefore, the deviation of the right and left arrangement of the granular member 320 can be increased.

  Further, for example, it may be formed in a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction, or may be formed in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced as a lump until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310, and is dispersed by the collision.

  When the shape of the collision member 420 is changed, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, it is preferable that the advancing / retracting portion 481 of the cover member 480 be configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are convex upward. Thereby, collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 can be easily avoided.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to be flat when viewed from the side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to have a shape in which the lower half projects and is bent in a side view. In this case, the dense position of the granular members 320 can be moved to the upper half side.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the size of the partition member 310 in a front view is substantially equal to the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the partition member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be equal to or larger than the size of the viewing area in which the player can view the display in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. You may do it. Thus, it is possible to avoid occurrence of a situation in which the edge of the partitioning member 310 is visually recognized overlapping with the display by the third symbol display device 81, so that the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 is improved. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the single collision member 420 is employed as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but is not limited thereto. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be employed, and cooperative operation or individual operation may be performed by separate driving devices.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the translation member 410 contacts the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not contact the collision member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a pillar portion projecting from the plate portion 422 to the rear side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 and be configured to be able to abut on the front transmission member 440. In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar portion is formed with unevenness in such a manner that the length in the radial direction switches according to the angular arrangement, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 causes the arrangement of the pillar portion. Can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be minutely displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (finely displaced).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described. However, the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited at all, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may enter by slide displacement along a linear direction. In this case, the shape of the deformed through portion 315 can be easily formed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 disposed on the left and right sides of the cover member 480 are formed to have a shape that is recessed toward the back side is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the granular member 320 fits away under the lid member 480 in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, a protrusion may be formed to project from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and the protrusion may be configured to be able to abut the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular member 320 is locally accumulated, the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be broken with the displacement of the lid member 480 toward the entry side by pushing the granular member 320 by the protrusion. . Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

  The shape of the projection of the cover member 480 is not limited at all. For example, you may comprise so that several projections may be scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the deposition of the granular member 320 occurs, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the granular member 320 to be deposited, and the deposition of the granular member 320 can be broken.

  In addition, a pair of ridges may be configured so as to be inclined to both left and right outer sides toward the evacuation-side distal end of the advancing / retracting portion 481 with the starting point at the left and right central portion of the entry-side distal end of the overhang portion 482. . In this case, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction in which the granular member 320 is pushed toward the left and right outer sides with the displacement of the cover member 480 on the approach side.

  The direction of the ridge is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be reversed, the ridge may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or a combination of ridges having different inclination degrees may be used. (A ridge extending on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel (or overlapping) with the rotation axis) may be used. Further, the number of ridges is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

  The length of the projecting portion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be protruded until it reaches a circle having the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or the protruding length of the lid member 480 from the advance / retreat portion 481 may be constant. Is also good. In the latter case, since the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protruding portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing / retreating portion 481, the same effect as the effect described above as the effect provided by the shape of the lid member 480 is obtained. Can be played by the part.

  When the projection is formed on the lid member 480, the operation timing of the projection is not limited to when the granular member 320 is stopped and the lid member 480 is displaced to the approach side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is located below the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is gradually changed in the forward and reverse directions near the state where the front transmission member 440 is rotated 66 degrees in the normal rotation direction with respect to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced little by little, and the granular member 320 riding on the collision member 420 Can be vertically displaced.

  Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, the granular member 320 is flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420, and can collide with the protrusion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the rearrangement of the granular members 320 can be executed, and the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be disrupted.

  Also, when the collision member 420 jumps up the granular member 320 (when the granular member 320 is displaced upward), the lid member 480 is displaced to the approach side, so that it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protruding portion. be able to.

  The execution of the small forward and reverse rotations of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled to reverse the drive force in the forward or reverse direction, or may be performed by causing the forward rotation in a short time interval. In this case, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 causes the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 to be displaced in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

  In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the advancing / retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape extending along the same plane over the left and right, so that the lid member 480 corresponds to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the interval between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not flat but has a shape having irregularities (wave shape), and the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 depend on the relative relationship between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312. The configuration may be such that the distance between the 480 and the curved plate portion 312 changes. Further, the approach side end of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the cover member 480 may be formed so as to be parallel to the axis of the rotation axis O1.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be provided on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

  In the first embodiment, the drive force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and the plurality of members (the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the transmission arm) are transmitted. In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, a case has been described where the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there may be a timing at which all of the members are displaced by the driving force of the driving motor MT1. In this case, the size of the drive motor MT1 to be employed may be slightly increased.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 contacts the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the projection 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, when a repulsive force is generated therebetween, the front side of the transmission member 440 may be made of The load can be transmitted to the translation member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the translation member 410 are not in contact with each other.

  For example, of the transmission protrusions 446, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between the protrusions 414 is disposed in a circumferential half that is disposed to face the protrusions 414 of the linear motion member 410. On the other hand, the opposite half of the circumference is provided with a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force between the projecting ridge portion 414, so that the repulsive force moves the linear motion member 410 to the lower end position. Therefore, the load at the time of starting the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted at two positions of the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460 is described. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed on at least one circumferential surface of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and the driving force may be transmitted through the groove to increase the number of driving force transmission targets.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which it may be unknown whether or not it is time to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction based on detection by the detection sensor SC4. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor for detecting the disposition of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 determines the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440. Whether or not it may be determined may be determined. With this, it is possible to determine whether or not the driving in the forward rotation direction has passed the firing state, so that the reverse rotation is possible if the firing state has not been reached, and the reverse rotation is not possible if the firing state has been exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, a linear motion slide).

  In the first embodiment, by making the shapes of the extending claw portions 734 of the effect member 700 different in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent a problem related to the displacement of the expansion / contraction member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state. Although the case of the configuration has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, by making the shape of the extension claw portion 734 different, the start timing of the radially expanding displacement is higher than that of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. Thereby, the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are balanced with the quick start of the displacement due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are simultaneously in all directions. It can be seen that the displacement has started.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the load is generated in the radial direction of the circle around the rotation axis of the rotation plate 730 by bringing the rotation plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740 has been described. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies an urging force to the expansion / contraction member 740 may be provided to apply the urging force to the expansion / contraction member 740, or a magnet may be provided to apply a magnetic force to the expansion / contraction member 740. good.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotating plate 730 is used as a means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and a means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

  In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided projection 743b receives a load first, and is radially outward from the first guided projection 743b. Although the case where the second guided protrusion 744b to be arranged receives a load later has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and the load is simultaneously transmitted to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b. It may be configured as follows.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the expansion and contraction displacement member 740 includes two projections, that is, the first guided projection 743b and the second guided projection 744b, is not limited to this. For example, one protruding portion may be configured to protrude obliquely with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion and contraction displacement member 740, a function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be provided in one projection.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the outer circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state has been described. It is not limited. For example, a projecting portion is formed outside the circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the first guided projection 743b can be pushed outward in the radial direction by the projecting portion. Aiming displacement can be assisted.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change of the rendering member 700 at the displacement lower end position and relaxes the degree of the posture change of the rendering member 700 that is allowed at the upper and lower middle positions is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the degree of change in the attitude of the effect member 700 may be increased toward the lower end position of the displacement.

  In addition, the degree of the posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the generation position of the acting force on the effect member 700, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

  That is, the contact area between the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arc-shaped hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the distal end portion of the lower arm member 630 for each portion, so that the arc-shaped hole 634, the auxiliary protrusion 712, Can be changed.

  The degree of the posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. For example, unevenness may be provided on the plate front surface of the main body member 601 disposed opposite to the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 to change the interval with the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, the posture change of the rendering member 700 is easily allowed in the plate front surface of the main body member 601 or in a portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress the posture change in a portion where the interval is small. Further, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the rendering member 700 approaches the lower end.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700 is not changed is described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a resistance increasing / decreasing device that can increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. As the resistance increasing / decreasing device, a brake device capable of increasing / decreasing frictional resistance, a device for increasing / decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device extending to a position where the displacement of the lower arm member 630 can be mechanically regulated may be used. . In the case of a device using a magnetic force, the device is easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) close to the distal end side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as the arrangement position of the effect member 700 moves downward, a large displacement is allowed as a displacement in the enlargement direction, and after the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed, Although the case where the displacement occurs has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the control may be performed so that the displacement in the enlargement direction occurs during the displacement of the effect member 700 in the vertical direction. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is moved left and right by displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction in which the production member 700 is reduced (displaced radially inward) while the production member 700 is displaced downward. The effect of changing from a long posture to a vertically long posture can be offset, and a change in posture of the effect member 700 in the forward tilt direction can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is displaced up and down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the center of the center frame 86, and the effecting member 700 extends to the front side of the center frame 86 in the collectively arranged state, and the state changes to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. It may be configured to change to a larger state.

  In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to open an opening in the front part of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second-layer glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 that covers the front surface of the game area. In addition, the second-layer glass unit is inclined from the front-rear position similar to the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front side toward the upper side, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17. Is preferred.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 is easily inclined depending on the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an urging means such as a spring for generating an urging force is disposed between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744, and the posture of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. You may comprise so that it may change. In this case, since the inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily achieved.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electric wiring DK1. In particular, by wrapping the cable tube around a portion disposed above the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main wiring member 601 and the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electric wiring DK1.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide concave portion 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By executing the operation control of the driving device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is temporarily fixed by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing device such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 may be limited.

  Further, the fastening position of the electric wiring DK2 can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electric wiring DK2 disposed through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a retaining position (for example, a throttle 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connection position. Alternatively, a fastening position may be provided closer to the vertical slide member 820 than the connection position.

  Further, the means for fixing the electric wiring DK2 is not limited to the use for the electric wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to hold the electric wiring DK1 of the scaling unit 600. That is, by reducing the width of a part of the arrangement part 635 where the electric wiring DK1 is arranged, the displacement may be limited by sandwiching the electric wiring DK1 or the inside of the arrangement part 635 may be configured. Alternatively, the electric wiring DK1 may be temporarily fixed with a fixing tool such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the arrangement portion 635 as a wiring path of the electric wiring DK1.

  In this case, the target to which the electric wiring DK1 is temporarily fixed may be the lower arm member 630 provided with the arrangement portion 635, or may be the effect member 700 disposed on the distal end side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. Alternatively, the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

  In the first embodiment, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-back direction) in which the wiring arm member 870 approaches and separates from the upper, lower, left, and right planes in correspondence with the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 on the upper, lower, left, and right planes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front-rear, left-right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up-down direction. The direction may be inclined and displaced.

  In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may have the same diameter.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced in the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b, and electric wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electric wiring may be configured to be changeable by a change in the posture of the arm member.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged separately.

  In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid that displaces the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further moving the wiring arm member 870 away from the vertical slide member 820 during the rotational displacement of the wing member 854, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Drive control can be performed as follows.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the effecting member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is changed to the extended state or the enlarged state occurs in the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, when the wing member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 having the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the rendering member 700 is disposed in a gap between the shielding design members 760 of the rendering member 700 in a discrete state, the rendering member 700 May be configured to be changeable to an enlarged state.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800, and to prevent a state change of the effect member 700 from being expected from the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the wing member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured to be the same as the shape of the guide route DL1 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends in a lateral width longer than the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. .

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path for causing the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to flow down, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path of a ball entering the general winning opening 63, may be used as a path of a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or may be shared. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path of a sphere that has passed through the out port 71.

  Further, since the arrangement of the winning ports 63, 64, 640, and 65 is set at an arbitrary position in the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow path LM1 can also be arbitrarily set. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to the case where the intermediate flow path LM1 is arranged on the back side of the game area.
For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (such as inside the glass unit 16). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section that flows down along a path in front view of a ball flowing down the game area.

  Further, for the purpose of putting the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to approach the left and right center sides of the game area. Therefore, a path that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the illuminated board of the horizontal board unit 166 is arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the up-down direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, like a hemispherical lighting device 613, the illuminated substrate may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  Further, the entire range of the electric decoration substrate is not limited to the one covered by the first decoration member 171. For example, a part of the illuminated substrate may not be shielded, and light emitted from a light emitting unit such as an LED may be directly visible.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a step shape, a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is stopped may be formed alternately.

  In addition, by fixing the guide hole 733 formed in a step shape to a part of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or abut at different displacement trajectories or different displacement timings.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right of the launch effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illuminated substrates has been described. is not. For example, the horizontal substrate unit 166 and the vertical substrate unit 167 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 may be configured with a plurality of illuminated substrates. Further, a portion (left and right long portion) corresponding to the horizontally long groove portion 171a of the decoration means 170 is configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of illuminated substrates. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, light may be visually recognized through the horizontally long groove 171a.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of increasing the direction of light irradiation, the present invention is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard illuminated substrates are used. For example, a light emitting unit such as an LED may be provided on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing the flexible substrate at a portion. Accordingly, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as an LED provided on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the light irradiation direction can be increased. In this case, it can be constituted by a single substrate.

  In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of a plurality, the number of configurations is reduced) regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusions A133b are formed at two places of the key device A130 has been described. However, the number (the number of formations) of the protrusions A133b may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is provided in the main control device A110 has been described. However, the number (the number of the provided) key devices A130 may be increased to two or more. .

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position of each configuration with respect to the other configuration, the arrangement direction (direction, posture, phase) with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration. May be changed. The arrangement order may be changed for all the configurations, or only some of the configurations may be exchanged. That is, the arrangement position, the arrangement direction, and the arrangement order of the components are arbitrary.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R directions) center. The opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged at the center in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the third connection wall portion A240 side).

  Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (the covering portion A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (the protrusions A271b) is the longitudinal direction (the arrow L) of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region). , R direction), the direction in which they are arranged in a direction (posture, phase) perpendicular to the direction of operation is described, but the direction connecting the pair of projections A133b (projection A271b) corresponds to the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R directions) of the second region) and the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R directions) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) are predetermined. Key device A130 (covering portion A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle (an angle larger than 0 ° and smaller than 90 °).

  Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening A260 (the covering portion A270), the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side close to the first connection wall portion A220 has been described. For example, the order of disposing the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering part A270) in reverse order to the arrangement order of the above-described embodiments (that is, in order from the side closer to the first connection wall part A220). ), And the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (the guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270)). Is done).

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is protruded from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end wall portions A272 and A2272 are shared by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall part A210.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), respectively, is not limited thereto. May be formed. That is, it does not need to be formed at a part that is lower in the outer surface of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. As other portions, for example, portions forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100, that is, the front wall portion A201, the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, and the left wall portion of the box covers A200 and A3200. A204 or the right wall A205, the back wall A301, the upper wall A302, the lower wall A303, the left wall A304 or the right wall A305 of the box base A300 are exemplified. Similarly, as the other portions, for example, the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, or the third connection wall portion A240 is exemplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is protruded from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end wall portions A272 and A2272 are shared by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall part A210.

  In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length of the operation unit A122 to a position protruding from the front surface (the surface on the side of the arrow F) of the operation wall unit A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 with the extension of the length dimension of the operation portion A122.

  In the above embodiments, a recess is formed on the outer surface (front) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom surface of the recess is the operation wall portion A210 (that is, from the front wall portion A201). Also, the case where the operation wall portion A210 is located at a position one level lower (the main control device A110 side) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer surface (for example, the front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200 is not limited thereto. The projection may be formed, and the portion of the projection that forms the projecting distal end surface may be used as the operation wall portion A210 (that is, the operation is performed at a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (on the side opposite to the main control device A110)). The wall part A210 is located).

  In the above embodiments, the case where the main control device 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 As long as the operator can be operated through the opening, the storage is arbitrary. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. As such a storage object, for example, it has a connecting portion connected to an opening / closing lid that opens and closes an outlet for discharging a ball from a ball channel, and the connecting portion is operated as an operator to open and close the opening / closing lid. (Structure, device) that opens and closes is exemplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where a push button switch or a key operated selector switch is adopted as the operation means (the switch device A120 and the key device A130) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other types may be used. May be employed. Examples of other types of operation means include a tactile switch, a rocker switch, a dip switch, a thumb rotary switch, a toggle switch, and the like.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation mode of the operation element (the operation unit A122 and the key A140) is pushing and rotating has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as the operation mode is provided via the openings (the openings A250 and A260 in the above embodiments). As other operation modes, pull-out, slide, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends like an operation button of a rocker switch), tilting (for example, toggle) As in the case of a switch operating lever, a mode in which the operating lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end as a fulcrum) is exemplified.

  In this case, the sliding direction of the operating element, the direction connecting both ends of the operating element that displaces the seesaw, and the falling direction of the operating element that tilts are in the longitudinal direction (the directions of the arrows L and R) of the operating wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the operability of the operation means can be improved by effectively utilizing the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  In any of the above-described operation modes, the shapes of the openings A250 and A260 when viewed from the front are shapes formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the operation element (a region necessary to allow displacement). Is also good.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and the end surface of the key A140 that is gripped by the finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b). However, the key A140 or the key device A130 is not necessarily limited to this, and in a state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of a surface or an end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by a finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (rings). (The outer edge of the portion A 272a or the square portion A 272b). In other words, at least one of the surface or the end surface of the key A140 that is in the off position or the on position is held in contact with the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When the key A140 is rotated (rotated), the end face of the key A140 may be slid with respect to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

  In addition, a gap between a surface and an end surface of the key A140 to be gripped by the finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), a gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the upright wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is defined by a tilt angle of the key device A130 relative to the printed circuit board A119 (an angle at which the tilt of the key device A130 is allowable). That is, at least one of the above-mentioned gaps is eliminated (an angle at which the key A140 or the key device A130 is brought into contact) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is hard to come off or be damaged or the solder is peeled off. . The prescribed angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In the present embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A133b may be formed at only one location or at three or more locations. In the case of forming at two or more locations, their circumferential positions (phases) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 project radially outward, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is disposed in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is provided radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the radially inward portion is provided on the outer surface of the base A133a of the key device A130. A configuration may be used in which a concave portion that is concave is provided, and the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is disposed in the internal space of the concave portion of the key device A130. In this case, if the concave portion is continued up to the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a so that the covering portion A270 can be put on the key device A130 (the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion) (the convex portion can be inserted). An opening for inserting the portion into the concave portion may be formed on the end face).

  In the above embodiments, the case where the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition, the ridge is formed on the guide wall A251. May be connected.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where two ridges (the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The number may be one, or three or more. In the case of forming a plurality of wires, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect another ridge to a position where the phase is different from that of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 by approximately 180 degrees. This is because the load input from the key A140 at the off position / on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

  The cross-sectional shape of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212, and other ridges, and the height of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210). ) And the width dimension (dimension in the direction orthogonal to the height direction of the cross-section disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end face shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, a shape obtained by combining these shapes, and the like. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may be a larger value.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the height of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212 (the dimension erected from the front (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210) extends along the extending direction. Although the case where it is fixed is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be changed along the extending direction.

  The height may gradually decrease as the distance from one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation angle of the key A140 (the phase difference between the ON position and the OFF position) is set to 90 ° is not limited to this, but is not limited to this. Phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 °, or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

  In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall portion A272) is an area corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferable to form it only in (a region required to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, The second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on the other side (opposite side from the one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled to the key A140 with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed in the shape.

  In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a rotation radius (a distance from the rotation center to an end face (a narrow surface along an outer edge of a surface gripped by a finger)) of a portion on one side of the rotation center and a distance from the rotation center. Also, the case where the rotation radius of the other side is different from that of the other side has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation radius (from the rotation center to the end face (gripping with a finger) The distance) to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may be openings having substantially the same size (radius).

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. good. As other front-view shapes, for example, a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape of a pentagon or more, and a shape obtained by combining these are exemplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200) has been described. It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be substantially orthogonal (that is, a form in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is along the directions of the arrows U and D).

  In each of the above embodiments, a part (three sides in the above embodiments) of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 is connected to the connection wall portion (the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion). A240), the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall portion.

  That is, in a front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation wall part A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall part A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. Are arranged (formed), but the operation wall portion A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 does not coincide with the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one line) is described. Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include a staggered arrangement, an arrangement dispersed at positions having no regularity, and a lattice arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually orthogonal straight lines). Further, in the case of disposing substantially in series (substantially one line), the disposing direction may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (box covers A200, A3200), and may be disposed substantially orthogonally. It may be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surface (the surface on the arrow F side) of the end wall portions A272 and A2272 is formed as a flat surface has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 are not limited thereto. One or a plurality of protrusions or ridges (ribs) may be erected from the front (the surface on the side of the arrow F) of the above.

  In this case, the ridges (ribs) (for example, portions formed to extend in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) are end face walls when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow B). It is preferable to extend radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271) outward in the radial direction. Further, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are provided at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Thereby, when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edge of the end face wall portions A272 and A2272, and even if the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the key A140 removal direction (arrow F direction). This is because breakage of the end wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the ridges (ribs).

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in a continuous annular shape in a front view in the circumferential direction.
A plurality of such ridges (ribs) may be provided with different diameters (ie, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the upright end surface of the upright wall A209 is retracted from the height position of the upright end surface of the upright walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). (Positioned on the side that is separated), but the present invention is not limited to this, and another standing wall A208, A280, A290 may be retracted.

  Further, the retreat amount of each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference surface may be different from the receding amounts of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, respectively. Further, the amount of retreat may be changed in the one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290.

  In this case, it is preferable to reduce the amount of retreat from the reference plane of the upright end face as the upright wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. The printed circuit board A119 is more distant from the fastening hole A206a as compared with the nearer area, because the regulation by the screw ASC is weaker. When the standing wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a, the amount of retreat from the reference plane of the standing front end surface is reduced by reducing the amount of retreat from the reference surface when the degree of adhesion with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened. This is because it is easy to secure the close contact between the standing end surface of the standing wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 on all the standing walls.

  For example, in this embodiment, assuming that the standing end surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference surface, the fastening holes A206a (in the order of the standing wall A280, the standing wall A290, and the standing wall A208). Since the distance from the standing wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the standing end surface of the standing wall A208). Is preferable to minimize the amount of retreat from the reference plane.

  Further, the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may also be changed so that the retreat amount from the reference plane becomes smaller as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the upright end surfaces of the one upright walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be inclined surfaces with respect to the front wall portions A201 of the box covers A200, A3200, for example.

In the above embodiments, the case where the setting value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display in the setting change mode has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, the information may be displayed on another display device.
As other display devices, for example, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84 and the like are exemplified.

  Further, a configuration in which the set value is not displayed on any of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may be adopted.

  In this case, when the setting change mode is started, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, a first value) regardless of the set value before the start, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. A configuration in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times may be adopted. Unauthorized means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in a hall) can suppress the illegal acquisition of the set value. Further, when the setting is changed during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the set value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

  Although not described in the above embodiments, a first detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position about the hinge 18 as a rotation center) is provided. When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 has been opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is permitted, and the frame 12 is not less than the predetermined angle of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. When the release (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, the input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be invalidated). . This is because it is possible to suppress an unauthorized change of the setting.

  Further, a second detection sensor for detecting a relative position of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (a rotation position around the rotation axis A410 as a rotation center) is provided. , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are detected by the second detection sensor to be opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device). If the input from A130 is invalidated) and the opening (rotation) of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is performed. You may comprise so that it may be permitted. This is because it is possible to suppress an unauthorized change of the setting.

  Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the predetermined positions of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are determined. The setting change described above may be allowed when the opening (rotation) beyond the angle is not detected by the second detection sensor. In addition, as the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor, for example, a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch that displaces a mechanical detection unit with opening and closing are exemplified.

  In the above embodiments, if a predetermined electric connection line (an electric connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 is used. Although the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless the predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), this is not necessarily the case. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main control device A110. That is, as long as at least power supply device 115 is connected to main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether or not power supply device 115 is connected or disconnected) , Connection and disconnection may be mixed), and the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be allowed.
In this case, the set value accompanying the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main control device A110.

  In the above embodiments, if a predetermined electric connection line (an electric connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 is used. The case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless the predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110) has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the predetermined electrical connection line is not released from main controller A110, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if connected, However, even if the connection and the release are mixed, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed (that is, the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device). When connected to the A110 may be configured to set change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

  For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being illegally operated and paying out the game balls.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the ridge A2273 is extended in a streak shape as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end wall portion A2272 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of protrusions are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval from position AP1 including position AP2 to position AP5 to position AP6.
Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the ridge A2273 is formed intermittently from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5.

  In addition, the range in which the ridge A2273 or the plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or enlarged. . Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b.

  In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 as a rotation center, so that the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. 122 ( b)), the arrangement is described above. However, the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt another displacement mode.

  As another displacement form, for example, the board box is disposed so as to be slidable in the width direction (arrows L and R directions) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slid in the opposite direction (arrow L direction) with respect to the hinge 18. As a result, the substrate box is disposed at the second position, the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrows F and B directions) of the pachinko machine A10 (the inner frame 12), and the rotation axis is formed. A form in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) around A410 as a rotation center is exemplified.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed on each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one or both of the rotation axes A4410 may be It may be formed on the box covers A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, a divided body of the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300, and in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotation axis is formed from each divided body. A4410 may be formed.

  Note that the same applies to the above-described seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described. However, the rotation axis A410 is formed on the box covers A200, A3200 or the box base A300. May be. Further, as in the case described above, in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotation axis A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed respectively.

<First control example>
Next, various control contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, a part of the configuration is changed from the above-described embodiments, and the control example will be described. Description is omitted. In addition, in the configuration used in the present control example, there is a configuration in which the same configuration as that of each of the above-described embodiments is denoted by a different reference numeral. Since the specific configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration of each of the above embodiments, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment in that the configuration of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is changed. And the others are the same. A detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted, and differences from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and points that have been omitted in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

  FIG. 124 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 124, in the first control example, a first frame button 22za and a second frame button 22zb are added to the front view (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The differences are the same, and the others are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb play a role as operation means that can be operated by the player, similarly to the frame button 22 described above. In the first control example, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select an effect mode for various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10. This embodiment differs from the embodiment in that the number of operation units that can be operated by the player is increased from one to three.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the frame button 22 is disposed on a substantially horizontal surface of the upper plate 17, whereas the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are disposed on a substantially vertical surface of the upper plate 17. It is configured to be disposed in. Further, the frame button 22 is arranged at a position apart from the operation handle 51 (a position 300 mm away from the operation handle 51 to the left) in the width direction at the viewpoint (the viewpoint in FIG. 124) when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are disposed at a position not separated from the frame button 22 (a position separated from the operation handle 51 by 100 to 150 mm to the left). I have.

  That is, when the player is operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the frame button 22 is configured to be easier to operate with the left hand than the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb. In addition, since the operation buttons 22 arranged on the horizontal plane can be operated by moving the left hand in the direction of gravity, the operation buttons 22 can be operated from the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb arranged on the vertical plane. Is also configured to be easy to operate.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present control example, an effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the player can operate the operating means a plurality of times within one effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured. doing. In this case, by using the frame button 22 as the operating means to be operated by the player in the continuous-stroke effect, the player can easily participate in the continuous-stroke effect.

  In addition, during the execution of the above-described continuous-stroke effect, an operation for terminating the ongoing continuous-stroke effect is configured to be executable. Specifically, an operation means (frame button 22) operated in the continuous-stroke effect is provided. By operating the operation means (the first frame button 22za or the second frame button 22zb) disposed at the separated position, it is possible to end the continuous beating effect halfway. With this configuration, a player who is willingly participating in the continuous-stroke effect, that is, a player who has operated the frame button 22 a plurality of times, erroneously terminates the continuous-stroke effect (the second operation means). Operation of the first frame button 22za or the second frame button 22zb) can be suppressed. In addition, since the moving direction of the left hand when performing the operation is different between the frame button 22 and the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the operation means. It can be more suppressed. Furthermore, since the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate with the left hand than the frame button 22, it is possible to further suppress the player from erroneously operating the operation means. it can.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 2). The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, among the configuration of the game board 13, the details of the control of the game executed based on the ball fired on the game board 13 are described in detail. Although the configuration necessary to explain the contents of the flow down is described, and the rest is simplified, the same configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is actually provided.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is formed on the left side area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 provided at the center of the game board 13 and on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The player operates the operation handle 51 so that the shot ball has a strength to flow down the left area (left-handed game), and the shot ball moves to the right. A game (right-handed game) having a strength to flow down the region is configured to be executable.

  Two general entrances 63 are provided in the left region, and a first entrance 64 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left region can enter. Then, of the balls that have flowed down the left area, those that have not entered the general entrance 63 and the first entrance 64 flow into the out-opening 71 provided at the most downstream portion of the game area, and are not shown. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to flow down the discharge path and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in the right side region, the through gate 67, the second entrance 640, an open state in which the second entrance 640 is attached to the second entrance 640 and a ball can enter the second entrance 640, and the open state. An electric accessory 640a that is changed to a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, a specific winning opening 65a, and an open state that is attached to the specific winning opening 65a and allows the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. A variable winning device 65 is provided which is changed to a closed state where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the opened state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, the lottery of the special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, and based on the result of the lottery. Then, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Then, when the variably displayed third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, “7.7.7”), a big hit game (privilege game) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, an operation of opening the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) is executed. , A right-handed game). The ball is made to enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player can acquire many prize balls during the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the normal state in which the jackpot game is not executed, a game in which a ball is thrown into the first entrance 64 is performed, and in the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed, the right hitting game is variable. The player will aim for the winning device 65. Therefore, by making the area in which the ball is fired differently according to the game state, it is possible to make the player realize that the player is playing a game.

  Further, the variable winning device 65 in which the opening operation is executed during the big hit game is provided with a positive change switch 65e3 through which a ball having entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, two paths through which the entered ball can pass are provided in the variable winning device 65, and a ball flowing down one of the paths is provided. It is configured to pass through the positive change switch 65e3. Then, when the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the special symbol lottery result is a gaming state in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot as a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is over (the high probability of the special symbol). State) is given.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, a normal symbol lottery is configured to be executable as a different lottery from the special symbol lottery, and when a ball passes through the through gate 67 provided on the game board 13, Ordinary symbol lottery rights can be obtained. Like the special symbol, the normal symbol can be set to easily win (high-probability state) and hard to win (low-probability state). When the jackpot game to be executed based on this is completed, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. .

  As will be described later in detail, when a winning is achieved in a normal symbol lottery, a general winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is open for a predetermined period is executed. The per-figure-per-game is configured to be executed with different operation contents depending on the state of the ordinary symbol at the time when the per-figure-per-game is executed. Is configured such that the period when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is longer in the case where the common symbol game is executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the case where the symbol is executed. doing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the special symbol lottery state and the normal symbol lottery state are configured to be variable, the normal state (the special symbol low probability state, the normal symbol low Probability state), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol), and probable state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) can be set. In the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that the left-handed game is more suitable than the right-handed game. It becomes a game method advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, the time-saving state in which the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the probable change state are states in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that the right-handed game is better than the left-handed game. It becomes a game method advantageous to the player. As described above, by changing the game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set game state, the player can operate the operation handle 51 to perform the game while varying the firing intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be settable after the end of the jackpot game, and furthermore, as described above, during the jackpot game, the player is made to perform a right-handed game. In a period in which the player's advantageous state (big hit game state, normal symbol high probability state) is continuously set, a game (right-handed game) can be performed with the same firing intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation handle 51 from being complicated, and the player's willingness to play the game is reduced.

  Next, a flow of a game when a ball is fired by each game method will be described. When the player executes a left-hitting game, about 1/20 of the balls flowing down the left area enter the general entrance 63, and about 1/20 enter the first entrance 64. When the ball enters the general entrance 63, a privilege of paying out three balls as a prize ball is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and a privilege for obtaining a lottery right for the first special symbol is provided. In other words, entering the ball into the first entrance 64 provides a privilege more advantageous to the player than entering the ball into the general entrance 63.

  That is, when the player executes the left-handed game and fires 250 balls, an average of 3.5 prize balls can be obtained for the 10 fired balls, and the player has obtained the ball. It is configured such that about 20 balls can enter the first entrance port 64 before 250 balls including the prize ball disappear. As described above, the entrance (the general entrance 63) that can acquire only the prize ball, the entrance (the first entrance 64) that can acquire the right of the special symbol lottery in addition to the prize ball, By executing the game aiming at the game, the special symbol lottery that can be acquired for the specific number of balls while extending the period required to digest all the specific number of balls (for example, 250) is extended. Since the number of rights can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively granting the right to special symbol lottery in a short period of time. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, since the ball that has flowed down the left area is not allowed to enter the second entrance 640, it is provided when a left-hitting game is executed. The privilege to be given is always constant regardless of the game state.

  On the other hand, when the player executes a right-handed game, about 球 of the balls flowing down the right area pass through the through gate 67 and avoid the ball passing through the through gate 67 or the through gate 67. About one half of the ball that has flowed down the right area reaches the electric accessory 640a. When the electric accessory 640a is closed, the electric accessory 640a is buried in the game board 13, and the ball can pass through the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and flow down to the downstream side of the right region.

  Then, about one-fourth of the ball that has flowed to the downstream side of the right side area (below the electric accessory 640a) enters the general entrance 63 provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65, and is about three times. / 4 reaches the variable winning device 65. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. However, when the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball flows down the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 in the closed state, It flows into the out port 71 as it is. When a plurality of spheres flowing down the right area collide and the trajectory of the sphere becomes irregular, a part (about 1/400) of the sphere flowing down the right area is transferred to the first entrance port 64. It is configured to be able to enter the ball.

  That is, when a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, about 1/4 of the fired ball enters the general entrance 63 (three prize balls), Since the ball can enter the first entrance 64 very rarely, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game. Becomes

  When the right-handed game is executed when the time-saving state or the probable change state is set as the game state, the game per pug is executed with a high probability that the open period is longer than the normal state, and flows down the right area. Approximately one-half of the ball that is played is configured to enter the second entrance 640. In this control example, since it is configured to be able to store up to four normal symbol lottery rights, the ratio of the ball shot by the right-handed game passing through the through gate 67 is about 1/2. Even if it is designed to be, the symbol lottery can be continued without interruption.

  When a ball enters the second entrance 640, one prize ball is awarded, and a privilege that allows the right of the second special symbol lottery to be obtained is awarded. Therefore, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball is made into the second entrance 640 (a winning ratio of about 1/2, one prize ball) and the general entrance 63 by the right-handed game. (A winning ratio of 1/4, three prize balls) can be entered, and a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) can be executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls. Therefore, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

  As shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of nails are implanted in the right area, and the ball flowing down the right area reaches the flow path r1 that can reach the electric accessory 640a and reaches the electric accessory 640a. An unobtainable flow path r2 is at least formed. The ball flowing down the flow path r2 is configured to enter the general ball entrance 63 more easily than the ball flowing down the flow path r1 and passing through the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, when the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down in the flow path r1 with a bias, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed. That is, when the ball flows down the flow path r2, the ball enters the general entrance 63 to which more prize balls are given than when the ball enters the second entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be easily performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessively disadvantageous situation from being provided to the player in accordance with the falling state of the ball fired by the right-handed game.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 125, a configuration is adopted in which a ball flowing down the left area cannot enter any of the through gate 67, the second ball entrance 640, and the specific winning opening 65a. However, it is sufficient if the ball is configured so that it is harder to enter than a ball that has flowed down the right area. For example, it is possible to pass through the through gate 67 at a ratio of about 1/100 of a ball that has flowed down the left area , Or may reach the electric accessory 640a.

  The variable winning device 65 is provided below the variable display unit 80 (above the out port 71), and the ball flowing in the left area and the ball flowing in the right area enter the specific winning port 65a at the same ratio. You may be comprised so that it can be performed. With this configuration, the jackpot game can be executed without changing the game method being executed regardless of whether the jackpot has been won in the normal state or the jackpot has been won in the time saving state or the probable change state.

  Next, a case where a right-handed game is executed during the big hit game will be described. In the present control example, when the big hit game is executed, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. As a result, when a right-hitting game is executed during the jackpot game, the ball that has flowed down the right region enters the second entrance 640, and the ball efficiently enters the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible. In addition, during the jackpot game in which the balls easily enter the specific winning opening 65a to which many prize balls (15 award balls) are awarded, the balls can be easily introduced into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress giving a prize ball to a player excessively.

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed during the jackpot game, most of the right-flowed game flows down to the downstream side of the right region. Although details will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is configured to be switched between an open state and a closed state by opening and closing the opening and closing door 65f. When the opening / closing door 65f is closed, a flow path through which a ball can flow is formed on the upper surface of the closed opening / closing door 65f, and the opening / closing door 65f is provided from the upstream side (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 125) of the opening / closing door 65f. The ball flows down to the downstream side of 65f (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 125). In this control example, during one big hit game, the opening and closing door 65f is opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (10) of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. A round game can be executed a plurality of times, and an interval period (a period in which the opening / closing door 65f is closed) of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 second) is set between round games. I have. The period required for the ball to flow down the flow path formed on the upper surface of the closed door 65f (for example, 0.8 seconds) is longer than the above-described interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is configured to be. Therefore, during the jackpot game, even if the player continuously executes the right-handed game and a ball that reaches the variable prize device 65 during the interval period occurs, the ball flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f. During this time, the next round game is started, so that the ball shot during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning opening 65a without waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that most of the balls that have reached the variable winning device 65 among the balls fired by the right-handed game during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning opening 65a, The total number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game varies depending on the number of balls that enter the general entrance 63 out of the balls fired by the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to closely watch what flow path the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down during the big hit game.

  When the jackpot game ends, the above-described probability change state is set when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game, while the variable prize device 65 is set during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass through the probable change switch 65e3, the time saving state is set.

  Here, in the probable change state in the present control example, as described above, the probability of the result of the special symbol lottery being a big hit increases, and the normal symbol in which the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 67 is a lottery. The probability is set to be high. Further, the time until the lottery result of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is determined (hereinafter, referred to as a fluctuating time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal game state. In addition, the probable change state in this control example is set so that after the big hit game ends, the result of the special symbol lottery is continuously performed 200 times until it becomes a lottery result other than the big hit, and the special symbol lottery is performed 200 times. It is set so that the state changes from the probable change state to the normal game state after the consecutive hits other than the jackpot. In this way, by providing a limit to the period during which the probable change state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to be a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be. Note that the period during which the probable change state continues may be set to other contents, for example, may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as when the special symbol lottery is executed. A shift lottery for shifting the probable change state to the normal game state may be performed. Further, a period during which the probable change state continues may be set by time.

  Further, in the probable change state of the present control example, the open pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to open when a winning is won in a normal symbol lottery executed by passing a ball through the through gate 67 is a normal game state. The opening pattern is set to be more advantageous to the player than the opening pattern. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, the release pattern of the electric accessory 640a set during the probable change state is such that a ball enters the second entrance 640 than the release pattern set during the normal state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball can be opened becomes long.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example executes the right-handed game in the probable change state, and can efficiently execute the game by aiming at the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. Is configured. Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the probable change state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

  On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a jackpot is the same low probability state as the normal state, but the lottery is performed by passing through the through gate 67. The lottery probability at which the executed ordinary symbol wins is set to be high as in the case of the probability change state. Further, the time until the lottery result of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is determined (hereinafter, referred to as a fluctuating time) is set to be shorter than that in the normal state. In addition, the time saving state in the present control example is set so that after the big hit game ends, the result of the special symbol lottery is continuously performed 100 times until the lottery result other than the big hit becomes a lottery result. It is set to shift from the time-saving state to the normal state after a number of times other than the jackpot. In this way, by setting a limit to the period during which the time saving state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to be a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be. It should be noted that the period in which the time saving state is continued may be set to other contents, for example, may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as when the special symbol lottery is executed. A shift lottery for shifting the time saving state to the normal state may be performed. Further, a period in which the time reduction state continues may be set by time. Further, the period in which the time reduction state is set (the number of time reductions) may be changed according to the type of the jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time reduction state.

  Further, in the time-saving state of the present control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to open when a winning is won in a normal symbol lottery executed by a ball passing through the through gate 67 is a normal game state. The opening pattern is set to be more advantageous to the player than the opening pattern. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a set during the time saving state is such that a ball enters the second entrance 640 than the opening pattern set during the normal state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball can be opened becomes long.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example executes the right-handed game in the time saving state, and can efficiently execute the game by aiming at the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. Is configured. Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the time-saving state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand playability.

<About the variable winning device in the first control example>
Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 126, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and on the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form the variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has an LED board 65d disposed, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. Opening / closing unit 65f, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, a back cover body 65e and a flow path cover. A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, and a rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operating the link member 65i, and covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side with a screw to the back cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 127 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 127 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 127 (b), the variable winning device 65 has a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. In the specific winning opening 65a, a substantially rectangular opening is formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided to the left in FIG. 127 (b). A bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 128 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 127 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side, and a non-entry state. The state is changed to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper portion of the open / close door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second ball entrance 640 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even during the time saving state (including during the probable change state), it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being executed, and immediately after the jackpot game, the left-handed game is performed. The trouble of changing the game method can be reduced. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 127 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 127 (b). As shown in FIG. 127 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 128, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 128 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted, and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the passage cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. You. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by the positive change switch 65e3, which is configured by a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 and that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is done.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, the game ball passes through the above-described positive change switch 65e3 during the big hit game, so that the game state after the big hit game is changed to a certain state (special symbol pattern). High probability state) is set. That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a specific area for giving (setting) a probability change state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the special symbol state into a high probability state (probable change state) or a low probability state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the jackpot game. it can. Note that the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is at least one second. The operation timing and operation time of the operation of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round. In addition, when the jackpot B and the jackpot C are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round.

  Therefore, at the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the game ball that has won the variable prize device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probable change switch 65e3, but it is impossible to pass the jackpot A through the probable change switch 65e3 ( So that it is difficult to pass). Therefore, it is possible to control the rate at which the probable change state is given depending on the type of the jackpot, and it is possible to configure so as not to cause excessive advantage and disadvantage.

  In the present control example, by changing the switching control content of the switching member 65h according to the jackpot type, a jackpot game (probable jackpot game) in which a ball easily passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 and a ball Is configured to be able to set a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. However, without being limited to this, for example, the switching control content of the switching member 65h is the same regardless of the jackpot type. By setting and setting the opening and closing timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the jackpot game to be different, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during a period in which the ball can be passed to the positive change switch 65e3. A jackpot game (probably variable jackpot game) that is easy to ball and a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is difficult to enter In this case, for example, the length of the period (opening period) from the execution of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game (the first round game) or the interval period By changing the length of the game, it is preferable that the above-described probability-change jackpot game and the normal jackpot game can be set.

  With reference to FIG. 128 (b), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 128 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h, and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1, there is provided a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 and the positive change switch 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of winning the fifth round in a state where the gaming balls won before the fifth round have not been ejected, and winning the positive change switch 65e3 even in the case of the jackpot A.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (in this embodiment, 15 balls per one ball winning). Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the probability change switch 65e3, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a certain-variable gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 provided substantially at the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86. In addition, the center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent game balls from abutting against the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the third symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the identification information (first symbol) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Display means. The display content of the variable display of the third symbol is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152). This allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol that is variably displayed in the various varieties of display modes, so that a period until the special symbol lottery result is displayed (variable display period of the special symbol) elapses. By this, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  Further, in the present control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery, a variable time of a different length can be set as the variable time of the first symbol. Specifically, it is configured such that the fluctuation time of a longer time is more easily set when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when the result is a loss. Since the fluctuation time of the third symbol controlled by the display control device 114 is synchronized with the fluctuation time of the first symbol, the longer the third symbol is displayed, the more the corresponding special symbol lottery is won. You can increase the likelihood of doing.

  Therefore, the display control device 114 sets the third symbol variation displayed on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 as the third symbol variation so as to increase the variation time of the third symbol variation being executed. A variable display mode, that is, a variable display mode indicating whether or not the third symbol change is stopped and displayed is configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of the third symbol variation, and to make the player play the game while expecting the variation of the third symbol to be displayed with a longer variation time. it can.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will be briefly described. In this control example, one symbol row is formed by a plurality of types of third symbols, and three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Each symbol row is formed by a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Display). Then, the symbol rows that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order (for example, left, right, and middle order), and when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, a predetermined symbol row that can be visually recognized by the player. The result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player by the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed at the position (effective line).

  Specifically, when the third symbol of the same type is stopped and displayed on the activated line as the third symbol included in each symbol row, that is, “7.7.7” is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. When stop display is performed, the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to notify that the big hit has been won.

  Also, in a state where at least one symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, a state where other symbol rows are stopped and displayed in a combination that can indicate a jackpot win, specifically, a left symbol row and a right symbol row are A state in which the symbol is stopped and displayed at "7" and the middle symbol row is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, that is, a state where the third symbol can be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot winning, is referred to as a "reach state". It is configured to execute an effect that raises the expectation of the jackpot.

  In this way, by changing the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning according to the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be executed, it is possible to interest the contents of the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be executed, Monotony can be suppressed. In the example described above, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed at “7”, and the middle symbol row is displayed in a variable state, that is, the third symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot winning. The state in which the state can be displayed is referred to as the "reach state". However, the state in which it is possible to suggest to the player that it is highly likely that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the third symbol variation being executed is high. For example, once the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed in the above-described "reach state", all the symbol rows are not stopped and the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed. The state in which the fluctuation display is performed again may be referred to as a “reach state”, or even if the third symbol is not stopped and displayed as part of the winning combination, the player is notified that the jackpot expectation degree is high. Display mode (example If it may be cases where the third symbol is stop-displayed in the "Reach Development" and displayed display mode) "reach state".

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present control example, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 152) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like, or the third symbol display may be configured to stop and display the third symbol using a plurality of liquid crystal displays. The device 81 may be configured.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example, and FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram of the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the display content typically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152), so that, for example, three of left, middle, and right A symbol row is displayed. By configuring the third symbol display device 81 with a liquid crystal display in this manner, a variety of effects can be easily executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The third symbol (identification information for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of ten types of main symbols simulating numbers from “0” to “9”. It is configured. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 152) is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (stop-displayed) in a variable display (for example, the final display). (Variable display in which "7 / 7.7" is stopped and displayed), and the big hit game is executed after the variable display is completed. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol rows L1 to L3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols of each symbol row are stopped and displayed on the activated line Z1. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the pay line Z1 in the combination of the big hit symbols (in the first control example, the same combination of the main symbols), the big hit video showing the big hit winning is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the third symbol in the symbol column, The number of third symbols forming each symbol row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the third symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character is combined with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. . Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Or by moving the variable display area to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player is difficult to identify). ), But the display style and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  In addition, in the first control example, a specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as a third symbol variably displayed in the middle symbol column L2 which is finally stopped and displayed among the plurality of symbol columns. . This specific symbol is configured in a display mode to which identification information (for example, “development”) that is not used for the combination indicating the jackpot winning is added, and the specific symbol stops on the pay line Z1. By displaying, it is configured to be able to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more). And it is comprised so that it can notify that the fluctuation | variation display of each symbol row is performed again.

  With such a configuration, for example, even when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol columns L1 and L3 that have been stopped and displayed earlier than the combination indicating the jackpot winning, the special symbol lottery being executed is not performed. Since it is possible to keep the player having the expectation of the jackpot winning until the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the present control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the third symbol indicating the same numeral is stopped and displayed on the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3, the changing middle symbol column L2 is specified. A specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a location (for example, a location between numbers “0” and “9”). Thus, the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the predetermined period of the variable display of the third symbol has elapsed, so that a surprising variable effect can be provided to the player.

  Note that the condition for displaying the specific symbol may be other than the above-described condition. For example, it is determined that the number indicated by the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3 is a predetermined combination. The condition may be used, or the condition that the player operates the operation means during the variable display of the third symbol may be used. Further, the condition may be established based on the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, a variation effect in which a specific symbol is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the third symbol may be set in advance when the variation effect is set (at the time of the variation start).

  Also, when displaying a specific symbol, a method other than a method of interrupting and displaying a predetermined symbol column may be used. For example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol column. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, when a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the third symbols which indicates the special symbol jackpot winning is stopped and displayed. In a state where the specific symbol is reached, that is, in the reach state, the specific symbol may be replaced with the third symbol set before and after the specific third symbol, and the specific symbol may be displayed. Accordingly, even if any of the plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is shown, so that the fluctuation effect can be watched while giving the player a sense of expectation. .

  In this control example, two types of "big hit" and "missing" can be set as a result of the special symbol lottery, and if a big hit is won, one of the big hit types is set. By changing the game content of the jackpot game according to the set jackpot type, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, and the ball can be changed during the jackpot game. A normal jackpot game that is difficult to pass through the probable change switch 65e3 is configured to be executable. The combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 informs the result of the lottery of the special symbol and suggests (notifies) the set jackpot type to the player. .

  More specifically, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit B" or "big hit C" in which the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, the odd symbol number of "3, 7" is used. Of these, a variable display is performed in which one of them is stopped and displayed at the same time. Also, in the case of "big hit A", a fluctuation display in which any of the even-numbered "4, 6, 8" among the main symbols "0 to 9" is aligned in a double row is performed. In addition, in order to notify the player only that the jackpot has been won, and to make it difficult to grasp the set jackpot type, any of the jackpot types “Spot jackpot A”, “Spot jackpot B”, and “Spot jackpot C” is set. Even in this case, a fluctuation display in which any one of "1, 2, 5, 9, 0" is aligned with the eyes is performed.

  In the present control example, one symbol row is configured to be formed by the ten main symbols described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a symbol that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery. A sub-design (for example, a star mark display mode) may be provided. Then, according to the combination of the main symbol and the sub symbol that are stopped and displayed, information other than the lottery result of the special symbol may be configured to be notified to the player, for example, a combination of the main symbol indicating the jackpot winning. When the main symbol or the sub symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination (first stop display mode) other than the above, the lottery right that can be won by the jackpot is included in the lottery right of the special symbol stored and stored. When the main symbol or the sub symbol is stopped and displayed in the second stop display mode different from the first stop display mode, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution is predetermined. It may be configured to indicate that it is longer than the period. With this configuration, information other than the result of the special symbol lottery being executed (result determination result) is provided to the player according to the result of the third symbol change executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10 in which the jackpot probability is set lower than the departure probability, since it can be provided, only the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is deviated is continuously reported, and the willingness to play decreases. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 129 (a), the description will be continued. In the sub-display area Ds, the number of lottery rights (the number of reserved symbols) of the special symbol stored and stored is displayed. In the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that a maximum of four lottery rights can be held and stored, and the order is held or stored, or in accordance with the order used for the special symbol lottery. It is configured to display the corresponding reserved symbol. In addition, a comment for explaining the effect contents of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm and for explaining the effect result is also displayed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with higher priority than the first special symbol lottery, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. During the probable change state or the time-saving state, it is configured to easily acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved). That is, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the normal state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the probable change state and the time saving state. Therefore, the type of the holding symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds is configured to be switched according to the set gaming state, and when the normal state is set, the holding of the first special symbol is set. The identification information (special figure 1 reserved symbol) indicating the number of storages (special figure 1 reserved symbols) is displayed, and if the probable change state and the time saving state are set, the reserved stored number of the second special symbol (special figure 1) It is configured to display identification information (2 special symbols in 2 reserved symbols) indicating 2 reserved balls. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol lottery mainly executed in the current gaming state are acquired.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), a first display in which a guide display mode for guiding a player to a game method corresponding to a set game state is displayed at the upper left of the main display area Dm in a front view. A region Dm1 is formed. As described above, in the present control example, when a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a game state, a left-handed game is given to a player more than a right-handed game. When it is advantageous, the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is set, or the probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is set. If so, the right-handed game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game. Also, during the big hit game, the right-handed game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

  As described above, in the case where there is a game property that varies a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the game situation (the set game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot game), the player is changed by changing the game method. Can be prevented from getting tired of the game early, but the player can not grasp the advantageous game method at present, and the game is executed with the disadvantageous game method, and the player suffers disadvantage. As a result, there is a problem that a desire to play the game is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, in the first display area Dm1 (see FIG. 129 (a)), a guidance display for guiding a game method (right-handed game or left-handed game) which is advantageous to the player at present. The aspect is configured to be displayable. This makes it possible to inform the player of an advantageous game method in an easily understandable manner. In the present control example, the guide display mode is not displayed for a game method (left-handed game) that is advantageous in the normal state set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Thereby, when the game situation in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set, the guidance display mode (for example, the “right-handed” display mode) is displayed in the first display area Dm1 that has not been displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily notify the player that the advantageous game method has been switched.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, a prior guidance notification mode for notifying in advance that the gaming method advantageous to the player is switched before the gaming method advantageous to the player is switched. Is settable. Thus, the player can be made aware of the fact before the game method is actually switched, so that a suitable game can be easily executed immediately after the game method is switched.

  As described above, the notification mode (guidance display mode) for notifying the player of a game method that is advantageous to the player and the advance guidance notification for notifying in advance that the game method that is advantageous for the player is switched. By enabling the display of the mode and the mode, it is possible to provide a game without giving stress to the player.

  In the present control example, the guide display mode is configured to be displayed when a period in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In a state that is more advantageous than a right-handed game (for example, a normal state), a display mode of “left-handed” may be displayed as the guidance display mode.

  In addition, as a mode for guiding the display content of the guidance display mode to the player, a first mode and a second mode for guiding the player by emphasizing the first mode may be settable. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the enhanced guidance display mode in which the guidance display mode displayed in the first display area Dm1 is enlarged is displayed for 2 seconds after the game method that is advantageous to the player is switched. Detecting means for detecting a game method executed by the player (for example, detecting means for detecting that a ball has flowed down the left area, and detecting means for detecting that a ball has flowed down the right area) Is provided, and based on the detection result of the detection means, the game is not executed in the advantageous game method even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the switching of the game method advantageous to the player, or the disadvantageous game method When it is determined that the game is being executed, the second mode described above may be set. With this configuration, the player can more reliably play the game in a game method that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the state where the guidance display in the above-described second aspect is being performed, if it is determined that the game has been played in a game method that is advantageous to the player, the guidance display is switched from the second aspect to the first aspect. It is preferable to change the display content of the mode. As a result, the player playing the game with the appropriate game method is excessively guided on the game method, and the effect of the various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. It is possible to suppress the reduction.

  In the above-described example, only the guide display mode using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 has been described as the guide mode for guiding the player to the game method. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In response to the display timing of the guidance display mode, the voice output device 226 outputs a “right-handed” voice as a guidance voice for guiding the game method, or is provided on the pachinko machine 10 by the lamp display device 227. The light emission control for guiding the game method may be executed by sequentially turning on or off the plurality of light emitting means. This allows the player to easily know that the game method has been switched even with a sense other than visual sense (such as hearing) or the game method to be executed.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned first display area Dm1 is configured so that the display position is not easily changed with respect to other display areas. With such a configuration, in any game situation, the user can grasp the game method of the game to be executed only by checking the specific portion (for example, the upper left side) of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, the fourth symbol linked to the variable display of the first special symbol or the fourth symbol linked to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed at the upper right of the main display area Dm in a front view. The second display area Dm2 is formed. The fourth symbol is a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result of each special symbol lottery similarly to the third symbol described above, and is configured to be less noticeable than the third symbol described above. . The fourth symbol is configured to be constantly displayed in the second display area Dm2 when the special symbol lottery is executed. With this configuration, even if the effect using the entire main display area Dm is executed to enhance the effect of the third symbol change, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery is being executed. It is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with movable means (producing role) so as to cover at least a part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the above-described embodiments. However, the above-mentioned second display area Dm2 is formed at a position on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 which does not overlap (or hardly overlaps) the movable range, regardless of which movable means is movable. Therefore, even when the movable means moves during the third symbol change, the change display mode of the fourth symbol can be easily informed to the player.

  Note that, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 129 (b), the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 are shown in such a size that the player can visually recognize them. It is formed in a difficult size. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to watch the fluctuation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as a fluctuation effect of the third symbol, or when a movable character for effect provided near the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a falling character 700 or a rotating character) 840 (see FIG. 7)) is movable, and the size of the display areas of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 is reduced in accordance with the case where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is covered. The display position may be changed or may be temporarily hidden. This makes it possible to provide a powerful performance without discomfort.

  Furthermore, instead of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2, a fourth dynamic display is provided outside the third symbol display device 81 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. You may comprise so that a pattern may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide the LED for the fourth symbol in the same place as the LED for decoration provided in the pachinko machine 10 in correspondence with each symbol. This makes it possible to execute the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation display of each symbol, which is difficult for the player to understand.

<About the effect contents in the first control example>
Next, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 130 to FIG. 132, a description will be given of the contents of an operation effect for causing a player to operate a plurality of operation means (frame buttons 22).

  Conventionally, an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by a player is provided, and the effect mode is stepwisely changed according to the number of operations on the operation means during a predetermined period in which a specific effect is being executed. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect). In such a continuous production, in general, the production mode is configured to be changed in a stepwise manner, and when the production mode is changed to a specific production mode, the production mode is not changed to the specific production mode. Is also configured to provide an effect that is advantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine capable of performing such a continuous-hit production, the player can actively change the production mode of the production to be performed by actively operating the operation means. Can participate in games. However, since the effect mode set in the continuous hit effect is set in advance in accordance with the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, when a special symbol lottery has been lost, the operation means is operated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Is operated, there is no setting of an effect mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win. Also, when the effect content is set such that the more the effect mode is changed during the continuous hit effect, the higher the expectation of winning the special jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery is deviated and won. It is necessary to execute a continuous-stroke effect in which the effect mode is difficult to change in the continuous-stroke effect executed at that time.

  In this case, even if the player operates the operating means a plurality of times within the predetermined period in which the continuous hit effect is executed, the period in which the effect mode is not changed continues, and the willingness to operate the operating means decreases. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when all the production modes set in the continuous-stroke production, that is, when the production mode is changed to the final production mode based on the operation on the operation device, the operation mode is changed to the subsequent operation device. According to the content of the operation, the continuous-stroke effect can be ended without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period in which the continuous-stroke effect is executed. With such a configuration, the player is caused to perform a long-period production without changing the production mode for a long time, and the player's willingness to play the game and, consequently, the willingness to operate the operation means are reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the effect contents of the continuous hit effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be specifically described. FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a start screen of a continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the present control example, an effect in which the main character 801 fights with a plurality of enemy characters 802 is executed as a continuous hit effect, and the number of enemy characters 802 is determined in response to an operation on the frame button 22. It is configured to perform the effect of reducing

  First, when the continuous hit effect is executed, “100” is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode indicating the number of enemy characters 802, and the display area HR2 is used to prompt the user to operate the frame button 22. A button 803 as a display mode and a time gauge 804 for indicating a period of the continuous hitting effect (a period during which the operation on the frame button 22 is effectively determined) are displayed. More specifically, the button 803 has an operation mode (shown by a downward arrow in the figure) indicating a pressing operation as an animation for urging the player to press the frame button 22, a button 803 in a normal state (non-operation state), An animation having an operation mode of repeating a pressed state (operation state) is displayed.

  Here, the enemy character 802 is configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes. In the example of FIG. 130 (a), a strong enemy character 802a having a horned head and a normal enemy character 802b are displayed. ing. In the present control example, a privilege (a type of a variable effect executed after the end of the consecutive hit effect) that is provided according to the remaining number of enemy characters displayed in the display region HR1 is advantageous to the player. It is configured such that it is possible to suggest whether or not the enemy character is a enemy character. As the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 displayed in the display area HR1 is smaller, an advantage that is advantageous to the player is more easily provided. Further, when the remaining number displayed in the display area HR1 is the same, it is possible to indicate the advantage degree of the privilege given to the player also by the type of the enemy character 802 displayed corresponding to the remaining number. Make up.

  Specifically, it is configured such that defeating the strong enemy character 802a makes it easier to give a benefit advantageous to the player than when the strong enemy character 802a remains. With this configuration, the player expects to reduce the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 in the continuous hitting performance, and further, sees the continuous hitting performance while expecting a specific enemy character 802 to be defeated. , Can enhance the effect.

  In addition, the character 801 is equipped with a sword 801k as a weapon for defeating the enemy character 802, and by waving the sword 801k, an effect of reducing the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 is executed. The display mode of the sword 801k is configured to change as the variable mode of the continuous hitting performance approaches the upper limit value (maximum variable value). Specifically, the sword 801k is configured to be changed to a display mode in which the player can grasp that the sharpness of the sword 801k is falling rapidly. In other words, the sword 801k is a suggestion means that enables the player to predict how many enemy characters 802 can be reduced at the maximum in the present repeated hit production.

  With this configuration, when a specific number (for example, 10) of the enemy characters 802 are displayed in the middle of the continuous hitting production, the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 is determined by looking at the display mode of the sword 801k. Can be predicted whether or not can be further reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the effect result of the continuous hit effect, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

  The display mode of the time gauge 804 is variable according to the elapsed time of the continuous production, and the remaining time area 804 b indicating the remaining period of the continuous production is reduced from the left end of the time gauge 804. Is displayed. Then, as the remaining time area 804b decreases, the elapsed time area 804a is increased and displayed on the time gauge 804. With this configuration, the player can see at a glance the time that has already elapsed (the display mode of the elapsed time area 804a) and the remaining time (the display mode of the remaining time area 804b) in the entire period of the continuous hit effect. Can be grasped. Further, in the present control example, the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect is not displayed as a numerical value. That is, based on the elapsed time after the execution of the continuous-stroke effect and the variable state of the display mode of the time gauge 804 displayed in the display area HR2, the length of the period set as the continuous-stroke effect is given to the player. It is configured so that it can be grasped physically.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure of estimating the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect. Further, even when different lengths of time are set as the period in which the continuous hitting effect is executed, it is only necessary to change the variable mode of the time gauge 804, and the processing related to the display control can be simplified. In the present control example, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is configured so that the player visually recognizes the display ratio of the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b, thereby grasping the effect period of the continuous hit effect. However, in addition to this, for example, a value of “100” is displayed at the left end of the time gauge 804 and “50” is displayed at the center of the time gauge 804 as information indicating the ratio with respect to the display area of the time gauge 804. May be displayed at the right end of the time gauge 804. Thereby, the display ratio of the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b in the time gauge 804 can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In the present control example, the remaining time area 804b is configured to be variably displayed at a constant speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining time area 804b is large, that is, the left end side of the time gauge 804 Until the remaining time area 804b is displayed, the remaining time per unit time is smaller when the remaining time area 804b is smaller, that is, when the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the right end of the time gauge 804. The configuration may be such that the degree of reduction of the region 804b is large. Thus, as the remaining period of the continuous-stroke effect is reduced, the degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b can be delayed, so that the continuous-stroke effect can be executed without giving up to the end.

  For example, when the remaining time area 804b is large, that is, when the remaining time area 804b is displayed to the left end of the time gauge 804, when the remaining time area 804b is small, that is, when the remaining time area 804b is on the right end side. May be configured such that the degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b per unit time is smaller than the case where the remaining time area 804b is displayed, or the period of the continuous striking effect after the time gauge 804 is displayed. The length of the period up to the end may be set in advance, and the remaining time region 804b may not be displayed when the period has elapsed, and the degree of decrease in the remaining time region 804b may be advanced or delayed. Display control may be performed as described above. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period in which the continuous-stroke effect is set, so that the frame button 22 (operation means) is enthusiastically operated immediately after the continuous-stroke effect is executed. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 130 (a), the description will be continued. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Defeat an enemy with repeated button hits" is displayed as a display mode indicating that a repeated hit effect has been started. This allows the player to be notified of the execution of the continuous hitting effect and the contents of the operation to be performed during the continuous hitting effect in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, thereby making it easier for the player to participate in the continuous hitting effect.

  Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit production, a display screen as shown in FIG. 130 (b) is displayed. FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed after the frame button 22 has been operated a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 130 (b), when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hitting production, the number of enemy characters 802 decreases in accordance with the number of times of operation, and a preset value (maximum) An effect is executed in which the number of enemy characters 802 decreases to (variable value). FIG. 130B shows a continuous-stroke effect in which “3” is set as the maximum variable value, and the number of remaining enemy characters 802 on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is three. Is displayed, and the character "Remaining 3" indicating the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is displayed in the display area HR1. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), since the display mode of the enemy character 802 has reached the upper limit value (maximum variable value), the sword is suggested to suggest that the display mode will not change any more. As the display mode of 801k, a display mode in which the blade is tattered is displayed.

  In addition, even if the production mode of the continuous hit production is changed to the maximum variable value, the player is not immediately notified that the maximum variable value has been reached, and the display area HR2 displays the current time. The display of the time gauge 804 indicating the production period of the continuous hit production and the display of the button 803 are continuously displayed. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who is performing the continuous hitting effect to play the game by expecting that the effect mode of the continuous hitting effect is more variable.

  In the present control example, the degree of variability of the effect mode of the continuous hitting effect is configured such that the maximum variable value is likely to be different according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol. The smaller the number of remaining enemy characters 802 to be performed), the higher the possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

  Then, as for the effect of the continuous hit effect, different display modes are displayed according to the number of enemy characters 802 at the end of the continuous hit effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), when the number of the enemy characters 802 (the remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the continuous hitting production is “0”, the special symbol lottery for this time is performed. Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 131 (a)), indicating that there is a high possibility that the result is a jackpot (see FIG. 131 (a)). Is less likely than "", but the character of "CHANCE", which leaves the possibility of the special symbol lottery being a big hit, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 131 (b)), and "10 to 89". In the case of "", "???" is displayed in the sub display area Ds as a display mode that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to reduce the number of enemy characters 802 more during the continuous hit production.

  Further, when the number of enemy characters 802 (the remaining number displayed in the display area HR1) at the end of the continuous-stroke effect is “90 to 100”, the player does not actively participate in the continuous-stroke effect. Therefore, the character of "more repeated hits !!" that encourages participation in the continuous hit effect is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, instead of the special symbol lottery result, as the effect result of the continuous hit effect. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player who has forgotten to operate the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous hit production or who has not understood the operation to know the content of the game to be executed during the continuous production. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to operate the frame button 22 at the time of performing the continuous hitting effect next time.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) after the production mode of the continuous production has reached the maximum variable value, the end condition of the continuous production is established, and the continuous production is performed. Before the end of the effect period, the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), when the end condition is satisfied in a state where the continuous play effect has reached the maximum variable value (3), the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804 remains. , An effect similar to the effect of the continuous hit effect executed when the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is “3” (see FIG. 131 (b)) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is done.

  With this configuration, the maximum variable value of the continuous-stroke effect that is being executed this time can be reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the end of the continuous-stroke effect effect period. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, when the effect result of the continuous-stroke effect is displayed before the effect period of the continuous-stroke effect has elapsed, the remaining effect period (the remaining time of the time gauge 804) is displayed. Until elapses, an effect different from the continuous hit effect is executed according to the operation on the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 even when the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed early.

  Further, in the present control example, as a special effect result, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), a part of the case where the end condition is satisfied in a state where the effect mode of the continuous hit effect has reached the maximum variable value (3). An effect is performed. FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special effect result is set as an effect result of a continuous hit effect.

  FIG. 132 (b) shows the above-described maximum when the end condition is satisfied in a state where the production mode of the continuous production has reached the maximum variable value (3) (see FIG. 130 (b)) as the production result of the continuous production. A chase effect that further changes the variable value (3) is executed, the number of enemy characters 802 is reduced to 0, and a special effect result in which the character “Large Chance” is displayed in the sub display area Ds is shown. In the display area Dm, a character “Chase Occurrence” is displayed, and an animation is displayed in which the character 801 makes an additional attack on the enemy character 802 and defeats the remaining enemy characters 802. Then, the character “remaining zero” is displayed in the display area HR1. Further, the button 803 is not displayed in the display area HR2, and further informing the player that the effect mode does not change even if the frame button 22 is pressed further, and notifies the player of the timing at which the pursuit effect is executed. A time gauge 804 is displayed to notify the user.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to display the production result of the continuous-stroke effect before the production period of the continuous-stroke effect has elapsed, that is, the pachinko machine that has provided an end condition other than the elapse of the period as the end condition of the continuous-stroke effect. In the machine 10, by making it possible to display an effect result different from normal in a part of the case where the end condition is satisfied, the player is eager to end the continuous beating effect under various end conditions. Can participate.

  Further, in the present control example, as described above, after the staging effect has been changed to the maximum variable value, as well as the end of the staging period, the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (eight times) as the end condition of the stuttering effect. There is an end condition (shortened end condition) that is satisfied in the case where the special effect is displayed when a part of the shortened end condition is satisfied. This makes it easier for a player who has actively operated the frame button 22 to execute a special effect than when a player who has not actively operated the frame button 22 has performed the continuous hit effect. be able to.

  In the present control example, the shortening end condition is configured to be satisfied according to the number of times the player has operated the frame button 22. However, when the player operates the frame button 22, May be configured so that the shortened end condition is more easily satisfied than when no is operated.For example, each time the operation on the frame button 22 is performed after the production mode of the continuous hit production is changed to the maximum variable value, The lottery may be executed, and when the lottery is won, the shortening end condition may be established. Even in the case of such a configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 more frequently, the shortened end condition can be more easily satisfied than when the player does not operate the frame button 22 more often. In addition, in this case, the shortening end condition is satisfied immediately after the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is changed to the maximum variable value (after the effect mode is changed to the maximum variable value and the first operation on the frame button 22). For this reason, the shortening end condition can be satisfied without causing the player to predict the maximum variable value set in the running continuous rendering effect.

  In addition, in the above-described control example, the end condition can be satisfied after the effect mode of the continuous-stroke effect is changed to the maximum variable value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In a case where the mode can be changed to three or more effect modes, the end condition of the continuous effect is established before the effect mode of the continuous impact effect is changed to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. May be. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the first effect mode (first effect mode) in the continuous hit effect is being executed, the ratio is changed to the next effect mode with a probability of about 1/2. A variable lottery to be performed (first lottery) is executed, and an end lottery (second lottery) to end the continuous-stroke effect with a probability of about 1/100 is executed. When the variable lottery (first lottery) is won before the end lottery (second lottery), the effect mode is changed to the second effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the semi-variable value). When the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the continuous-stroke effect is being executed in the second effect mode, the first lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10, and the second lottery is executed with a probability of about 1/10. Run. In other words, the configuration is such that it is easier to win the second lottery when the continuous hitting effect is executed in the second effecting mode than when the continuous hitting effect is executed in the first effecting mode. The effect form of the continuous hit effect may be varied in accordance with various lottery results executed based on the operation on the frame button 22 in.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous-stroke effect, the effect mode of the continuous-stroke effect is changed by the first condition being satisfied, and the continuous-stroke effect is performed by the second condition different from the first condition being satisfied. It is configured such that the second condition is more easily satisfied than the first condition as the rendering mode of the continuous-stroke effect is changed. While making it difficult for the player to predict the maximum variable value that has been set, it is possible to execute a continuous hit effect in a variety of effect modes based on the operation on the frame button 22.

  Also in this case, the maximum variable value in the continuous striking effect is set in advance, and when the maximum variable value is reached, the staging mode is not changed even if the first lottery is won. Until the winning, the continuous hitting production may be continued without changing the production mode. Further, when the first lottery is won in a state where the maximum variable value has been reached, a process for increasing the winning probability of the second lottery may be executed without changing the effect form. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a period during which the second lottery is not won during the continuous hitting effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

  In the above-described example, the first condition and the second condition are both configured to be satisfied according to the result of the predetermined lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is used as in the present control example. A configuration may be such that at least one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied in accordance with the number of operations on the (operation means). As described above, according to the condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hitting effect and the result of the predetermined lottery executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hitting effect. And the conditions to be satisfied are established, and in accordance with the condition of each condition, the production mode of the continuous production is varied or the end timing of the continuous production is set, so that at which timing the continuous production is performed It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the effect mode is variable, and at what timing the continuous-stroke effect ends, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, it is configured to be able to notify the player that the more the effect mode is changed during the continuous hit effect, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, but is not limited to this. For example, even if the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the continuous hitting production, a special symbol lottery is performed in a special symbol lottery when the production mode of the continuous hitting production is not variable. You may be comprised so that it may notify that the possibility of winning is high. With such a configuration, even when a state in which the rendering mode is difficult to change during the continuous hit rendering is set, the player can enjoy the rendering mode to the end. Also, in the case where the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed in an effect mode that has not been changed from the initial state, whether the current effect result is an effect result executed because the frame button 22 was not operated, It is possible to make it difficult for a nearby player to know whether or not the effect is an effect based on the result of operating the 22.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes that can be set during the continuous-stroke effect are facilitated, and when a variable condition for changing the effect mode during the continuous-stroke effect is satisfied, any of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes is determined. In a gaming machine configured to be able to be set at random, a configuration may be such that a specific effect mode is more easily set when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when the result is a loss. With this configuration, it is possible to make the relationship between the variable number of the production mode during the continuous production and the expectation of the jackpot winning possible, so that the player is given to the player until the last moment when the production is completed. On the other hand, the frame button 22 can be operated eagerly.

  In this case, an upper limit value is set for the number of times the effect mode is changed during the continuous-stroke effect, and when the number of times the effect mode is changed during the continuous-stroke effect reaches the upper limit, the maximum value in the first control example is set. The same processing as in the case where the display mode is changed to the display mode of the variable value may be performed. Thereby, the frame button 22 is positively operated during the continuous-stroke effect, so that the variable number of the effect mode is limited to an upper limit in a state where the remaining period of the continuous-stroke effect (the period in which the operation on the frame button 22 is effectively determined) remains. When the value reaches the value, it is possible to shorten the effect period of the continuous hit effect.

  Next, the display contents of the icon display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a region where icon display can be performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the icon display effect is started.

  In the present control example, a plurality of types of icons can be displayed at a plurality of positions on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the icon display effect (icon Display notice) is configured to be executable. And it is comprised so that the result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to a player according to the place where each icon is displayed in this icon display effect, and the type of the displayed icon.

  In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent a player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, a portion where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of effect pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the effect of the icon display effect to be executed is determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery. However, when a method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance is used, there is a problem that the amount of effect data to be stored in advance increases according to the number of effect patterns.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the icon display effect is executed, the icon display effect can be executed in a mode in which a plurality of lottery results are combined. In other words, rather than storing in advance the effect pattern data indicating a series of effect contents in the icon display effect, the effect contents are determined for each part of the icon display effect, and the icon display is performed in an effect mode in which the determined contents are combined. It is configured to perform the effect. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the icon display effect in various effect modes using the effect data of a limited data amount.

  Although a specific description will be given later, in the present control example, when determining the effect mode of the icon display effect, the number of icons displayed in the current icon display effect, the icon display order, and the icon display location are separately set. , And the icon display effect is executed in an effect mode in which the selected contents are combined. That is, for example, when the number of displayed icons is four, the first icon type, the second icon type, the third icon type, and the fourth icon type are displayed. Is displayed, a display location where the first icon is displayed, a display location where the second icon is displayed, a display location where the third icon is displayed, and 4 The display location where the eye icon is displayed is selected.

  Furthermore, the display location of the icon is configured so that the same display location can be selected repeatedly. If the same display location is selected repeatedly, the latter icon is not displayed. Make up. With this configuration, it is possible to display a number of icons different from the number of icons selected as the effect mode of the icon display effect, so that the icon display effect is executed simply by combining a plurality of effect contents. This makes it possible to execute the icon display effect in more various effect modes than in the case of performing the effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), in this control example, five places of the areas 811a to 811d are set in advance as places where icons can be displayed in the icon display effect. Then, when the icon display effect is executed, a suggestion mode indicating the location where the icon is displayed is displayed for five locations of the area 811a to the area 811d.

  FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when a suggestion mode is displayed in the icon display effect. As shown in FIG. 133 (b), when the icon display effect is executed and the suggestion mode is displayed, the area 811a and the area 811b are displayed as the display places where the icons may be displayed in the current icon display effect. , A display mode (circled in the figure) indicating the area 811c is displayed. Then, of the areas displayed in the suggestion mode, the area 811a is displayed in a highlighted display mode (double circle in the figure) for indicating the area where the icon is displayed next (first).

  As described above, when the icon display effect is executed, by displaying the suggestion mode indicating the place where the icon is displayed before the icon is actually displayed, the player can receive the icon. It is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the effect of the display effect. Further, in the present control example, a display portion (specific display portion) where icons are more easily displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when the result is a loss is provided. Therefore, when the specific display location is suggested as the suggestion mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special symbol jackpot is won.

  In the present control example, a plurality of display locations are displayed as a suggestion mode displayed in the icon display effect. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the display location where the icon is displayed in the icon display effect to be executed this time without suggesting the display order. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, specifically, in which display order the icons are displayed.

  In this control example, the icon is always displayed at the display location displayed in the suggestion mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The icon may be configured to be more easily displayed than the non-displayed display part, and when a plurality of display parts are displayed in the suggestion mode, the icon is displayed in some of the plurality of display parts. You may comprise so that it may not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect mode of the icon display effect to be executed.

  Here, a flow in which icons are actually displayed in the icon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and FIG. 134 (b) shows all icons in the icon display effect. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a case where the display screen is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the icon 812a first displayed as the icon display effect is displayed in the area 811a displayed in the highlighted display mode in FIG. 133 (b). In the present control example, the icon 812a is displayed after the animation in which the area where the icon is displayed in the main display area Dm is destroyed and the icon pops out from the inside is displayed, so that the display of the area 811a is performed. The mode, that is, the display mode indicating the area where the icon is displayed is different from the display mode indicating the other area.

  Then, the area 811c is displayed in a highlighted manner for suggesting a display location where the icon is to be displayed next, and is not displayed in the suggested manner on the display screen shown in FIG. 133 (b). An area 811d is displayed in a suggested manner. In this way, as the icon display effect progresses, even after the icon display effect is executed, by adding information on the order in which the icons are displayed in the icon display effect and the display location where the icons are displayed, Pleasure for predicting the final result of the icon display effect can be provided.

  In addition, since the contents of the suggestion mode can be grasped while grasping the type of the displayed icon, the icon display effect can be enjoyed in a complex manner. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (a), the most common “square shape” is displayed as the icon display mode as the icon display mode at the beginning of the icon display effect. I have. In this control example, the easiness of the display is also made different for the type of the icon displayed in the icon display effect, and the type of the icon that is difficult to be displayed is different from the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is out. It is configured so that the display is easier in the case of a big hit. Thereby, in the icon display effect, the player can be interested in not only the number of icons to be displayed and the display locations, but also the types to be displayed.

  Also, it is possible to change the expectation of the jackpot winning based on the combination of the icon display location and the icon type, or to change the expectation of the jackpot winning based on the combination of the number of displayed icons and the icon type, It may be configured to vary the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning based on the combination of the icon types to be performed. Thereby, as the continuous hitting effect progresses, that is, since the effect result can be predicted while grasping the type and the display location of the actually displayed icon, the player can be more interested. This has the effect.

  After a predetermined time elapses from the diagram shown in FIG. 134 (a), icons are displayed for all of the four regions (regions 811a to 811e) displayed in the suggestion mode. Specifically, the icon displayed second is the area 811c adjacent to the area 811a, and then the icons are displayed in the order of 811b and 811d. In the example shown in FIG. 134B of this control example, the display order of the icons is set in the order of the area 811a, the area 811c, the area 811b, and the area 811d, and the area 811a has the icon type of “square shape”. An icon 812a, an icon 812b having a “diamond shape” as the icon type in the area 811b, an icon 812c having a “round shape” as the icon type in the area 811c, and an icon having the “V sign shape” as the icon type in the area 811d. 812d is displayed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present control example, the icon 812d of the “V-sign shape” is displayed in the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery compared to the case where the big hit is not won (in the case where the big hit is won). It is configured to be easily displayed. Then, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing and at which display position the icon 812d of the "V-sign shape" is displayed, the icon type, the display position, and the display order are separated. It is configured to be able to execute icon display effects by independently selecting and combining the selected contents. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the contents of the icon display effect.

  In the present control example, each icon displayed in the icon display effect is configured to be continuously displayed until the icon display effect ends. However, the icon displayed once is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the icon is deleted after a predetermined period elapses. For example, after the next icon is displayed, the previously displayed icon may be deleted. With this configuration, while suppressing the occurrence of a period in which no icon is displayed during the icon display effect, the effect of the icon display effect can be reduced if the user does not continuously watch the icon display effect. Since it can be made difficult to grasp, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Next, another pattern of the icon display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when icon display locations are set to be duplicated as icon display effects. The icon display effect shown in FIG. 135 is the same as FIG. 134 (b) described above, except that the number of displayed icons and the icon type are the same, and only the icon display order is different. Specifically, in FIG. 134 (b) described above, the display order of the icons is set in the order of the area 811a, the area 811c, the area 811b, and the area 811d, whereas in FIG. 135, the display order of the icons is The area 811a, the area 811c, the area 811a, and the area 811c are set in this order.

  In the present control example, when the display locations of the icons are selected repeatedly, only the icon type corresponding to the display order selected first is displayed. Therefore, an icon display effect in which the third icon (the “diamond-shaped” icon 812b) selected as the icon type and the fourth icon (the “V-signed” icon 812d) are not displayed is executed. Will be. Thereby, internally, it is possible that four icons can be displayed and that the icon 812d of the "V-sign shape" can be displayed, that is, the icon display effect, that is, the possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In spite of being in a state where the icon display effect for indicating high is executable, only two icons are displayed as the effect mode of the icon display effect that is actually executed, and the expectation degree of the jackpot winning Icon display effect is displayed in which only the icon types that are not high are displayed.

  Therefore, the effect of the icon display effect to be executed can be set in a complicated manner with respect to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that an effect that makes it difficult for the player to predict the game result can be provided. In addition, as an icon display effect that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is out, only two icons can be displayed internally, and only the icon types for which the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning is not high are displayed. Even when the icon display effect to be displayed is executed, the player is made to think that the icon display effect in which only two icons are displayed has been executed because the icon display positions in the icon display effect overlapped. be able to. This allows the player to play the game while having an expectation for the jackpot winning until the icon display effect ends.

  In addition, according to the example illustrated in FIG. 135, the configuration is such that the icon set first is displayed when the icon display location in the icon display effect is duplicated. May be configured to display the selected icon, or provided with a determination unit that can determine the type of the icon whose display location is duplicated, and configured to display the icon determined as the easily selected icon type. Alternatively, an icon determined to be an icon type that is difficult to select may be displayed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a fusion icon is generated by fusing icons whose display locations overlap, and the fusion icon is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, the contents of the delay effect in the present control example will be described. In the present control example, the player operates the frame button 22 to vary the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the operation result, and outputs sound in accordance with the variable mode. An effect (operation effect) for outputting a sound from the device 226 is configured to be executable. Further, when the operation effect is performed, a predetermined delay condition (for example, a delay condition that is satisfied when the determination unit that determines whether to perform the delay effect determines that the delay effect is to be performed) is satisfied. In response to the operation on the frame button 22, a delay effect of delaying one or both of the variable timing of the display mode and the audio output timing can be executed.

  The above-described delay effect makes the player feel uncomfortable by changing only the execution timing without changing the content of each effect to be executed (display effect for changing the display mode, sound effect for outputting sound). Only the player who has noticed the discomfort can grasp that the delayed effect has been performed, and as a benefit, a privilege (eg, a jackpot winning) advantageous to the player is given with a high probability. It has recently been used as an effect to show that

  However, the frequency of occurrence (execution frequency) is low because the advantage is used as an effect in which the advantageous privilege is given with a high probability, and even if the player plays the game all day, it is executed only once or twice. Was something. Conventionally, with respect to the delayed effect in which the execution frequency is low and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to each delayed effect pattern, that is, the display effect after the frame button 22 is operated. The display data including the display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the execution of the sound effect, and the production data dedicated to the delay effect having the sound data including the sound corresponding to the standby period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. There is a problem that the capacity of the effect data becomes large with respect to the execution frequency.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when a delayed effect is to be executed, a standby period can be set from the time when the frame button 22 is operated to the time when the effect for the operation on the frame button 22 is executed. When it is determined that the set standby period has elapsed, an operation effect is executed. That is, the timing at which the operation effect is executed is delayed from the operation timing of the frame button 22.

  With this configuration, the delayed effect can be executed without providing the effect data dedicated to the delayed effect. Further, in the present control example, a standby period of a different length can be set as a standby period from when the frame button 22 is operated to when the operation effect is executed. In addition, in the present control example, the above-described standby period is configured to be settable for each of the display effect and the sound effect. That is, when the delay effect is executed, the length of the delay period of the display effect and the length of the delay period of the sound effect can be made different. As described above, only by changing the length of the waiting period, it is possible to set a plurality of delay timings in the delayed effect, and it is possible to increase the variation of the delayed effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  First, an example of an operation effect performed in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed when an operation effect is performed, and FIG. 136 (b) is an example of a display screen displayed as a result of the operation effect. FIG. First, when the operation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 136 (a), a treasure chest 810 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the "treasure box is opened with the button PUSH!" Is displayed. The display area HR2 formed in the main display area Dm includes a button 803 as a display mode for prompting an operation on the frame button 22 and a time gauge 804 for indicating a period during which the operation on the frame button 22 is effectively received. Is displayed. The display mode displayed in the display area HR2 is the same as the display mode in the above-described continuous hit effect (see FIG. 130 (a)), and the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description is omitted.

  136 (a), a schematic diagram showing the state of the frame button 22 and the audio output device 226 is shown next to the diagram simulating the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. In the situation, a schematic diagram showing a situation where the frame button 22 is not operated and a situation where the sound indicating the effect of the operation effect is not output from the sound output device 226 are shown.

  Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 after the operation effect is executed, the treasure box 810 displayed at the center of the main display area Dm opens as shown in FIG. 136 (b), and the effect result is displayed from the inside. Is displayed as a result display mode 810a for indicating the "chance". Then, the comment “Chance !!” is also displayed in the sub display area Ds. The state shown in FIG. 136 (b) is a state in which the frame button 22 is operated, and a state in which a sound (“Packan”) indicating the effect of the operation effect is output from the sound output device 226, and is displayed. The display mode that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 from the area HR2 has been deleted.

  As described above, in the case of a normal operation effect, the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation effect (during the period in which the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the time gauge 804). As the effect of the effect, a sound (“Pakkan”) indicating that the treasure box 810 has been opened is output at a timing corresponding to the display effect that the treasure box 810 opens and the display mode in the display effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that has a sense of unity with sight and hearing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137 and FIG. 138, the contents of the effect when the delay effect is executed with respect to the operation effect (when the delay pattern is set) will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation effect, and FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic view. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for an operation effect.

  First, when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state where a delay pattern has been set for the operation effect, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), a sound indicating that the box 810 has been opened from the sound output device 226 ( Although “Pakkan” is output, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is the display mode displayed when the operation effect is executed and the frame button 22 is not operated (FIG. 136). (See (a)) is performed. Then, when the delay period (0.8 seconds) set as the current delay pattern elapses, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), the display mode (see FIG. 136 (b)) indicating the effect of the operation effect is changed. It is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, the delay pattern described with reference to FIG. 137 described above is a delay pattern in which the display effect is delayed by 0.8 seconds and the sound effect is delayed (not delayed) by 0 seconds. By executing the delayed effect in this way, it is possible to cause the player to execute an effect with a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the effect state after the display mode shown in FIG. 137 (b) is displayed is the same as the effect state when the delayed effect is not executed (see FIG. 136 (b)), the player can It is necessary to determine whether or not a delayed effect has been executed in a short period of time in which only the sound effect is executed without executing the display effect, and it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the effect contents of the operation effect. .

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 137, since the sound is output from the sound output device 226 immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (since the sound effect is executed), the frame button 22 is appropriately operated. It is possible to inform the player that the operation has been performed in an easy-to-understand manner. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure a delay period for both the display effect and the sound effect as a delay pattern of the operation effect. good.

  Although the state shown in FIG. 137 (a) is actually the state where the frame button 22 has already been pressed, the button 803 and the time gauge 804 are displayed continuously in the display area HR2. Make up. Then, similarly to the case where the frame button 22 is not operated, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is changed. That is, a display mode in which the remaining time area 804b is reduced is displayed. That is, the display mode when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed. As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated in the case where the delay pattern of the operation effect is set, the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a production mode that does not give a sense of incongruity to the player as a production mode during the delay period without using a new production. Further, even when the delay periods having different lengths are set, it is only necessary to change the length of the period during which the same display mode continues when the frame button 22 is not operated.

  Here, for example, the frame button 22 is operated in a state where there is almost no remaining effect period of the operation effect (the period indicated by the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804) (specifically, a state of less than 0.8 seconds), and the delay is performed. When a pattern is set, the remaining effect period of the operation effect becomes 0 during the delay period, so that the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. There is a problem that you can not.

  Therefore, in the present control example, it is possible to determine whether or not the present is in the delay period, and if the remaining effect period of the operation effect becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the delay period is in progress. When it is determined that there is, a specific effect can be executed.

  Next, the effect contents of this specific effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the specific effect. As shown in FIG. 138, when the specific effect is executed, a comment “Delay is occurring” for notifying the player that the current time is in the delay period is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the center of the main display area Dm, a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is displayed around the closed treasure box 810, and the special effect (in the figure, around the button 803 displayed in the display area HR2). (Indicated by a star)) is displayed. Also, at the timing when this specific effect is executed, the effect period of the operation effect is 0, so that the time gauge 804 without the remaining time area 804b is displayed. Then, in accordance with the execution timing of the specific effect, the sound of “chance” is output from the sound output device 226 as a sound mode based on the result of the special symbol lottery targeted for the current operation effect. This voice mode is variable based on the result of the actual special symbol lottery. If the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, a voice (for example, chance, If the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, a sound (for example, occurrence of a delay, etc.) for notifying the player that the delayed effect is being executed is generated. What is necessary is just to comprise so that output may become easy.

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of selecting at which timing during the operation effect the frame button 22 is operated. In the present control example, when the effect period of the operation effect (effective period in which the frame button 22 can be operated) elapses during the set delay period, the above-described specific effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even during the delay period, the delay period may be reset and the effect result of the operation effect is displayed when the effect period of the operation effect has elapsed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to use new effect data, and the length of the delay period can be made more complicated.

  Further, the execution condition of the above-described specific effect may be separately provided. Alternatively, the special effect may be configured such that only the operation effect performed during the change of the special symbol in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is executed.

  In the above, an example of the delay effect in the present control example has been described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. However, the effect mode of the delay effect is not limited to the above-described content, and the sound effect is more performed than the display effect. The delay pattern may be set so that the timing is delayed. Further, in this control example, when a delay pattern is set for an operation effect performed within one special symbol fluctuation period, the operation effect of the delay pattern is completed within the special symbol fluctuation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a delay pattern is set, an operation effect may be executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, for example, when a preliminary determination process for determining in advance the special figure reservation winning information newly acquired during the execution of the operation effect is performed, and the result of the preliminary determination process is a result of winning a jackpot, It is preferable to configure so as to set a delay pattern. Further, the delay period set as the delay pattern can be set up to the specific timing of the special symbol change corresponding to the special figure holding which is the result of the preliminary determination of winning the jackpot in the preliminary determination at the longest. , An unexpectedly long delay effect can be executed. In addition, in the case where a delayed effect is performed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations, the same operation effect may be performed as an effect corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the delayed effect is performed. Thereby, the effect result of the operation effect performed after the delay period has elapsed can be provided to the player without discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139 to FIG. 144, the contents of the effects of the collective effect and the battle effect will be described. In the present control example, as an effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a variable effect corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special symbol change can be executed. Further, as one of the variable effects, a variable display effect using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executable. Then, as one of the variable display effects, a collective effect and a battle effect are configured to be executable.

  In this control example, as a variable display effect performed during the special symbol change period for indicating the result of one special symbol lottery, a collective effect is performed in the first half of the variable display effect, and the second half of the variable display effect is performed. During the period, a battle effect is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the effect of the collective effect. In this way, by configuring the effect mode to be executed in the second half period in accordance with the result of the effect executed in the first half period of the variable display effect, the variable display effect continuously executed for a predetermined period Can be continuously watched.

  First, among the variable display effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the contents of the collective effect performed in the first half period will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141. The collective effect is an effect for assembling a plurality of characters (friend characters), and a battle effect for the latter half of the period is executed in an effect mode according to the number of ally characters gathered in the collective effect. The present control example is configured such that the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is more likely to be a big hit when the number of ally characters gathered in the collective effect is larger than when the number is small. Therefore, when the collective effect is executed, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting more ally characters to collect.

  In this control example, the display effect of the third symbol variably displayed on the display surface (the main display area Dm) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to execute a collective effect. Each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 variably displayed in the display area Dm is variably displayed with a third symbol corresponding to a different type of ally character. The third symbol corresponding to the ally character is included in the third symbol displayed during the collective effect (including the temporary stop display that appears to be stopped visually, and also the stop display described below). Is included, an effect indicating that the stopped and displayed ally characters have gathered is executed.

  The number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the collective effect is different depending on the directing period of the collective effect, and the third symbol is stopped when a long effect period is set as the directing period of the collective effect. It is configured so that the number of times of display is increased. In this manner, by configuring the number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be variable in accordance with the set effect to be executed, it is possible to determine how many friendly characters can be acquired (collected). Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to play the game while expecting more ally characters to gather until the collective effect ends.

  Further, in the present control example, different types of ally characters are set for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3 that are variably displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which display mode each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present control example, the number of friendly characters set for each symbol row is made different. Specifically, for the middle symbol row L2, another symbol row (left symbol row L1, right symbol row, It is configured such that more ally characters are set than in the symbol row L3).

  With this configuration, the player sees the collective effect while strongly conscious that the third symbol corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed for the symbol row in which many ally characters are set. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect. For example, the number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed as a collective effect is set to two times, and one type (character 1) in the left symbol column L1 and one type (character 2) in the right symbol column L3 is a medium symbol. In the case where two types (characters 3 and 4) of ally characters are set in the row L2, the first variation is to collect four types of (character 1 to character 4) ally characters in the present variation effect. At the 3 symbol stop display timing, at least the character 3 or the character 4 needs to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, and the ally character does not need to be stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3. . Therefore, the player can be interested in which ally character is stopped and displayed in which symbol row at which timing, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the specific effect contents of the collective effect executed in the present control example will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen displayed when the collective effect is started, and FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram illustrating a friend character that can be acquired in the collective effect. FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the displayed display screen, and FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen when a friendly character is acquired in a collective effect, and FIG. Is a diagram showing an example of an end screen of the collective effect.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), when the collective effect is executed, the display mode of the third symbol set in the symbol columns L1 to L3 is changed, and the third symbol in the left symbol column L1 is stopped and displayed. A left preliminary symbol display area 900a in which preliminary symbols are displayed is formed so as to accompany the left third symbol display area 901a to be displayed. Similarly, a middle spare symbol display area 900b for displaying a middle spare symbol is formed so as to accompany the middle third symbol display area 901b in which the third symbol of the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, and the right symbol row L3 A right preliminary symbol display area 900c for displaying a right preliminary symbol is formed so as to accompany the right third symbol display area 901c in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the character “L” is displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, and the character “H” is displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c. On the other hand, when the character of “go” is stopped and displayed, the collective effect is started, and the character of “start of collective effect” indicating that the collective effect has been executed is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (a), the start timing of the collective effect is displayed, and the preliminary symbol for indicating that the collective effect is started is stopped in each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c. Although the displayed display screen has been described, each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c may be used for other effects, for example, an effect that straddles a continuously performed variable effect (continuous effect). ) Is executed, each preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, “continuous” characters) in each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c to indicate that a continuous effect is being executed, Each spare symbol may be stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, the character “probably changing”) for indicating the currently set gaming state.

  Further, a preliminary symbol may be used as an effect for invoking whether or not the collective effect is executed. Is stopped and the large symbol is stopped and displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a that is first stopped and displayed, and the preliminary symbol “go” is stopped and displayed in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c that is stopped next. May be configured to stop and display the “X” preliminary symbol in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b that is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing the player to predict whether or not the collective effect is to be executed according to the stop display mode of each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

  In this control example, at the start timing of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139 (a), the third symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed in a normal display mode. Then, regardless of the stop display mode of the third symbol, the preliminary symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to use a dedicated stop display control and a dedicated third symbol type for the third symbol as display control when the collective effect is started, and the processing load of the display control is eliminated. Can be reduced.

  In the present control example, by configuring the third symbol to be stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the stop display timing of the preliminary symbol indicating the start of the collective effect, the player can know that the collective effect is started. Although the configuration is such that it can be facilitated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that only the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed while the third symbol is being variably displayed. With this configuration, the preliminary symbol can be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop display timing of the third symbol, so that the collective effect can be started at various timings. Further, there is no need to execute stop display control for stopping and displaying (temporarily stopping) the third symbol in accordance with the start timing of the collective effect, and the processing load of display control can be reduced.

  In the present control example, the display screen indicating the start of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139 (a) is configured to be able to be displayed at a plurality of timings. When the collective effect is executed from the start timing of the special symbol change, the preliminary symbol is stopped in the display mode indicating the start of the collective effect at the stop display timing of the third symbol corresponding to the stop timing of the special symbol change being executed. When the collective effect is executed with the special symbol variation being displayed and being executed, the preliminary symbol can be stopped and displayed at a plurality of timings during the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation. It is composed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the production period of the collective production. Note that FIG. 139 (a) shows a case where the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific timing during the variation display of the special symbol variation, and therefore, is displayed in the display area Dm1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. The fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation is variably displayed.

  Next, when the collective effect is started, a display screen of the collective effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (b). When the collective effect is started, a display area HR5 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm. The display area HR5 is a display area in which the acquired (aggregated) ally characters are displayed, and an obtainable display frame corresponding to the maximum number of ally characters that can be obtained, in accordance with the production mode of the collective effect to be executed. (In the figure, seven display frames are indicated by dotted lines). At the time shown in FIG. 139 (b), since no ally characters have been acquired, no acquired ally characters are displayed in the display area HR5.

  By forming the display area HR5 in this way and displaying the obtainable display frame and the obtained allied characters, the player is notified in advance of the maximum number of allied characters that can be obtained in the current collective effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily evaluate the production contents of the group production. Furthermore, since the number and type of the already-acquired ally characters can be displayed as a history, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, a display area HR6 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the maximum number of friendly characters that can be acquired in the current collective effect and the number of acquired friendly characters are displayed as numerical information. 139 (b), the maximum number of acquirable ally characters is "7", and the number of already acquired ally characters is "0". “0/7” is displayed as the information display mode indicating the situation.

  When the group effect is executed, a display mode dedicated to the group effect is set as a display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c. Specifically, the third symbol in the display mode corresponding to each ally character and the third symbol in the display mode not corresponding to the ally character are stopped and displayed. The third symbols variably displayed in the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c are stopped and displayed before the preliminary symbols variably displayed in the respective preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

  In FIG. 139 (b), the third symbol (indicated by “?” In the figure) in a display mode not corresponding to the ally character is stopped and displayed in the left third symbol display region 901a and the right third symbol display region 901c. In the middle third symbol display area 901b, the third symbol in a display mode imitating "bird" is stopped and displayed as the third symbol in the display mode corresponding to the friend character. At this point, as described above, since the preliminary symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the ally character which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol in the collective effect is not acquired, but the ally character is acquired. When the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode, the acquired allied character is notified in advance.

  By configuring in this manner, the number and type of friendly characters acquired when successful acquisition of friendly characters in the collective effect can be notified to the player in advance, so that the player Thus, the effect contents of the collective effect performed this time can be notified step by step. In addition, during the execution of the collective effect, in a state where a plurality of display modes corresponding to the ally characters are displayed in the third symbol, the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the acquisition of the ally characters has failed. Thus, the third symbol corresponding to the ally character that cannot be actually acquired can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively uses the image data of the third symbol, which is a display mode dedicated to the collective effect.

  Thereafter, when the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that a friend character is acquired, the display screen shown in FIG. 140A is displayed. In FIG. 140 (a), as a display pattern of a preliminary symbol indicating acquisition of a friend character, “large” is displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, “collection” is displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and a right preliminary symbol display area 900c is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. Then, as a collective effect, a sub-display area Ds is provided as a guide display indicating that a friend character (tri-character) corresponding to a display mode imitating “bird” which has already been stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b is acquired. The comment "Tori GET !!" is displayed.

  Further, in the display area HR5, a simple display mode imitating "bird" is displayed in the fifth display frame from the top to indicate the acquired ally character. Here, in the present control example, a predetermined order is given to the ally characters that can be obtained in advance, and the order corresponds to the order given in advance among a plurality of display frames displayed in the display region HR5. It is configured so that the friendly character acquired at the position is displayed. That is, in the state of the display area HR5 shown in FIG. 139 (b), the player is notified only of the total number of friendly characters that can be obtained in the current collective effect, but as shown in FIG. 140 (a). In the case of acquiring one ally character, it is possible to make the player predict the type of the ally character that can be acquired in the running collective effect by the location of the display frame on which the acquired ally character is displayed. Become.

  Therefore, as the collective effect progresses, the effect form of the collective effect can be predicted in more detail, so that it is possible to keep the player interested in the content of the effect to be executed.

  In this control example, the shape of each display frame displayed in the display region HR5 is all the same, but the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a friend character corresponding to each display frame can be predicted. The shape of the display frame may be changed to some extent. Moreover, you may comprise so that the supplementary information which can predict the friend character corresponding to each display frame may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict the types of friendly characters that can be obtained in the current collective effect immediately after the collective effect is started.

  Further, in the present control example, as described above, the acquired ally character is configured to be displayed at a position corresponding to the order given in advance. It may be configured to be displayed side by side, or if the possibility of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is different depending on the type of obtained ally character, in the order of the possibility of winning the jackpot, You may be comprised so that the acquired ally character may be displayed side by side.

  Further, in the present control example, the total number of friendly characters that can be acquired in the collective effect being executed in the display area HR5 immediately after the collective effect is started is notified to the player. Without limitation, only a part of the total number of friendly characters that can be acquired in the running collective effect is notified to the player, and the number of display frames displayed in the display area HR5 is increased as the collective effect progresses. Thus, the number of friendly characters that can be obtained in the collective effect may be increased. As a result, even if the number of friendly characters that can be obtained immediately after the execution of the collective effect is notified, the number of notifications may increase in the middle, and the willingness to play is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the present control example, the timing of acquiring the ally character, that is, the preliminary symbol, can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times in the "large set" within the stage of the collective effect. Then, after the ally character has been acquired a plurality of times, if the preliminary symbol is displayed in a display mode different from the “large set” as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the group effect ends.

  In FIG. 140 (b), as shown in the display area HR5 and the display area HR6, a state in which a total of four ally characters of “elephant”, “dugong”, “bird”, and “bear” have been acquired. And “4/7” is displayed as the information display mode. A third symbol indicating “?” Is displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a, a “wild boar” is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and a third symbol indicating “r” is displayed in the right third symbol display area 901c. “Large” is displayed in the symbol display area 900a, “X” is displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and “go” preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c.

  In other words, while each of the preliminary symbols is displayed in a fluctuating manner, each of the third symbols is stopped and displayed, and after inviting the player to obtain “boar” and “rhino” as ally characters, the left, right, and middle order The preliminary symbols stopped and displayed are displayed as "large" and "go", and the state in which the "X" is finally stopped and displayed after more emphasizing that a friendly character can be obtained. Even in the case of performing the effect of ending the collective effect in this way, by making it difficult for the player to predict whether the collective effect will end or to acquire the ally character and whether the collective effect will continue to the end, It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (b), in the collective effect in the present control example, one of the display patterns ("large", "cross mark", "go") of the preliminary symbol for notifying that the collective effect is finished. The section is the same as the display mode (“large”, “collection”, “go”) in the case of acquiring a friend character, but is not limited to this, and, for example, informs the end of the collective effect. In a display mode (for example, “E”, “N”, “D”) that is completely different from the display mode for acquiring a friend character in order to notify that the collective effect is finished. A continuous display mode (for example, “E”, “?”, “D”) in which the display mode of the preliminary symbol is partially different from the display mode of the preliminary symbol may be displayed.

  In this case, when "E" is stopped and displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a during the collective effect, it is determined that the ally character cannot be acquired, and whether or not the collective effect ends is determined. Only players will be interested. That is, it is possible to provide an effect result that is advantageous to the player even if the effect result does not increase the number of friendly characters. Therefore, in the case of performing a collective effect in which a limited number of allied characters can be obtained, it is possible to increase the number of times the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

  When the preliminary symbol is configured to be able to be stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, the display control may be executed so that only the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the third symbol is not stopped and displayed. Thereby, the frequency of stopping and displaying the preliminary symbol can be increased. Furthermore, when the above-described continuous display mode is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) continuously, the display mode when the next symbol to be stopped and displayed acquires a friend character (“large”, It may be configured so that stop display is performed at “collection” and “go” (the possibility of stop display is increased). With this configuration, when the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, not only the collective effect is continued, but also the degree of expectation of acquiring a friend character can be increased. The effect can be further enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the end of the collective effect is notified in the stop display mode of the preliminary symbol, the next display using the ally character acquired in the collective effect is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. A comment “start battle” is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the effect to be executed. Then, a battle effect is executed. The contents of the battle effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144.

  Here, in the present control example, when performing a collective effect, it is configured such that various effect contents are independently selected, and the collective effect is executed in an effect mode in which a plurality of independently selected effect contents are combined. doing. This makes it possible to execute a variety of collective effects using a small amount of effect data as compared with a case where effect data (image data) is provided for each effect pattern executed in the collective effect.

  Specifically, the types of friendly characters that can be displayed in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are set in advance, and the friendly characters are acquired during the collective effect according to the variation pattern in which the collective effect is performed. The number of times to perform is set in advance. Then, the total number and types of friendly characters acquired in the current collective effect are selected independently according to the result of the special symbol lottery (variable pattern command type).

  Therefore, for example, in the situation where the number of the ally character types set only in one symbol row among the ally character types obtained in the current group effect is larger than the number of times of obtaining the ally character during the group effect, May occur. In other words, when a variety of effect contents are independently selected and a predetermined effect is executed in an effect mode in which a plurality of independently selected effect contents are combined, a combination of effect contents that cannot be executed (difficult) is determined. There is a problem that it occurs.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the result obtained by combining a plurality of independently selected effect contents is a feasible effect mode. When it is determined that the effect is in the effect mode, the exclusive effect is executed, and a result obtained by combining a plurality of independently selected effect contents can be provided to the player without discomfort. With this configuration, compared to the case where the effect data (image data) is provided for each effect pattern to be executed in the collective effect, the collective effect that is rich in variations using the less effect data can be performed without any trouble. Can be provided.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the above-described special effects will be described. FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion screen suggesting the last acquisition chance in the collective effect, and FIG. 141 (b) is an example of a display screen showing the result of the last acquire chance in the collective effect. FIG.

  In this control example, it is determined whether or not a result obtained by combining a plurality of independently selected rendering contents is a feasible rendering mode, and the determined result indicates that the rendering mode is not feasible (difficult). As a special effect that is executed when it is determined, a last acquisition chance effect is configured to be executable. In this last acquisition chance effect, an effect of acquiring a friend character is executed regardless of the fluctuation display and the stop display of the third symbol, and among the friend characters set to be acquired in advance, 139 and an effect for acquiring a friend character which could not be obtained in the effect contents of the collective effect described above with reference to FIG. 140 is executed.

  Specifically, after the end screen of the collective effect shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displayed, the third symbol is rockingly displayed as shown in FIG. 141 (a). Then, a comment of “Get a chance to get started” is displayed as a guidance display mode indicating that the last acquisition chance effect is to be executed in the sub display area Ds. When the variation display of the third symbol is resumed in the state shown in FIG. 141 (a), the last acquisition chance effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the end screen of the collective effect (FIG. 140) An effect of acquiring the ally character stopped and displayed in (b) is executed. Further, on the end screen of the collective effect (see FIG. 140 (b)), a friendly character that is not stopped and displayed is additionally displayed, and an effect of acquiring the additionally displayed friendly character is executed.

  When the last acquisition chance effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), “elephant” and “dugong” are displayed in the display areas HR5 and HR6 as the collective effect including the effect of the last acquisition chance effect. , "Rhino", "Tori", "Bear", and "Boar" are displayed in a state where a total of six ally characters have been acquired, and "6/7" is displayed as the information display mode. In the sub-display area Ds, the number of friendly characters acquired at the last acquisition chance and the guidance display mode for guiding the effect to be executed after the collective effect are “Last two GET !! Battle start”. Is displayed.

  In this way, by enabling the execution of the last acquisition chance effect, in the case of performing a collective effect by combining a plurality of independently selected effect contents, the combined result is provided without giving a sense of incongruity to the player can do. In the effect example described above with reference to FIG. 141, after the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) indicating that the last acquisition chance effect is executed, the last acquisition chance effect is executed. Although an example is shown, after the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) indicating that the last acquisition chance effect is executed is performed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again, thereby providing the last acquisition chance effect. , And the collective effect ends.

  Thus, when the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) indicating that the last acquisition chance effect is executed is executed, the game is performed while giving an interest in whether or not the last acquisition chance effect is executed. Can be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142 to FIG. 144, the contents of the battle effect will be described. This battle effect is an effect that is executed after the end of the collective effect, and an effect according to the effect result of the collective effect, that is, the number of ally characters acquired in the collective effect is executed. In this battle effect, an effect is executed in which the ally character acquired in the collective effect performs a battle with the enemy character.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a battle effect has been started. In FIG. 142 (a), a description will be given of a battle effect executed after the above-described last acquisition chance effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the battle effect is executed, a display region HR7 is formed on the left side of the main display region Dm, and the number and type of the ally characters acquired in the previously performed collective effect As a display mode in which the characters can be identified, a total of six ally characters of “elephant”, “dugong”, “rhino”, “bird”, “bear”, and “boar” are displayed. A display area HR8 is formed above the display area HR7, and "6 attacks" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of battles executed in the current battle effect. In other words, in this battle effect, the player is notified that the battle effect in which six ally characters acquired in the collective effect individually battle with the enemy character is executed. In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the effect contents of the battle effect in advance, it is possible to appropriately determine the progress of the battle effect, and to execute an easy-to-understand effect.

  Further, an enemy character (boss character) 910 of the battle effect is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and a physical strength gauge 911 indicating the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is displayed in the vicinity (lower side). The physical strength gauge 911 is composed of a numerical display mode (indicated by “1000” in the figure) indicating the current physical strength value (HP) by a numerical value and a gauge display mode indicated by a gauge. Is displayed in a remaining HP display mode 911a indicating the physical strength value (HP) of the user and a consumed HP display mode 911b indicating the HP already consumed (see FIG. 142 (b)).

  Then, the physical strength gauge 911 indicates that the remaining physical strength value (HP) is full as a guide display for making it easier for the player to grasp the remaining physical strength value (HP). “MAX”, “200” indicating that the remaining strength value (HP) is a predetermined value, and “0” indicating that the remaining strength value (HP) is 0 are displayed. Then, in accordance with the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 reduced in the battle performance, the remaining physical strength values are displayed as guides for guiding the player to the production mode executed after the battle performance and the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning. When (HP) decreases to the predetermined value (200), after the battle effect, “SP reach” indicating that the SP reach in which the jackpot expectation degree is set higher is executed, and the remaining physical strength value (HP ) Becomes 0, that is, when the boss character 910 is defeated in the battle effect, a “great chance” indicating that the expectation of the jackpot winning is high is displayed.

  With such a configuration, the effect of the battle effect and the subsequent game content can be associated and grasped, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect. Further, even if the boss character 910 is not defeated in the battle effect, it is possible to let the player know in advance that the expectation of the jackpot win increases by reducing the remaining physical strength value (HP) to the predetermined value, An easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

  In the battle effect executed in this control example, basically, an attack effect in which one ally character attacks the boss character 910 is executed, and one of a weak attack and a strong attack is executed as an attack pattern of the ally character. It is composed. When a weak attack is performed, the stamina value (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases by the minimum unit (for example, 100), and when a strong attack is performed, the stamina value (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases to the minimum unit (for example, 100). , 100) (for example, 200).

  Here, the contents of the effect of the attack effect in which the ally character attacks the boss character 910 in the battle effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (b) and 143 (a). FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a weak attack effect is executed, and FIG. 143 (a) is a display displayed when a strong attack effect is executed. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), when the attack effect starts in the battle effect, the attack is executed in order from the ally character first acquired in the collective effect among the ally characters displayed in the display basin HR7. Attack effect is performed. Then, the display mode indicating the ally character used for the attack effect is erased from the display area HR7, and the display area HR8 displays "5 remaining times" from which the remaining number of attacks is subtracted. In FIG. 142 (b), “Tori” is performing a light attack as the friend character 820, and “−100” indicating the physical strength value of the boss character 910 reduced by the current attack (light attack) is displayed in the display area HR9. At the same time, the numerical value display mode of the physical strength gauge 911 is subtracted and displayed to “900”, and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b correspond to the current physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 “900”. It is displayed in the displayed mode. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, “Tori Attack !!” is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the current attack is a weak attack. The display mode of the boss character 910 displayed in the main display area Dm is configured to be slightly variably displayed (expressed as a sweat display in the figure) with respect to a state in which no attack has been made (see FIG. 142A). ing. The display mode of the boss character 910 is configured to be variably displayed in a different display mode according to the magnitude of the physical strength value reduced (consumed) in one attack effect and the remaining physical strength value. By variably displaying the display mode of the boss character 910 in this manner, it is possible for the player to visually grasp the contents of the battle effect, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  Next, the contents of the strong attack production executed after the attack production shown in FIG. 142 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 143 (a). As shown in FIG. 143 (a), “bear” is performing a strong attack as a friend character 820, and the display area HR9 indicates the physical strength value of the boss character 910 reduced by the current attack (strong attack) “−”. “200” is displayed, the numerical value display mode of the physical strength gauge 911 is subtracted and displayed from “700”, and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b are the current physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910. Is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "." In the sub display area Ds, “Critical HIT !!” is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding that the current attack is a strong attack.

  Further, the display mode indicating the ally character used in the attack effect is deleted from the display area HR7, and “5 remaining times” is displayed in the display area HR8 after the remaining number of attacks is subtracted. Then, when the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 becomes 0 as a result of executing a predetermined number of attack effects in the battle effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 143 (b) is displayed. FIG. 143 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed when the boss character 910 is defeated as a result of the battle effect. As shown in FIG. 143 (b), as the last attack effect (the sixth attack effect) in the battle effect, the “sai” of the ally character 820 executes a strong attack, and the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is 200. The effect display in which the boss character 910 is defeated due to the decrease is performed.

  On the other hand, if the boss character 910 cannot be defeated as a result of the battle effect, a different effect is executed according to the remaining physical strength value (HP), and the remaining boss character 910 is configured. When the physical strength value (HP) is 200 or less, an effect display in which the boss character 910 escapes is executed as shown in FIG. 144 (a). When the remaining physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is larger than 200, a counterattack effect in which the boss character 910 counters is executed, and the battle effect ends, and the corresponding special symbol change is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the present control example, as the effect mode of the battle effect, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a cooperative effect in which a plurality of ally characters attack the boss character 910 simultaneously (see FIG. 144 (b)) is executed. doing. In this case, the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 reduced by one attack effect becomes larger than that of the strong attack, and the effect is advantageous to the player. For example, on the battle effect start screen shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the number of attacks executed in the battle effect is displayed less than the number of ally characters participating in the battle effect, It is configured to indicate that the production is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the details of the pseudo-offset effect will be described. In the present control example, in order to enable continuous execution of the special symbol change, the right to execute the special symbol change (the lottery right of the special symbol lottery) is stored up to a predetermined number (four) as an upper limit. Means. Thereby, even if the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of the special symbol change, the lottery right (special figure reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol change can be continuously performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol change for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is made different according to the number of lottery rights (number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means. More specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute a special symbol change with a longer change time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol change is not performed, and to acquire a new lottery right in a state where the number of lottery rights stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit. Can be suppressed.

  More specifically, in the present control example, when the number of special figure reservations stored on hold is 0 and the result of the special symbol lottery executed is out of order, the number of special figure reservations is increased from 0. It is configured such that a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is more likely to be set than when the result of the special symbol lottery executed in a large number of cases is out of order. When a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 14 seconds is set, a fluctuation effect for 14 seconds indicating that the special figure lottery result is out of order is executed.

  In other words, if the variable effect performed in response to the special symbol lottery executed when the number of special figure reservations is 0 is the above-described variable effect for 14 seconds, the effect of the variable effect is There is a problem that the player can easily determine that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of the display before the result is displayed, and the willingness to play decreases.

  In addition, in order to solve the above-described problem, for example, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of effect modes of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 14 seconds can be set. Since the effect data for the variable effect for indicating that the variable effect is out of order is increased, a new problem occurs that the data amount of the entire variable effect is increased. Furthermore, as a variation pattern selected when the result of the special symbol lottery executed in a state where the number of special figure reservations is zero is a plurality of variation times (for example, 14 seconds, 16 seconds, 18 seconds) Although it is conceivable to configure so as to make it easy to select, in this case, a load is applied to the control processing for selecting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, and the type of the fluctuation time to be set increases, In addition, there is a problem that a load is applied to the change display processing of the special symbol and the change display processing of the third symbol.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or when a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time longer than 14 seconds is set is selected, the above-described fluctuation of 14 seconds is performed. The effect is configured to be able to be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is not a winning, the above-described 14-second fluctuation effect is executed, and thereby the player's willingness to grasp that the 14-second fluctuation effect is being executed. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In addition, since the result of the special symbol lottery may be a big hit, even if the player knows that the 14-second variable effect is being executed, the player's willingness to play may decrease. Since there is no change effect, it is not necessary to configure a plurality of types of effect modes of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 14 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data amount of the entire variable effect. In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed when the number of special figure reservations is 0 is out of order, it is not necessary to select a variation pattern of a plurality of variation times. A load is placed on the control processing for selecting the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation, and the type of the fluctuation time to be set is increased, so that the fluctuation display processing of the special symbol and the fluctuation display processing of the third symbol are burdened. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of hanging.

  Next, the flow of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 146, the flow of the continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) will be described. As described above with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, the continuous-stroke effect is an effect performed using a part of the effect period of the variable effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By operating the operation means (frame button 22) by the player, an effect (operation effect) in which a specific display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed is executed. is there.

  Specifically, for example, as a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) executed by the main controller 110, a special symbol variation in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set is executed (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), The fluctuation effect is executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the effect period (60 seconds) corresponding to the fluctuation time (60 seconds) of the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 146 (b)).

  When the stuttering effect is included in the effect mode of the variable effect set by the sound lamp control device 113, the player with respect to the frame button 22 for 10 seconds from the time when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable effect. 146. A button valid period (operation valid period) for validating the operation (pressing) is set (see FIG. 146 (c)), and a continuous-hit effect is executed corresponding to the operation valid period (FIG. 146 (d-)). 2)).

  In this continuous striking effect, the display mode (in FIG. 130A, the display mode of the enemy character 802 and the display mode of the display area HR1) are changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation valid period. Is performed. This display mode indicates to the player whether or not a privilege (for example, an effect (SP reach) that makes it easy to win a jackpot, a jackpot winning) to be given to the player after the end of the continuous hitting effect is given to the player. In the control example, the upper limit value (maximum variable value) at which the display mode is changed during the continuous hitting effect is set based on the corresponding special figure fluctuation hit / fail judgment result (big hit lottery result).

  In the example shown in FIG. 146, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated 20 times (upper limit number of times 20) is set as the maximum variable value. Does not change. Further, in the present control example, after the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation valid period reaches the maximum variable value, if the operation on the frame button 22 is further continued and the end condition is satisfied, the continuous striking effect is produced. The timing for displaying the result can be shortened. In the example shown in FIG. 146, as the end condition for shortening the timing of displaying the effect result of the continuous hit effect, the end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated after reaching the maximum variable value reaches eight times. Is set to 8 times.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 146 (d) and FIG. 146 (e), a description will be given of the content of the operation performed on the frame button 22 by the player and the effect to be executed during the continuous hit effect period. FIG. 146 (d) shows a flow of the effect executed when the end condition is not satisfied during the operation valid period, and FIG. 146 (e) shows the effect when the end condition is satisfied during the operation valid period. It shows a flow of the effect to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (d), after the continuous hit effect is executed, until the frame button 22 is operated 20 times, an effect in which the display mode is changed according to the operation on the frame button 22 is executed. (Period A). Thereafter, during a period (period B) in which the number of operations on the frame button exceeds 20 and the number of operations on the frame button 22 becomes 21, 22, and 23 times (period B), the number of operations on the frame button 22 becomes the maximum variable value. Since it has exceeded, it is a period in which the display mode is not changed. Then, when the continuous-stroke effect ends (when the remaining period of the operation effective period becomes 0), a result effect for 10 seconds is executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 146 (e), the end condition is satisfied until the continuous-stroke effect ends (until the remaining period of the operation effective period becomes 0), that is, to the frame button 22 during the continuous-stroke effect. When the number of times of has been 28, the result effect is executed. In this case, since the result effect is executed in a state where the operation effective period remains, the player operates the frame button 22 during that period (period C) to change the display mode displayed as the result effect. In addition, a buzzing effect is performed in which a light emitting unit (such as an LED) provided in the pachinko machine 10 emits light or a sound is output from the sound output device 226 to make the result effect lively.

  As described above, in the present control example, if the end condition is established based on the operation on the operation means during the period in which the continuous hit effect is executed, the continuous hitting is performed before the end condition based on the passage of time is satisfied. The effect is finished, and the effect of the continuous hit effect is displayed. With such a configuration, when the continuous-stroke effect is executed, the operation to the operation means for changing the display mode of the continuous-stroke effect and the operation to shorten the effect period of the continuous-stroke effect are performed by the player. The player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

  Further, in the present control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous striking effect, the variable content (variable number) in the continuous striking effect is limited, so that the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested by the variable content of the continuous striking effect. It is configured to be possible. Therefore, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, an effect is executed in which the number of times of changing the display mode is small (in the example of FIG. 130A, the remaining number of the enemy characters 802 is hard to decrease). In this case, if the staging period of the continuous hitting effect is fixed, in the continuous hitting effect, a period in which the display mode does not change when the operating means is operated continues for a long time, and the player operates the operating means. There was a problem that motivation declined.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, since the end condition is satisfied after the variable number of display modes reaches the upper limit (maximum variable value) in the continuous-stroke effect, the effect period of the continuous-stroke effect can be shortened. In addition, it is possible to suppress the above-described problem from occurring. Further, in the present control example, since the operation content for the operation means executed to change the display mode in the continuous hitting effect and the operation content for establishing the end condition are the same, the player Thus, the end condition can be satisfied without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  Also, in this control example, even if the production period of the continuous-stroke effect is shortened, the operation validity period is not shortened. During this period, it is possible to execute an effect that is executed after the continuous hit effect (effect indicating the result of the continuous hit effect), and it is possible to execute a dedicated operation effect. In other words, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the effect to be executed next according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied (the end condition that is satisfied with the passage of time, the end condition that is satisfied based on the operation of the operation unit).

  In this control example, the same operation (pressing the frame button 22) as the operation for changing the display mode during the continuous-stroke effect and the operation for terminating the continuous-stroke effect is performed, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, different operations may be set. Further, the operation content of the operation means that is effectively determined during the operation validity period includes not only whether or not the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), but also, for example, the time period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. The length (so-called long press) may be determined, or the pressing interval at which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed may be determined. Further, a configuration may be made in which a period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed, that is, that the player selects an operation of not pressing the frame button 22 is determined.

  As described above, by configuring the operation contents of the operation means so that a plurality of operation contents can be identified and distinguished, it is possible to set different effect modes in accordance with the operation contents executed by the player, The interest of the game can be improved. For example, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is continuously pressed without leaving an interval of a predetermined period or more (for example, one second) during the continuous hitting effect, it is determined that the operating means has been operated, and the display mode is determined. May be executed, and thereafter, when the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds), a process for satisfying the end condition may be executed.

  In addition, the end condition may be satisfied if the player does not press the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (for example, one second) during the continuous hit effect. In this case, if the frame button 22 has not been depressed at least once after the execution of the continuous-stroke effect, the end condition of the continuous-stroke effect is satisfied without changing the display mode. A suitable game can be provided to a player who does not want to. In addition, for the player who operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect, the end condition may be satisfied midway (before reaching the maximum variable value) unless the frame button 22 is continuously operated. Thus, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

  Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute a guidance display on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to guide the player in a condition that the end condition is satisfied in an easy-to-understand manner. It is good to display a comment "If one second or more continues, the continuous-stroke effect will end" and a time gauge indicating the remaining time until the end condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to suppress the end of the continuous hitting effect at a timing not intended by the player.

  In the above-described control example, only one end condition is set as the end condition for ending with the operation valid period remaining, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be. In this case, for example, the end condition that is likely to be established may be made different depending on the production state of the continuous production. For example, when the remaining period of the operation validity period is 5 seconds or more, the frame button 22 is set. An end condition that can be satisfied when the button is not pressed is easily established, and an end condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is pressed is easily established when the remaining period of the operation effective period is less than 5 seconds. It is good to configure.

  Further, the content of the end condition may be changed according to the display mode displayed as the continuous hit effect. For example, the display mode when the maximum variable value is reached is the first display mode (the remaining number is 50 or more). May be configured to be more difficult to be established than in the second display mode (the remaining number is less than 50) in which the remaining number is smaller than the first display mode. With such a configuration, the end condition can be more difficult to be satisfied in a state where the number of remaining enemy characters 802 is large, so that a period in which the player thinks that the display mode is changed in the continuous hitting effect is changed. It can be lengthened, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the flow of the button effect (delayed effect) described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138 will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

  If the effect period of the variable effect is 60 seconds and the button effect is set as the effect mode, a button effect period of 15 seconds is set 10 seconds after the start of the variable effect (FIG. 147). (A)). The button effect period is formed from a button effective period (operation effective period) of 10 seconds and an effect period of 5 seconds.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, this button effect is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. (For example, a display effect for changing a treasure box 810) and a sound effect for outputting a sound (for example, “Pakkan”) from the sound output device 226 are executed, and the delay effect mode is not set. (In the case of the normal button effect), the display effect and the sound effect are executed in synchronization (at the same timing), and when the delay effect mode is set, the timing of the display effect and the sound effect is shifted. Be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 147 (b), the flow of the effect when the normal button effect is executed will be described. When the button effect is executed as shown in FIG. 147 (b), a button operation suggestion display for urging the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed as shown in FIG. 136 (a). This button operation suggestion display is continuously displayed until the player operates the frame button 22 (period A). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22, the display effect and the sound effect are simultaneously executed, and the operation result display indicating the effect result of the button effect (see FIG. 136 (b)) ends the button effect period. Is displayed continuously for a period up to (period B). Thereafter, a variable effect is performed (period C).

  Next, referring to FIG. 147 (c), in the case where the delay button effect is executed, the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 is immediately before the end of the operation effective period, specifically, the delay period ( At the point in time when, for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed, the effect when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the operation effective period ends (for example, the timing 0.5 seconds before the operation effective period ends). The flow will be described. As shown in FIG. 147 (c), when the button effect is executed, the effect is executed in the same effect mode as the normal button effect. Then, if the player operates the frame button 0.5 0.5 seconds before the end of the button valid period (operation valid period), a 0.8-second delay period is set, and 0. After 8 seconds, the display effect and the sound effect are executed.

  Here, in this control example, if the operation valid period remains after the delay period has elapsed, the button operation suggestion displayed before the frame button 22 was operated during the 0.8 second delay period. The effect display mode is configured to be continuously displayed. That is, in the present control example, when the delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, the display control device 114 is instructed so that the execution timing of various effects based on the operation of the frame button 22 is delayed by 0.8 seconds. Since the timing for setting (outputting) the display command is delayed, the display control device 114 waits until the display command is received, that is, until 0.8 seconds elapse after the frame button 22 is operated. Since the information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated cannot be received, the display mode of the button operation suggestion effect is continuously displayed.

  With this configuration, when a delayed effect is performed in the button effect, there is no need to separately set a display command to display a display mode corresponding to the delay period, and the delayed effect is executed. Control processing can be reduced. In addition, various types of delayed effects can be executed only by setting the lengths of the delay periods to be different from each other, so that the control processing for executing the delayed effects can be reduced. Further, in the present control example, since the delay period can be set for each of the display effect and the sound effect, more various delay effects are executed by combining the effect modes of the effects. be able to.

  Note that the above-described normal button effect, that is, when an operation is performed on the frame button 22, the display effect and the sound effect are performed without setting a delay period, but in this case, You may comprise so that 0 second may be set as a delay period. With this configuration, when setting a button effect, the same process is performed when setting a normal button effect and when setting a delayed button effect. Since the button effect can be set without changing the content, the control process can be simplified.

  Returning to FIG. 147 (c), the description will be continued. In the example shown in FIG. 147 (c), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period is 0.5 seconds, and the operation valid period ends during the delay period (0.8 seconds) ( Therefore, if the button operation suggestion display is continuously displayed during the delay period, the remaining period display area 804b of the time gauge 804 disappears during the delay period, and an unnatural effect is performed. There was a problem that would. On the other hand, in the present control example, when it is determined that the operation effective period ends (elapses) during the delay period, a special effect (see FIG. 138) is performed during the delay period (period D). It is configured to run.

  With this configuration, different effects can be executed according to the presence / absence of a delay period during the button effect and the operation timing of the frame button 22. Can be operated. In the present control example, the effect mode of the variable effect is set in advance, that is, whether the button effect is to be executed as the variable effect to be executed at the time when the variable effect is executed, and whether the delay period is set. Is determined, and when the frame button 22 is operated during the button effect, the effect based on the content of the button effect determined in advance is configured. However, without being limited to this, for example, When the fluctuating effect is executed, only the presence or absence of the button effect is determined, and when the frame button 22 is operated during the button effect, the presence or absence of the delayed effect and the delay mode (delay target, delay period) are determined. In this case, for example, a plurality of operations can be performed on the button effect, and depending on the operation performed during the button effect, the execution probability and the delay mode of the delayed effect Different It not may be determined configured to be able to.

  Specifically, the delay period may be set more easily when the player performs the second operation than when the player performs the first operation, or the delay period may be set based on the first operation. In such a case, the possibility that the corresponding special symbol lottery has won a jackpot may be higher than in the case where the delay period is set based on the second operation. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation and the frequency of execution of the delayed effect can be made different depending on the content of the operation performed by the player.

  In the present control example, as a result display period in which the operation result display for indicating the effect result of the button effect is displayed, a period of 5 seconds (5 seconds in the latter half of the button effect period) is provided. The operation result display is displayed until the result display period elapses after the frame button 22 is operated and the effect result is displayed. Thus, by configuring the length of the result display period to be longer than the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period, the operation is enabled as shown in FIG. 147 (c). Even if the longest delay period is set by operating the frame button 22 immediately before the end of the period, a period in which the operation result display is displayed can be secured, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand is executed. Can be.

  In the present control example, the effect mode of the delayed effect is set before the button effect is executed. Therefore, even when the same delay period is set, the frame button 22 during the operation effective period is set. The display period of the operation result display differs depending on the operation timing of the operation. Therefore, for example, when a specific animation display is executed as the operation result display, it is necessary to change the display mode of the animation according to the length of the display period of the operation result display. In other words, as a display mode of the operation result display, for example, when an animation for one second is executed, if the display period of the operation result display is other than a multiple of one second, the operation result display ends in the middle of the animation. There is a possibility that the effect of the effect is reduced.

  In this case, a method of performing control to extend or shorten the display period of the operation result display according to the timing at which the animation being executed ends may be considered. Thus, the display period of the operation result display can be ended at the timing when the animation is ended. However, when the length of the display period of the operation result display is changed, the effect period of the variable effect executed after the display period of the operation result display has to be changed correspondingly, and as a whole the variable effect, There is a possibility that a strange feeling may occur in the production of the game.

  In order to solve such a problem, for example, at the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the remaining period of the operation valid period or the remaining period of the button effect is determined, and based on the determination result. It is preferable to determine the length of the delay period. Specifically, a basic delay period (a delay period previously set as a variable effect) is set in accordance with the operation timing of the frame button 22 so that the display period of the operation result display is a multiple of one second. , It may be configured to add and set a correction delay period. With this configuration, the display period of the operation result display can be ended at the timing when the animation is ended. Further, different delay periods are set depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as another method, for example, when an animation is being executed at the timing when the display period of the operation result display has ended, the remaining animation is configured to be overlapped and executed while performing the fluctuation effect. Is also good. In this case, since the player is more interested in the fluctuating effect that is newly executed than the animation, the area where the animation is displayed becomes smaller than during the display period of the operation result display, and the transmittance of the animation is reduced. The remaining animation may be executed while performing display control to increase the image quality.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147, the delay effect can be executed in the middle of the special symbol change. Therefore, even if the delay period is set by the delay effect, the set delay is set. Regardless of the length of the period, it is possible to change the effect of the variable display so that the display mode indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed at the stop timing of the special symbol variation, for example, a special symbol, In the case where the delayed effect can be executed in the variable effect executed immediately before the stop timing of the change, the delayed effect may be executed across the stop timing of the special symbol change.

  In this case, for example, when it is determined that it is the timing to stop the special symbol fluctuation (the timing to stop the fluctuation effect), it is determined whether or not a delay period is set. Until the delay period elapses (ends), display control may be performed so that the special symbol change is stopped or displayed or the lottery result of the special symbol change (special symbol lottery) is not notified to the player. In this case, if it is determined that the next special symbol change will be executed after the currently running special symbol change is stopped and displayed, a predetermined period from the start of the next special symbol change is used. Then, a fluctuation effect (delay effect) to show the lottery result of the previous special symbol fluctuation is executed, and if the next special symbol fluctuation is not executed, the standby period until the demonstration screen is displayed is used. When a big hit game is started by executing a fluctuation effect (delay effect) to show the lottery result of the special symbol fluctuation, the period (opening period) until the first round game is started What is necessary is just to comprise so that the fluctuation effect (delay effect) for showing the lottery result of the last special symbol change may be performed.

  Further, the length of the period (fixed display period) in which the special symbol change is stopped and displayed may be configured to be longer than the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period. The period (1.8 seconds), which is the sum of the minimum period (for example, 0.3 seconds) necessary to confirm and display the special symbol and the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period, is confirmed and displayed. What is necessary is just to set as a period. In addition, it may be configured such that the special symbol change confirmation display period is lengthened only when a delay effect can be executed as a change effect.

  As described above, when performing a delayed effect using another effect period (next variable display period, standby period, jackpot game period, fixed display period), the actual game content executed during the effect period Should be displayed so that the player can grasp it. This allows the player to grasp the actual game content, thereby suppressing the execution of an unintended game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the flow of the effects performed in the collective effect (see FIGS. 139 to 141) and the battle effect (see FIGS. 142 to 144) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the present control example is configured to execute the collective effect and the battle effect during one variable effect period, and to perform the variable effect period according to the length of the variable effect period, that is, according to the change pattern. In addition, an effect period of the collective effect (the number of times the effect for acquiring the character is executed) is defined in advance. In addition, a plurality of execution timings of the collective effect in the variable effect can be set, and as shown in FIG. 148 (a), when the collective effect is executed from the start timing of the variable effect, the previous special symbol change "Large set" is stopped and displayed as a display mode indicating the result of the fluctuation effect corresponding to (first special figure fluctuation), that is, a third symbol stop display mode for indicating the first lottery result of the special figure fluctuation. In addition, the special design change (second special figure change) of the effect mode is started (the variable effect is started), and the collective effect is executed. With this configuration, the timing for terminating the collective effect is the same as when performing the collective effect in the middle of the second variation of the special figure change (see FIG. 148 (b)), ie, In the case of performing a battle effect and various reach effects of the same period in the second variable effect of the special figure change, the effect period of the collective effect can be made different.

  In this case, for example, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special figure change is determined in advance based on the winning information at least before the second special figure change is performed, and the result of the preliminary determination is performed. Is a big hit, it is good to make it easy to set the production mode shown in FIG. 148 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 148, in addition to the configuration in which the start timing of the collective effect is made different, it is preferable that a plurality of end timings of the collective effect can be set. For example, the change time corresponds to a special figure change of 60 seconds. As a fluctuating effect, a collective effect is executed from the start timing of the fluctuating effect, and a fluctuating time corresponding to a special figure change of 90 seconds, and a collective effect is executed from the middle of the fluctuating effect. Therefore, it is preferable to configure so that a collective effect (the number of times the effect for acquiring a character is executed) of the same length is executed. With this configuration, when the collective effect is performed, the player can be interested in the length of the variable effect period, and the collective effect in the same mode can be changed in different variable effect periods. It can be used for an effect, and control processing for executing a variable effect can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a flow of setting the content of the battle effect will be described. In the present control example, a collective effect and a battle effect can be executed using one special symbol change (special figure change) period. That is, the configuration is such that the effect of the battle effect and the effect of the collective effect are determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery. That is, when the special figure change is started (when the change effect is started), the effect form of the battle effect is determined.

  Specifically, a battle period (number of attacks) and a production result (enemy HP, remaining HP) are determined as the production mode of the battle production based on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for which the fluctuation production is determined. It is configured to be. With this configuration, the group effect and the battle effect can be executed in an effect mode corresponding to the effect of the battle effect.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine the effect mode of the battle effect after the end of the collective effect, based on the effect of the collective effect. In this case, for example, when the number of characters that can be obtained in the collective effect is configured to be changed according to the operation result of the operation unit during the collective effect, the number of characters to be obtained during the collective effect can be changed. Even in the case of configuring, it is possible to suitably execute the battle effect corresponding to the collective effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a description will be given of the flow of the pseudo-offset effect (see FIG. 145). In the present control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, in order to suppress a long period in which the special symbol change is not executed, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is not long, The configuration is such that a specific outlier fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of (14 seconds) is set is selected, and an outlier specific (14 seconds) is executed as a fluctuation effect corresponding to the specific outlier fluctuation pattern. (See FIG. 150 (a)).

  However, in the non-specific effect, the variable effect in which the third symbol does not reach the reach state is executed for a predetermined period, and before the variable effect ends, the variable effect currently being executed is the non-specific effect. This makes it easy for the player to grasp this. In other words, there is a problem that the player can easily determine that the result of the special symbol lottery executed in a state where the number of reserved special figures is 0 is out of order, and the willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation is selected to have a fluctuation time of 14 seconds or more, the above-described non-specific effect is executed using a part of the fluctuation time. (See FIG. 150 (c)). In addition, when a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is selected, the off-specific effect is executed twice (see FIG. 150 (b)).

  In the present control example configured as described above, even when the player determines that the off-specific effect has been executed, the timing at which the effect result of the off-specific effect is displayed and the special symbol change is stopped. It is difficult to predict whether or not the displayed timing matches. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is out of the range until the unspecified effect is completed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 145, when a special-specific effect is executed at a timing different from the stop display timing of the special symbol lottery (the first specific-specific effect in FIG. 150 (b), FIG. c), the third symbol is rocked (temporarily stopped) and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the same effect may be performed using the same effect data.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), in the case where two unspecified effects are executed during one special figure fluctuation period, for example, the fluctuation for 14 seconds is synchronized with the start timing of the special figure fluctuation. An effect (the first non-specific effect) is set, and if it is determined that the first non-specific effect is completed, the remaining period of the special figure change is determined. If the determination result is 14 seconds or more, You may be comprised so that the fluctuation | change effect (the 2nd non-specific production | presentation) for 14 seconds may be performed again.

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to previously store the 28-second effect data in which two off-specific effects are executed, so that the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced. In addition, by allowing the setting process of the variable effect corresponding to one special figure change period to be set a plurality of times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), the variable effect can be set during the first half period. Since it is possible to change the effect mode in the second half period based on the effect conditions established in the above, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, by using a configuration in which the setting process of the fluctuation effect corresponding to one special figure fluctuation period can be set a plurality of times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), FIG. In the case of setting the fluctuation effect which becomes the flow of the flow, first, only the fluctuation effect of 30 seconds in the second half period (normal effect per stage) and the interruption effect of 16 seconds in the first half period are determined. When a predetermined effect condition (for example, a new special figure reserved ball has not been acquired) is satisfied, an out-of-specification effect may be set. With this configuration, the special figure holding ball is 0 at the time when the special figure change is started, and the special figure change is started even when the execution condition of the off-specification effect is satisfied. In the case where a new special figure reservation has been acquired at the time point when 16 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game, it is possible to suppress the execution of the off-specification effect.

<About the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, the flow of a game in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) and a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a normal state). It is configured to be able to set three types of gaming states: a symbol high-probability state) and a time-saving state (a special symbol low-probability state, a normal symbol high-probability state), and an initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped). Or the state after the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is operated (pressed)), the normal state is set.

  Then, during the normal state, a game mainly based on the first special symbol lottery executed by causing the ball to enter the first entrance hole 64 is executed. In the normal state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/300, and when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is "big hit A" (selection rate 1/2). And "big hit B" (selection rate 1/2) are selected. When "big hit B" is selected, a big hit game (probably variable big hit game) in which a ball is easily passed to a specific area (probable change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the big hit game is executed, and "big hit A" is executed. Is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass a ball to a specific area (probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game is executed.

  Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. In the certain change state, when the number of times of execution of the special symbol lottery (change) reaches 200 or when a big hit is won, the end condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to another game state. Specifically, if the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches 200 in the state where the probability change state is set, the gaming state is changed to the normal state before the 201st special symbol lottery is executed. Is migrated. In this control example, the process of shifting the gaming state from the probability change state to the normal state, that is, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, and the process of shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the ordinary symbol The process of shifting to the low-probability state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol change corresponding to the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. It is not necessary to be executed in a state in which the high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state are set. For example, immediately after the 200th special symbol lottery is executed (at the start of the 200th special symbol change), Alternatively, the process may be shifted to immediately before the execution of the 201st special symbol lottery (the timing at which the execution condition of the 201st special symbol lottery is satisfied, but the special symbol lottery is not executed).

  Further, the timing of shifting the special symbol probability state and the timing of shifting the normal symbol probability state may be different, for example, the high probability of the special symbol is determined immediately after the 200th special symbol lottery is executed. Only the state may be shifted to the low probability state, and after the result of the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol may be shifted to the low probability state. With such a configuration, during the 200th special symbol fluctuation period, the game state can be set to the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

  Since the probable change state is a high probability state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be in an open state by a game per general symbol than in the normal state of a low probability state of a normal symbol, and a game mainly based on a second special symbol lottery. Is executed. In the probable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/100, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is “big hit C”. Selected.

  "Big hit C" is a big hit type in which a 16-round probability change big hit game is executed. That is, in the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the certainty big hit game is always executed. Therefore, in terms of the execution probability of the probability-change jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

  Also, in detail, in the present control example, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a six round game is always executed, and when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 16 round game is always executed. Is done. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

  Next, the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) will be described. In the case of winning the "big hit A" in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, or in the case where the ball could not be passed to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability changing big hit game , The time saving state is set. This time saving state is configured to disappear when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100 or when the jackpot is won until the number reaches 100. . That is, if the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot A is won), the time-saving state is set for a period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (time reduction). The number of times is set to 100).

  During this time saving state, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set in the gaming state as in the above-described probability changing state, the electric accessory 640 is easily opened, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. State. The lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as that in the normal state. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed in the time reduction state than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as the normal state. In other words, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the time reduction state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower jackpot probability than in the probability variation state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the probability variation state. In other words, the time-saving state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability-change state in terms of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery. In the present control example, the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same between the probability change state and the time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery executed is different from the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. For example, the fluctuation time is shorter in the probability change state than in the normal state. , The special symbol change may be executed.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 152, main controller 110 has MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and display setting on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first control example. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter C3 for determining a special symbol stop type (reach hit type, non-reach type, out-of-reach type), and a variation type counter used for variation pattern selection. CS1 and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 187). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing a lottery right (reserved ball) of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b comprising four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing lottery rights (reserved balls) is provided, and a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided. A special symbol holding ball execution area common to the symbol is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fluctuation, in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Similarly, the same value is stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the signal passes through the gate 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 599), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 599 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 599). It returns to the structure. Particularly, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 599, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 599. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 187).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 155 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Further, the first random number table 202a has a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special symbol). Is set to have a different value (number) of random numbers to be a big hit.

  As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. In addition, the first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a high probability (see FIG. 155 (a)) and the first random number table 202a for a special symbol with a low probability (see FIG. 155 (a)) Are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. At the timing, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of the range, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become. In the present control example, the jackpot type is set to three types, "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit C", and any one is determined by the first hit type counter C2. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 599. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are two random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value “0, 1” is the first random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 2 out of the total number of random numbers of 600, and thus the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “2/600 (1/300)”. Becomes

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are six random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 5” are stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability. . As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 600 out of the total number of random numbers of 600, and thus the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “6/600 (1/100)”. Becomes

  In this control example, the random number value of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability and the random number of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability are stored. The configuration is such that the same random number value is defined by a numerical value. With such a configuration, for example, when “0” is acquired as the value of the first random number counter C1, the gaming state at the time of executing the jackpot determination using the value of the first random number counter C1 Regardless, you can win the jackpot. Therefore, when a ball is thrown into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 and a reserved ball with a special symbol is acquired, the value of the first random number counter C1 which wins the big hit is acquired. Since it is possible to easily determine before the special symbol lottery is executed, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting that a jackpot determination will be performed later without grasping the set game state, and to produce the effect. Can be enhanced.

  In addition, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit at the time of the special symbol low probability and the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be the big hit at the time of the special symbol high probability are not overlapped. You may comprise. In this case, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state), the random number value determined to be the big hit (the value of the first random number counter C1). ), It is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value which is a big hit of the special symbol. Therefore, the big hit is more illegally assigned than when the random number determined to be a big hit is overlapped when the special symbol has a high probability (high probability state) and when the special symbol has a low probability (low probability state). Can be suppressed.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 155 (b), the first hit type selection table 202b for determining the big hit type includes a data table referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol. And a data table which is referred to in correspondence with the lottery.

  Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table that is referred to when selecting a big hit type set when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and includes a type of the special symbol and an acquired first hit type. A different big hit type (big hit A to big hit C) is selected based on the value of the counter C2.

  In the present control example, the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game are configured to be different according to the set jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to give the player who is playing the game for the jackpot winning interest not only the jackpot winning but also the set jackpot type. Further, in the present control example, a configuration is made such that a privilege having a different degree of advantage is given to a player depending on the set jackpot type. This allows the player to be more interested in the set jackpot type.

  Next, the content specified in the first hit type selection table 202b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 155 (b). The special symbol type (symbol type) to be subjected to the special symbol lottery is In the case of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, and the big hit type “big hit A” is “50 to 99”. , The jackpot type “Big Jackpot B” is defined respectively. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type “big hit C” is defined regardless of the acquired first hit type counter C2 value.

  When "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the round game is 6 rounds, and a big hit game (normally 6R big hit game) in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area (V winning opening) during the big hit game is executed. You. Then, if the ball does not win V during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is completed, a special symbol lottery in which the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is 100 times is executed. In order to set a gaming state (100 time savings) that continues until, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to “100” and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to “0”. On the other hand, when the ball wins a V during the jackpot game, the game state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) continues until the 200 times of the special symbol lottery is executed. To set the value of the time saving counter 203u to “0”, the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to “200”.

  In other words, the above "big hit A" is a big hit type in which a normal big hit game in which the ball is hard to pass through the specific area (V winning opening) during the big hit game is executed, and the game is normally executed. Means that the ball does not pass through the V winning opening during the jackpot game. However, during a jackpot game, if an illegal game, for example, a game in which a structure in the variable winning device 65 is destroyed and a ball is forcibly made a V-win is executed, the ball is played during the "jackpot A" jackpot game. May pass through a specific area (V winning opening). In the present control example, when a ball is won by a fraudulent game, the player is more likely to play the ball than the probable state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. As a disadvantageous game state, a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set. Thereby, a penalty can be imposed on a player who has executed an unauthorized game.

  In addition, as a penalty imposed on a player who has executed an illegal game, for example, a fraudulent fluctuation pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol fluctuation executed when a latent state is set. For example, when a game state (for example, a latent state) that cannot be set when a normal game is being executed is set, a change pattern with a change time of 10 minutes is selected. May be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a special symbol lottery from being efficiently executed for a player who has executed an illegal game.

  In the present control example, the ease of passing a ball to the V winning opening is changed according to the type of the jackpot game to be executed, but even if any type of the jackpot game is executed, If a ball enters a specific area (V winning opening) during the jackpot game, a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a ball hits the V winning opening during a normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set after the jackpot game ends.

  When "big hit B" is set as the big hit type, the round game is 6 rounds, and a big hit game (probable change 6R big hit game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning opening) during the big hit game is executed. You. Then, when the ball wins a V during the jackpot game, a gaming state (probable variation state) in which the probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) continues until 200 special symbol lotteries are executed. (200 times), “200” is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203u, and “200” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball does not win the V during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol lottery in which the time reduction state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is 100 times is executed. In order to set a gaming state (100 time savings) that continues until, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to “100” and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to “0”.

  When "big hit C" is set as the big hit type, the round game is 16 rounds, and a big hit game (probable change 16R big hit game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning opening) during the big hit game is executed. You. Then, when the ball wins a V during the jackpot game, a gaming state (probable variation state) in which the probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) continues until 200 special symbol lotteries are executed. (200 times), “200” is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203u, and “200” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203t. On the other hand, when the ball does not win the V during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol lottery in which the time reduction state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is 100 times is executed. In order to set a gaming state (100 time savings) that continues until, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to “100” and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to “0”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured to determine one of the three types of the jackpot types based on the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Is configured. The first special symbol and the second special symbol have different jackpot types selected when the result of the determination is a large jackpot, and the first special symbol is determined when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. The jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player, that is, the jackpot type in which the probability-change jackpot game is executed is configured to be more easily selected than when the jackpot is won by lottery. Therefore, the player can be interested in which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the lottery is being executed.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The rough variation mode is determined by the above-described stop type selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the rough time, such as short time deviation, long time deviation, normal reach, super reach, etc., is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The display mode is determined. Then, based on the variation mode determined by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the audio symbol control device 113 or the display control device 114 displays the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the three symbols are determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 187) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) storing a random value for determining the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 156, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used during a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, and a normal table 202d1 during a high probability state (time saving state, probability change state). A time / probability change table 202d2 to be used is defined, and a change pattern is selected using a data table corresponding to the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed. In the present control example, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set than when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. The configuration is such that a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is more easily selected when the variation pattern is selected using the time saving / probability variation table 202d2 than when the variation pattern is selected using the variation table 202d1. .

  In the present control example, the variation pattern is selected using the same data table (the time reduction / probability variation table 202d2) when the time reduction state is set as the gaming state and when the probability variation state is set. , The game state currently set based on the selected variation pattern is configured to be difficult for the player to understand. Then, the player is made to grasp the game state currently set by the various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the player can be interested in various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, if the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the special symbol lottery is more efficiently executed than the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. Alternatively, a variation pattern may be selected by using different data tables for the time saving state and the probable variation state. Also, the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set may be more efficiently configured to execute the special symbol lottery than the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, for example, Among the various fluctuation patterns defined in the data table (normal table 202d1) used when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is longer than the fluctuation pattern having the longest fluctuation time. Is set, among the various fluctuation patterns defined in the data table (the time-saving / probable-variation table 202d2) used, the variation pattern with the longest variation time may be defined with the longer variation time. .

  The details of selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later will be described in more detail. Based on the value of the counter CS1, the contents of the rough change pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the change time are determined, and a change pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the contents of various tables specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d used when the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 157 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. In the normal table 202d1, various fluctuation patterns are set in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, referring to FIG. 158, a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability change table 202d2. In the time-saving / probable variation table 202d2, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and a value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns.

  In this control example, the variation pattern is defined in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1, but the variation pattern is not limited to this. For example, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 or the first hit type selection table 202b The variation pattern may be defined in accordance with the jackpot type selected by the above.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the normal symbol is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 155 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 155 (c)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability that the normal symbol is hit from the low probability. For the high-probability time (the period in which the symbol is usually in a time-saving state), and the number of winning random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently.

  Here, in the present control example, the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 125) attached to the second entrance 640 can be changed to the open state in the ordinary symbol winning game executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol. The game to be executed is executed. That is, normally, when the electric accessory 640a that is positioned in the closed state that restricts the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640, the second ball entry is performed when the ordinary drawing game is executed. The game is executed in a normal drawing so as to be changed to an open state that allows the ball to enter the mouth 640. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the ease of entry of a ball into the second entrance 640 in accordance with the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. In other words, the frequency of the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, can be changed according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. A game in which the lottery and the special symbol lottery are related can be performed.

  Further, in the present control example, the game content of the general per-game is configured to be different according to the set game state, and specifically, a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. In the case where the game per game is executed, the ball is thrown into the second entrance 640 than when the game per game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. The game is configured to execute a game that is easy to play.

  More specifically, when a normal symbol hitting game is executed in a state where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a long hit in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for an opening time of 4 seconds is executed. When the normal symbol hitting game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a short hit in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the opening time of 0.2 second is executed. Make up. With this configuration, the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is easier to win in the ordinary symbol lottery than the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and Since it is possible to easily make the ball enter the second entrance 640 in the winning game, it is possible to motivate the player to perform the game for executing the second special symbol lottery.

  In this control example, only the short hit is executed when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In a part of the case of winning per symbol, the above-described game per long symbol per game may be configured to be executed, or a general symbol executed in a state where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. A part of the winning game may be configured to execute the above-described short winning per-day winning game. In addition, in the present control example, although there are two types of games per game, a short game and a long game, three or more game types per game may be set.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 187).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 152, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 153, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 187), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 186). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 185) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 155), the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 155), A two-per-random number table 202c (see FIG. 155) and a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) are set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores, in addition to the above, various data necessary for the game (for example, operation scenario data of a jackpot game), a program, and the like.

  For example, the operation scenario data of the jackpot game is defined in a data table in which a game operation content during the jackpot game is associated with the determined hit type, and is based on information (scenario) stored in the data table. Thus, the movable control of various devices (such as the variable winning device 65) during the jackpot game is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, positive variable setting flag 203h, positive variable passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k , A notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, a remaining ball timer 203p, a certain variable valid flag 203q, a certain variable valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a certain variable counter 203t, a time reduction counter 203u, and other memories. It has an area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores an ordinary winning random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data becomes available in four reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area). Of the areas that are present, the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the order of winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter for counting up to four times the number of lottery rights for the first special symbol lottery executed based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and a ball enters the first entrance 64 during a special symbol change or during a jackpot game, and a new first special ball is entered. When the lottery right for the symbol middle line is acquired, 1 is added until the maximum value of 4 is reached. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in 110 itself. As a result, the number of balls to be changed, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the actual deviated display shows a deviation from the held ball count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is retained in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 is obtained, The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to set the special symbol high probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the special symbol high probability state is set is determined by whether the ball enters (passes) the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. ) Is determined. Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (passed) the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (hereinafter, referred to as V winning), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 191). . On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203h is referred to at the end of the jackpot game (see S1202 in FIG. 190), and when it is determined that the value is set to ON, the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to 200 and then turned OFF. This is set (see S1205 in FIG. 190). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the power has passed through the probability change switch before the power is turned off. If it is determined that the power has passed, the probability change setting flag 203h is determined. May be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the certainty variable switch 65e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a later-described certainty variable counter 203h has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the game store. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 (flowed down the specific area) in one round of the jackpot game (in this control example, one round of the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been ejected, based on the total value of the value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the value of the ejection number counter 203s described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one each time the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 (V win). In addition, after executing a process of determining whether or not the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to “0”. Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. When the winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected. Based on this, it is updated by being added one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the number-of-discharges counter 203s and the positive variable passing counter 203i) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether or not they match, it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is for counting the operation time of various devices (opening / closing door 65f, switching valve 65h) that are variably controlled during the jackpot game. This is a counter for counting (counting) the time when the solenoid (solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, at the big hit A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the fifth round, and at the big hits B and C, the flow path solenoid 65k is set based on the start of the fifth round. Set to on for 5 seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set as the start data of the fifth round for the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the big hit B and the big hit C. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Also, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in an initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. As described above, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning to the positive change switch 65e3 according to the type of the big hit.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this control example, a voice of "looking at the liquid crystal") to attract the player's attention. In this control example, a value corresponding to one second is set in the notification counter 203m at the end timing of the fourth round (ten balls are won in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have elapsed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one each time the big hit control process (refer to S904 in FIG. 188) of the main controller 110 is executed. Based on the fact that the value of the notification counter 203m becomes 0, a notification command output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the sound.

  With this configuration, the sound "look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the fifth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the fifth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to look at the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is information, is displayed. In the fifth round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, and if the operation is watched by the player, the type of the jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player having the expectation that the probability change game state is given until the end of the big hit game, the player controls the movement of the switching member 65h (the flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 by the player. An informational production that makes it difficult to see is being performed. However, when the fifth round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval. Is performed. Thereby, after the interval effect is executed, the player can be attracted to the displayed content displayed, and the player can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In the present control example, the third symbol display device 81 is notified so as to be shown so as to distract the player from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By notifying the device 65 that the player's hand is held, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by informing the player to look at the decorative lamp 34 and the like. Furthermore, during the four rounds, a two-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to notify the user of reading with a mobile phone, thereby distracting the player's attention. In the present control example, regardless of the type of the jackpot game being executed, the above-described distracting effect is executed for the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the fifth round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. It is configured so that: Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player can determine the type of the jackpot of the current jackpot game based on the length of the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating whether or not the ball has been thrown after the completion of one round and the specific winning opening 65a has been closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p described later is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. It is a counter for.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is a time required for discharging a ball winning the variable winning device 65 when the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be ejected to the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is previously set to the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. You. If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain-variable setting flag 203h is turned on even if the game ball passes through the certain-variable switch. May not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  The probable change valid flag 203q indicates that the game ball has passed through the specified area (probable change switch 65e3) after the switching member 65h has switched the ball to a specific area (probable change switch 65e3) and has been switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed (probable change switch 65e3). ) Is a flag for determining whether or not the passing (V winning) is valid. When the probability change valid flag 203q is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passes through the specific area (the probability change switch 65e3) during a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203q was set to ON. After the switching member 65h switches to a position where the ball cannot flow down in the specific area (the probability changing switch 65e3), the period necessary for normally passing the probability changing switch 65e3 can be determined by the probability changing valid timer 203r. In the present control example, the time required for the ball that has reached the switching member 65h to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 0.3 second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. Thereafter, even if the vehicle passes through a specific area (probability change switch 65e3) (V prize), it is determined to be illegal and is determined to have passed. do not do.

  As a result, a ball can be illegally entered into a specific area (probable change switch 65e3) (V prize), a game ball can be pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probable change switch 65e3, or passed through a magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like. Damage caused by fraudulent detection or false detection can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharges.

  The probability change counter 203t is a counter for indicating a state in which the special symbol high-probability state is set, and a value corresponding to a case where the special symbol high-probability state is set is set. Based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area (probable change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game, a value is set in the probability change counter 203t after the jackpot game ends (see S1203 in FIG. 190). Then, the value set each time the special symbol lottery is executed (each time the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation elapses and the special symbol during the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed) is decremented by one. Also, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. Accordingly, the special symbol high probability state is not set during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In the present control example, when the special symbol high probability state is set, the value of the probability change counter 203t is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation), and the probability variation counter 203t is set. Is set to 0, the special symbol high-probability state ends, and the state shifts to the special symbol low-probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the next big hit game Until is executed (until the jackpot is won), the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to continue. In this case, the value of the probability change counter 203t may be set to “10000”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol and a condition for subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is determined based on the number of times of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the termination condition that can be satisfied by the processing content of various processes executed by main controller 110 is satisfied, the value of positive variable counter 203t is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), or Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a winning for a special general drawing), the value of the probability change counter 203t may be decremented.

  Further, the value set in the probability change counter 203t may be made different based on the type of the winning jackpot and the passing state of the ball to the specific area (probability change switch 65e3), or the content of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203u. Similarly to the above, the value of the probable variable counter 203t may be configured to be subtractable by a condition other than the number of times of the change of the special symbol. May be configured to be able to subtract a plurality of values at a time. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp how long the special symbol high probability state continues, so that the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the special symbol high probability state can be watched without getting tired. Can be.

  Further, in the present control example, as a condition for terminating the probability change state, that is, a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (variations). Although only the condition is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the content of various processes executed by main controller 110 is satisfied, the value of positive change counter 203t is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the probability change counter 203t may be subtracted, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, The configuration may be such that the value of the probability change counter 203t is decremented based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the like.

  In addition, in the present control example, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is configured to be decremented by one, but a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 203t are grouped (for example, 2) according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied. Substitution may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed so that the value of the probable counter 203t becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the probable counter 203t. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the probable change state continues, and to interest the player in the game in the probable change state.

  Further, the condition for terminating the probable change state may be changed according to the content of the condition for setting the probable change state (big hit type). Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The time reduction counter 203u is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is set. After the jackpot game is over, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set in the time-saving counter 203u (see S1205 in FIG. 190). And when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. Thereby, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203u is set, and the value of the time reduction counter 203u is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). Is set to 0, the normal symbol high-probability state ends, and the normal symbol low-probability state is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the next big hit game Until is executed (until the big hit is won), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol may be configured to continue. In this case, the value of the time reduction counter 203u may be set to “10000”.

  In this embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes) as a condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol and a condition for subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203u. Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the content of various processes executed by main controller 110 is satisfied, the value of time reduction counter 203u is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), or Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the time reduction counter 203u may be decremented.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203u is configured to be decremented by one. However, a plurality of values of the time reduction counter 203u are grouped (for example, 2) according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed such that the value of the time reduction counter 203u becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the time reduction counter 203u. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time reduction state continues, and to interest the player in the game during the time reduction state.

  Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be changed according to the content of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (big hit type). Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 152, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 185) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variable effect pattern selection table 222a, a continuous hit effect selection table 222b, a random display selection table 222c, a delayed effect selection table 222d, and a collective effect selection table 222e. , Battle effect selection table 222f.

  The variation effect pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are respectively set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command. One fluctuation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

  Here, the contents of the fluctuation effect pattern selection table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation effect pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the fluctuation effect pattern selection table 222a is referred to when the main controller 110 receives a fluctuation pattern command (normal fluctuation pattern command) selected using the normal table 202d1. The time-saving / probable variation referred to when the main control device 110 receives a variation pattern command (time-saving variation pattern command) selected using the time-saving / probability variation table 202d2. Effect pattern table 222a2.

  In each effect pattern table, various effect data corresponding to the change pattern command (change time) selected by the main controller 110 are defined, and the change effect of the change effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is defined. Used when selecting the production contents.

  Next, the contents of the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1. As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the normal effect pattern table 222a1, the type of the normal variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding thereto, and the acquired first effect Various effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are defined corresponding to the value of the counter 223p1. Note that, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 160 (b), for convenience of explanation, there is a range indicated as “various reach effects” as an effect pattern, but this actually depends on the acquired first effect counter 223p1. Indicates that different types of effect patterns are defined.

  The content defined in the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be described in more detail. The hit / fail judgment result is “hit (big hit)”, the type of the received fluctuation pattern is “type A (60 seconds)”, When the number of reserved special symbols is "0", the effect pattern is "pseudo-offset" regardless of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1, and the number of reserved special symbols is "1-3". In the case of "", "various reach effects" according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223p1 are defined. When the type of the received variation pattern is “type B (90 seconds)” and the number of reserved special symbols is “0 to 3”, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 is “0 to 149”. In the range of "", "various reach effects" are specified, and in the range of "150 to 198", "sequence of character effects" is specified.

  Here, when the “pseudo out-of-control effect” is selected as the effect pattern, an effect including a specific out-of-specific effect for 14 seconds (see FIG. 145 (a)) is executed. With this configuration, the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, while the special symbol lottery is “0”, so that the special symbol lottery is ultimately won, while making the player think that an off-specific effect has been performed. Can be provided to the player. Therefore, even if a 14-second out-of-specific effect performed when the result of the special symbol lottery is out is performed, the possibility of the lottery result being a jackpot can be left. This can prevent the result of the special symbol lottery from being grasped in advance.

  When “sequence of character effects” is selected as the effect pattern, effects using a plurality of effect devices of the pachinko machine 10 are executed. Although a detailed description of this effect device is omitted, it is a movable means (a member for effect that operates using an electric drive source) provided in the pachinko machine 10, and is effected according to the result of the special symbol lottery. A device movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. Some of the effect devices require a preparatory operation (for example, an operation for moving to a standby position) in advance to actually move to a different position. Therefore, as in the present control example, the preparatory operation can be reliably executed by setting the effect pattern of the variable effect. In addition, for an effect device that requires a preparation operation, an effect pattern that executes only the preparation operation may be provided in addition to the case where the effect is actually executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance whether or not an effect using the effect device is to be executed based on the presence or absence of the preparation operation.

  If the result is "out", the type of the received fluctuation pattern is "type D (14 seconds)", and the number of reserved special symbols is "0", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223p1 is obtained. Regardless of the effect pattern, “out of specific effect” is acquired when the type of the received fluctuation pattern is “type E (28 seconds)” and the number of reserved special symbols is “0 to 3”. Regardless of the value of the first effect counter 223p1, the effect pattern is "second out-of-specification effect", the type of the received fluctuation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)", and the number of reserved special symbols is "0". In the case of “-3”, the “various reach effects” according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 indicate that the type of the received fluctuation pattern is “type F (60 seconds)” and the corresponding number of reserved special symbols If is "0-3", get "Various reach effects" according to the value of the first effect counter 223p1, the type of the variation pattern received is "type F (60 seconds)", and the number of reserved special symbols is "0 to 3" In the table, “various reach effects” are defined in the range of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 of “0 to 194”, and “sequence character effects” are defined in the range of “195 to 198”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the contents of the time-saving / probable variation effect pattern table 222a2 will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the effect pattern table 222a2 for saving time and probability. As shown in FIG. 161, the effect pattern table 222a2 for time saving / probable variation includes the type of the time saving variation command output from the main controller 110, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding thereto, and the acquired first effect counter. Various effect patterns (fluctuating effects) are defined corresponding to the value of 223p1. In addition, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 161, for convenience of explanation, there is a range indicated as “various reach effects” as an effect pattern. Indicates that the effect pattern is defined. Also, the detailed contents specified are different from the above-described normal effect pattern table 222a1 (see FIG. 160 (b)) in that the specific allocation values are different and the corresponding effect patterns are different. In this case, the detailed description is omitted.

  The continuous-stroke effect selection table 222b includes a continuous-stroke effect performed when “continuous-stroke effect” is selected as the variable effect pattern selected by the variable-effect pattern selection table 222a based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110. This is for selecting an effect mode, and includes an upper limit number selection table 222b1, an end number selection table 222b2, and an effect result selection table 222b3.

  The “continuous hit effect” is included in the effect patterns described as “various reach effects” in the variable effect pattern selection table 222a described above with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. The effect of the effect contents described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132 is executed.

  First, the contents of the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1. The upper limit number selection table 222b1 is referred to when selecting the number of operation times (upper limit number) of the frame button 22 required to change to the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the continuous hit effect.

  Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is “win (big hit)” and the reach type is “SP reach”, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2 is “0 to 39”. In this case, “20” is selected as the upper limit number. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is “0”. When the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2 is “40 to 198”, “15” is selected as the upper limit number. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is “5 bodies”.

  If the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "win (big hit)" and the reach type is "super reach", the upper limit number is set as "the maximum number of times regardless of the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2". 15 "is selected. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is “11 to 40 bodies”.

  Here, the case where the final variable mode is “11 to 40 bodies” is a case where a specific numerical value is not determined when selecting an effect mode of a continuous hit effect, and only a possible range is selected. When this “11 to 40 bodies” is selected, when the display control device 114 receives an operation command for the frame button 22, the variable mode within the currently displayed variable mode is not reversed. A determination is made as to whether or not to make the variable, and when the determination is won, the variable mode is configured to be changed within the above-described range. In this way, by configuring the sound lamp control device 113 so as not to determine the details of the effect mode of the continuous hit effect, it is possible to provide a variation in the effect mode of the continuous hit effect that is actually executed.

  If the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "out" and the reach type is "SP reach", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times regardless of the value of the obtained second effect counter 223p2. . In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is “5 bodies”. When the reach type is “super reach”, “15” is selected as the upper limit number of times regardless of the value of the acquired second effect counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is “11 to 40 bodies”. When the reach type is “other than reach”, “10” is selected as the upper limit number of times regardless of the value of the obtained second effect counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is “11 to 40 bodies”.

  Next, the contents of the end count selection table 222b2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the end number selection table 222b2. The end number selection table 222b2 is for selecting an end condition for shortening (ending) the production period of the continuous production after the operation of the frame button 22 reaches the upper limit number during the continuous production. In the present control example, as an end condition for shortening (ending) the effect period of the continuous hit effect, an operation number end condition that is established based on the operation number of the frame button 22 can be set. ), Different end times are defined based on the set upper limit times and the acquired value of the third effect counter 223p3 as a result of the special symbol lottery.

  FIG. 163 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect result selection table 222b3. The production result selection table 222b3 is a data table used when selecting the production result of the continuous-stroke effect, and depends on the result of the special symbol lottery, whether or not the production period of the continuous-stroke effect is shortened, and the set upper limit number. Different production results are selected.

  The random display selection table 222c has a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode of the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the effect icon storage area 222c1, the display order selection table 222c2. , A permutation storage area 222c3, an ideographic mode selection table 222c4, and a display number selection table 222c5.

  The effect icon storage area 222c1 is a storage area in which information corresponding to various icons used in the random display effect is stored. Here, the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (b). FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect icon storage area 222c1. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), the effect icon storage area 222c1 is formed with six regions of a first region za1 to a sixth region za6 in order.

  One icon information is stored for each area. Specifically, the first area za1 has “quadrangular” icon information, the second area za2 has “triangular” icon information, and the third area za3 has “quadrangular” icon information. Four areas store “round” icon information, a fifth area stores “diamond” icon information, and a sixth area stores “V-sign” icon information.

  In this control example, icon information is stored for each area formed in the icon storage area 222c1, and the areas are ordered. Then, when the effect mode of the random display effect is determined, the icons are displayed according to the order of the respective areas of the icon storage area 222c1. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect according to a predetermined rule while giving the icon display contents randomness. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as compared with the case where the effect content is set completely at random.

  In FIG. 164 (b), only one area range (first area za1 to sixth area za6) is described as effect icon storage area 222c1, but actually, it is stored corresponding to each area. There are a plurality of area ranges in which different icon information items are provided, but for convenience of description, the description is omitted. As described above, the effect icon storage area 222c1 is provided with a plurality of area ranges, and when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect, by using different area ranges, a random display effect in which the effect mode is greatly changed. Can be easily executed. For example, among a plurality of area ranges, specific icon information that is stored only in a part of the area ranges is provided, and when a special symbol lottery has been won, the area range in which the specific icon information is stored is selected. It is good to make it easy. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the jackpot winning only by displaying the icon corresponding to the specific icon information.

  Further, the icon information stored in the area range of the effect icon storage area 222c1 (the first area za1 to the sixth area za6) may be switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, as the predetermined switching condition, a switching condition that is satisfied when the jackpot game has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice), or a time-means ( For example, RTC) is mounted, and is executed based on a switching condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 13:00) is satisfied, an operation unit that can be arbitrarily operated by the player, and an operation on the operation unit. In the pachinko machine 10 having the effect selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the effect, it is preferable to provide a switching condition that is established based on the operation of the operation means by the player. Thereby, even if only one area range is provided, the variation of the presentation mode can be varied.

  The display order selection table 222c2 is a data table used when selecting the display order of icons to be displayed in a random display effect, and includes an icon as a first icon (head icon) displayed in the random display effect. This is for selecting which area of the storage area 222c1 is to be set.

  Here, the contents of the display order selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (b). FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the display order selection table 222c2. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the fourth effect counter 233p4, a different area (first area) corresponding to the top icon is displayed in the display order selection table 222c2. za1 to the sixth region za6) can be selected.

  In this control example, when a region (first region za1 to sixth region za6) corresponding to the top icon is selected, a predetermined order (first region za1 (A), second region za2 (B)) is selected from that region. ,..., The sixth area za6 (F), the first area za1 (A),. Therefore, when "A" is selected as the first icon and when "C" is selected, the same display mode is displayed when the first icon is displayed in the random display effect. Become. Therefore, the player can watch the display mode of the icons displayed continuously in the random display effect, specifically, the display mode of the second icon displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 164 (c), the icon of the “V-sign shape” can be more easily displayed as the top icon when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when the result is a loss. It is configured as follows. In addition, the configuration is such that the rate at which “C” is selected increases. Therefore, during the random display effect, the icon of the “V sign shape” is easier to be displayed when the big hit is won than when the big hit is not won. Therefore, the icon of the “V-sign shape” is a specific icon that has a high jackpot expectation just by being displayed.

  The permutation storage area 222c3 is a storage area in which information on the position where the icon is displayed in the random display effect is stored. In this control example, a plurality of orders (permutations) in which the icons are displayed in the random display effect are prepared in advance, and the icons are displayed along the selected permutation when selecting the effect mode of the random display effect. It is configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect in accordance with a predetermined rule while giving randomness to the icon display order. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the effect according to the result of the special symbol lottery, as compared with the case where the effect content is set completely at random.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), effect data (permutation data) corresponding to permutations A to D is stored in the permutation storage area 222c3, and a display mode selection table 222c4 described later is stored. The permutation data selected by using is read.

  Here, the contents specified in the display mode selection table 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 165 (b). FIG. 165 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the display mode selection table 222c4. The ideographic aspect selection table 222c4 is a data table used when selecting the icon display position in the random display effect, and as shown in FIG. 165 (b), the result of the special symbol lottery and the display order selection table 222c2. And the value of the fifth effect counter 223p5 based on the type of the top icon selected by using. It is configured such that different permutation data is selected. Then, the permutation data selected using the display mode selection table 222c4 is read from the permutation storage area 222c3, and is determined as the effect mode of the random display effect.

  The display number selection table 222c5 is a data table used when selecting the number of icons displayed in the random display effect. The contents of the display number selection table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display number selection table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 166, the display number selection table 222c5 is defined so that a different number is selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the sixth effect counter 223p6. Each value is defined so that a larger number is more likely to be selected in a case where is a big hit than in a case where it is not a big hit.

  With this configuration, the expectation of the jackpot win increases when more icons are displayed in the random display effect. As described above, in the random display effect in the present control example, a plurality of effect elements are independently selected, and the effect is determined by combining the selection results. It is possible to increase the variation of the production mode by using this.

  In addition, when each of the effect elements is selected, whether or not a jackpot has been won is included in the selection condition. Therefore, even in the combined effect mode, the effect mode can be determined based on the balance based on whether or not the jackpot has been won. For example, the icon of the "V-sign shape" as an icon to be displayed is set to be easier to be displayed at the beginning in the random display effect when the big hit is won, and when the big hit is won, Because it is set so that the number of icons displayed in the random display effect can be increased, in the random display effect that is executed, the jackpot winning is more complex than the loss winning This makes it easier to display the icon of the “V-sign shape”.

  The delay effect selection table 222d is a data table used when selecting the effect mode of the delay effect to be executed when the delay effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, and includes the length of the delay period and the target of the delay effect. It is for selection.

  Here, the contents of the delay effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the delay effect selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 167, different delay types are defined in the delay effect selection table 222d in accordance with the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7.

  In this control example, a plurality of delay periods (hours) can be selected when executing a delay effect. The degree of expectation of winning a jackpot depends on the length of the delay period. In other words, when the player has more experience of the game, it becomes possible to gradually determine the presence or absence of the delayed effect based on the relationship with other effects. Therefore, in the present control example, the delay period in the delay effect is configured to have a difference. Thus, it is possible to provide a player who can determine that the delay effect is to be executed, to enjoy the ability to determine the type of delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the presence or absence of a delayed effect and the delay period can be set for each of a plurality of effects that can be executed simultaneously. This makes it difficult to compare the execution timing with the surrounding effects.

  As described above, in the case where a delayed effect is performed, if a different delayed effect mode is configured to be set for each of the plurality of effects that can be simultaneously performed, normally, a plurality of simultaneously performed effects are included. The effect data of 1 was used as the delayed effect. That is, the effect data including at least the effect information corresponding to the delay period set for each effect and the effect information during the delay period is used.

  In other words, the effect data corresponding to the same timing (for example, the start timing of the special symbol change) is set irrespective of the presence or absence of the delayed effect in which the effect is apparently executed with the predetermined timing with respect to the player. After the effect based on the effect data during the period was executed, the effect to be delayed was executed. In the case of such a configuration, the effect including the delayed effect is performed using the effect data started in accordance with the start timing of the special symbol change, so that it is possible to easily perform the effect without deviation. The effect could be enhanced.

  However, since it is necessary to prepare in advance the effect data corresponding to the effect contents of the delayed effect, there is a problem that the amount of effect data is increased only by slightly changing the delay period. On the other hand, in the present control example, it is configured to delay at the timing of setting the effect data to be subjected to the delayed effect, that is, the timing of setting the display command related to the delayed effect by the sound lamp control device 113. I have. Therefore, when making the delay periods different, it is only necessary to change the value of the timer (delay timer 223s) for measuring the delay period of the sound ramp control device 113.

  The collective effect selection table 222e is a data table used when determining the effect form of the collective effect, and stores character information indicating characters used for the collective effect as shown in FIG. 168 (a). It has a character storage area 222e1 and a character number selection table 222e2, which is a data table used when selecting the number of characters that can be obtained in the collective effect.

  The battle effect selection table 222f is a data table used when determining the effect mode of the battle effect, and selects the physical strength value (HP) of the enemy character used in the battle effect as shown in FIG. 169 (a). HP selection table 222f1 used when performing, the final remaining HP selection table 222f2 used when selecting the stamina value (HP) of the enemy character finally remaining in the battle effect, and when selecting the battle content of the battle effect. And a battle mode selection table 222f3 to be used.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a change start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, effect selection information storage area 223h, operation effect flag 223i, pressed flag 223k, press counter 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect counter group 223p, an upper limit number setting area 223q, an end number setting area 223r, a delay timer 223s, a continuous notice setting flag 223t, a continuous notice counter 223u, a continuous notice flag 223v, a round number counter 223x, and at least another memory area 223z. To have.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). A counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waits) of the special design fluctuating effect up to four times for each special symbol type. The number of pending balls when a winning information command is received or when a fluctuating pattern command is received Update according to the increase / decrease timing.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. A counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main controller 110 for each type of special symbol, when a winning information command is received, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and controls the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and outputs the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 detects the start winning and adds the number of balls to be retained in the variable display, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and subtracts the number of reserved balls. In this case, a ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponding to the command (see S2207 in FIG. 195). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The ordinary reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the ordinary symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command of the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the third symbol is set. It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S2602 in FIG. 199). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (see S2102 in FIG. 195) of the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221. Are transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is turned off (see S2613 in FIG. 199). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to ordinary symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a winning start for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special random number counter C1 acquired in accordance with the start winning, From the values of the special hit type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1, various types of information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, change pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn. The main control device 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  In addition, when the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 is detected, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in accordance with the passage is used to select a normal symbol corresponding to the passage. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 receives various kinds of information notified by the prize information command. In the case of the winning information, the result is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted prize information is based on the type of the entrance (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) in which the entrance is detected, or four areas corresponding to the normal symbol ( Of the vacant areas (first area to fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (whether or not, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to a winning start is drawn. Although a configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying the audio lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a start winning is generated, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. And a setting means for setting a prize information command. When the prize information command is received, various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223f and the received prize information command are included. It is also possible to provide a determining means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches. Thus, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

  Further, in the first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set when a new start winning is generated and is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. The notification timing is not limited to the above-described timing (the timing at which the prize information command is set). For example, a storage unit for temporarily storing the prize information command is provided. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition is variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, when the big hit game starts or ends, or the like), or the special symbol starts to change (or At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (a so-called look-ahead effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

  In the present control example, based on the respective winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a pre-reading effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing a display color of a reserved symbol is performed. As described above, by executing various effects (pre-reading effects) based on the respective winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be given to each of the reserved balls before the start of the variable display. It can give you a big win. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

  In the state setting area 223g, the current gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state before a predetermined period (for example, if the current jackpot is being played, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot) is displayed. This is a storage area to be set (stored).

  In the state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main control device 110 are received by the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195), information indicating the gaming state included in the received state command is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. If it is determined in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) that a command indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed has been received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is immediately updated. The game state is set (stored) as the set game state. Thereby, it is possible to change the effect mode of the variable effect executed after the end of the big hit game according to the game state set at the time of the big hit winning. In addition, for example, even if the jackpots are of the same jackpot type, the game state executed after the end of the jackpot game is changed according to the game state at the time of winning. The game state set after the big hit game ends can be predicted on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and an effect during the big hit game for indicating the prediction result can be executed.

  The effect selection information storage area 223h is an area for temporarily storing the content (effect mode) selected as the variable effect pattern, and is an effect mode executed in the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199). Various effect modes set in the setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are stored. Then, when the operation on the frame button 22 is determined to be valid or when the effect mode being executed is changed, the effect is read out to grasp the effect mode of the currently set (executed) variable effect. It is. The effect selection information storage area 223h stores the effect mode of the variable effect (past effect mode) for the special symbol lottery that has already been executed, the effect mode of the variable effect currently being executed, and the winning information storage area 223f. The effect form (scheduled effect form) of the fluctuating effect scheduled to be executed for the winning information that is present is configured to be temporarily stored, and the effect state for up to five special symbol lotteries is scheduled as the past effect mode. An effect mode corresponding to a maximum of four pieces of winning information is stored as an effect mode.

  With this configuration, for example, when selecting a new effect mode, it is possible to set the effect mode based on the effect mode set (executed) in the past. In this case, for example, in the case where the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current variable production is a jackpot winning, by intentionally setting the production mode overlapping with the production mode set in the past, It is preferable to configure so as to increase the expectation of the jackpot winning when the same effect mode is set successively. In this way, if the same effect mode is normally set successively, a new effect is not executed, so that the player's willingness to play decreases. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. In this case, a display mode such as “same reach” is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a notification unit for notifying the player that the same effect mode has been set continuously. It is good to configure as follows. This makes it possible to notify the player that the same effect mode has been set successively to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  Further, it may be configured to set an effect mode different from the effect mode set in the past, or may be configured to sequentially set a plurality of effect modes having a story. By setting the effect mode related to the effect mode set (executed) in the past as described above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in the effect performed, so that the player It is possible to suppress getting tired of the game early.

  The pressed flag 223k is for indicating that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. Things.

  This pressed-down flag 223k indicates that the frame button has not been pressed during the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (when the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0) in the frame button input monitoring / producing process (see S2107 in FIG. 208). When it is determined that the button has been pressed (operated), it is turned on (see S3404 in FIG. 208). Then, it is referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210) (S3609 in FIG. 210). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, the operation effect is turned off (see S3610 in FIG. 210).

  As described above, the pressed-down flag 223k is provided as a storage unit for temporarily storing the operation of the operating unit (frame button 22) during the operation valid period, and the pressed-down flag 223k is already operated by the operating unit. When the status indicating that the operation has been performed is set (set to ON), an operation effect performed based on the operation on the operation unit is configured by not accepting a new operation on the operation unit. Can be executed reliably.

  In addition, simply by setting the pressed-down flag 223k to ON, it is possible to prohibit the operation of the new operation unit from being accepted. Therefore, the operation unit (frame button 22) is operated, and then the operation based on the operation is performed. The period until the effect is executed can be easily changed.

  The number-of-presses counter 223m is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation valid period, and the operation effect being executed is a continuous hit effect, that is, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). In the case of an operation effect in which the effect mode varies based on the number of times), the number of operations is measured.

  The operation validity timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation validity period set during the operation effect, and when the operation validity period is set, a value indicating the length of the operation validity period set this time is used. Is set. Then, the set value is decremented as time passes. When the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0, the operation on the frame button 22 is determined to be valid.

  The effect counter group 223p is for counting a random value to be referred to when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the present control example, and has a plurality of random value counters. Specifically, it has 11 types of counters, the first effect counter 223p1 to the eleventh effect counter 223p11, and when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect, various effect modes are selected using a special effect counter. Is done. In this way, by configuring the production mode of the variable production using the values of the different counters, it is possible to perform a plurality of productions within one main process, that is, at intervals shorter than the cycle in which the production counter value is updated. Even if the process of selecting an effect mode is executed, it is possible to prevent a plurality of effect modes from being selected with reference to the same counter value.

  These various effect counters are counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199. Although not shown, each time the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the update contents of the various effect counters are updated so that synchronization is difficult. Specifically, the configuration is such that the value of each effect counter is updated by a different prime number by one update process. With such a configuration, in various effects in which the effect mode is selected using the effect counter, the effect contents to be executed can be easily set at random.

  In the present control example, various effect modes are selected using the values of a plurality of counters whose values are independently updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined calculation process is performed on the value, and the effect mode is selected using a value indicating the calculation result. With this configuration, the number of effect counters can be reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, the effect to be performed is prevented by giving a rule to the effect performed by configuring so as to select various effect modes using the value of the effect counter whose value is independently updated, so that the effect of the effect is reduced. Although it is increased, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of effect modes are selected using the same effect counter value. With such a configuration, it is possible to select an effect mode with a plurality of effect modes having rules, and to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  The upper limit number setting area 223q is an area in which the number of times of operation on the frame button 22 until the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect is displayed is stored. In the determination process, the upper limit number selected using the upper limit number selection table 222b1 is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the number of operations on the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect has reached the upper limit number.

  The number-of-ends setting area 223r is the number of times the frame button 22 is operated after the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the continuous-stroke effect is displayed and before the effect period of the continuous-stroke effect is shortened (ended). Is stored, and in the process of determining the effect form of the continuous hit effect, the number of finishes selected using the finish count selection table 222b2 is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the continuous hit effect. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the number of operations on the frame button 22 during the continuous-stroke effect has reached the end number.

  The delay timer 223s is a timer that measures a delay time set as a delay effect.

  The continuous announcement setting flag 223t includes information indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the received winning information, and is a flag indicating that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed from the next variable effect to be executed. It is set to ON when the received prize information includes information indicating that a continuous announcement effect is to be executed.

  Then, it is referred to when a fluctuation display process for setting a new fluctuation effect is executed.

  The continuous notice counter 223u is a counter for indicating the number of variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is continuously executed, and in the winning information-related processing (see S2210 in FIG. 196), the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to ON. In this case, a value indicating the number of times until the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information received this time is executed is set. Then, the value is subtracted every time the variable effect ends. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the status of the continuous announcement effect that is being executed.

  The continuous announcement flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the continuous announcement effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous announcement effect is executed. Then, it is set to off when the continuous announcement effect ends. It is referred to in the prize information-related processing (see S2210 in FIG. 196), and while the continuous announcement flag 223v is set to ON, that is, during the continuous announcement effect, the new continuous announcement setting flag is not set to ON. Make up.

  The round number counter 223x is a counter for measuring the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and a value is added when a new round is started during the jackpot game. And it is reset to 0 when the big hit game ends.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 211) stored as the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 176) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236 b and a second frame buffer 236 c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 213 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first start port 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 is displayed in a fluctuation effect when the main control device 110 performs a fluctuation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 212).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the power-on main image (see FIG. 172). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “x” at the same position as the symbol “○” are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image indicating it is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", an image indicating it is stopped for the variable effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “O” and “X” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 128) numbered "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the fluctuation is started on the third symbol display device 81 even though the fluctuation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the effect is not immediately started.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, the first starting port 64a is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the ball is moved to the second starting port. When the ball easily enters 64b, the number of award balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which the special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the condition. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table.

  If the MPU 231 specifies to display any of the backgrounds (the sea, the beach, the background of the preparation period, and the background dedicated to the time effect) corresponding to the background mode, the MPU 231 determines whether The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time elapses.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 174) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 176) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 175). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 175).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 175, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 176) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 175, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 172 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 211). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7505 in FIG. 223 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 213 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 213 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 213 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 213 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7401 in FIG. 223 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 223 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 176) described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 176) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 176) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 222) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 176), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 173, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 220). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7613 in FIG. 224). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7614 in FIG. 224). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 213 (b)) is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (599 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 599, 99, 599, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a ball entering the first entrance 64a (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204). S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 187) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. To be stored.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the processing of S207 is performed, the processing of S213 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the processing of S208 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. The subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 187) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. To be stored.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process (S213) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution areas provided commonly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are provided. , A special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Jackpot type is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) (the current lottery result) ) Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an open scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the values of the probability change counter 203t and the time reduction counter 203u are set to 0. (S218), and the start of the jackpot is set (S219). Then, a stop command is set (S220), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), a game state update process (S221) is executed. The game state update processing (S221) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S220), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the game state update process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update processing (S221). This game state update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and subtracts the values of the probability change counter 203t and the time reduction counter 203u. This is a process for updating the game state based on the subtracted value.

  In the game state update processing (S221), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), the process proceeds to S355. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted variable counter 203t is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is 0 (S353: Yes), it is the timing to end the probability change, so that a status command indicating a normal state is set (S354), and this processing ends.

  In the present control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 155 (b), if the predetermined value (200) is set in the probability change counter 203t as long as the game is played normally, the same is applied to the time-saving counter 203u. The value (200) is configured to be set. Therefore, when it is determined in the process of S352 that the value of the probability change counter 203t is 0, the value of the time reduction counter 203u is also 0, so that a state command indicating a normal state is set.

  In FIG. 179, when the value of the probability change counter 203t is determined to be 0, a state command indicating a normal state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After updating the value and the value of the time reduction counter 203u, updating both values, determining the updated values, determining the current gaming state, and issuing a state command indicating the gaming state based on the determination result. It may be configured to set. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set a state command indicating a gaming state (latent state) in which the value of the probability change counter 203t is larger than 0 and the value of the time-saving counter 203u is 0.

  On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355). When it is determined that the value is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S35: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S355, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203u subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203u is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating transition to the normal state is set (S358), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S357, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203u is not 0 (S357: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is performed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol change process. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether the ball is hit or not), and the first symbol display device is used. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start processing (S213), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203t is greater than 0 (whether the game state is during the probability change period (high probability game state)) (S302). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of special variation of the special symbol, and the process proceeds to S303. In the processing of S303, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first random number table 202a for the high probability corresponding to the type of the special symbol (see FIG. 155 (a)). Then, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 600 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, six random numbers “0 to 5” are set as big random numbers of the special symbol in the probability change game state (special game state), and the value of the first random number counter C1 and Is determined to be a special symbol big hit when the random number value corresponding to the hit matches. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value of the probability change counter 203t is 0 (the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability corresponding to the type of the special symbol (see FIG. 155 (a)). Then, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 600 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. In the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), two random numbers of “0, 1” are set as the random number value of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the winnings of these are set. If the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the processing of S305, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (ie, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a). Is determined (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S305: Yes), the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. Is set based on the value of (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202d, and the three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. Among A to C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, in the case of the first special symbol big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined to be the big hit A, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of “50 to 99”. If there is, the big hit B is determined, and in the case of the big hit of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”, it is determined that the big hit C (FIG. 155 (b) )reference).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to C) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Although a detailed description is omitted, the stop type (reach type or presence / absence of reach) of the symbol change is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Although illustration of the relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is omitted, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", the normal reach and "51 to 250" If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines a variation time until the result of the determination is notified, and notifies voice lamp controller 113 of the variation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuating time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode as long as the change time is the same, even in the out-of-reach display mode. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation pattern for the deviation, “short deviation”, “long deviation”, various types of “normal reach”, and various types of “super super reach” are defined. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot D, various types of “normal reach” and various types of “super reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol is out of the way (S305: No), a display mode at the time of the out-of-match corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The variation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and the stop type selection counter is checked. Based on the value of C3, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing (S104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and if there is a start win, it is determined. This is a process for executing a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol based on the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is changed) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command of the first special symbol, which indicates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation, is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 187) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball count command in the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value is stored in the first area of the free symbol storage area (the first area to the fourth area) in the special symbol 1 storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with respect to S407 to S412, in each of the above-described processing of S401 to S406, the processing for winning the first entrance 64 is only changed to the processing for winning the second starting opening 64b. Since the same processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball is won at the second ball entrance 640, the first ball is stored as a reserved ball, the first random number counter C1, the first ball counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter, and the like. Each value of CS1 is acquired and stored in the corresponding special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b in the empty reserved area.

  As described above, a second random number counter C1, a first random number counter C2, and a stop type selection counter similar to the first special symbol are also provided for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. By acquiring each value of C3 and the variation type counter CS1, a lottery can be executed by using a common random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be hit. Probability can be constant.

  After executing the process of S412, a pre-read process is executed (S413), and this process ends. The details of the prefetching process (S413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 182. , A process of determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of the change.

  In the present control example, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but may be selected at the start of the change. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of the fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the respective counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the change type counter CS1) may be obtained at the start of the change. With this configuration, it is possible to acquire a counter related to the hit / fail judgment at the time of entering the ball, and to obtain a counter irrelevant to the hit / fail judgment at a later time. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the prefetching process (S413), which is one of the start winning processes (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413).

  In the pre-reading process (FIG. 182, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S451). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning (entering) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S451: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S451: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball. From the storage area 203b, respective values of the first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the current winning are acquired (S452).

  Next, the lottery results indicated by the acquired values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first random number table 202a and the first type selection. Preliminary determination is made with reference to the table 202b and the variation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 155 (a) and (b), and FIGS. 156 to 158) (S453). A winning information command including information for indicating the determination result is set (S454), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This ordinary symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is associated with the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S501). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of the variable display on the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is obtained (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 (S508). In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S507 and the second random number for high probability Based on the table 202c (see FIG. 155 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Normally, it is determined that the pattern is out of place.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203u is 1 or less (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S507 and the second A lottery result is determined based on the two-random number table 202c (see FIG. 155 (c)) to determine whether or not a normal symbol has been won (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “1 to 239”, it is out of the normal symbol. Is determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S511), and when it is determined that the lottery is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S511: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S511 that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

  In the processing of S514, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203u is 0 (S514). If the value of the time reduction counter 203u is not 0 (S514: Yes), the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S514 that the value of the time reduction counter 203u is 0 (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516). This processing ends. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability (in the time reduction state), the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol (in the normal state). Therefore, the frequency of the lottery of the ordinary symbols increases. Therefore, since the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened, so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. State.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the normal symbol game state is configured such that the normal state is set when the special symbol is won during the special symbol jackpot. With such a configuration, during a big hit that is advantageous to the player, the game state of the normal symbol also becomes an advantageous state, and it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player. In addition, the period in which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol jackpot period) and the period in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open (normal symbol winning period) overlap, and the variable winning that is most advantageous for the player is performed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the open electric powered product 640a hinders the winning of the ball in the device 65.

  The above-mentioned contents will be described in detail. When the electric accessory 640a is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable prize device 65 can win, the electric accessory 640a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball flowing down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 640a, and there is a problem that the ball cannot be sufficiently won to the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position (downstream side) below the variable winning device 65, and the ball that flows down the first flow path during the jackpot period (during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open). Can be solved by using a structure that makes the variable winning device 65 easily win, but in this case, there is a problem that the structure of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, since the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state (normal state) during the special symbol jackpot, the electric accessory 640a becomes difficult to open during the jackpot period, and the above-described problem is solved. can do.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S515 or the processing of S516 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the process of S517, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S512, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display updating process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

  Next, when the variation display that is currently being executed is started on the second symbol display device 83, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S519). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1 (S520). If the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 1, If it is determined (S520: Yes), “1 second × 2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. And migrate. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set as follows. “0.2 seconds × 1 time” is set (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

  In the processing of S523, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set to start for the time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 (S523), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 end. On the other hand, in the processing of S519, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the processing of S520 to S523 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 177), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present control example) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S603). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is reset. The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when power is turned on to the main control device 110. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present control example) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). If it is not stored (S805: No). Since the processing at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S812 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S812 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly performed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes, and transmits a status command based on the long-time release flag 203i (S808). Next, while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S810), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic processing of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripherals). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 178) and the start winning process (see FIG. 181) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, a winning command set in the start winning process or the pre-read process (see FIG. 182) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S521 and S522 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183). Note that the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 in FIG.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In this control example, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180). At 37, a stop display (lighting display) is performed.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. I do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 183). Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 185 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S801). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state. This is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning port (specific winning port (large opening port) 65a, V winning port 650a).

  In the big hit control process (S904), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the big hit of the special symbol (S1001). If it is determined that the special symbol big hit is the start timing (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this processing ends.

  Note that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the special symbol big hit or small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and thereafter, the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A, 5000 for big hit B). In this case, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, if a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and if a big hit in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased Can be shortened. In the present control example, if a big hit occurs during a left hit game, it is necessary to switch to a right hit game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit occurs in a left-handed game, a sufficient time for switching to a right-handed game (big hit game) can be secured. Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1001 that it is not the special symbol big hit start timing (S1001: No), it is next determined whether or not the special symbol big hit is present (S1003). In the processing of S1003, the game information related to the hit game stored in the game state storage area 203m is read out and the discrimination is performed.

  During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1003, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1003: No), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being hit (S1003: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the big hit operation setting processing is executed (S1005). The jackpot operation setting process (S1005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 189. However, the process corresponding to the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (variable winning device 65, V winning device 65, and switching member 650h) Is performed).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the jackpot operation setting process (S1005), which is one of the processes of the jackpot control process (S904 in FIG. 188), will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005).

  When the jackpot operation setting process (S1005) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. The operation scenario is read (S1101). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably changing solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the processing of S1101 (S1103), and the winning number counter 203j is reset (S1104). A round number command is set (S1105). After that, the process ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present control example performs a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is performed on the first attacker (V winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a second attacker (variable winning device 65) on the second attacker (variable winning device 65). And a jackpot game (round game) in which the first attacker (V winning device 650) performs the opening operation. This is specified only in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the eye round game. Therefore, when executing a round game other than the above, a scenario in which the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 650k is opened to the corresponding opening operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge flow path 650e2). Is not defined, the process of S1102 is skipped.

  As described above, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Defects can be suppressed. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004 in FIG. 188: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound ramp control device 113 so that the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round game is currently being played.

  In the present control example, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set as the round command set by the main control device 110, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started may be set. In this case, the sound ramp control device 113 is provided with a means for counting the number of round commands received during one big hit game, and the number of the round game executed this time on the sound ramp control device 113 is determined. May be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 650k (S1006). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1006: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S1007). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1006 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1008). The start timing of the ending effect is that the final round (the tenth round in the case of the jackpot A) in the jackpot game ends, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and the standby time (ball control time in this control example) (3 seconds) have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is set to off (S1009), the ending process is executed (S1010), and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1010).

  When the ending process (S1010) is executed, first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1201), and it is determined whether or not the certain change setting flag 203h is ON (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203h is ON (S1202: Yes), the value of the probable change counter 203t is set to 200 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the processing of S1204, a value corresponding to the jackpot type and the presence or absence of the V prize is set in the time reduction counter 203u (S1204), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the probable change setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the processing of S1203 is skipped and the processing shifts to the processing of S1204 described above.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1008: No), next, the winning processing is executed (S1011). Here, the winning process (S1011) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1011).

  In the winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S1401). The round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S1401: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is within the round valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a. When it is determined that the ball has passed the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). After that, the processing of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process of S1404 is executed.

  In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407), and the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it is possible to determine that the ball is being thrown since the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), it is determined whether or not the round time (30 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed (S1405). . If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the processing of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the processing of S1408 is executed.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether the ball has passed the V switch 650e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the ball has passed the V switch 650e3 (S1410: Yes), the value is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i and updated (S1411), and the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412).

  After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1410 that the ball has not passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: No), the processing of S1413 is executed. In the processing of S1413, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is turned off (S1414), the probability change valid flag 203q is turned on (S1415), and the process is thereafter terminated. Here, by setting the probable change valid flag 203q to ON, if the ball remaining in the special discharge channel 650e2 passes through the V switch 650e3 even after the switching member 650h is switched, the special symbol is used. Can be controlled so as to set the high probability state.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not the probable change valid flag 203q is on (S1416). If it is determined that the probable change valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), the process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S1416 that the probable change valid flag 203q is ON (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probable change valid timer 203r and updated (S1417).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the probable change valid timer 203r has reached the upper limit value (1.2s in the present control example) (S1418). If it is determined that the probable variable valid timer 203r is at the upper limit (S1418: Yes), the probable variable valid flag 203q is set to off (S1419), and the probable variable valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1420). . After that, this processing ends. In the process of S1418, when it is determined that the probability change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410.

  By this, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed the V switch 650e3 until the probability change valid timer 203r reaches the upper limit value. State can be set. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the V switch 650e3 and giving a high probability state of a special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191) is completed, an abnormal process is executed (S1012), and the process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing (S1012). This abnormality process (S1012) is a process for monitoring whether the V switch 650e3 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormal processing (S1012), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is a round valid period (S1501). If it is out of the round validity period (S1501: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). After that, the processing of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed the ball discharge switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1504: Yes), the ball is being thrown out, so the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by one and updated (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the number of discharges counter 203s) matches the number of winnings (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined whether it is (S1507).

  If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the processing of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the processing of S1509 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game balls in the V winning device 650 and suppress the illegality of passing the game balls to the V switch 650e3.

  In the processing of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the positive change passage counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1511), and thereafter, this processing is ended.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 210, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 193, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S2119 (see FIG. 194). ) Is determined (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 194, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 194), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2119 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S2119 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S2118 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S2119, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S2119 (see S2118 in FIG. 194). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2119 is executed. Therefore, the process in S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S2119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S2008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S2008 is performed via the processes from S2004 to S2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process skips S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S2010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S2011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the command that can determine whether or not the symbol has been hit for a long time is output from the main control device 110, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can also determine the state. Can be.

  The reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is that when the process from S2004 to S2008 is performed via the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or the current processing of S2101 (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2114 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2113. In the processing of S2101, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined in S2102 to S2113, which is processing relating to display (staging), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2114, the variable display setting process in S2115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in a short cycle. That is, by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2115 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing is received. Based on the command, the setting relating to the variable effect can be performed without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2108 to be described later (S2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, or the value of the ordinary reserved ball number counter 223c. Is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. The frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110), and the flow shifts to the processing in S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing in S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S2110 ends, an operation effect management processing is executed (S2111). The operation effect management process (S2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 210, but the effect mode displayed during the operation effect is determined according to the presence or absence of an operation on the operation means (frame button 22). A process for changing is performed.

  After executing the operation effect management process (S2111), an operation control process (S2112) is executed. In the operation control process (S2112), the operation control of the various movable movable objects provided for the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is performed. The operation control of the various movable movable objects is performed based on a lottery result of a special symbol, a lottery result of a normal symbol, an operation result of the operation means (frame button 22), a game result during the jackpot game, and the like. This is executed according to the contents of the operation scenario of the movable movable object, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing in S2112 ends, a counter update processing is executed (S2113). In the counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for time information, which is necessary when executing various effects, for example, the operation valid timer 223n is executed.

  When the processing in S2113 ends, a command determination processing is executed next (S2114). This command determination processing (S2114) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (S2114), a variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off processing is executed (S2119). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S2120). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2117: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2114). This command determination processing (S2114) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

  In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 195), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2003), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received (S2204). If a stop type command has been received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and the process ends. .

  In the processing of S2204, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received (S2207). When the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball). The number is stored in the number counter 223b) (S2208), and the process ends. Here, the reserved ball number corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the reserved ball number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Is stored. When receiving the reserved ball count command indicating the reserved ball count of the ordinary symbol, the information for indicating the reserved ball count is stored in the ordinary reserved ball count counter.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2207, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not a winning-related command has been received (S2209). If a winning-related command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning-information-related processing starts (S2210), and this processing ends. The details of the prize information-related processing (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196, but a prize command output from the main controller 110 (a prize command corresponding to a special symbol, a prize command corresponding to a normal symbol). A process of preliminarily determining the winning information included in the winning command, and executing an effect (pre-reading effect) based on the result of the predetermination, and a process of temporarily storing the result of the predetermination. Is done.

  In the processing of S2209, if no winning-related command has been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S2211), and if it has been received (S2211: Yes). Then, the jackpot-related process is executed (S2212), and this process ends. The jackpot-related processing (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2211 that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), a stop process is executed (S2214), and the process is hunted. This stop processing (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the processing of S2213 (S2213: No), the present processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a prize information related process (S2210) which is one of the command determination processes (S2114: see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the winning information-related processing (S2210). This winning information related processing (S2210) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the prize information related processing (S2210), first, prize information included in the received prize information command is read (S2301), and a hold display mode is determined based on the result of the winning / failure determination included in the read prize information (S2302).

  Then, a display command for indicating the hold display mode determined in the process of S2302 is set (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement flag 223v is on (S2304). If it is determined that the continuous announcement flag 223v is on (S2304: Yes), the process is terminated as it is, and the continuous announcement is being performed. When it is determined that the flag 223v is off (S2304: No), the presence or absence of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the winning information read out in the process of S2301 (S2305), and the process proceeds to S2306.

  In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306). When it is determined that there is no continuous announcement effect (S2306: No), the present process is terminated, and when it is determined that there is a continuous announcement effect (S2306: Yes), the continuous announcement setting flag 223t is set to ON ( (S2307), the number of times until the special figure change corresponding to the target prize information is set to the value of the continuous notice counter 223u (S2308), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, the content of the jackpot-related processing (S2212 in FIG. 197) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process (S2212). The jackpot-related process (S2212) is executed in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is related to a hit (big hit, small hit) from the main control device 110. This is executed when a command is received.

  In this control example, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is opened when the big hit C is won by the special symbol lottery and when the small hit is won. When the winning game (left winning game) to be executed is executed and the big hits A, B, D and E are won by lottery of special symbols, the variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a winning game (right winning game), and in the big hit-related processing (S2212 in FIG. 197), a display command for displaying information related to a winning game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The processing and the winning effect different according to the type of the winning game to be executed are configured to be executed.

  When the jackpot-related process (S2212 in FIG. 197) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an opening command (S2401). If it is determined that the command is an opening command (S2401: Yes), a display opening command is set (S2402), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not an opening command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2403), and it is determined that the command is a round number command. In this case (S2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 223x (S2404), a display round number command is set based on the value of the round number counter 223x (S2405), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2403, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S2403: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2406) and determined to be an ending command. In this case (S2406: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2407), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2408), and the process ends. Also. If it is determined in the processing of S2406 that the ending command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a V-pass command (S2409), and if it is determined that the command is a V-pass command. (S2409: Yes), a V effect command is set (S2410), and the process ends. If it is determined that the V-pass command has not been received in the process of S2409 (S2409: No), the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2214). In this stop processing (S2214), processing for setting the display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed in accordance with the special symbol change stop timing.

  When the stop processing (S2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is larger than 0 (S2501). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is equal to or smaller than 0 (S2501: No), the process proceeds to S2505. When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is larger than 0 (S2501: Yes), the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is decremented by 1 (S2502), and then, whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0. Is determined (S2503). When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not 0 (S2503: No), the process proceeds to S2505. If it is determined that the value of the continuous announcement counter 223u is 0 (S2503: Yes), the continuous announcement flag 223v is set to OFF (S2504), and the process proceeds to S2505. In the process of S2505, the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2505), and thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S2115). The variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 199), first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2601). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2601: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is It is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice setting flag 223t is on (S2604). If it is determined that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is on (S2604: Yes), the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to off. (S2609), the continuous announcement flag 223v is set to ON (S2610), and the flow shifts to the process of S2608.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2604 that the continuous announcement setting flag 223t is off (S2604: No), then it is determined whether the continuous announcement flag 223v is on (S2605). When it is determined that the continuous announcement flag 223v is ON (S2605: Yes), the effect mode is determined based on the acquired fluctuation pattern and the continuous announcement effect (S2611), and the process proceeds to S2608. In the process of S2605, if it is determined that the continuous announcement flag 223v is off (S2605: No), the variation effect pattern selection table 222a (FIGS. 160 (a) and (b)) is displayed based on the acquired variation pattern. A variable effect pattern is selected with reference to the pattern (2606). Next, an effect mode setting process is executed (S2607), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2608). The contents of the effect mode setting process executed in the process of S2607 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S2612.

  In the process of S2612, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2612). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2612: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2612: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2613), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is It is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2614). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S2615), and the process proceeds to S2616.

  In the processing of S2616, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2616). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of S2616 has been executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the contents of the effect mode setting process (S2607), which is one of the variable display setting processes (see FIG. 199) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process (S2607). In this effect mode setting process (S2607), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (preliminary content) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is executed.

  When the effect mode setting process (S2607) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (S2701). Here, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a probable change state based on the information set in the state setting area 223g. If it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the current state is not the normal state (S2701: No), the time reduction / probable change effect setting processing is executed (S2707), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2706. The details of the time-saving / probable-change during-effect setting process (S2707) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the current state is the normal state (S2701: Yes), it is next determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the variable effect pattern selected this time (S2702). If it is determined (S2702: Yes), an operation effect setting process is executed (S2703), and the flow shifts to the process of S2704. The details of the operation effect setting process (S2703) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2702, when it is determined that the operation effect is not included in the variation effect pattern selected this time (S2702: No), it is then determined whether the variation effect pattern selected this time has a battle effect (S2704). If it is determined that there is a battle effect (S2704: Yes), a battle effect setting process is executed (S2705), and the flow shifts to the process of S2706. The detailed contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the battle effect is not included in the variation effect pattern selected this time (S2704: No), a display command for indicating various setting contents is set (S2706), and the process is performed. finish.

  Next, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703). In the operation effect setting process (S2703), a preparation process corresponding to the operation effect type included in the current fluctuation pattern is executed.

  When the operation effect setting process (S2703) is executed, first, the type of the operation effect is extracted (S2801), and it is determined whether or not the current operation effect is a continuous hit effect (S2802), and it is determined that the operation effect is a continuous hit effect. In this case (S2801: Yes), a continuous-hit effect setting process is executed (S2803), and the flow shifts to the process of S2807. Details of the continuous-hit effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the production is not a continuous production (S2801: No), then it is determined whether or not the current operation production is a delayed production (S2804). (S2804: Yes), a delay effect setting process is executed (S2805), and the flow shifts to the process of S2807. Details of the delay effect setting process (S2805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2804 that the effect is not a delayed effect (S2804: No), the process corresponding to the extracted other operation effect type is executed (S2806), and the process shifts to S2807.

  In the processing of S2807, the operation validity period is determined based on the selected variation effect mode (S2807), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the content of the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous-hit effect setting process (S2803).

  When the continuous-stroke effect setting process (S2803) is executed, first, a hit / failure determination result and a reach type are extracted based on the received fluctuation pattern command (S2901), and the extracted hit / failure determination result, reach type, and a second effect counter are extracted. The upper limit number and the final variable mode are determined using the upper limit number selection table 222b1 (refer to FIG. 162 (b)) with reference to the value (S2902). Next, a value corresponding to the determined upper limit number is set in the upper limit number setting area 223q (S2903), and the number of end times is determined by referring to the extracted validity determination result, the determined upper limit number, and the value of the third effect counter. The number of terminations is determined using the selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 163 (a)) (S2904), and a value corresponding to the determined upper limit is set in the termination number setting area 223r (S2905). Next, the effect is determined by referring to the extracted determination result of the success / failure and the determined upper limit number (S2906), the effect mode of the continuous hit effect corresponding to the various determination contents is set (S2907), and the effect selection information is stored. The information regarding the effect mode set in the area is stored (S2908), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, the contents of the delayed effect setting process (S2805) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805).

  When the delay effect setting process (S2805) is executed, first, a result of the determination of success or failure is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3001), and the extracted result of the determination of success or failure and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7 are referred to. Then, the delay period and the delay target are determined using the delay effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 167) (S3002), and the information on the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored (S3003). After that, this processing ends.

  In this control example, as described above, the content of the delay effect and the delay target are set at the start of the fluctuation, and the start timing of the delay effect is set in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 208) described later. Although the setting is made so as to be set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting may be made so that the start of the fluctuation is set as the start timing of the delayed effect. With such a configuration, more delayed effects can be executed, and various effect modes can be provided to the player.

  Next, the contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705). In the battle effect setting process (S2705), first, a validity / non-permission determination result and a fluctuation time are extracted based on the received fluctuation pattern command (S3101), and the extracted validity / non-performance determination result, the fluctuation time, and the eighth effect counter are extracted. The number of effects and the number of characters are determined using the character number selection table 222e2 (see FIG. 168 (c)) with reference to the value of (S3102), and the current effect is generated based on the determined number of characters. The character to be used is determined (S3103), and with reference to the character storage area 222e1 (FIG. 168 (b)), the pattern row arrangement information of the determined character type is compared with the number of effects (S3104). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a symbol row in which the number of characters greater than the number of effects is determined (S3105). If it is determined that there is a symbol row in which the number of characters greater than the number of appearances is determined (S3105: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the last acquisition chance is determined (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. If it is determined that there is no symbol row in which the number of characters larger than the number of appearances is determined (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3107.

  In the process of S3107, the effect mode of each effect is determined (S3107), the effect mode of the collective effect corresponding to the various determination contents is set (S3108), and information on the effect mode set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored. Then (S3109), the second half battle effect setting process is executed (S3110), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the content of the battle second half effect setting process (S3110) executed in the battle effect setting process (see S2705 in FIG. 204) will be described. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle second half effect setting process (S3110). In the battle second half effect setting process (S3110), first, the number of characters to be acquired in the collective effect is read from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3151), the result of the hit / fail determination, the number of characters, and the value of the ninth effect counter. , The HP value of the battle opponent is determined using the HP selection table 222f1 (see FIG. 169 (b)) (S3152), and the hit / failed determination result, the determined HP value of the battle opponent, and the tenth HP value are determined. With reference to the effect counter value, the remaining HP value is determined using the final remaining HP selection table 222f2 (see FIG. 169 (c)) (S3153), and the hit / failed determination result and the determined battle partner HP value are determined. The number of battles is determined using the battle mode selection table 222f3 (see FIG. 170) with reference to the value of the eleventh effect counter (S3154). Next, based on the determined HP value and the remaining HP value, a reduced HP value to be reduced in the latter half of the battle effect is determined (S3155), and each battle effect is determined based on the determined number of battles and the reduced HP value. Is determined (S3156), the effect form of the continuous hit effect corresponding to the various determination contents is set (S3157), the information on the effect form set in the effect selection information storage area 223h is stored (S3158), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the content of the time-saving / probable-change effect setting process (S2707) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving / probable variation effect setting process (S2707). In this time reduction / probability change effect setting process (S2707), it is first determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is on (S3201). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is ON (S3201: Yes), the present process ends. If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is off (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the obtained fluctuation pattern includes a random display effect (S3202). If it is determined that there is no random display effect in the obtained fluctuation pattern (S3202: No), the present process ends. If it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern has a random display effect (S3202: Yes), a random display effect setting process is executed (S3203), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203) executed in the time saving / probable change effect setting process (see S2707 in FIG. 207) will be described. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the content of the random display effect setting process (S3203). In this random display effect setting process (S3203), first, a pass / fail judgment result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3301), and the extracted pass / fail judgment result and the value of the fourth effect counter are referred to. Using the display order selection table 222c2 (see FIG. 164 (c)), the effect icon (head icon) to be displayed first is determined (S3302), and the extracted result of determination of success / failure, the determined head icon, and the fifth effect are displayed. With reference to the value of the counter, the permutation is determined using the display mode selection table 222c4 (refer to FIG. 165 (b)) (S3303), and the extracted validity / non-permission determination result and the value of the sixth effect counter are referenced. Then, using the display number selection table 222c5 (see FIG. 166), the display number of the effect icons is determined (S3304), and the display icons correspond to various determination contents. Set the representation embodiment of the random display effect (S3305), stores information about representation embodiment set to effect selection information storage area 223 h (S3306), followed by terminating the present process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of a notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107: see FIG. 208), first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3401: No). Then, the processing is terminated. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the operation is currently in the valid period (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S2703 of FIG. 201), the operation validity period corresponding to the type is set in the operation validity timer 223n, and the operation validity timer 223n is set. It is determined whether or not the value indicates the operation validity period.

  In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the operation is not in the effective period (S3402: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the operation is valid (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set on (S3403), and if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is on. (S3403: Yes), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3403: No), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3404), and the operation content corresponding to the set operation valid period is read ( (S3405) Next, it is determined whether or not the operation content is a continuous hit effect (S3406). If it is determined that it is a continuous hit effect (S3406: Yes), the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S3407), and the flow shifts to the process of S3411.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the operation content is not a continuous hit effect (S3406: No), then it is determined whether the operation content is a delayed effect (S3408). If it is determined that the delay effect is a delay effect (S3408: Yes), a value corresponding to the delay period is set in the delay timer 223s (S3409), and then it is determined whether or not the voice mode of the current delay effect content is a delay. (S3413). If it is determined that the voice mode is not delayed (that is, normal) (S3413: No), a voice command corresponding to the effect mode of the delayed effect is set (S3414), and the process proceeds to S3411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the voice mode of the current delayed effect content is late (S3413: No), the process of S3414 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3411.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3408 that the operation content is not a delayed effect (S3408: No), a process corresponding to the other operation content is executed (S3410), and the process proceeds to S3411. In the process of S3411, the operation mode corresponding to the current frame button operation is determined (S3411), a display command corresponding to the determined operation mode is set (S3412), and the process is thereafter terminated.

  Note that, in the present control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for changing the effect mode of the operation effect is established based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, but is not limited thereto. The variable condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation validity period, or an operation unit having a plurality of operation methods may be provided. The variable condition may be established when the operation means is operated by a specific operation method.

  Further, in the present control example, the operation of the operating means is indicated by setting one flag (pressed flag 223k) to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured so as to show different operation results, and to change the effect mode of the operation effect according to the type of the operation result.

  Further, in the present control example, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is described as an example of the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute an effect of moving the decoration movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means).

  In the present control example, when an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is being performed, when the frame button 22 is operated, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation validity period is determined. Although the configuration is as described above (see S3411 in FIG. 208), other configurations may be used.

  Specifically, an operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined is set within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. Then, there are provided storage means for storing the length of the set operation validity period, and calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation validity period based on the value of the operation validity timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation unit.

  With such a configuration, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means (according to the remaining time at the time of operating the operation means), so that a variety of effects can be provided to the player. Can be provided.

  In addition, one operation validity period is determined from a plurality of operation validity periods, an operation validity period setting means that can be set within the effect period of the display effect, and an operation validity timer 223n when the operation means is operated. Calculating means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation validity period based on the value of (1) may be provided. With this configuration, different operation validity periods can be set for display effects in the same display mode, and based on the set operation validity period length and the timing at which the operation unit is operated. The calculated progress rate of the operation validity period, that is, the length of the entire operation validity period is set to 100, and the ratio of the period that has already elapsed (or the period that has not elapsed) is calculated as a percentage (%). The operation mode to be executed can be made different.

  Thereby, even if the operation means is operated at the same timing based on the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that various effects are provided to the player. be able to.

  Further, instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation effective period, the operation mode is set according to the value of the percentage calculated by the calculation unit, thereby changing the operation mode. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to “1 to 100”. In other words, when the operation mode is set according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, when the length of the operation valid period is set to be 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds are set. Is set when the operating means is operated at the third second (the remaining time is 3 seconds), and when 14 seconds is set, the operating means is operated at the seventh second (the remaining time is 7 seconds). Since the remaining time is different between and, different operation modes are set.

  In each of the above-described examples, the operation means is operated at the middle point of the operation validity period in any case, and the operation difficulty is the same. It is necessary to define a data table so as to select an operation mode based on not only the remaining time of the validity period but also the length of the set operation validity period and the remaining time of the operation validity period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is.

  In this case, if the length of the operation validity period is set to be variable to a plurality of lengths, the capacity of the data table described above is greatly increased, and a situation occurs in which the data capacity is reduced. . In contrast, by configuring the operation mode using the percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation validity period. In this case, the data capacity of the data table can be reduced.

  In addition, as a classifying unit that classifies the percentage value calculated by the calculating unit into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first classifying unit that classifies into “1% to 50%” and “51% to 99%”; “1% to 10%”, “11% to 20%”, “21% to 30%”, “41% to 50%”, “51% to 60%”, “61% to 70%”, and “71” % -80% "," 81% -90% ", and" 91% -99% ", and a second classifying means is provided. Further, based on whether a predetermined condition such as a special symbol lottery result is satisfied or not. Deciding means for deciding which classifying means to use, classifying the percentage value calculated by the calculating means by the classifying means decided by the deciding means, and selecting an operation mode based on the classified information May be configured.

  In addition, in the case of using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed thereafter is changed according to the operation timing of the operation unit, for example, a pachinko machine is used as an operation effect performed by operating the operation unit. It is good to use the effect which makes the movable object for effect provided in 10 move. This makes it possible to execute the operation effect without worrying about the operation effect period executed based on the set operation mode and the display effect period displayed on the display means.

  Next, the content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the effect mode of the special figure fluctuation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern and the effect mode of the special figure fluctuation effect are described. Processing for replacing an effect based on a normal symbol lottery (ordinary symbol effect) is executed.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not an operation effect is present in the running variable effect (S3501). When it is determined that there is no operation effect in the running variable effect (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3511. If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the running fluctuation effect (S3501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is 3 seconds before the operation validity period (S3502). If it is determined that it is three seconds before the operation validity period (S3502: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the operation validity period is set (S3503), and the process shifts to S3511. If it is determined that it is not three seconds before the operation validity period (S3502: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation validity period has started (S3504). If it is determined that it is not the start of the operation valid period (S3504: No), the process of S3505 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3506. If it is determined that the operation valid period has started (S3504: Yes), a value corresponding to the length of the currently set operation valid period is set in the operation valid timer 223n (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3506. .

  In the processing of S3506, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3506: No), the process proceeds to S3510. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506: Yes), the value of the delay timer 223s is subtracted by 1 (S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted delay timer 223s is 0. It is determined (S3508). If it is determined that the value of the subtracted delay timer 223s is not 0 (S3508: No), the process proceeds to S3510. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3508: Yes), the start of the corresponding delay effect is set (S3509), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3510. In the processing of S3510, other liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3510), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S3511, other liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3511), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In the operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is performed during a period in which the operation effect is being executed.

  When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S3601). Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3601: No), the present processing ends. When it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S3601: Yes), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is decremented by 1 (S3602), and then, whether the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (S3603). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not 0 (S3603: No), the process proceeds to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3603: Yes), then it is determined whether the shortening flag is on (S3604). If it is determined that the shortening flag is on (S3604: Yes), the shortening flag is set to off (S3605), and the process shifts to S3606. If it is determined that the shortening flag is OFF (S3604: No), the process of S3605 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3606.

  In the process of S3606, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3606: No), a display command for indicating that the operation validity period has ended is set (S3607), and the process shifts to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), a display command for extending and displaying the display screen indicating the operation valid period is set (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3609. I do.

  In the process of S3609, it is determined whether the pressed-down flag 223k is set to ON (S3609). If it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223k is set to off (S3609: No), the process proceeds to S3623. When it is determined that the pressed-down flag 223k is set to ON (S3609: Yes), the pressed-down flag 223k is set to OFF (S3610), the value of the press-down counter 223m is read (S3611), and then pressed. It is determined whether the value of the number-of-times counter 223m is larger than 0 (S3612). If it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3612: Yes), the value stored in the upper-limit number setting area 223q is compared with the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m (S3613). Next, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the limited number of times setting area 223q matches the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m (S3614). If it is determined that the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q and the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m match (S3614: Yes), a display command for indicating that the upper limit number has been reached is issued. The setting is performed (S3515), and the process proceeds to S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the limit count setting area 223q and the value of the press counter 223m do not match (S3614: No), the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the press The value of the number-of-times counter 223m is compared (S3616), and it is determined whether the value stored in the number-of-times-of-completion setting area 223r matches the value of the number-of-times-of-press counter 223m (S3617). If it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the value of the press counter 223m match (S3617: Yes), the value of the press counter 223m is reset (S3618), and the shortening flag is set. Is set to ON (S3619), and the process shifts to S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the end count setting area 223r does not match the value of the press counter 223m (S3617: No), the processing of S3618 and S3619 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S3620. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 3612 that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is 0 (S3612: No), then it is determined whether or not the shortening flag is on (S3621). When it is determined that the shortening flag is on (S3621: Yes), a specific effect is determined (S3622), and the flow shifts to the process of S3623. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3621: No), the corresponding button effect is set (S3620), and the flow shifts to the process of S3623.

  In the process of S3623, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set (S3623), and the process ends.

<Control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes required for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 212, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present control example, the case has been described where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 223 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7402 in FIG. 223 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)), the simple command determination processing is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. (See S6308 in FIG. 213 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 213 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, a ball (start winning prize) enters the first starting port 64, and a start instruction of the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a display fluctuation pattern command is received, a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period to perform a simple fluctuation effect. it can. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 176) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when receiving a continuous advance command (not shown) from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also notified of the continuous advance. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 176 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type (big hit A to D) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is performed, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is performed, and the process of S6304 is performed. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 214, S6302), as shown in FIG. 214, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). (S6401: No), the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), and returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present control example, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S6501 is turned on, and other variation table data is determined. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S6503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6506), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 (b) is a flowchart illustrating stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hits A to D) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (FIG. 213 (b)), the value of the stop type counter updated each time the process is executed, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S6602). ).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S6603). Thereafter, the flow returns to the process of S6401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S6408: Yes), display jackpot-related command processing is executed (S6409). Details of the jackpot-related display command processing for display (S6409) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Here, the jackpot-related command processing for display (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing (S6409), and processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Is to execute.

  In the display jackpot-related command processing for display (FIG. 216, S6409), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S6701). If it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is a display opening command (S6701: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6702), and the flow shifts to the process of S6703.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6702) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing (S6702). The opening command process (S6702) is a process executed when it is determined in the display jackpot-related command process (see S6409 of FIG. 216) that there is a display opening command, and an effect indicating the start of the jackpot. On the third symbol display device 81.

  In the opening command processing (S6702), first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802). After that, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the opening display data table (S6803), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6804), and the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are turned off (S6805). Then, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 216, the description will be continued. In the process of S6701, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6701: No), the process proceeds to S6703. When the processing of S6701 or S6702 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703). If it is determined in the process of S6703 that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S6704), and the flow shifts to the process of S6705.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S6704). The round number command process (S6704) is a process executed when it is determined in the display jackpot-related command process (see S6409 of FIG. 216) that the display round number command has been received. This is a process for displaying an effect when the number of rounds is updated on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the round number command processing (S6704), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6811). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6812), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6813). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6814), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6815), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 216, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6703 that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S6705. When the processing of S6703 or S6704 is completed, it is determined whether or not a display ending command has been received (S6705). If it is determined in the processing of S6705 that there is an ending command for display (S6705: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S6706), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6707.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6706) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S6706). The ending command process (S6706) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the display jackpot-related command process for display (see S6409 in FIG. 216), and has an effect indicating the end of the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the ending command processing (S6706), first, an ending display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6851). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233 e is cleared (S 6852), and the time data is set in the time counter 233 h based on the ending display data table (S 6853). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6854), the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6855), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 216, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6705 that there is no ending command for display (S6705: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S6707. When the processing of S6705 or S6706 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S6707). In the process of S6707, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S6707: No), the process ends. If it is determined that there is a display V effect command (S6707: Yes), a V effect command process is executed (S6708), and then the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 218 (b), the details of the V effect command processing (S6708) will be described. The V effect command process (S6708) is a process executed when it is determined that the V effect command has been received in the display jackpot-related command process for display (see FIG. 216), and the probability that the jackpot game is awarded is determined. This is a process for displaying an effect suggesting a high price on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S6708), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6902), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6903). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6904), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no jackpot-related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a back image change command (S6410). If there is a change command (S6410: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 (a) is a flowchart illustrating the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224 and S7403) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S7001). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to D), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S7002), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7609 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7610. . When the specified rear image type is the rear image B, a part of the image data corresponding to the rear image is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Then, a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to D is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6410: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If (S6412: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6412, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6414), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6414 again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6414 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination processing (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)) is similar to the command determination processing. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 172, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 215 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 215 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 215 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 220, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7251).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7251, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7252), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7301). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7302). As a result, if it is End information (S7302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7303). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7303: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7305), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7306), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7302: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 220, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. Therefore, first, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). After the final display flag 233z indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on rather than off (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed on the display data table. The contents are set in the table buffer 233d (S7217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and it means that the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 172d is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223 and FIG. 224, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 223 (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is any untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 213 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 213 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) (see S7501: No in FIG. 223 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed previously from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is ON (S7707). If the transfer start flag is ON (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S7711, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends as it is.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. The image data that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 225, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information 176, the drawing list shown in FIG. 176 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 213 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  Further, in the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, the determination as to whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is performed by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident Whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused may be confirmed. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed, but by using the configuration described in the above control example of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. May be stored as a part of the boot program to be executed. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory constituted by a nonvolatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a may be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). And a first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified in the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the drawing process is delayed by writing the image data.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One RAM is used for the resident area and the normal area. It may be divided so that the same content as each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above control example, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above control example, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are not overwritten while the power is turned on and continue to be retained is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. The transfer can be efficiently performed without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command and the frame button operation command. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 and The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 220). By executing a warning image setting process (see FIG. 221) when the determination is made, a warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command for notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display control device 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Accordingly, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address in which the time (20 ms in this control example) in which the image of the frame is displayed is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this control example, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type are displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed and drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Accordingly, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing contents but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed in accordance with the additional drawing contents. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the variable effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above control example, a case will be described where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image for which the drawing process is completed (in the above control example, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the image for one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval). Therefore, the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded is displayed. May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above control example, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 transmits the sound display control device 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above control example, the demonstration has been described in which the rear image is changed and the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, but the demonstration effect is not necessarily performed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol including a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above control example, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first stores the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 becomes 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Therefore, it is not necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to determine whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above control example, the case where only the image data corresponding to “back A” of the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the transfer instruction of the image data is defined by the transfer data table or the display data table in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. It may control the rollers 237. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. In addition, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a back image is displayed. It may move or change.

  In the above control example, the main controller 110 transmits the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1 and first counter type C2) acquired at the time of the start prize notified to the sound lamp controller 113, to the number of reserved balls. Although the case of being included in the command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1 and first counter type C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is used as an audio lamp. The control device 113 may be notified.

  In the above control example, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the pattern is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above control example, a case has been described in which one gaming machine 13 has one first start port 64a for starting a special symbol jackpot lottery when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances in which a ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball count command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the first entrance is changed. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is mainly transmitted. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above control example, the winning in the first starting port 64a and the passage through the through gate 67 are configured to be suspended up to four times, respectively. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four. The number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of balls to be changed in the variable display based on the winning in the first starting port 64a is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is changed by the number of the reserved balls. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the various effect devices (the effect member 700, the horizontal slide member 840, and the injection device 400 for injecting the granular member 320 used in the first control example described above (FIG. 5 and FIG. 6))) will be described in detail. The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that control contents relating to the various effect devices described above are added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of various effect devices in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. Note that the specific configuration and operation principle of the various effect devices are the same as those of the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted. Further, for convenience of explanation, in the above-described first control example, different symbols are given to the structures (structures having individual functions) constituting each of the effect devices. Are given only to the description, and the description will be made as if each of the effect devices has the functions described in the first control example. In addition, the name of each of the effect devices to which the same reference numerals as in the above-described first control example are partially changed, but detailed contents are the same as those described in the above-described first control example. Is the same as the device (structure) denoted by the reference numeral.

  FIG. 226 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, and FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the injection device 400. is there. The diagram shown in FIG. 226 (a) is a simplification of the diagram shown in FIG. 7 of the first control example, and the specific contents are the same as those of the first control example described above. Detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the pachinko machine 10, an operation unit 500 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The operation unit 500 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 such that the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 is located at an opening formed at the center. A rendering member 700 is provided above the operation unit 500, and a horizontal slide member (rotating member) 840 is provided on each of the left and right sides. Further, the injection device 400 is provided at the back side of the operation unit 500, that is, at a position hidden behind the operation unit 500 and invisible when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front.

  The detailed operation principle is the same as that of the above-described first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, the rendering member 700 is movable so as to move downward from the standby position shown in FIG. 226. And is configured to cover about 1/3 of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when it is located at the operating position moved downward (see FIG. 8). Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the effect member 700 is configured to be able to execute a dividing operation. With this configuration, by moving the rendering member 700 from the standby position to the operating position, the player watching the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is interested in the rendering member 700. By making it easier to hold, and by performing the dividing operation after positioning the effect member 700 at the operation position, it is possible to cause the player to execute a surprising effect in a state where the player is gazing. , Can enhance the effect.

  In addition, each of the rotating members 840 is independently movable in the up-down direction, and the rotating member 840 itself is configured to be rotatable around the center of the rotating member (see FIG. 11). In this way, by further rotating the rotating member 840 while moving the position of the rotating member 840, it is possible to execute a powerful effect for the player.

  Next, the configuration of the injection device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The injection device 400 is a device for radially injecting the granular member 320 upward (toward the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), and makes the injection device 400 itself difficult to be visually recognized by a player. Therefore, it is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so as to be hidden by the operation unit 500. In the injection device 400, a storage area ra for storing the granular member 320 is formed, and a bottom member of the storage area ra is formed in an arch shape. By driving the drive mechanism 400m, the bottom member is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. When the bottom member sa moves upward, the plurality of granular members stored in the storage area ra are moved. 320 is configured to be ejected upward. Note that the specific operation principle of the injection device 400 is the same as that of the above-described first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, in the second control example, the storage detection sensor sa is provided as a detection unit that can detect the amount (number) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra. The storage detection sensor sa is formed by a weight sensor capable of detecting the weight applied to the arch-shaped bottom portion, and determines whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the weight sensor. It is configured to be distinguishable. Based on the detection result, the detecting unit may detect a state in which the granular member 320 injected by the injection device 400 is not stored in the storage area ra, for example, a state in which the granular member 320 is clogged without returning to the storage area ra. it can.

  The configuration of the detecting means for detecting whether or not the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the detecting unit may be configured to partition an area through which the injected granular member 320 passes. And the number of the granular members 320 ejected in the direction of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 beyond the detection line, and from the display surface side of the third symbol display device 81 to the storage area ra. And the number of granular members 320 that return is provided, and a configuration is provided in which it is possible to determine whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra based on the measurement result of the measuring unit. You may. Further, as in the present control example, when the member to be ejected from the injection device 400 has a rollable shape (spherical shape), the member to be ejected by the injection device 400 moves to the storage area ra. A return means is formed on the return path, and a counting means capable of counting the number of ejected members rolling on the alignment path is provided. Based on the counting result of the counting means, all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. It may be configured to be able to determine whether or not it is stored.

  As described above, by configuring the state of the granular member 320 to be distinguishable, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect. In other words, in an effect device such as the effect member 700 or the rotating member 840, the operation of which is mechanically controlled based on the driving of the driving means (motor or solenoid), the driving condition of the driving means (the number of rotations of the motor (the number of steps) ) Or the state of energization of the solenoid), it is possible to grasp the current state (position) of the rendering device. However, for the granular member 320 injected by the injection device 400, the injection device 400 It is possible to determine the timing at which the driving mechanism 400m is driven, but it is difficult to determine at what timing the ejected granular member 320 is stored in the storage area ra again. In other words, the area where the ejected granular member 320 reaches varies depending on the direction in which the ejected granular member 320 collides with the ejected granular member 320, and further, the momentum of the ejected granular member 320 weakens, When it falls downward, it collides with each member provided in the emission region of the granular member 320 or clogs the gap between the members, and thus a delay occurs in the timing of returning to the storage region ra. There was a fear. Further, the granular member 320 is attracted by the static electricity generated by the collision or contact of the granular member 320, so that the timing of returning to the storage area ra may be delayed or may not be possible.

  Although detailed contents will be described later, in the second control example, in order to solve the above-described problem, the state of the injected granular member 320 is determined, and based on the determination result, the granular member 320 is next determined. The timing and the content for executing the effect using are configured to be variably controllable. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of injecting the granular member 320 by the injection device 400 in a state where the granular member 320 is not stored in the storage area ra is performed, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Further, in the present second control example, the determination value for determining that the number (amount) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra is abnormal depends on the operation content (operation purpose) of the injection device 400. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is difficult to perform the effect of injecting the granular member 320 by the injection device 400 due to the abnormality being determined to be excessively abnormal by the abnormality determination, and to reduce the effect of the effect. it can.

  Further, in the present second control example, in a part of the state where all the granular members 320 are not stored in the storage area ra, the effect of injecting the granular members 320 by the injection device 400 is executed by the purpose. The granular member 320 is configured to be stored in the storage area ra. As described above, it is possible to attempt an operation of normalizing the storage state of the granular member 320 by using the operation control used for the effect, so that the operation control for the injection device 400 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 227 to FIG. 229, the contents of the effect using each effect device executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. 227 to 229 are diagrams for simply explaining the flow of the production using each production device (the production member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400), and the detailed configuration is omitted. However, the specific structure and operation principle are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state where the rendering member 700 is located at the operating position, and FIG. 227 (b) is a state where the rendering member 700 is located at the operating position. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device 400 is driven and a granular member 320 is being injected in a state where a dividing operation is being performed. FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a state in which the effecting member 700 moves to the standby position and the granular member 320 returns to the storage area ra. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device 400 is driven while the granular member 320 is being injected while the 840 is being driven.

  In the present control example, it is configured such that a series of character effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 can be executed. In this series of character effects, first, the first effect of moving the effect member 700 to the operating position is executed (see FIG. 227 (a)), and then the injection device 400 is driven while the effect member 700 is divided. The second effect is executed (see FIG. 227 (b)), and after the elapse of a predetermined standby period, the third effect in which the operation of the rotating member 840 and the driving of the injection device 400 are executed (see FIG. 228 (b)) And are configured to be executable.

  In this way, by executing an effect in which a plurality of various devices are linked, it is possible to execute a powerful effect with a sense of unity with the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), by driving the injection device 400 in accordance with the dividing operation of the rendering member 700, it is possible to give an illusion that the granular member 320 is protruding from the inside of the rendering member 700. As a result, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, the operation status of the injection device 400 (recovery status of the granular member 320) can be determined during the execution of a series of special character effects, and the operation status of the injection device 400 (the state of the granular member 320) is determined. When it is determined that the “collection state” is a predetermined abnormal state, only the effect display executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400. (See FIG. 29). With such a configuration, the effecting member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 can be provided while the granular member 320 is protruding. It is possible to minimize the effect of a series of special-effects effects while minimizing the occurrence of situations in which various members are damaged by moving the

  Here, with reference to FIG. 230, a flow of a series of character effect effects will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart schematically showing the status of various devices of the pachinko machine 10 with the passage of time when a series of character effects is executed. FIG. 230 (a) shows the main control device 110, FIG. 230 (b) shows the sound lamp control device 113, FIG. 230 (c) shows the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 230 (d) shows the launching object (ejection device) 400, FIG. ) Is a timing chart of the falling role (directing member) 700, and FIG. 230 (f) is a timing chart schematically showing the situation of the rotating role (rotating member) 840 over time.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), in the present control example, during the special symbol change (for example, change time 90 seconds) fluctuation period executed by the main control device 110, the above-described series of character effects is executed. It is configured as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 230 (c), the variation effect display of the third symbol is executed on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the start of the special symbol variation, Then, 45 seconds after the variable effect display is executed, a series of character effect displays corresponding to the series of character effects is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (b), when performing a series of character effects, it is necessary to execute a preparation operation on the firing character 400 in advance, and 5 seconds before executing the series of character effects ( The preparation control is executed with 5 seconds from the start of the special symbol change (timing after 40 seconds) as a preparation period. When the preparation control is executed, the firing accessory 400 performs a preparation operation (see FIG. 230 (d)), and thereafter, the firing accessory 400 and the dropping accessory 700 are synchronized with the start timing of a series of character effect productions. Performs the operation (see FIG. 226 (b)). Then, when the first operation of the firing role object 400 ends, a preparation operation (operation of moving from the firing position to the standby position) is performed for the next operation, and a standby period is set until the execution timing of the second operation. You.

  Then, when a predetermined period elapses after the operation of the dropping object 700 ends, when 60 seconds elapse after the fluctuation effect display is performed, the rotating member 840 starts operating, and the firing member is activated so as to match the timing. The second operation of the object 400 is performed. As described above, by effecting the operation control on each of the effect devices so that the operation timing of the firing role object 400 matches the operation content of the falling role object 700 and the rotating member 840, the effect can be enhanced. .

  Here, as the preparatory operation of the firing role object 400, the driving process of moving the firing role object 400 to the standby position (see FIG. 227 (a)) and the determination of whether the state of the granular member 320 is normal or not. Is performed. Then, when it is determined that the granular member 320 is normal (normally stored in the storage area ra), the next operation of the firing accessory 400 can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in the present control example, the projectile 400 is configured to be operated a plurality of times during a series of production periods, but during the operation period of the projectile 400 a plurality of times, There is a waiting period. This standby period is provided as a period during which a part of the preparation operation can be executed again when the preparation operation is not completed normally. More specifically, at the end timing of the preparation period, it is determined whether or not all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If it is determined that all of the granular members 320 are not stored, a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is determined. At a certain interval, a process of determining whether or not the granular member 320 is entirely stored in the storage area ra can be executed again.

  As described above, since the granular member 320 fired by the firing role object 400 moves irregularly in the firing area (emission area), the time spent for returning to the storage area ra varies greatly depending on the case. Will be. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not the granular member 320 is entirely stored in the storage area ra can be executed a plurality of times at different timings, and even if a slight error occurs, the second operation of the firing accessory 400 Is executable. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily execute a series of character effect effects, and to increase the effect of the effect.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present control example, the storage state of the granular member 320 is determined to be abnormal during the preparation period of the firing accessory 400, and the abnormal state occurs even after the standby period has elapsed. If the determination is continued, the execution of the effect for operating the launching object 400 is stopped, and another effect is executed. With such a configuration, even when the effect using the firing accessory 400 cannot be normally executed, it is possible to execute a series of accessory effects without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, among the operation controls of the firing role object 400, the contents of the operation control when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the flow of the operation control (at the time of startup) of the firing accessory 400. In the present control example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the operation of various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 is checked. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, at the time before the game hall where the game using the pachinko machine 10 is performed is opened, the operation confirmation of the various effect devices is executed. Thus, when an abnormality occurs in the operation of various effect devices, for example, when it is determined that an abnormal state in which a normal operation cannot be performed due to a malfunction of a driving mechanism (a motor, a solenoid, a driving gear, etc.) In addition, the repair can be performed without inconveniencing the player who is playing the game.

  As shown in FIG. 231, when the operation confirmation processing for the firing accessory 400 is performed at the time of power-on, first, the granular member monitoring for determining whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra. The process is executed (see FIG. 231 (b)). In the granular member monitoring process, it is determined whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor sa illustrated in FIG. 226 (b). Then, it is determined whether or not the current storage status is abnormal based on the determination result of the granular member monitoring process (see FIG. 231 (c)).

  In this control example, in the abnormality determination for determining whether or not the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is abnormal, the rank of the abnormality determination is made different depending on the timing (situation) at which the abnormality determination is performed. ing. Although detailed contents will be described later, the storage amount of the granular member determined to be abnormal is made different according to the abnormality determination timing (situation).

  In the abnormality determination performed first in the operation confirmation processing for the firing accessory 400 at power-on, the abnormality determination (high level A) having the highest determination level is performed. In this high-level A abnormality determination, “normal” is determined only when the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is a determination result indicating that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If the result of the determination is “abnormal”, it is configured to be determined. When the abnormality is determined to be “abnormal” by the abnormality determination, the execution of the initial operation process at power-on is interrupted, and an abnormality notification process for notifying the abnormal state to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the secondary damage due to the continuation of the initial operation processing in the state where the abnormality of the projectile 400 has occurred.

  Then, when it is determined as “normal” in the abnormality determination performed at the first timing of the initial operation processing, a preparation operation and a firing operation are then performed as drive control of the firing accessory 400. Thereafter, after a waiting period of 3 seconds, the second abnormality determination is performed. In the second abnormality determination, an abnormality determination (high level B) having a next higher determination level is performed next to the above-described high level A abnormality determination.

  In this high-level B abnormality determination, if the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is a determination result indicating that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, it is determined to be “normal” and within a predetermined amount. "Retry" if the error is an error LV1 indicating that the error is an error (for example, error 10%), an error LV2 indicating that the error is a predetermined amount or more (for example, the error is larger than 10%), or In the case of abnormal LV3, it is configured to be determined as "abnormal".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232, a description will be given of the contents of the operation control in the case of using the firing role object 400 as an effect of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in the case of executing a series of character effect effects). FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the operation control of the firing accessory 400 (at the time of a series of accessory productions). In the present control example, similarly to the above-described initial operation process, even when performing a series of character effects, abnormality determination is performed on various devices used for the effects. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation content of a series of character effect production may be changed according to the result of abnormality determination. Further, by making the determination level of the abnormality determination in the abnormality determination different, it is configured such that an effect using the firing role object 400 is easily executed in a series of character effect effects.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 233, of a production mode of a series of character effects performed in accordance with the result of the abnormality determination of the firing character 400 in the series of character effects. Drawing 233 is a mimetic diagram showing typically the flow of the production performed in a series of special character productions. In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 232, two abnormality determinations performed during a series of the character effect production (a first abnormality determination having a medium determination level and a second abnormality determination having a low determination level). In the case where both are determined to be normal, as shown in FIG. 233 (a), in the first half of the target production period of the series of special productions, the first production production of the firing production 400 and the falling production 700 And a drop production is performed. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period, the second firing effect of the firing role object 400 and the rotation effect of the rotating member 840 are executed. In addition, on the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, an effect display corresponding to a predetermined series of character effect effects is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the first abnormality determination that the abnormality is “abnormal (for example, abnormal LV2)”, the granular member 320 is not normally stored in the storage area ra, and the firing combination is performed as a series of character effects. Even if the object 400 is operated, the effect of the effect is reduced, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), an effect mode different from that in the normal state (see FIG. 233 (a)) is set. Specifically, the execution of the first firing effect of the firing role object 400 is stopped, and a specific drop effect is set as an effect using the falling role object 700 instead of the normal drop effect. Then, irrespective of the result of the second abnormality determination to be performed, the execution of the second firing effect using the firing accessory 400 is stopped even in the second half of the series of character effects, and the rotary effect using the rotating member 840 is performed. Is executed.

  Since the effect period of the specific drop effect is set longer than the effect period of the normal drop effect, the interval between the end of the effect of the drop role 700 and the start of the effect of the rotating member 840 is normal. It is configured to be shorter than a series of character effects performed. In other words, in a series of normally-executed character effects that are executed normally, the firing role object 400 is configured to be driven in accordance with the operation of various effect devices (falling role object 700, rotating member 840). In order for the object 400 to drive normally, it was necessary to leave an interval for a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, in the production mode of a series of character effects production shown in FIG. 233 (b), since the firing role material 400 is not driven, even if the production period of the falling role material 700 is lengthened, a sense of incongruity is given to the player. There is nothing. Further, since the timing of executing the effect of the rotating member 840 is the same as that in the normal state (see FIG. 233 (a)), the processing load that allows the control processing contents to be shared between the normal state and the abnormal state Can be reduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (b), when the result of the first abnormality determination is determined to be “abnormal”, the shooting is performed during a series of the special effects production without considering the result of the second abnormality determination. Although it is configured to set an effect mode in which the accessory 400 is not used, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be “normal”, the second firing of the launch accessory 400 is performed. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. That is, in the case where it is determined as “abnormal” in the first abnormality determination of the series of the character effects, for example, the granular members 320 are stored in the storage region ra and all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage region ra. If it is not normally determined that the character has been dropped, or if it is determined that the granular member 320 is caught in the falling character 700 and is “abnormal”, a production using the falling character 700 is executed as a series of character effects. By doing so, there is a case where all the granular members 320 are normally stored in the storage area ra. Therefore, the second firing effect of the firing role object 400 may be executed based on the result of the second abnormality determination. Thus, it is possible to easily perform the effect using the firing role object 400.

  Next, a description will be given of a production mode of a series of character-effects production when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of character-effects production. FIG. 233 (c) is a diagram schematically illustrating an effect mode of a series of character-effect effects when it is determined as “slightly abnormal” in the second abnormality determination.

  When the same determination as "normal" is made in the first abnormality determination, a first firing effect and a drop effect that are the same as a series of the role-effect effects in a normal state are executed. Thereafter, when the second abnormality determination determines that the abnormality is “slight abnormality (for example, abnormality LV2)”, a delay period is set, and after the delay period elapses, a retry process of performing abnormality determination again is executed. . If the result of the abnormality determination performed in the retry process is “normal”, the same operation control as that in the normal state, that is, the operation control is performed. The second launch effect of the launch role 400, the rotary effect of the rotating member 840, and the effect display performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are simultaneously executed based on the delay period elapsed timing.

  In other words, the configuration is such that the execution timing of the latter half of the series of special-effects productions is delayed by the period during which the retry process is performed (the delay period). During the delay period, the specific display is performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without performing the operation control of the various effect devices. With such a configuration, the display contents of the effect display continuously displayed during the execution of the series of character effects, and the operation contents of various effect devices whose execution timing varies depending on the presence or absence of a delay are shifted. It is possible to suppress the effect of the effect from being reduced.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, for example, in the pattern shown in FIG. 233 (c), when the result of the second abnormality determination is “abnormal”, the display content continuously displayed on the specific display is displayed. The second specific display of the content is displayed, and a series of character effects in which various effect devices do not operate are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to end the series of the special-effects production using the production display that does not make the display content of the specific display uncomfortable. Further, it is possible to reduce the amount of data corresponding to the operation control contents of the various effect devices dedicated to the special abnormality determination result.

  Next, a description will be given of a production mode of a series of character-effects production when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of character-effects production. FIG. 233 (d) is a diagram schematically illustrating a production mode of a series of character-effect productions when the second abnormality determination is determined to be “abnormal (for example, abnormal LV3)”. When the result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be abnormal LV3, a special operation effect is executed without executing a retry process as shown in FIG. 233 (c). In this special operation effect, an operation effective period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22) is set, and based on the fact that the player has operated the operation means within the operation effective period, various special effects It is an effect to operate either.

  In other words, based on being determined to be “abnormal” by the abnormality determination, the operation of various effect devices is stopped as an operation scenario of a series of character effects, and instead, an operation effect used as another effect is incorporated. Make up. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to operate various effect devices by operating the frame button 22 during the execution of a series of character effects in which the effect device is operated a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being considered to be in the effect mode set due to the abnormal determination of the firing accessory 400 determined to be abnormal.

<Electrical Configuration of Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 152) by connecting to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. And the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 are different from each other. Specifically, a decoration accessory motor for driving various effect devices is provided. The difference is that the group Mz is connected. The other configuration is the same as that of the above-described first control example, and thus the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The decorative accessory motor group Mz includes various motors and solenoids for driving the drop accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the firing accessory 400, and the like, and has a specific configuration and operation. The principle is the same as that of the above-described first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the second control example is different from the first control example described above in that a character action table 222aa and an abnormality determination table 222ab are added, and the other points are the same. It is. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory operation table 222aa stores the operation contents (operation scenario) for various decorative accessories (falling accessory 700, rotating member 840, firing accessory 400, etc.) used for the variation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation. ) Is a data table in which an operation scenario is defined for each of the various decorative objects in accordance with the operation to be executed, and the operation scenario corresponding to the operation to be executed is An operation based on the read operation scenario is performed.

  Here, the contents of the scenario specified in the accessory operation table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 (a) is a schematic diagram showing various scenarios defined in the accessory operation table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 236 (a), the accessory operation table 222aa is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (at start-up), in addition to the operation scenario referred to when executing the variable effect. An operation scenario referred at the time of the initial operation is also defined.

  Specifically, the initial operation scenario 222aa1, the launching agent preparation operation scenario 222aa2, the launching agent first operation scenario 222aa3, the launching agent second operation scenario 222aa4, the dropping agent operation scenario 222aa5, and the rotating auditors operation scenario 222aa6. Is stored.

  Next, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to when determining how much the granular member 320 fired by the firing accessory 400 has returned to the storage area ra of the firing accessory 400, It is configured such that the determination result of the abnormality determination is made different depending on the error from the normal value. In the present control example, the state where all the granular members 320 (for example, 10) are stored in the storage area ra is set to “10”, and each time the number of stored granular members 320 decreases by one, an error is generated. It is configured to be determined in increments of 10%.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236 (b), when the error (%) is “0”, the determination result is “normal”, and when the error is “10%”, the determination result is “abnormal LV1”. If the error is "20% to 30%", the determination result is "abnormal LV2", and if the error is "40% or more", the determination result is "abnormal LV3". As described above, the state where all the granular members 320 (for example, ten) are stored in the storage area ra is determined in a stepwise manner, so that it is determined that the state is abnormal depending on the situation. Can be easily changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235 (b), a configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 235 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), the second control example is different from the first control example in that an accessory delay timer 223aa and an effect level storage area 223ab are added. It is. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory delay timer 223aa is a timer for measuring a period during which the operation control of the firing accessory 400 is delayed. When the operation control of the firing accessory 400 is delayed, a predetermined delay period (2 seconds) is used. ) Is set (see S3909 in FIG. 243). The value is updated each time the character effect management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) is executed, and when the timer value becomes 0, a process for re-determining the abnormality of the firing character 400 is performed. This is executed (see S3810 in FIG. 244). During the period when the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is larger than 0, that is, during the delay period, the operation instruction to the various effect devices other than the launching accessory 400 executed by the sound lamp control device 113 is also delayed. .

  With this configuration, it is possible to delay the operation instruction to the other various effect devices by the same length as the delay period set for the operation control of the launch role 400. It is possible to make it easy to execute operation control with a sense of unity for various effect devices including the 400. Further, even if the processing for extending the delay period of the launching object 400 can be executed halfway, the operation for other various effect devices is performed until the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa becomes 0. Since the instruction is not output, it is possible to easily perform the operation control with a sense of unity for the various effect devices including the launch role 400.

  Note that, in the present control example, in addition to the various effect devices, the process of instructing the display control content regarding the display effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be delayed. There is no limitation, and an effect device that outputs an operation instruction may be provided regardless of the length of the delay period set for the projectile 400. By providing such a rendering device, the player can determine that the operation control of the launch role 400 has been executed with a delay by determining the operation content of the launch role 400 and the operation content of the rendering device. It can be easily notified.

  The effect level storage area 223ab is a storage area for temporarily storing an effect level set in accordance with the effect mode of the effect using the firing accessory 400. In the present control example, before performing the effect using the firing role object 400, that is, the firing effect (see FIG. 227 (b)) in which the granular member 320 is fired toward the display surface side of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is necessary to execute a preparatory operation for lowering the bottom member of the projectile 400 to the preparatory position. Since the preparation operation is performed by driving the drive mechanism 400m (see FIG. 226 (b)), if the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m has been driven, a firing effect is performed. Since the player knows that the launching effect will be performed before the game is performed, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

  Therefore, in the present control example, even when the launching effect is not executed, only the preparation operation can be executed. Thereby, even if the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m has been driven, it is difficult to determine whether or not the firing effect is executed, so that it is easy to provide the player with an unexpected effect. be able to.

  In the present control example, when setting an effect in which the preparation operation of the firing accessory 400 is executed, the effect set this time is an effect mode in which only the preparation operation is executed, or an effect in which the shooting effect is executed. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether the mode is a mode and to determine the effect level according to the result of the determination. Specifically, in the case of an effect that executes only the preparatory operation, it is determined that the effect level is 1 and in the case of the effect that executes the launching effect, it is determined that the effect level is 2, and the effect level is stored in the effect level storage area 223ab (FIG. 241). S3705, S3706).

  The effect level stored in the effect level storage area 223ab is referred to when determining an abnormal level using the abnormality determination table 222ab. In this way, the effect of executing only the preparatory operation, that is, an effect in which the operation of the firing accessory 400 is not controlled even if the result of the abnormality determination is “normal” is executed, and the effect of executing the firing effect is performed. By making the determination result of the abnormal level by the abnormality determination different from the effect to be performed, for example, because the effect only of the preparation operation was performed, the firing effect was not performed, or the result of the abnormality determination was "abnormal" In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the firing effect has been executed.

<About the control processing contents of the sound lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237 to FIG. 246, control processing contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) is replaced with the start-up process (see FIG. 193), and the main process (see FIG. 194) is replaced with the main process. Processing 2 (see FIG. 239) is replaced with effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200), and effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) is replaced with liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 209). Instead, the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (see S2160 in FIG. 245) is changed to the operation effect management process 2 (see S2161 in FIG. 246) instead of the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210). Otherwise, they are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flowchart schematically illustrating the content of the startup process 2. As shown in FIG. 237, the start-up process 2 is different from the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 193) in that an initial operation process (S2051) is added.

  Specifically, when the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) is executed, the same processes in S2001 to S2010 as the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 193) are executed. Then, when the process of S2010 is completed, an initial operation process is executed (S2051), and thereafter, interruption permission is set (S2011), and this process ends. The details of this initial operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 238. However, in the second control example, the effect device for decoration of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the drop role 700, the rotating member 840, the firing role 400) ) Is a process for executing the operation check. That is, in the second control example, the operation of various effect devices can be checked during a period (power-up period) until the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the main process can be executed in a loop. . Then, if an abnormality occurs during the operation check of the various effect devices, the startup process 2 is not terminated, and an abnormality notification to the outside is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to know when the various devices for decoration have failed at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, and therefore, various devices that have failed while the player is playing the game. Can be suppressed from being performed by using the effect and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. Also, in recent pachinko machines 10, a plurality of effect devices are configured to be operation-controlled, and the operation control contents are configured to be different according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in a game state, it is rare that all of the operation control contents set for various effect devices are executed. For example, a normal operation due to disconnection or the like is performed. Even if an impossible production device is generated, it is not possible to know that the production device is out of order unless a production that controls the operation of the production device is executed. There was a problem that the wires were left in a disconnected state for days. On the other hand, in the present control example, when the start-up process 2 of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the operation control for confirming the operation is performed on the various effect devices. It is possible to prevent the failure of the device from being overlooked for a long time.

  Next, the contents of the initial operation process (S2051) executed in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the initial operation process (S2051). In the initial operation process (S2051), a process for executing an operation check of a decorative effect device (for example, the dropping object 700, the rotating member 840, the firing object 400, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This is a looped process until all the operation checks are completed. Although FIG. 238 describes in detail the processing related to the operation check of the firing accessory 400, which is a characteristic configuration of this control example, the processing related to the operation check is similarly performed for other effect devices. ing. The detailed description of the processing for confirming the operation of other effect devices is also omitted.

  When the initial operation process (S2051) is executed, first, an initial operation scenario 222aa1 is read from the accessory operation table 222aa (S2081). Then, operation control corresponding to the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is executed (S2082). Here, in the initial operation scenario 222aa1, an operation scenario is defined such that operation control is sequentially performed on each effect device, and it is determined that the result of the operation check of one effect device is normal. In such a case, it is configured to execute the operation check of the next effect device. In this way, by controlling the operation of each of the effect devices independently, it is possible to prevent the effect devices in operation from being buffered and damaged.

  Furthermore, when the operation check of all the effect devices is completed normally, the operation check for simultaneously operating the plurality of effect devices in the combination used in the actual effect is executed. In this case, the operation scenario for the effect stored in the accessory operation table 222aa is read, and the operation control for each effect is executed. As described above, by confirming the operation using the operation control of the contents actually executed in the effect, whether or not the operation instruction is appropriately output to the plurality of effect devices, or the plurality of effects When the devices are driven at the same time, it is possible to perform an operation check on whether or not an excessive power value is output, and it is possible to further reduce the frequency of occurrence of malfunctions in the rendering device during a game.

  In this control example, the initial operation processing is performed using the operation scenario for the initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial operation processing is performed using only the operation scenario actually used for the effect. May be executed. With this configuration, the amount of operation scenarios for operating the effect device can be reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is defined so that the operation control is sequentially performed on each of the effect devices. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The content of the initial operation scenario 222aa1 may be defined so that the operation control is repeatedly performed on the effect device. As a result, the time spent for the initial operation processing can be reduced.

  When the processing of S2082 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the operation control of the firing accessory 400 has been completed (S2083), and when it is determined that the operation control of the firing accessory 400 has not been completed, that is, another effect. If the operation control of the device is being executed, or if the operation control of the projectile 400 is being executed (S2083: No), it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in any of the effect devices other than the projectile 400. If it is determined that no abnormality has occurred (S2084: No), the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is updated (S2085), and it is determined whether or not the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates the end. If it is determined that the content does not indicate the end (S2085: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S2082 and repeats until the initial operation scenario 222aa1 ends. And executes the processing of S2082~S2086. Then, in the process of S2086, when it is determined that the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 has the content indicating the end (S2084: Yes), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2084, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect devices other than the launcher 400 (S2084: Yes), a notification indicating an abnormality of the accessory is executed (S2091), and the processing is looped. . With this configuration, the initial operation processing does not end in a state where the accessory abnormality is notified. In this case, the hall staff confirms the notification indicating the abnormality of the accessory, removes the cause of the abnormality of the accessory, and then turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again. In other words, in order to normally operate the pachinko machine 10 determined to be the accessory abnormality, the hall staff needs to execute the work, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably brought into the normal state.

  In the present control example, the initial operation process is always executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the power is turned on in this state, the startup process 2 may be completed without executing the initial operation process (S2051). With this configuration, the initial operation process can be skipped when, for example, a trouble that occurs during the game requires the player to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours of the game arcade. Can be. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be returned to the state where the player can play the game at an early stage.

  Returning to S2083, the description is continued. In the process of S2083, when it is determined that the contents of the initial operation scenario of this time are contents for completing the operation of the launcher 400 (S2083: Yes), three seconds have elapsed from the completion of the operation of the launcher 400. (S2087), and if it is determined that three seconds have not elapsed (S2087: No), the processing of S2087 is repeatedly executed until three seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that 3 seconds have elapsed in the process of S2087 (S2087: Yes), the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is obtained (S2088), and an abnormality is detected using the obtained detection result. The abnormal level is determined with reference to the determination table 222ab (S2089).

  Then, it is determined in the processing of S2089 whether or not the abnormal level is 1 or more (S2090). When it is determined that the abnormal level is 1 or more (S2090: Yes), the notification indicating the abnormality of the accessory is executed (S2091). ), Loop the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormal level is not 1 or more (normal) (S2090: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S2085.

  Next, the contents of the main processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the main processing 2. This main processing 2 is different from the main processing (see FIG. 194) of the above-described sound lamp control device 113 in that a character effect effect management process (S2151) is newly added, and the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is added. The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is replaced with the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) instead of the operation effect management process (S2111). Also, the difference is that the contents of the processing executed in the command determination processing (S2114) and the processing executed in the variable display setting processing (S2115) are partially changed. Other parts are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the main processing 2 is executed, the same processing from S2101 to S2109 as the above-described main processing (see FIG. 194) is executed, and thereafter, the character effect effect management process (S2151) is executed. Processing 2 (S2160) and operation effect management processing 2 (S2161) are executed. After the processing of S2161, the processing of S2112 to S2120, which is the same as the above-described main processing (see FIG. 194), is executed, and the processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the contents of the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) executed in the command determination process (see S2114) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be described. This effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) is different from the above-described effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) in that a process for setting an effect mode of a character effect is added. The other contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect mode setting process 2 (S2657) is executed, first, the same processes of S2701 to S2705 and S2707 as the above-described effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are executed. Then, when the processes of S2704, S2705, and S2707 are completed, it is next determined whether or not there is a character effect in the variation effect pattern selected this time (S2751). If it is determined that there is a character effect (S2751: Yes) ), Execute a character effect effect setting process (S2752), set a display command for indicating various setting contents (S2706), and end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2751 that there is no accessory effect (S2751: No), the processing of S2706 is executed as it is, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the contents of the character effect effect setting process (S2752) executed in the effect mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the contents of the character effect effect setting process (S2752). The role-effect production setting process (S2752) executes a process for setting the effect mode of the role-effect production, and sets an operation scenario of the role-effect production corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern. In the case of setting an effect mode corresponding to an effect using the launcher 400, a process of setting the effect level is executed. The effect level set in this character effect effect setting process (S2752) is referred to when the abnormality determination of the firing character 400 is performed.

  When the role effect setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the type of the role effect included in the variation effect pattern selected this time is extracted (S3701), and the fired role 400 is set to the extracted type of the role effect. It is determined whether or not the character effect using is included (S3702). In the process of S3702, if it is determined that the character effect using the firing character 400 is included (S3702: Yes), the effect content of the firing character effect is determined (S3703). Then, it is determined whether the projectile effect rendered this time is a projectile effect in which only the preparatory operation is executed or a project role effect in which the fire effect is executed (S3704).

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that it is a projectile effect effect in which only the preparatory operation is executed (S3704: Yes), the effect level 1 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the preparation operation is not the only operation, that is, that the firing effect is also executed (S3704: No), the effect level 2 is set in the effect level storage area 223ab, and the flow shifts to S3707.

  In the present control example, as a character effect using the firing character 400, a firing character effect effect that executes only the preparation operation and a firing character effect effect that performs the preparation operation and the firing operation are configured to be executable. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance that the firing operation is to be performed at the time when the preparation operation is performed.

  Further, in the present control example, a configuration is such that different production levels are set for the projectile effect that performs only the preparatory operation and the projectile effect that performs the preparation operation and the firing operation. The degree of abnormality determination is configured to be different according to the level. Specifically, when the projectile effect that performs the preparation operation and the launch operation is set, the case of the projectile effect that performs only the preparation operation is set. Is configured to be less likely to be determined to be abnormal. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute a firing operation using the firing role object 400.

  On the other hand, when the launching operation using the launching object 400 is not executed, and the launching agent effect in which only the preparation operation is executed is executed, it is easy to determine that the situation of the launching agent 400 is abnormal. With this configuration, the abnormality determination of the firing role object 400 can be properly performed without lowering the frequency at which the firing operation using the firing role object 400 is performed.

  In addition, in the present control example, when it is determined that the situation of the launching role 400 is abnormal, another role production without using the launching role 400 can be executed. Therefore, when performing the projectile effect that executes only the preparation operation of the projectile 400, if the situation of the projectile 400 is determined to be abnormal, another character effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to substantially increase the effect of the production, compared to the role production in which only the preparation operation is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 241, the description will be continued. In the process of S3707, the operation scenario corresponding to the type extracted as the current character effect presentation is read from the accessory operation table 222aa (S3707), the read operation scenario is set (S3708), and the effect corresponding to the set operation scenario. The mode is stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3709), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that the type of the present role effect does not have the launching effect effect (S3702: No), the process of S3703 to S3706 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3707. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, a description will be given of the contents of the accessory effect management process (S2151 in FIG. 242) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 239). FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the contents of the character effect management process (S2151). In this bonus effect management process (S2151), as various management processes performed during the bonus effect, an abnormality determination process performed during the bonus effect, and a process performed when a value is set in the bonus delay timer 223aa. The processing is executed.

  When the role production management process (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether a role operation scenario is set, that is, whether a role production is currently being performed (S3801), and the role operation scenario is set. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (S3801: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the accessory operation scenario is set (S3801: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3802). If it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S3802: No), the set accessory action scenario is updated (S3803). Then, it is determined whether or not the currently set accessory operation scenario includes an accessory operation scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400 (S3804), and if it is determined that there is an accessory operation scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400. (S3804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the content of the current operation scenario is the abnormality determination timing (S3805). If it is determined that the current operation scenario is the abnormality determination timing (S3805: Yes), the abnormality determination process during the performance is executed. (S3806), and terminates this process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3804, when it is determined that the accessory operation scenario of the firing accessory 400 is not set (S3804: No), or in the process of S3805, it is determined that it is not the abnormality determination timing (S3805: No), the operation control corresponding to the operation scenario is executed (S3807), and this processing ends.

  Further, in the processing of S3802, the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, that is, the abnormality determination processing for the firing accessory 400 has already been performed, and as the determination result, the delay processing for delaying the bonus effect has been performed. If it is determined that a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the accessory delay timer 223aa based on the result (S3802: Yes), the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is updated (S3802: Yes). (S3808), and it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa after the subtraction is 0 (S3809). Here, when it is determined that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is 0 (S3809: Yes), it is the timing when the delay period has elapsed, so that the abnormality in the second effect is performed again to execute the abnormality determination again. A determination process is performed (S3810), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3809, when it is determined that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is not 0 (greater than 0) (S3809: No), the present process ends as it is. If it is determined in the processing of S3809 that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, the processing of S3802, S3802, S3808, and S3809 is repeatedly executed, and the operation scenario for the currently set accessory effect is executed. The updating process (S3803) is not executed. That is, in the situation where the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is larger than 0, the configuration is such that the accessory effect does not progress. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the effect of the role effect being executed during the delay period, the timing of the effect of the plurality of role effects being shifted, and the effect of the effect being reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243, a description will be given of the contents of the during-production abnormality determination process (S3806) executed in the accessory effect management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242). FIG. 243 is a flowchart schematically illustrating the contents of the during-effect abnormality determination process (S3806). In this effect abnormality determination processing (S3806), abnormality determination is performed in a character effect (for example, a series of character effects) in which the firing character 400 is used. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 232, the determination level “medium level” which is executed before operating the firing role object 400 for the first time as a series of role-effect effects, and the second firing An abnormality determination in which the determination level performed before operating the accessory 400 is “low level” and an abnormality determination in which the determination level performed after the second operation of the firing accessory 400 is “high level” are performed. You.

  When the abnormality determination process during production (S3806) is executed, first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S3901), and the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to based on the acquired detection result. Is determined (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the current abnormality determination timing is the first abnormality determination timing (the timing at which the determination of the “medium level” in FIG. 232 is performed) (S3903).

  In the process of S3903, when it is determined that it is the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is “2” or more (S3904), and “2” or more. If it is determined that the target combination is (S3904: Yes), a production mode indicating a specific production not using the launcher 400 is determined (S3905), and the operation scenario corresponding to the launcher 400 is reset (S3906). A notification command indicating an object abnormality is set (S3907), and the process ends.

  That is, at the timing of the first abnormality determination, that is, at the abnormality determination timing executed before the effect using the firing accessory 400 is performed, the amount of the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra is less than 80%. In such a case, the configuration is such that the situation of the projectile 400 is determined to be abnormal. Thus, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect when the effect using the firing role object 400 is executed. In this case, as the specific effect without using the launch role 400, for example, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), the operation scenario of the falling role 700 is rewritten, and the effect period is longer than the normal drop effect. Since the configuration is such that the specific drop effect is executed, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the series of the role-effect effects itself.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3903 that the current time is not the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: No), then the second abnormality determination timing (the abnormality determination in which the determination level in FIG. (S3908). If it is determined in the processing of S3908 that it is the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the processing of S3902 is "2" (S3909), and "2" If it is determined (S3909: Yes), a value indicating 2 seconds is set to the accessory delay timer 223aa (S3910), and a display command indicating a display mode during the delay period is set (S3911). The process ends.

  In the process of S3909, when it is determined that the abnormal level is not “2” (S3909: No), it is next determined whether the abnormal level is “3” (S3912), and when it is determined that the abnormal level is “3”, (S3912: Yes), an effect mode indicating the second specific effect not using the firing accessory 400 is determined (S3913), the operation scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400 is reset (S3914), and a notification indicating an anomalous property is notified. The command is set (S3915), and the process ends.

  In the process of S3908, if it is determined that the timing is not the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: No), then, the third abnormality determination timing (the abnormality determination of the determination level “high level B” in FIG. 232) is performed. Timing) (S3916). If it is determined in the processing of S3916 that it is the third abnormality determination timing (S3916: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the processing of S3902 is greater than “1” (S3917), and “1” is determined. Is determined to be larger than "" (S3909: Yes), a notification command indicating an anomalous property is set (S3918), and this processing ends. Since the third abnormality determination timing corresponds to the case where the operation scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400 ends, even if it is determined that the accessory is abnormal, the operation corresponding to the firing accessory 400 is performed. The scenario will not be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3917 that the abnormal level is not higher than “1” (S3917: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the content of the abnormality determination processing during the second effect (S3810) will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the content of the second effect abnormality determination process (S3810). The second production abnormality determination process (S3810) is executed in the accessory production management process (S2151) described above with reference to FIG. 242, and updates the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa to 0. If the determination is made, that is, if the result of the abnormality determination of the projectile 400 is a predetermined result, the abnormality determination (retry processing) is performed again after a time interval. This is the process to be performed when it is performed.

  In the second stage abnormality determination processing (S3810), first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S4001), and the abnormality level is determined with reference to the abnormality determination table 222ab (S4002). Then, it is determined whether the determined abnormal level is “normal” or abnormal level “1” (S4003). If it is determined that it is “normal” or abnormal level “1” (S4003: Yes), This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the level is not “normal” or the abnormal level “1”, that is, if the abnormal levels are “2” and “3” (S4003: No), the second specific effect that does not use the firing accessory is performed. Is determined (S4004), the operation scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400 is reset (S4005), a notification command indicating an abnormality of the accessory is set (S3918), and the process ends.

  If the result of the abnormality determination processing during the second effect is normal, the operation scenario for the various effect devices is updated again after the elapse of the delay period. The production of the character production will be resumed. On the other hand, when the result of the abnormality determination processing during the second effect is abnormal, a new effect mode (second specific effect) is set when the delay period has elapsed, and the effect corresponding to the second specific effect is a series combination. It is performed in the second half of the production.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) will be described with reference to FIG. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160), various processes related to the liquid crystal effect are not executed in the state where the accessory delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period with respect to the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). The processing is different in that processing for adding the same is added, and otherwise the same processing is executed. The same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 2 (S2160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3551), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S3551: Yes), This process is completed by skipping all the processes. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S3551: No), the same processes as S3501 to S3511 as the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above are executed, and this process ends. .

  Next, the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect management process 2 (S2161). This operation effect management process 2 (S2161) does not execute various processes related to the operation effect in the state where the accessory delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period, in contrast to the operation effect management process (S2111) described above. The processing is different in that processing for adding the same is added, and otherwise the same processing is executed. The same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the operation effect management process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3651). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), all The process is skipped and the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S3651: No), the same processes as S3601 to S3624 as the operation effect management process (S2111) described above are executed, and this process ends.

  As described with reference to FIG. 245 and FIG. 246, in the present control example, when a delay period is set to execute the abnormality determination of the projectile 400 again, the effect contents are also provided for other effects. Is configured not to be executed. That is, when the delay period is set, not only the effect on the launch role 400 but also other effects are delayed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a shift in the execution timing of the production by each production device in a production with a sense of unity using a plurality of production devices (a series of character effects).

<First Modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 247 to FIG. 249, a description will be given of a modified example of the button hit effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example. In the above-described continuous control effect in the first control example, the continuous-stroke effect is performed after the operation for changing the effect mode (variable operation) and the effect mode is changed to the maximum variable value (the effect mode that does not change any more). And the operation (shortening operation) for shortening the effect period of the effect is a pressing operation on the frame button 22. After displaying the production mode corresponding to the maximum variable value of the executed continuous production, the continuous production can be ended (reduced) without continuing the useless production period. Can operate the frame button 22.

  On the other hand, the continuous striking effect in the present modified example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variable operation and the shortening operation can be executed with different operation contents. That is, in the above-described first control example, since the variable operation and the shortening operation are configured to be executed with the same operation content (operation content of pressing the frame button 22), the effect mode of the continuous hit effect is set. While the shortening operation can be performed only after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, in the present modification, the variable operation and the shortening operation are performed with different operation contents, so The shortening operation can be performed before the effect mode of the effect changes to the effect mode corresponding to the maximum variable value.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the timing at which the shortening operation is executed during the period in which the continuous hit effect is executed. Further, similarly to the above-described first control example, since the maximum variable value can be set to be different depending on the continuous striking effect to be executed, the effect mode can be set to the maximum variable value (the effect mode that does not change any more). ) Can be made difficult to understand.

  FIG. 247 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a start screen of a continuous button production effect in this modification. Note that the same elements as those in the display mode displayed in the continuous hit effect in the above-described first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 247 (a) shows a display screen on which a continuous-stroke effect (aura effect) that can be changed in a maximum of five stages (Lv5) is performed as a continuous-stroke effect. The aura effect whose value is set to the third stage (Lv3) is shown. That is, in the aura effect this time, even if the player executes the variable operation a plurality of times, only the third stage (Lv3) is variable at the maximum.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), when the aura effect is executed, an effect 851 which is a variable mode of the aura effect is displayed around the character 801 and the variable information display mode indicating the current variable stage is displayed in the display area HR51. Is displayed as "Lv1". This variable information display mode is for indicating to the player the degree of change of the effect 851 based on the variable operation, and a higher level is displayed as the aura effect progresses (as the effect 851 changes). is there. As described above, not only the display mode of the effect 851 but also the current variable stage is displayed as a numerical value, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

  In the display area HR2, a button 803 and a time gauge 804 showing the same contents as in the above-described first control example are displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the game of the continuous hitting effect (aura effect) executed this time is displayed. As a guidance display mode for showing the contents, a comment of "save energy by repeatedly hitting a button" is displayed.

  Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the execution of the aura effect and the variable mode of the effect 851 reaches the second stage, the variable mode reaches the second stage as shown in FIG. 247 (b). Is displayed. Further, a display area HR52 is formed, and a shortened operation guide display indicating that the shortened operation is executable is displayed for the player. In the display area HR52, a button 852 imitating the first button 22za is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the operation content of the shortening operation. Then, an arrow indicating the operation method for the button 852 is also displayed.

  At this point, since the operation validity period indicated by the time gauge 804 has not elapsed, a display mode indicating that a variable operation can be accepted is displayed in the display area HR2. On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a notification display mode for notifying the player that the player can select whether to continuously perform the variable operation or to perform the shortening operation. The comment "You can choose to save more energy by hitting repeatedly or release it by pressing the first button" is displayed.

  As described above, during the aura effect that is a continuous hit effect, a period during which both the variable operation (press operation on the frame button 22) and the shortening operation (press operation on the first button 22za) are provided, By making the user select which operation is to be performed, it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect mode of the operation effect. In other words, if the shortening operation is performed in a state where the maximum variable value has not been reached during the aura effect, the effect result of the aura effect is displayed without displaying the variable mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol lottery referred to when setting the effect mode (maximum variable value) of the aura effect (continuous hit effect).

  In the present modification, a single pressing operation is performed on the first button 22za to complete the shortening operation. Then, when the shortening operation is performed, an effect result according to the degree of change of the effect 851 by the aura effect at that time is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the effect 851 displayed at the time when the shortening operation is executed is a display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect, and the effect is produced according to the determination result. The result display mode is configured to be different.

  For example, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is performed is a display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 248 (a) is displayed. FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents displayed when a shortening operation is performed after the variable mode of the aura effect (effect 851) is changed to the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. FIG. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), when the shortening operation is performed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) is reached, the player is notified in the sub-display area Ds that the shortening operation has been performed after the maximum variable value has been reached. A comment "Nice timing! Lv3 was the upper limit this time" is displayed as a notification display mode for notifying the user. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the maximum variable value set for the aura production performed this time, and avoid a situation where the aura production is continuously performed without performing the shortening operation. You can understand what you have done.

  In the main display area Dm, the word “chance” is displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the effect result of the current aura effect. Note that the display contents of the result display mode 851a are the same as those in the continuous hit effect of the first control example described above, and therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the display area HR2 is not displayed, and a button 852 imitating the first button 22za and a time gauge 804 are displayed in the display area HR52. In the present modified example, as described above, when the continuous hitting effect is executed, the player is caused to execute an operation on an operation means different between the variable operation and the shortening operation. Then, when the shortening operation is performed, during the subsequent operation valid period (during the remaining period displayed on the time gauge 804), the operation unit that can be operated by the player is changed to the operation unit that can execute the variable operation ( It is configured to switch from the frame button 22) to the operation means (first button 22za) that has performed the shortening operation.

  As shown in FIG. 248 (a), the display area HR2 is not displayed, and the time gauge 804 is displayed in the display area HR52, so that the operation on the operation means in the continuous hit effect is effectively determined during the operation valid period. In addition, the operating means to be operated by the player (the type of the operating means that is effectively determined) can be notified in an easily understandable manner. Further, in this way, by switching the operation means that can be operated by the player during the remaining period after the shortening operation is performed, the trouble of operating the frame button 22 again after the shortening operation is performed is eliminated. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is performed is not the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 248 (b) is displayed. FIG. 248 (b) shows an example of display contents displayed when a shortening operation is performed in a state where the variable mode of the aura effect (effect 851) is a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. FIG. As shown in FIG. 248 (b), at the time when the maximum variable value (Lv3) has not been reached, that is, when the shortening operation is executed at the stage where the variable value is Lv2, the maximum variable value is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As a notification display mode for notifying the player that the shortening operation has been performed in a state where the power has not been reached, a comment “Insufficient power! Must have saved more energy ...” is displayed. Thereby, the player can understand that the variable mode can be further changed in the aura effect performed this time.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a character "?" Is displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the effect result of the current aura effect. In other words, as the effect result of the aura effect, the preset effect content (display mode) is the effect content when the maximum variable value is reached, and therefore, the shortening operation is performed before the maximum variable value is reached. In such a case, the effect contents set in advance are not displayed as the effect results of the aura effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the effect of the aura effect.

  On the other hand, the player on whom the display screen shown in FIG. 248 (b) is displayed is difficult to grasp from the display mode the maximum variable value set in the current aura production, but at least, Since it can be easily grasped that a value higher than the variable value (Lv2) at the time when the shortening operation was performed was set as the maximum variable value, a higher value may have been set as the maximum variable value. You can enjoy the later production with a sense of expectation. Furthermore, for a player who does not like the continuous hitting effect, the state in which the effect prompting to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times is continuously displayed for a predetermined period can be eliminated by executing the shortening operation. It is possible to make it easy for the player to play any desired game.

  In the continuous hit production (aura production) of this modification, as shown in FIG. 248, when the timing of executing the shortening operation is early, that is, when the variable form of the continuous production does not reach the maximum variable value, It is configured so that an appropriate effect result is not displayed. Therefore, in the case where the continuous hit effect is executed, there is a possibility that the timing of executing the shortening operation is delayed and only the variable operation is executed in order to display an appropriate effect result. In this case, there is a problem that the shortening operation is not executed even though the maximum variable value has already been reached, the operation effective period elapses without changing the variable mode, and the effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the variable mode of the continuous hitting effect reaches the maximum variable value, a guided effect for urging the player to perform a shortening operation is configured to be executable. I have. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the period in which the variable mode of the continuous hitting effect does not change for the player continues for a long time, and a situation in which the willingness to play decreases.

  The effect contents of the guidance effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen displayed when the guidance effect is executed. FIG. 249 (a) shows a case where the same aura production as in FIG. 247 (a) is executed, and the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) reaches the maximum variable value “3”. In this state, the display screen when the remaining period of the operation validity period is 1 second in a state where the operation is valid.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (a), when the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) reaches the maximum variable value “3” and the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes one second, In the display area Ds, a comment “Is it better to press the first button?” Is displayed as a guidance effect mode for urging the user to operate the first button 22za, and is also displayed in the display area HR52. The on button 852 is enlarged and displayed. This allows the player to know that the currently displayed variable mode is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura effect.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the shortened operation before the operation valid period elapses (until the period displayed on the time gauge 804 elapses).

  In this modification, as an execution condition for executing the above-described guidance effect, a time lapse execution condition that is satisfied when the remaining period of the operation effective period in the aura effect becomes a predetermined period (1 second) is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated reaches the predetermined number after the end condition in the above-described first control example, that is, the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value is displayed. May be configured to set the operation result execution condition that is satisfied.

  Further, even in the state where the guidance effect shown in FIG. 249 (a) is executed, if the operation effective period of the aura effect has passed without the player performing the shortening operation, the state shown in FIG. The indicated display screen is displayed. FIG. 249 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a shortening operation is not performed during an aura effect. As shown in FIG. 249 (b), when the shortening operation is not performed in a state where the variable mode (effect 851) is changed by the variable operation, the comment “the stored energy has disappeared” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Is displayed, and the result effect in which the aura effect ends is executed without displaying the result display mode 851a (see FIG. 248 (a)) indicating the effect result of the aura effect.

  With this configuration, when the aura effect is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game to execute a shortening operation. In this modification, the result display screen shown in FIG. 249 (b) is configured to be displayed when the shortening operation is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the state where the variable mode (effect 851) is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, if the operation effective period has elapsed without executing the shortening operation, a display screen showing an appropriate effect result (See FIG. 248 (a)) and executing the shortening operation in a state where the variable mode of the aura effect (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. The display screen shown in FIG. 249 (b) may be displayed only when the operation validity period elapses. With such a configuration, in the aura effect, the player who operates the frame button 22 (executes the variable operation) while expecting the variable mode to change until the operation effective period elapses is appropriate for the player. Since it is possible to provide a special effect result, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, the execution control of various effects for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be entirely executed by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, in a production period of various fluctuation effects executed in correspondence with the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, when a specific timing comes, the display control device 114, the sound output device 226, and the production device are driven. Command to instruct the various solenoids to execute the effect.

  In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 centrally manages the execution timings of the various effect devices, so that the effect can be executed without error for the various effect devices, and an effect with a sense of unity is provided. be able to.

  However, in recent years, the pachinko machine 10 tends to increase the number of various effect devices or output complicated execution instructions to the effect devices to enhance the effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, if the execution management of all the effects is executed by the sound ramp control device 113, the processing load on the sound ramp control device 113 increases, for example, processing directly related to the game result, Specifically, a process of stopping and displaying the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a process of displaying the number of acquired balls during the jackpot game, and a display for notifying the player that the gaming state is switched. There is a possibility that the processing is delayed and the player's willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which is a control device for displaying various effect images on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, has a function of managing execution effects. This is different from the first control example described above in that the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced. Other technical ideas are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the third control example, when the display variation pattern command is set by the audio lamp control device 113, a display timer management command for managing the passage of time on the display control device 114 side can be set. doing. Then, when the timer control command is received by the display control device 114, the duration of the target effect is managed by the timer, and when the duration managed by the timer ends, the fact that the duration has ended is determined. The display end command shown can be output to the audio lamp control device 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines that the continuation period has ended by receiving the display end command output from the display control device 114, and sets a command for an effect to be executed based on the end of the continuation period. With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 does not need to have a measuring unit (timer) for measuring the elapse of the duration, and the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the elapsed time has elapsed. It is not necessary to always execute the process of determining Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Further, in the third control example, whether or not a specific display mode is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the timer is managed by the display control device 114 (the specific display mode). Whether the corresponding image data has been used or not) is configured to be discriminable, and when the above-described display end command is set, information indicating whether or not to display the specific display mode is also settable. .

  Then, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether a command indicating the display of the special-purpose display mode has been output from the display control device 114, and based on the determination result, determines the effect mode of the effect performed after the continuation period. It is configured to be variably settable. Thus, it is possible to set effect commands for various effect devices with contents (effect mode) according to the execution contents (display results) executed by the display control device 114. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the period in which the continuation period is set, a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is sent to the display control device 114. The display mode can be variably controlled by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 among various effect modes set by the audio lamp control device 113.

  With such a configuration, in an effect performed outside the control of the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, a continuous hit effect), the effect mode can be changed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Electrical Configuration of Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. Note that the present control example is different from the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the above-described first control example in that a rendering mode 233ba is added to the work RAM 233, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect timer 233ba is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of the timer management effect included in the timer management command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and the duration of the timer management effect at the timing when the timer management effect is executed. Is set. Then, each time the V interrupt processing executed in units of 20 milliseconds is executed, the value of the timer is updated, and when the value of the timer is updated to 0, it is determined that the timing of ending the timer management effect.

<About the control processing content of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 251 to FIG. 259, control processing contents in the third control example will be described. This third control example is different from the first control example described above in that a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are performed. The difference is that some are changed, and the others are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 251 to 254, the contents of control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third control example is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example in that the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) is replaced with the command determination process. The processing 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) is different from the processing in that variable display setting processing 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) is executed instead of the variable display setting processing (see S2115 in FIG. 199). It is. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 251 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the command determination process 3 (S2164). This command determination processing 3 (S2164) adds processing when a display end command output from the display control device 114 is received to the command determination processing of the first control example (see S2114 in FIG. 195). And the other points are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes from S2201 to S2214 as the command determination process of the above-described first control example (see S2114 in FIG. 195) are executed. Then, in the processing of S2213, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is next determined whether or not the display end command has been received (S2251). (S2251: Yes), end command reception processing is executed (S2252), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display end command has not been received (S2251: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the contents of the end command receiving process (S2251) executed in the command determination process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end command receiving process (S2251). In the end command receiving process, a process for setting various effect modes based on the lapse of time managed by the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the end command receiving process (S2251), first, the corresponding effect selection information is read from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S4101). In the process of S4101, the information related to the timer management effect stored in the display variation pattern command setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 254) described later is read. Thereby, the end command output from the display control device 114 is associated with the timer management effect set by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, information included in the display end command received this time is extracted (S4102). In the process of S4102, the type of the corresponding timer management effect and the specific display indicating that the specific image data (effect data) is displayed as the image data (effect data) displayed during the effect period of the timer management effect. Information and period information indicating the duration of the current timer management effect are extracted.

  Then, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S4102 includes the specific display information (S4103). If it is determined that the specific display concession is included (S4103: Yes), the information is read in S4101. The specific information is additionally updated to the effect selection information (S4104), an end-time effect command corresponding to the additionally updated effect selection information is set (S4105), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific display information is not included in the processing of S4103 (S4103: No), the processing of S4104 is skipped, and the end-effect command corresponding to the effect selection information read in S4101 is output. This is set (S4105), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165). This variation display setting process 3 (S2165) is different from the above-described variation display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) in that a process for setting a variation pattern command for display is executed in a subroutine. Other than the above are the same. The same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 3 (S2165), first, the same processes of S2601 to S2607 and S2609 to S2611 as the above-described variation display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) are executed, and thereafter, the display variation pattern command setting process Is executed (S2651). Then, when the process of S2651 is completed, the same processes of S2612 to S2616 as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 of FIG. 199) are executed, and this process ends.

  In the display variation pattern command setting process executed in the process of S2651, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect pattern selected this time is set, and the display control device 114 performs timer management (time lapse management). A process for setting a command for execution is performed.

  Here, the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the content of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651).

  In the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651), first, it is determined whether or not a timer management effect is included in the variation effect pattern selected this time (S4201). The timer management effect is an effect in which the display control device 114 manages the passage of time, for example, an effect that is performed for a predetermined period in a variable effect period in which the variable effect is performed. Mainly, when the timer management effect ends, another effect is executed based on the display result displayed during the timer management effect. The specific contents of the timer management effect will be described later.

  In the process of S4201, when it is determined that there is a timer management effect (S4201: Yes), a display timer management command indicating the execution timing and the duration of the timer management effect is set (S4202), and the effect selection information is stored. Information on the current timer management effect is stored in the area 223h (S4203), a display variation pattern command is set (S4204), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is not determined that the timer management effect is present, that is, when it is determined that the variable effect pattern selected this time does not include the variable effect corresponding to the timer management effect (S4201: No), The processing of S4202 and S4203 is skipped, the processing of S4204 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  Here, with respect to the flow of the variable effect using the timer management effect, for example, in the continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the player activates the frame button 22. A specific description will be given of a case where an effect executed during an effect period (10 seconds) in which an operation valid period that can be operated is set as a timer management effect.

  When setting a variable effect pattern command in which a continuous hit effect is executed, in the display variable pattern command setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 254), the execution timing of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) (after the start of the variable effect) A display timer management command is set to indicate 10 seconds later (see FIG. 146 (c)) and the duration of the timer management effect (continuous hit effect) (10 seconds (see FIG. 146 (c))). 254, S4202). At this time, the contents of the effect selected this time and the effect mode of the effect (various reach effects) executed after the timer management effect is completed are stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h. By storing in the effect selection information storage area 223h in this way, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the timer management effect has ended, the control process to be executed next (the next effect to be executed) Content) can be easily read, and the processing load can be reduced.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display timer management command set by the voice lamp control device 113, the continuous hitting effect is performed in accordance with the execution timing of the timer management effect based on the information included in the display timer management command. The process starts (see FIG. 130A). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting production, a press command indicating that the player has operated (pressed) the frame button 22 is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 and displayed. The control device 114 determines a variable mode in the continuous hit effect based on the received press command, creates image data (effect data) corresponding to the determined variable mode, and displays the image data on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. .

  In this case, as shown in the upper limit number selection table of the first control example (see FIG. 162 (b)), when an effect pattern that defines only a predetermined range as the final variable mode is selected, It is preferable that the display control device 114 executes control for changing the variable mode within a range that does not deviate from the predetermined range and within the range in which the currently displayed variable mode proceeds.

  With such a configuration, the rule according to the result of the special symbol lottery, that is, only the range that can be displayed as the final variable mode is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, and the determination of the detailed variable mode within the range is determined. Since the processing can be executed by the display control device 114, the processing load of the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

  Then, when the effect period of the timer management effect (continuous striking effect) has elapsed, the display control device 114 uses the display control device 114 to display end information indicating that the timer management effect has ended and display information indicating the display content of the variable mode at the end of the effect period. Are set and output to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, based on various information included in the display end command output from the display control device 114, based on information stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h, various The effect mode of the effect is determined, and various commands for executing the determined effect mode are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and the various effect devices.

  In addition, the display end command output from the display control device 114 includes, in the display end command, specific display information indicating that the specific variable mode was displayed during the continuous-stroke effect period (for example, corresponding to the upper limit value of the range determined as the final variable mode). Only when the display mode is included, the effect mode of various effects to be executed after the end of the continuous-stroke effect is determined as a specific effect mode different from normal, and the determined specific effect mode is executed. Are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and various effect devices.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs the command indicating the start timing and the duration of the timer management effect to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 can execute the time management of the timer management effect. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing related to the variable effect in the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the information (command) indicating that the timer management effect has ended is configured to be received from the display control device 114, and based on the reception of the information (command), the effect to be executed after the timer management effect ends. Since it is configured to determine the effect mode and to instruct the various devices constituting the pachinko machine 10 to execute the effect, even if the sound lamp control device 113 does not perform the time management of the timer management effect, It is possible to give an instruction to execute the effect to various devices at an appropriate timing without shifting, and to suppress the effect of the effect performed by the various devices from being shifted and the effect of the effect to be reduced. Can be.

  Further, in the present control example, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the timer management effect managed by the display control device 114 during time management is determined by the display control device 114. ing. Therefore, compared to the case where the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the timer management effect, the load of the control process related to the variable effect in the sound lamp control device 113 is different. Can be reduced.

  Further, the display end command indicating that the timer management effect has ended includes information on the display mode determined by the display control device 114 (information for indicating the display mode displayed at the end of the timer management effect). The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 determines an effect mode of the effect to be executed after the end of the timer management effect based on information included in the display end command. With this configuration, it is possible to set an effect mode corresponding to the effect result of the timer management effect that is executed and managed by the display control device 114 with the sound lamp control device 113, thereby enhancing the effect.

  Next, control processing contents of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The control processing content of the display control device 114 in the third control example is different from the control processing content of the display control device 114 in the first control example in that a V interrupt process (see FIG. 213 (b)) is used. V interrupt processing 3 (see FIG. 255) instead of command determination processing (see S6302 in FIG. 214) in that command determination processing 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) is executed. is there. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the V interrupt processing 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V interrupt processing 3. The V interrupt processing 3 is different from the above-described V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)) in that a processing for updating the effect timer 233ba is added, and the other points are the same. . The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the third control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the MPU 231 controls the VPU based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes the drawing process of the image for one frame. The configuration is such that interrupt processing 3 is executed. That is, the V interrupt processing 3 is a control processing that is periodically executed. Therefore, by updating the value of the effect timer 233ba in accordance with the execution of the V interrupt processing 3, the display control device 114 can execute appropriate time management using the effect timer 233ba.

  In the present control example, the effect timer 233ba is updated using the V interrupt processing 3. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A timer may be provided in the display control device 114 so that the elapsed time can be measured based on the time measurement result of the timer. Alternatively, among the other control processes, a control process that is periodically executed may be used. You may comprise so that elapsed time can be measured.

  In the V interrupt processing 3, first, the same processing as S6301 to S6309 is performed as the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213 (b)) of the above-described first control example, and thereafter, the effect timer updating processing is executed ( (S6351), this process ends. The effect timer updating process executed in S6351 is a process for updating (subtracting) the value set in the effect timer 233ba. The effect timer 233ba measures the effect period (duration) of the timer management effect, and a value corresponding to the effect period of the timer management effect is set in accordance with the timing at which the timer management effect is executed. Each time the interrupt processing 3 is executed (every 20 ms), the value is updated (subtracted). Then, when the value of the effect timer 233ba becomes 0, the effect period of the timer management effect ends.

  Next, the contents of the command determination process 3 (S6352) executed in the V interrupt process 3 (FIG. 255) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 3 (S6532). In this command determination process 3 (S6532), processes for executing a press command process (S6452) and a timer setting process (S6454) are added to the above-described command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 214). The same reference numerals are given to the same processing contents that are otherwise the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the command determination process 3 (S6532), first, the same processes from S6401 to S6413 as the above-described command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 214) are executed. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412), it is next determined whether there is a press command (S6451), and if it is determined that there is a push command (S6451: Yes), The push command processing is executed (S6452), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6401.

  Here, the pressed command determined in the process of S6451 is a command for indicating that the player has operated the frame button 22 within an operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 can be effectively determined. When the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the frame button 22 has been operated within the operation valid period, the voice lamp control device 113 displays the command on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation on the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is operated during an effect (timer management effect) in which a process for variably determining the displayed display mode is performed by the display control device 114, a command set by the sound lamp control device 113 is used. is there.

  When receiving the press command, the display control device 114 executes a process (press command process) for changing the effect mode of the timer management effect. As described above, the pressing command is set not only when the player operates the frame button 22 but only when information on the operation performed on the frame button 22 by the display control device 114 is necessary. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present control example, the process for variably setting the mode of the effect being executed based on the operation on the frame button 22 is performed by the effect performed by the sound lamp control device 113 and by the display control device 114. It is necessary to determine whether or not to set a press command by the sound lamp control device 113 because the effect is to be executed. For example, the effect being executed based on the operation on the frame button 22 is required. When the process for variably setting the mode is executed only by the display control device 114, it is preferable to set a press command every time the operation on the frame button 22 is performed. Also, instead of setting a press command every time the frame button 22 is operated, information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is accumulated for a predetermined period (for example, one second), and the predetermined period elapses. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a press command including operation count information indicating the number of operations on the frame button 22 is set based on the accumulated information.

  With this configuration, a slight error occurs in the variable timing of the presentation mode for each operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113. This configuration is, for example, based on the number of times the frame button 22 (operating means) is operated within a predetermined period, such as an operation effect of changing the display mode after the predetermined period elapses, such as one operation on the frame button 22. It may be used when performing an operation effect without changing the display mode based on the display.

  In the case where such an operation effect is performed, for example, a variable mode (for example, a variable gauge display that increases each time the frame button 22 is operated) is changed in accordance with an operation on the frame button 22 within a predetermined period. Mode) can be set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the display mode after a predetermined period has elapsed can be set by the display control device 114. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 while changing the display mode each time the frame button 22 is operated, The processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present control example, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine that the frame button 22 has been operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of frame buttons 22 (operating means) may be configured to be capable of distinguishing, and the control device that performs the operation discrimination may be different depending on the type of the operating means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the contents of the press command processing (S6452) executed in the command setting processing 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the contents of the press command processing (S6452). In this press command processing (S6452), processing for changing the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the press command processing (S6452), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is a continuous hit production (timer management effect) (S7801). If it is determined that the present time is a continuous hit effect (timer management effect) (S7801: Next, it is determined whether the display mode is in a variable state (S7802). In the process of S7802, it is determined whether or not the currently displayed display mode is the upper limit set as the final variable mode of the continuous hit effect (a situation in which the display mode cannot be changed any more).

  In the process of S7802, when it is determined that the display is in the variable state (the display mode being displayed is variable) (S7802: Yes), the variable determination is performed (S7803), and the process is executed in the process of S7803. Image data is created based on the determination result of the variable determination (S7804), the created image data is set as effect image data (S7805), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7801, if it is determined that the continuous hit effect (timer management effect) is not being performed (S7801: No), or if it is determined in the process of S7802 that it is not in the variable state (S7802: No), This processing ends without creating new image data.

  The effect image data set in the process of S7805 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, and is switched to be displayed when the display timing in the display data table corresponding to the timer management effect is measured. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can execute a process for changing the display mode.

  Next, the contents of the timer setting process (S6454) executed in the command setting process 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer setting process (S6454). In this timer setting process (S6454), a process for setting whether or not a timer management effect is to be executed and setting the effect timer 233ba is executed.

  In the timer setting process (S6454), first, the currently received timer management command is analyzed (S7901), the timer set timing included in the timer management command is set (S7902), and the timer period included in the timer management command is managed. The timer is set (S7903), and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the effect timer updating process (see S6351 in FIG. 259) executed in the V interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 255) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the content of the effect timer update process (S6351). In the effect timer updating process (S6351), a process for updating the value of the effect timer 233ba set in the timer setting process (see S6454 in FIG. 258) is executed.

  When the effect timer update process (S6351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 233ba is greater than 0 (S8001), and it is determined that the value is not greater than 0, that is, the timer management effect is not being performed. In this case (S8001: No), the present process is terminated as it is. In the process of S8001, if the value of the effect timer 233ba is larger than 0, that is, if it is determined that the timer management effect is being performed (S8001: Yes), the value of the effect timer 233ba is updated (S8002). It is determined whether the value of the effect timer 233ba is 0 (S8003). In the process of S8003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is not 0 (greater than 0) (S8003: No), this process is terminated as it is during the effect period of the timer management effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8003, if it is determined that the value of the effect timer 233ba is 0 (S8003: Yes), it is the end timing of the timer management effect. Execute as end-time processing.

  First, in the process of S8004, it is determined whether there is a specific image display during the effect period (S8004). If it is determined that there is a specific image display (S8004: Yes), a specific command indicating the specific image display is created. (S8005), an end command is created (indicating the end of the effect timer) indicating that the value of the effect timer 233ba has become 0 (the timer management effect has ended) (S8006), and a display end command including the created commands is provided. Is set (S8007), and this process ends.

  In the process of S8004, when it is determined that there is no specific image display during the effect period (S8004: No), the process of S8005 is skipped. The process moves to the process of S8006.

  As described above, in the third control example, by causing the display control device 114 to execute a part of the management process related to the effects that have been centrally managed by the audio lamp control device 113, Can be reduced.

  In the above-described example, the effect performed during the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is targeted. However, without being limited to this, for example, a demonstration screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 may be configured to execute the management of the display period for the various display modes executed during the demonstration standby or during the jackpot game in which the jackpot game is being executed.

  In this case, for example, the information related to the game result, such as the timing at which the fluctuation effect is executed or the timing at which the fluctuation effect is stopped, is displayed from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 in order to properly notify the player of the information. Information indicating the waiting period until the display control device 114 executes the specific effect at the timing of outputting the command for the information, information indicating the effect period of the specific effect, information indicating the effect contents of the specific effect, and information indicating the effect of the specific effect. It is configured to output an effect management command including information indicating an effect discarding condition not to be executed, and when the display control device 114 receives the effect management command, the measurement of the standby period is started and until the standby period elapses. If the effect discarding condition is not satisfied during the period, a specific effect may be executed.

  Specifically, at the timing when the fluctuation effect of 30 seconds is executed, the standby period is 40 seconds, the effect period is 10 seconds, and the effect management command including at least information of “start of a new fluctuation effect” as the effect discarding condition. Set. In this case, when the next variable effect is immediately executed after the 30-second variable effect ends, that is, in the state where the special figure hold is secured, the effect discard condition is set before the standby period elapses. Holds, the specific effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the state where the special figure reservation is not secured, the special effect may be executed because the effect canceling condition is not satisfied and the waiting period may elapse.

  As described above, during the standby period in which the variable effect is not executed, when the specific effect is to be executed, the information regarding the specific effect is output to the display control device 114 in advance in accordance with the timing at which the command relating to the variable effect is output. By enabling the display control device 114 to execute the management process of the specific effect, it becomes possible to centralize the timing of outputting the command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, Can be reduced.

  Further, whether to set (output) the above-described effect management command can be set regardless of the variable effect pattern, that is, the process of setting the variable effect pattern and the process of setting the effect control command are independent. May be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect command corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern longer than 40 seconds and the effect management command are simultaneously output to the display control device 114, the standby period Since the variable effect is executed for a period longer than (40 seconds), the effect discarding condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the specific effect can be reliably executed.

  Further, in the above-described example, “start of a new variable effect” is provided as the effect discarding condition. However, other effect discarding conditions may be provided. An effect discarding condition that is satisfied when the process is not started may be provided. In this case, it is necessary to start a plurality of fluctuation effects during the standby period. be able to.

  As the specific effect performed by the above-described example, for example, a function (a so-called setting function) in which a plurality of setting values can be set and the degree of advantage of the player is changed according to the set setting value is used. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a specific effect including an effect mode in which the set value can be predicted by the player, and a specific effect including the effect mode in which the player can predict the currently set game state. A specific effect including an effect mode in which the player can predict the end condition (the number of special symbol lotteries, the number of jackpot winnings) until the end of the game or the gaming state (for example, the probable change state) advantageous to the player. It is good to configure as follows. Thereby, the player plays the game while expecting the specific effect to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this case, suggestion (notification) means for suggesting (notifying) the length of the set waiting period, and guidance means for guiding the player to a game method that does not satisfy the effect discarding condition are provided. It is preferable that the condition is provided so that the player can determine the condition for executing the specific effect.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265. In the first control example described above, the right to execute the special symbol change (the lottery right for the special symbol lottery) is held up to a predetermined number (four) in order to enable the special symbol change to be continuously executed. Even if a special symbol lottery drawing right (special figure reservation) is acquired during execution of the special symbol change, the lottery right (special figure reservation) is stored in the storage means. Can be. Therefore, after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol change can be continuously performed. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol change for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is made different according to the number of lottery rights (number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means. More specifically, the smaller the number of lottery rights (number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means, the easier it is to execute a special symbol change with a longer change time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the period during which the special symbol change is not executed, and to acquire a new lottery right in a state where the number of lottery rights stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the first control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or when a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time longer than 14 seconds is set is selected, the above-described 14 second It is configured so that a variable effect can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is not a winning, the above-described 14-second fluctuation effect is executed, and thereby the player's willingness to grasp that the 14-second fluctuation effect is being executed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

  However, in the above-described first control example, the specific fluctuation effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is also performed in a pseudo manner even when the result of the special symbol lottery is a hit. Is designed to make it difficult for the player to understand the lottery results, but because the variation pattern is selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery, a specific variation effect is executed for players who have been playing for a long time. In such a case, the expectation of the jackpot winning is easily predicted, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play decreases. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation in which the above-described specific fluctuation effect is executed is selected in order to shorten the period in which the special symbol fluctuation is not executed when the number of special figure holding balls is 0, When the number of special figure reserved balls is 0, it is necessary to select the ball at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is expected that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit when the specific fluctuation effect (pseudo specific fluctuation effect) is executed. It is difficult to increase the degree, and it is not possible to increase the expectation degree of the jackpot winning with respect to the specific fluctuation effect, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, the fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be selectable before executing the special symbol lottery. As a result, the result of the special symbol lottery is not predicted by the player based on the variation effect pattern executed in accordance with the selected variation pattern, so that the player's willingness to play is suppressed. be able to.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol change is configured to be selectable based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol when starting the special symbol change (number of special figure reserved balls). Specifically, when executing the first special symbol change (special figure 1 change), a change pattern is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number), When the special symbol change (special figure 2 change) is executed, a change pattern is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball number). When the number of the corresponding special figure reserved balls is 0, a variation pattern having a variation time of 14 seconds is selected based on the same technical idea as the first control example described above.

  With this configuration, the result of the special symbol lottery is not predicted by the player according to the variation effect pattern executed corresponding to the selected variation pattern, so that the player's willingness to play decreases. In the case where the number of special figure reserved balls is 0, the period during which no special symbol change is executed can be shortened while suppressing the occurrence of the special symbol change.

  In addition, in the fourth control example, when the lottery condition is satisfied after the special symbol change is performed in the change pattern (change time) selected based on the number of special figure reserved balls (after a predetermined time has elapsed). ), A special symbol lottery is executed, and based on the result of the lottery, the effect mode of the variable effect being executed is variable. Thereby, the variable effect executed regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery can be ended with the effect result indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, the result of the special symbol lottery can be finally notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the variable mode of the variable effect is made different based on the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change when the special symbol lottery is executed. Specifically, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change in the case where the special symbol lottery is executed is longer than a predetermined period (10 seconds or more), the effect content in the variable effect is configured to be variable. When the duration is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds), only the display mode indicating the effect of the variable effect being executed is changed without changing the effect content of the variable effect.

  With this configuration, the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the change of the special symbol can be easily notified to the player.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth control example is different from the first control example in that a variation pattern selection table 202cd (see FIG. 260) is used instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156). Are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202cd. The fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202cd includes a normal 4 table 202cd1 used when the game state is set to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and a time reduction state (special symbol). , A low probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) or a probability change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) 4 time saving / probability variation four table 202cd2 Have.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 260 (b), the contents defined in the normal four-table 202cd1 will be described. FIG. 260 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the four tables for normal 202cd1, according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. It is configured such that different fluctuation patterns are selected. This normal four table 202cd1 is different from the normal table 202d1 of the above-described first control example in that, when a variation pattern is selected, the result of the special symbol lottery is not looked at, and regardless of the type of the special symbol. There is a great difference in that the same variation pattern is selected.

  Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number (reserved ball number) is “0”, and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”. In this case, a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds (normal variation A) is selected, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 (normal variation B) is selected in the range of “150 to 198”.

  Further, for the range of the number of retained balls being “1, 2” and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 being “0 to 49”, a variation pattern (normal variation C) with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected, A fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation D) with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is selected for the range of “50 to 149”, and a fluctuation pattern of 30 (a normal fluctuation E) for the range of “150 to 198”. ) Is selected. Further, when the number of retained balls is “3”, a fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation F) with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 260 (b), in the fourth control example, when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance whether a jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery based on the selected variation pattern.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select a variation pattern of a variation time that is different depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (number of reserved special ball), when the number of reserved special ball is “0”, This makes it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than when the number of special figure reserved balls is greater than "0", and the special symbol fluctuation ends with the number of special figure reserved balls "0". Can be easily suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 260 (c), the contents of the time saving / probability change 4 table 202cd2 will be described. FIG. 260 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving / probability change 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 260 (c), also in the time saving / probability changing four table 202cd2, similarly to the above-mentioned normal four table 202cd1, the number of reserved balls (number of special figure reserved balls) and the obtained variation type counter CS1 are stored. A variation pattern of the variation time that varies depending on the value is defined.

  In this case, a variation pattern in which a variation time shorter than the time saving / probability variation 4 table 202cd2 and the above-described normal 4 table 202cd1 is set is easily selected. With this configuration, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the time saving state or the probable change state is set than when the normal state is set. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 125, in the time-saving state in which the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and in the probable change state, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. It becomes more difficult for the number of special figure reserved balls to become zero. Therefore, even if a variation pattern having a short variation time is configured to be easily selected, it is possible to prevent a long period in which the special symbol variation is not performed from occurring.

  In the fourth control example, as described above, the variation pattern is selected using the same data table regardless of the type of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As in one control example, a configuration may be adopted in which a different variation pattern can be selected according to the type of the special symbol and the set game state.

<Control processing of main controller in fourth control example>
Next, the contents of the control processing executed by main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the timing for starting the special symbol change and the timing for executing the special symbol lottery are different from each other. The contents of the control process are different. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154). The special symbol variation process 4 (S154) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 178) of the first control example, and is a special symbol variation start process executed as a subroutine. Instead of (see S213 in FIG. 180), a special symbol change start process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 262) is executed, and a process for executing a special symbol lottery during the change of the special symbol is added. , And otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (S154), first, the same processes of S201 to S212 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 178) of the above-described first control example are executed, and thereafter, the special symbol variation start process 4 Is executed (S251), and this processing ends. The details of the special symbol change start process 4 (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the minimum time has elapsed (S252), and when it is determined that the minimum time has elapsed (S252). : Yes), a special symbol lottery process is executed (S253), and thereafter, the same processes of S214 to S221 as the special symbol variation process of the first control example (see S104 of FIG. 178) are executed, and this process is executed. finish.

  Here, the present control example is configured to execute a special symbol lottery corresponding to the running special symbol variation when the minimum time has elapsed after the special symbol variation is started. That is, in the present control example, the special symbol change is executed before the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the determination in the process of S252 is a lottery condition determining means for determining whether the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied, and the minimum elapsed time determined in the process of S252 is the lottery condition.

  In this control example, the minimum time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as the lottery condition, and the same time is set as the minimum time regardless of the selected variation pattern. That is, the time that can be measured even with the shortest variation time (5 seconds) that can be selected as the variation pattern is set as the minimum time. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the lottery condition according to the selected variation pattern, and the control process of the main control device 110 can be simplified.

  In this control example, as the lottery condition for executing the special symbol lottery, a lottery condition that is established based on an elapsed time after the special symbol change is started is set. May be established. For example, a remaining time discriminating means capable of discriminating the remaining time of the special symbol change is provided, and the remaining time discriminated by the remaining time discriminating means is a specific condition (for example, 5 seconds). ) May be set. In addition, when a ball shot into the game area during the special symbol fluctuation period enters a predetermined entrance, a lottery condition is satisfied, or a player performs an arbitrary operation on the operation means. Alternatively, the lottery condition may be satisfied.

  In the present control example, the same lottery condition is set regardless of the selected variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different lottery conditions may be set according to the type of the selected variation pattern. May be provided. Thereby, since the execution timing of the special symbol lottery can be changed according to the selected variation pattern, for example, a lottery suggestion effect indicating the timing at which the special symbol lottery is executed is performed during the special symbol variation execution Can be performed. Therefore, during the period of the special symbol change, it is possible to execute a novel effect of suggesting to the player the timing at which the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol change being executed is executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

  Next, the details of the special symbol change start process 4 (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change start process 4 (S251). This special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) is different from the above-described special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 180) in that the process of executing the special symbol lottery is omitted. Otherwise, it is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 variation is started (whether the type of the special symbol variation executed this time is the first special symbol) (S351). ). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is changed (S351: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is acquired (S352), and the acquired special figure reserved ball number ( The change pattern is selected and determined using the change pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a) and the obtained value of the change type counter CS1 (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S351 that the change is not the special figure 1 change (the special figure 2 change) (S351: No), then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is acquired. (S355), and selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the acquired special figure reserved ball count (special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b) and the acquired variation type counter CS1 value. Is determined (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and the process ends.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 260, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222cd of the present control example is defined so that the result of the special symbol lottery is not referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation before executing the special symbol lottery. Is selectable. Therefore, even if the variation pattern of the selected special symbol variation is determined by the player, the result of the special symbol lottery is not grasped from the content of the determination. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In the present control example, the timing of executing the special symbol lottery is set later than the timing of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. However, the timing is not limited to this, and as in the first control example described above, After the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be selected. You may comprise so that a pattern may be selected. In this case, for example, a special symbol variation is executed based on the selected variation pattern, and a variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and after performing the variation effect, a predetermined When it is determined that the output condition is satisfied, a lottery result command indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is output to the audio lamp control device 113, so that the technical idea is the same as that of the fourth control example. The pachinko machine 10 can be configured.

  Next, the details of the special symbol lottery process (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253). This special symbol lottery process (S253) is executed when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied (when the minimum time has elapsed) after the special symbol variation is executed, and the special symbol variation being executed is performed. Is carried out.

  In the special symbol lottery process (S253), first, it is determined whether a result command has been set (S371). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery has already been executed. In the process of S371, if it is determined that the result command has been set (S371: Yes), the process ends. This makes it possible to prevent a plurality of special symbol lotteries from being executed in one special symbol change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S371 that the result command has not been set, that is, that the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current special symbol change has not been executed (S371: No), then the special symbol is held. The data of the execution area in the ball storage area is acquired (S372), and it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the probability change state (special symbol high probability state). (S373). If it is determined by the processing of S373 that the value of the probability change counter 203t is larger than 0 (S373: Yes), the current state is the special symbol high probability state, and thus the high probability time corresponding to the special symbol type is used. The lottery result is obtained based on the first hit random number table 202a (S374). In the process of S372, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S373: No), the special symbol type is selected because the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol. The lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability corresponding to the random number (S375).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the processing of S374 or S375 is a big hit (S376). This is set (S376), a result command for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit is set (S377), and the present process ends.

  The result command set in the process of S377 is, like various commands set in other processes, the same in the external output process (see S901 in FIG. 187) of the main process (see FIG. 187) of main controller 110. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, based on the reception of the result command processing, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process for changing the effect mode of the variable effect being executed. Thereby, it is possible to change the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol change executed before the special symbol lottery and the effect result to the effect mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the process of S376, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S376: No), a display mode at the time of the loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S378), and the result of the lottery is a failure. Is set (S379), and the process ends.

<Regarding Control Content of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, control processing contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example is different from the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example in that the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) The difference is that a determination process 4 (see S2174 in FIG. 264) is executed, and the other steps are the same.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example in that the timing of the special symbol lottery executed by the main controller 110 is different, and the special symbol variation is executed. After that, a special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the setting contents of the display mode (effect mode) of the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol to be executed in response to the special symbol variation based on various commands output from the main control device 110 are also described above. This is different from one control example.

  Specifically, the process of determining and executing the variation pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the third symbol based on the variation pattern command output at the execution timing of the special symbol variation is the same. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that, when a result command for indicating the result is received, an effect mode of the variable effect pattern being executed or a process for changing (switching) the effect result is added. In this way, by changing the effect mode of the variable effect pattern being executed or the effect of the effect based on the reception of the result command (switching), it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. .

  In addition, since the variable effect executed until the result command is received is not set based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol, the player will know the result of the lottery based on the effect mode. There is nothing. In addition, in the fluctuation effect executed until the result command is received, for example, it is preferable that a suggestion mode capable of indicating the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation set this time can be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the change time of the special symbol change being executed. Then, based on the prediction, it is possible to predict the timing at which the result command is received, that is, the timing at which the effect mode of the variable effect is changed based on the content of the received result command.

  When the command determination processing 4 (S2174) is executed, first, the same processings of S2201 to S2214 as the command determination processing of the above-described first control example (see S2114 of FIG. 195) are executed, and in the processing of S2213, the process is stopped. When it is determined that no command has been received (S2213: No), it is next determined whether a result command has been received (S2271).

  In the process of S2271, if it is determined that the result command has been received (S2271: Yes), the result command process is executed (S2272), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result command has not been received in the process of S2271 (S22271: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, the contents of the result command processing (S2272) executed in the command determination processing 4 (S2174) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the result command processing (S2272). In the result command process (S2272), when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the result command, it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode of the variable effect being executed, Is executed.

  In the result command processing (S2272), first, the lottery result included in the received result command is acquired (S4301), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S4302). If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S4302: Yes), then the remaining fluctuation time is calculated (S4303), and it is determined whether the calculated remaining fluctuation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304: Yes), a display command for switching the set fluctuation effect pattern to the hit special effect pattern is set (S4305). The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is within 10 seconds (S4304: No), the result display mode of the fluctuation effect pattern that has been set is changed to the hit result display mode indicating the winning. A display command for switching is set (S4305), and the process ends. Also, in the process of S4302, when it is determined that the result of the current special symbol lottery (lottery result included in the result command) is not a jackpot winning (is out of place) (S4302: No), this process is performed as it is. finish.

  In the above-described second control example, a configuration has been described in which a series of character effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 is executed according to the elapsed time of the variable display effect. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a series of character effects is executed in response to operation of the frame button 22. That is, an operation effective period in which the operation on the frame button 22 is regarded as valid when a specific period elapses in the variable display effect may be set, and a series of character effects may be executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. In this case, the above-described delay control in the first control example may be applied. In other words, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected in a state where the predetermined delay condition is satisfied, the start of the series of character effects is delayed by setting a delay period for the delay timer 223s. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the production mode. In addition, instead of delaying the start of the entire series of character effects, only a part of the operation may be delayed. In other words, only the start of the first operation may be delayed, or only the start of the second operation may be delayed. With this configuration, it is possible to further diversify the production mode of the series of special-effects, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. Also, the effect of delaying the operation of the accessory is not limited to a series of accessory effects, but an effect involving a variable operation of at least one of the various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10. If so, it may be applied to any of the effects. Further, instead of or in addition to the accessory, it may be possible to delay the start of a part or all of the light emission mode of the effect involving the light emission of the light emitting means such as the decoration LED or the lamp. With such a configuration, the production mode can be made different between the case where the delay is performed and the case where the delay is not performed, so that the production mode can be further diversified.

<Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 272. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example, as one type of the effect form in the variable display effect, a collective effect of an effect form in which a plurality of characters are gathered is configured to be executable, and an expectation that a large hit is obtained depending on the number of characters to be gathered The degree was suggested to the player.

  In addition to this, in the present modified example, it is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation to be a big hit by a combination of characters that are stopped and displayed in one variable display in the collective effect. In addition, in the present modified example, as an accompanying symbol attached to the third symbol imitating each character, an associated symbol imitating any one of numbers “1” to “9” is provided. In the present modified example, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation to be a big hit by a combination of the accompanying symbols attached to the stopped and displayed third symbol. Furthermore, in the present modification, the configuration in which the third effect corresponding to each character is to be displayed in which symbol row is set after the execution of the collective effect is determined, and the execution of the collective effect is determined for each of the accompanying symbols as well. After that, it is configured to set which symbol column is to be displayed. That is, the type of the character and the type of the associated symbol are not fixed, and each time the variable display effect accompanied by the collective effect is executed, the correspondence between the third symbol and the associated symbol (attached to each character) (Number) can be changed. When the third symbol and the associated symbol are in a specific combination, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is increased. With this configuration, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective effect, but also the type of the third symbol, the type of the associated symbol, and the Since the player can play the game by paying attention to the combination of the three symbols and the accompanying symbols, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, a description will be given of an effect form of the collective effect in the present modification. FIG. 266 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen on which friendly characters that can be obtained in the collective effect are displayed. As shown in FIG. 266 (a), in this modification, a third symbol imitating an animal character (or the character “?”) Is provided for each symbol row L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129 (a)). Is displayed, and an accompanying symbol imitating a number is displayed at the lower right of each third symbol. The accompanying symbol is always displayed along with the third symbol imitating the same character during one collective effect. That is, during the variable display of the third symbol, the variable display is performed together with the third symbol. In this modification, the combination of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol row at the time when the acquirable ally character is displayed, the combination of the associated symbol, and the combination of the third symbol, the associated symbol, and the stop position In such a manner, it is configured such that the degree of expectation to be a big hit can be suggested to the player.

  FIG. 266 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of stop symbols (chance-up pattern) in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot is increased. As shown in FIG. 266 (b), the third symbol imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, which suggests to the player that the jackpot expectation degree is increased. It should be noted that there is no difference in the degree of expectation of the type of the accompanying symbol attached to the third symbol of the bear other than the attached symbol imitating the number of “7”. Also, there is no difference in the degree of expectation between the types of the third symbols displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c. That is, as long as the third symbol imitating the bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, the expectation of the big hit is high regardless of the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol columns. Become. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the third symbol displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Although illustration is omitted, as a chance-up pattern different from a mode in which the third symbol imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, any one of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c is displayed. On the other hand, even when the third symbol accompanied by the associated symbol imitating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the big hit expectation is increased. That is, by displaying an associated symbol imitating the number “7” in any of the associated symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1, it is possible to indicate that the jackpot expectation degree is increased. Thus, it is determined whether the variation display of the chance-up pattern has been executed simply by paying attention to whether or not the associated symbol imitating “7” is stopped and displayed in any of the associated symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1. Can be easily determined, so that an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

  Further, in this modified example, a stop type in which the big hit is determined at the time of appearance is also provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and an accompanying symbol accompanying the third symbol imitating the bear is displayed. If the associated symbol imitates “7” (when the associated symbol imitating “7” is displayed in the middle associated symbol display area 901b1), it is determined that a big hit will occur.

  As described above, in the present modification, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective effect, but also the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol column in each variable display in the collective effect, And it is configured to be able to suggest the expected degree of big hit by the combination of the third symbol and the accompanying symbol. Therefore, not only whether the character is acquired in the collective effect, but also the character is stopped and displayed. It is possible to realize a gaming property in which the character (and the accompanying symbol) stopped and displayed at the time is noticed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In this modification, a third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, or any of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c has an associated symbol imitating "7". When the third symbol accompanied by is stopped and displayed, the jackpot expectation increases, and the third symbol imitating a bear accompanied by an associated symbol imitating "7" in the middle third symbol display area 901b is stopped and displayed. Although the jackpot is determined to be determined in the case where the jackpot is determined, the combination in which the jackpot expectation is improved and the combination in which the jackpot is determined are not limited thereto, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when only the third symbol with an attached symbol imitating an odd number is displayed in a stopped state, the jackpot expectation may be increased, or the stopped image may be displayed in a combination of an elephant, a bear, and a rhino. It may be configured so that the jackpot expectation degree is increased by being performed.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the character storage area 223e1 in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. In the present modification, a character storage area 223e1 is provided in the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the character storage area 222e1 in the first control example described above. That is, the character storage area 223e1 can be overwritten (updated). More specifically, it is configured such that the type of the third symbol (the type of the character) and the type of the accompanying symbol to be displayed in each symbol column in the collective effect can be newly set in each collective effect. I have. Then, during one collective effect, the variation display of the third symbol is executed in the arrangement set in the character storage area 222e1. By adopting a configuration in which the arrangement is reset for each effect, it is possible for the player to always feel novelty, so that it is possible to provide a game that is hardly available.

  As shown in FIG. 268, the character storage area 223e1 in this modification is defined in association with a range from “0000H” to “000DH” in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, and each address has a third value. Either data indicating the type of the symbol (character data) or data indicating the type of the associated symbol (numerical data) is stored. As shown in FIG. 268, the address “0000H” is a storage area for storing data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column, and has the address “0001H”. "Is a storage area for storing data (numerical data) indicating the type of an accompanying symbol attached to the first third symbol displayed in the left symbol column. Similarly, the address “0002H” and the address “0003H” are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column and data (numerical data) indicating the type of the associated symbol, respectively. ) Are stored, and the address “0004H” and the address “0005H” are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol column, and an associated symbol, respectively. The address "0006H" and the address "0007H" are data indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol column, respectively. This is a storage area for storing (character data) and data (numerical data) indicating the type of an accompanying symbol. The address “0008H” and the address “0009H” are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol column and data (numerical data) indicating the type of the associated symbol, respectively. The address "000AH" and the address "000BH" are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol column, and the address of the associated symbol. This is a storage area for storing data (numerical data) indicating the type, and an address “000CH” and an address “000DH” are data indicating the type of the third third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol column, respectively. This is a storage area for storing character data) and data (numerical data) indicating the type of an accompanying symbol.

  At the start of the collective effect, different character data and numeric data are stored one by one in the addresses “0000H” to “000DH” constituting the character storage area 223e1. The display mode of the symbol can be set. In this modification, while seven types of character data and nine types of numeric data are provided, the addresses associated with the character storage area 223e1 are 14 addresses (7 addresses × 2). Therefore, for character data, all characters are set in one of the symbol rows, but for numeric data, two numbers are left behind. That is, among the accompanying symbols imitating nine types of numbers, only the seven types of accompanying symbols are set as the accessory symbols of any of the third symbols in the one collective effect. In the present modified example, it is configured such that the associated symbol imitating the number “7” is more easily set in the case of a hit than in the case of a departure. In other words, it is configured such that, in the case of a departure, an accompanying symbol imitating the number “7” is hard to be set. Thereby, when the accompanying symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed, it is possible to improve a player's expectation of a big hit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 269, when storing character data at each address of character storage area 223e1 in the present modification, a lottery for determining which data is stored at which address is performed. The character lottery table 222e11 referred to for performing will be described. The character lottery table 222e11 is a type of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. Here, in this modified example, only the character data to be stored at the head address of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the character lottery table 222e11. The characters are arranged in a predetermined arrangement order (elephant, lion, dugong, rhino, bird, bear, boar). For addresses other than the head address, the character stored in the head address is used as a starting point. The character data is stored in a predetermined arrangement order. For example, when dugong is determined as the character to be stored in the head address, a rhino, a bird, a bear, a boar, an elephant, and a lion are stored in the order of the address of the character storage area 22231. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where character data to be stored in all addresses is determined by lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 269, in the character lottery table 222e11, the type of the character set in the first third symbol of the left symbol row (the character data set in the head address of the character storage area 223e1) ) And the range of the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 is set in the range of “0 to 34”, and the elephant character (character data “00H )) Are defined in association with each other. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the elephant character is 35, so the character data (00H ) Is stored in the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 17.6% (35/199). When character data corresponding to an elephant is set in the head address, a third symbol imitating an elephant and a lion is displayed in the left symbol column, and a third symbol imitating a dugong and a rhino is displayed in the right symbol column. A third symbol imitating a bird, a bear, and a boar is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is such that the bears can be displayed in the middle symbol row (an arrangement that can be stopped in a chance pattern or a fixed pattern).

  As shown in FIG. 269, a lion character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with a value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 in the range of “35 to 69”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the twelfth effect counter 223p12, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the lion character is 35, so the character data (01H) corresponding to the lion ) Is stored in the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 17.6% (35/199). When character data corresponding to a lion is set in the first address, a third symbol imitating a lion and a dugong is displayed in the left symbol column, and a third symbol imitating a rhino and a bird is displayed in the right symbol column. A third symbol imitating a bear, a boar, and an elephant is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is such that the bears can be displayed in the middle symbol row (an arrangement that can be stopped in a chance pattern or a fixed pattern).

  As shown in FIG. 269, the dugong character (character data “02H”) is defined in association with the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 in the range of “70 to 92”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that the twelfth effect counter 223p12 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the dugong character is 23, so the character data (02H ) Is stored in the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 11.6% (23/199). When the character data corresponding to the dugong is set in the first address, a third symbol imitating a dugong and a rhino is displayed in the left symbol column, and a third symbol imitating a bird and a bear is displayed in the right symbol column. The third symbol imitating a boar, an elephant, and a lion is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is such that bears cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  As shown in FIG. 269, a rhino character (character data “03H”) is defined in association with the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 in the range of “93 to 115”. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that the twelfth effect counter 223p12 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the rhino character is 23, so the character data (03H ) Is stored in the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 11.6% (23/199). When character data corresponding to a rhino is set in the first address, a third symbol imitating a rhino and a bird is displayed in the left symbol column, and a third symbol imitating a bear and a wild boar is displayed in the right symbol column. A third symbol imitating an elephant, a lion, and a dugong is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is such that bears cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  As shown in FIG. 269, the bird character (character data "04H") is defined in association with the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 in the range of "116 to 138". Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that the twelfth effect counter 223p12 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with bird characters is 23, and therefore character data (04H ) Is stored in the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 11.6% (23/199). When character data corresponding to birds is set in the first address, a third symbol imitating birds and bears is displayed in the left symbol column, and a third symbol imitating wild boars and elephants is displayed in the right symbol column. A third symbol imitating a lion, a dugong, and a rhino is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is such that bears cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  As shown in FIG. 269, a bear character (character data "05H") is defined in association with the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 in the range of "139 to 162". Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that the twelfth effect counter 223p12 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the bear character is 24, so the character data (05H ) Is stored in the leading address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 12.1% (24/199). When character data corresponding to a bear is set in the first address, a third symbol imitating a bear and a boar is displayed in the left symbol column, and a third symbol imitating an elephant and a lion is displayed in the right symbol column. A third symbol imitating a dugong, rhino and bird is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is such that bears cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  As shown in FIG. 269, the boar character (character data "06H") is defined in association with the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 in the range of "163 to 1698". Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that the twelfth effect counter 223p12 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the wild boar character is 36, so the character data (06H) corresponding to the wild boar ) Is stored at the head address of the character storage area 223e1 at about 18.1% (36/199). When the character data corresponding to the wild boar is set in the head address, a third symbol imitating a boar and an elephant is displayed in the left symbol column, and a third symbol imitating a lion and a dugong is displayed in the right symbol column. A third symbol imitating a rhino, a bird, and a bear is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is such that the bears can be displayed in the middle symbol row.

  In this way, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, a third symbol simulating a bear in the middle symbol is arranged at a rate of about 53.3%. That is, it is configured so that it can be in a stop form equal to or more than the chance pattern.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, when the result of the hit determination is out of the range, the value of the twelfth effect counter 223p12 is in the range of “0 to 19”, and the elephant character (character data “00H”) is displayed. A lion character (character data “01H”) is defined in association with the range “20 to 39”, and a dugong character (character) is defined in the range “40 to 74”. Data “02H”) is defined in association with the range “75 to 109”, and a rhino character (character data “03H”) is defined in association with the range “75 to 109”. , Bird characters (character data "04H") are defined in association with each other, and the bear characters (character data 05H ") are defined in association, for a range of" 145 to 198 ", boars character (character data" 06H ") is defined in correspondence.

  For this reason, the rate at which the third symbol imitating the bear is set in the middle symbol row (the rate at which the character data corresponding to any of the elephant, lion, and wild boar is set at the head address of the character storage area 223e1) is approximately 29.6%. That is, it is configured such that the third symbol imitating the bear is less likely to be arranged in the middle symbol row than in the case of the big hit. Thereby, the appearance rate of the chance pattern can be made higher in the case of the big hit, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the stop symbols in the middle symbol row. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 270, when storing numeric data for each address of character storage area 223e1 in the present modification, a lottery for determining which data is stored at which address is performed. The number lottery table 222e12 referred to for performing will be described. The number lottery table 222e12 is a type of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. Here, in this modified example, only the character data to be stored at the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the number lottery table 222e11. For other addresses, numerical data is stored in ascending numerical order starting from the numerical value stored at the address “0001H”. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the numerical data stored in all the addresses is determined by lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 270, in the number lottery table 222e12, each third result of the first symbol in the left symbol column is determined according to the result of the winning / wrong determination and whether or not the third symbol simulating a bear is arranged in the middle symbol column. The associated symbol type (numerical data set at the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1) set in the symbol is associated with the value range of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 270, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is set in the range of “0 to 24” regardless of the type of the middle symbol row. , And an associated symbol (numerical data “00H”) imitating the numeral “1” are defined in association with each other. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with the accompanying symbol imitating the number “1” is 25, The rate at which the numerical data (00H) corresponding to the associated symbol imitating "1" is stored at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.6%. When numeric data corresponding to an associated symbol imitating "1" is set at the address "0001H", the associated symbol imitating "1" and "2" is displayed in the left symbol column, and the right symbol column is displayed. Displays an associated symbol imitating "3" and "4", and a third symbol imitating "5", "6", and "7" is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the third symbol having an attached symbol imitating “7” is set in an arrangement in which the symbol can be stopped and displayed (can be stopped and displayed in the chance UP pattern).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is changed to the number “ An associated symbol (numerical data “01H”) imitating “2” is defined in association with the symbol. Of the 199 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the thirteenth effect counter 223p13, the number of random number values (counter value) associated with the accompanying symbol imitating the number “2” is 25, The rate at which the numerical data (01H) corresponding to the associated symbol imitating "2" is stored at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is about 12.6%. When numeric data corresponding to an associated symbol imitating "2" is set at the address "0001H", the associated symbol imitating "2" and "3" is displayed in the left symbol column, and the right symbol column is displayed. Displays an associated symbol imitating “4” and “5”, and a middle symbol column displays a third symbol imitating “6”, “7”, and “8”. That is, the third symbol having an attached symbol imitating “7” is set in an arrangement in which the symbol can be stopped and displayed (can be stopped and displayed in the chance UP pattern).

  Similarly, an associated symbol (numerical data “01H”) imitating the number “3” is defined in association with the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 in the range of “50 to 74”, and “75 to 99”. , The associated design imitating the number “4” is defined in association with the range, and the range “100 to 124” is defined in association with the associated design imitating the number “5”, An associated symbol imitating the numeral “6” is defined in association with the range of “125 to 174”. Therefore, the ratio at which the numerical data corresponding to the associated symbol imitating the numbers “3” to “6” is stored in the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 is the associated symbol imitating “1” or “2”. Similarly, each is about 12.6%. Even when the numerical data corresponding to the associated symbol imitating these "3" to "6" is set to the address "0001H", the associated symbol imitating the numeral "7" is set in any symbol row. It is set as an accompanying symbol of the third symbol to be performed. That is, a combination that can be stopped and displayed in the chance UP pattern.

  On the other hand, the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 is defined in association with the range of “175 to 186” and the associated symbol imitating the number “8”, and the range of “187 to 198” An associated symbol imitating “9” is defined in association with the symbol. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the numerical data corresponding to these “8” and “9” is 12 each, an accompanying symbol imitating the numbers “8” and “9” Are stored at the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 at about 6%, respectively. If the accompanying symbol imitating “8” or “9” is set as the accessory symbol of the first third symbol of the left symbol, the associated symbol imitating “7” cannot be set. The lottery ratio of the accompanying symbols (“8”, “9”) that is a combination in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed is determined by the lottery of the associated symbols (“1” to “7”) in which the chance UP pattern can be displayed. By setting the ratio lower than the ratio, it is possible to increase the jackpot expectation when the chance UP pattern appears.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, when the result of determination is incorrect, the selection ratio of each accompanying symbol is changed according to whether the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row. Variable. That is, the third symbol imitating a bear is not set in the middle symbol column (“05H” is stored as character data in any of the addresses “0008H”, “000AH”, and “000CH” in the character storage area 223e1). In this case, 14 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers “1” to “5”, and “6” and “7” Fifteen random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the associated symbols that imitate numbers, and 49 random values (counter values) correspond to the associated symbols that imitate numbers “8”. In addition, 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the associated symbol imitating the number “9”. That is, as compared with the case of winning, the ratio at which the numerical data corresponding to the attached symbol imitating the numeral “8” or “9” is set to the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 is increased. In other words, the ratio set to a combination that does not include the accompanying symbol imitating the number of “7” (a combination in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed) increases. Therefore, when the chance UP pattern is displayed, it is possible to improve a player's expectation of the big hit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, the result of the determination is incorrect, and the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row (addresses “0008H” and “0008H” in the character storage area 223e1). 000AH ”or“ 000CH ”stores“ 05H ”as character data), the random number value (counter value) for the associated symbol imitating the numbers“ 1 ”to“ 3 ” Not mapped. When the numeric data corresponding to the associated symbol imitating the numerals “1” to “3” is set in the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1, the addresses “0009” H, “000BH” corresponding to the middle symbol column , "000DH", the numeric data "06H" corresponding to the associated symbol imitating the number "7" is set, so the third symbol imitating the bear set in the medium symbol In this case, there is a possibility that an additional symbol imitating “7” may be set, so that this is avoided (preventing stop display in a fixed pattern (see FIG. 267) despite deviation). .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 270, 20 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers “4” to “7”, Sixty random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the numerical data corresponding to the associated symbol imitating the numeral “8”, and the numeral corresponding to the associated symbol imitating the numeral “9” For the data, 59 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with each other. That is, the lottery ratio of the associated symbols ("8", "9") that can be displayed in a combination in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed is changed to the incidental symbols ("4" to "7") in which the combination can be displayed in the chance UP pattern. , It is possible to increase the jackpot expectation when a chance UP pattern appears.

  As described above, in the present modification, the arrangement of the third symbol arranged in each symbol row and the associated symbol attached to each third symbol in the collective effect is randomly selected. This makes it possible to make the display mode different for each group effect, so that it is possible to realize an effect mode in which the player is less likely to get bored. In addition, since the stop-displayed combination of the third symbol and the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the third symbol and the associated symbol can indicate the jackpot expectation, each time the symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the symbols is displayed. More attention. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 271, details of the battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) in the present modification will be described. This battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) is a process executed in place of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the above-described first control example, and is similar to the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204). This is a process for setting various effect modes in the battle effect.

  In the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271), the processes in S3101 to S3110 are the same as the processes in S3101 to S3110 in the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above. Is executed. In the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271) in this modification, an array setting process for setting a combination (array) of symbols to be displayed in each symbol row is executed (S3151), and the process proceeds to S3101. And migrate. Details of the array setting processing (S3151) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the above-described array setting processing (S3151). In this array setting process (S3151), first, the character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269) is read, and the specified contents of the read character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269), whether or not this variation pattern is correct, and the twelfth Character data to be stored at the start address of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined according to the value of the effect counter 223p12 (S4402), and the determined character data is stored in the start address of the character storage area 223e1. It is stored (S4403).

  Next, an address obtained by adding “0002H” to the setting destination address where the data is set this time is set as the next setting destination address (S4404), and the new setting destination address is stored in the previous setting destination address. Character data obtained by adding “01H” to the obtained character data is stored (S4405). In the process of S4405, if the previously set character data is the upper limit “06H” (character data corresponding to the wild boar), “00H” is stored.

  When the processing in S4405 is completed, the character data is then transferred to all the set destination addresses (“0000H”, “0002H”, “0004H”, “0006H”, “0008H”, “000AH”, and “000CH”). It is determined whether or not the data is stored (S4406). If there is a setting destination address that does not store data (S4406: No), the process proceeds to S4404. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4406 that character data has been stored for all set destination addresses, then a number setting process for setting numeric data to each address of the character storage area 223e1 is performed. Execute (S4407) and end this process. Details of the numeral setting process (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the numeral setting process (S4407). In this number setting process (S4407), first, the number lottery table 222e12 (see FIG. 270) is read, and the contents of the read number lottery table 222e12, the result of the current win / fail judgment, and the value of the thirteenth effect counter 223p13 are read. The numeric data to be stored in the address “0001H” of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined according to the type of character data set in the middle symbol (S4502). Next, the numerical data determined in the process of S4502 is stored in the address “0001H” (S4503), and an address obtained by adding “0002H” to the setting destination address in which the current data is set is set as the next setting destination address (S4503). S4504). Next, numerical data obtained by adding “01H” to the numerical data stored at the previous setting destination address is stored for the new setting destination address (S4505). In the process of S4505, if the previously set numeric data is “08H” (numerical data corresponding to the numeric “9”) which is the upper limit, “00H” (corresponding to the numeric “1”) Numeric data).

  When the process of S4505 is completed, the character data is then transferred to all the set destination addresses (“0001H”, “0003H”, “0005H”, “0007H”, “0009H”, “000BH”, and “000DH”). It is determined whether or not the data is stored (S4506). If there is a setting destination address that does not store data (S4506: No), the process proceeds to S4504. On the other hand, in the process of S4506, if it is determined that the character data has been stored for all the set destination addresses, the present process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first control example, an animal character (or “?” Character) is imitated for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129 (a)). The third symbol is displayed, and an associated symbol imitating a number is displayed at the lower right of each third symbol. Then, when the execution of the collective effect is determined, by configuring the arrangement of the characters and the accompanying symbols in each symbol sequence separately, the correspondence between the character and the number can be changed for each effect. Make up. Then, the combination of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol column, the combination of the associated symbols, and the combination of the third symbol, the associated symbol, and the stop position are suggested to the player as to the degree of expectation to be a big hit. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, in each variation display in the collective effect, it is possible not only to determine whether or not a character is acquired, but also to pay more attention to a combination of stopped symbols, so that the game can be played. Interest in the game of the player can be further improved.

  In the present modification, only the first third symbol in the left symbol row and the type of the accompanying symbol attached to the third symbol are determined by lottery, and the types of the remaining symbols are determined by lottery. Are arranged in a predetermined order starting from the type of the symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the characters and the numbers to be set for all the symbols may be determined by lottery. With such a configuration, the randomness of each symbol can be further increased, so that the effect form can be further diversified. Alternatively, a selectable combination of symbols may be defined in advance by a table or the like, and the selection ratio of each combination may be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting a combination of symbols.

  In the modified example of the first control example described above, in the variable control of the display mode of the third symbol when the execution of the collective effect is determined, based on the character lottery table 222e11 described above with reference to FIG. 269. The display mode of the third symbol was configured to be variable. That is, for the type of the third symbol (numbers 0 to 9) that are variably displayed, the display mode is determined from the display mode (seven types of characters) of a type that is smaller than the number of types. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the third symbol used for the collective effect may be determined from the display modes of the number of types larger than the number of the third symbols displayed in a variable manner.

  Specifically, a character storage area in which 15 types of character information are stored is provided for 10 third symbols that are variably displayed, and among the 15 types of character information stored in the character storage area, Therefore, the display mode used for the collective effect may be determined for ten third symbols. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that all display modes are not displayed in a variable manner, so that the player has a pleasure of predicting which display mode has been determined when the collective effect is executed. Can be provided. Also, in this case, a notification (notification) for changing the identification information of the third symbol in the variable display to such an extent that the player can visually recognize the information, or notifying (indicating) the type of the determined display mode to the player. Suggest) means should be provided. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict the display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed immediately after the start of the collective effect.

  Further, the same display mode may be determined as the display mode of a plurality of third symbols that are variably displayed in the collective effect. With such a configuration, even when the collective effect is performed using the display mode (character data) of the number of types smaller than the number of the third symbols that are variably displayed during the collective effect, all the display modes are changed. An effect pattern that is not variably displayed can be executed. In addition, by determining only the specific display mode more than the other display modes, the display mode that is easily stopped and displayed in the collective effect and the display mode that is difficult to be displayed are displayed during the variable display of the third symbol in the collective effect. Can be suggested to the player.

  In a modification of the first control example, when the execution of the collective effect is determined, the display mode of the third symbol is determined, and the collective effect is executed to the end using the determined display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the collective effect and is changed and displayed again, a display for redetermining (updating) the display mode of each third symbol again. You may comprise so that an aspect update process can be performed.

  With this configuration, the display mode of the third symbol that can be stopped and displayed can be changed every time the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the collective effect, so that the user does not get tired of the collective effect on the way. Can be suppressed. In addition, the display mode corresponding to the character already obtained in the collective effect may be used as it is as the display mode of the third symbol, or the player may recognize that the display mode corresponds to the character that has already been obtained. An acquired display mode in which the display mode is changed to the extent possible (for example, a display mode in which a character is marked as “completed”) may be used, or a display mode corresponding to an acquired character may be changed to an unacquired character. You may comprise so that it may be changed to the display mode corresponding to a character.

  Further, as in a modification of the above-described first control example, when performing an effect using identification information (symbol) having a plurality of pieces of information, for example, first information (character information) added to each symbol When a configuration that can determine the second information (numerical information) and the third information (information indicating a part of the information (large set) indicating the success or failure of the effect) is used, a symbol having a plurality of each symbol is used. After a plurality (three) of the columns are displayed in a variable manner, the first privilege based on the combination of the first information and the second privilege based on the combination of the second information, of the three symbols stopped and displayed, In addition to providing the third benefit based on the combination of the third information, the combination of the first information and the second information, the combination of the first information and the third information, A combination of the second information and the third information, or the first information, the second information and the May grant can be configure certain benefits based on a combination of information. With such a configuration, the player is interested not only in the combination of the pieces of information given to the plurality of symbols that are stopped and displayed, but also in the combination of pieces of information given to one symbol. This has the effect of increasing the effect of production.

<Modifications of the icon display notice>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example, as described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, various icons are displayed in a plurality of places formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in various orders. By executing the icon display notice to be displayed by the, a variety of notice contents are provided to the player. The icon display notice executed in the above-described first control example is the effect icon storage area 222c1 (where the information indicating the icon type is stored in a specific order in advance when the notice mode (effect mode) is set). From FIG. 164 (b)), the first icon type is specified, and icons are displayed in order from the first icon type (effect element 1).

  Also, with respect to the location where the icon is displayed, one permutation is selected from the permutation storage area 222c3 (see FIG. 165) in which a plurality of specific permutation information indicating the display order is stored (effect element 2). ). Furthermore, the number of icons to be displayed in the icon display notice is determined by lottery (effect element 3).

  As described above, in the case of performing one effect, by setting a plurality of effect elements independently and enabling an effect that combines the set effect elements, all effect patterns that can be executed can be performed. Compared with the case where the effect data is separately prepared in advance, the amount of effect data prepared in advance can be reduced.

  Further, as the permutation information indicating the display order, for example, it is also possible to select the permutation information in which the same display location is redundantly selected, and when displaying the number of icons determined as the rendering element 3, a plurality of icons are displayed. Is displayed in the same display location, by providing a display rule for displaying only one of the icons, the number of icons different from the number of icons determined as the effect element 3 is reduced. The displayed effect can be executed, and effects with more variations can be executed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when determining the content of each effect element, the content of the effect element is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (result determination result). Although the effect mode is determined at random, the icon display notice to be executed is an effect mode that can indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player can be interested.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a description will be given of an effect element for executing a variety of icon display notices. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 274, the size of the icon displayed in the icon display notice can be changed. FIG. 274 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example in which an enlarged icon is displayed in the icon display notice according to the present modification. In addition, the icon display notice of the present modification is different from the icon display notice of the first control example in that the size of the displayed icon is configured to be variable, and the icon displayed at one display location is different from the icon display notice of the first control example. It is different in that display control for preventing icons from being displayed in other display locations covered by is performed, and is otherwise the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 274, the icon 812a initially displayed in the area 811a is displayed so as to cover (hide) the area 811b (see FIG. 133 (a)) as an icon display notice effect. In this case, no icon is displayed in the area 811b (see FIG. 133A) in the current icon display notice effect.

  In this way, by configuring the enlargement ratio of the displayed icon to be selectable, the area covered by the displayed icon differs depending on the enlargement ratio of the selected icon, the type of the icon, and the display location. It becomes possible. Then, by displaying icons in an order excluding the already covered area (non-display area) from the permutation selected as the above-described effect element 2, an icon display notice with more variations is executed. can do.

  In addition, when the technique of the present modification is used, a non-display area is set, so that it is easy to select an overlapped display location as the icon display order. Therefore, by combining the technology of setting the non-display area and the technology of displaying only one icon when the display location is overlapped, the number of the icons greatly deviated from the number of the icons set as the effect elements 3 described above is obtained. The icons can be easily displayed, and a variety of icon display notices can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 275, a description will be given of a configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present modification, which is different from the first control example described above. In the present modified example, as described above, when performing the effect of the icon display notice, the first control described above is configured such that the enlargement ratio of the displayed icon (the icon displayed at the head) can be changed. It is different from the example.

  The configuration of the ROM 222 is also different in that an enlargement ratio selection table 222A1 for selecting an enlargement ratio of an icon is provided. Since the other configurations of the ROM 222 are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the enlargement ratio selection table 222A1. As shown in FIG. 275, the enlargement ratio selection table 222A1 defines different enlargement ratios in association with the result of the special symbol lottery success / failure determination and the value of the A-th effect counter 223pA. Here, the A-th effect counter 223pA is a counter capable of updating a random value in the range of “0 to 198”, like the various effect counters 223p used in the above-described control examples. This is a counter whose value is periodically updated in a process (for example, a main process) that is periodically executed in the control process of the control device 113. The value of this counter is configured to be updated with regularity so that the updated value is not synchronized with the other effect counter 223p, and the specific configuration is the same. Omitted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect modes of the various effects selected with reference to the values of the various effect counters 223 from being the same combination.

  Specifically, the result of the determination is "win (big hit)", and the value of the Ath effect counter pA is in the range of "0 to 4", and the enlargement ratio "50%" is in the range of "5 to 99". Indicates the enlargement ratio “100%”, the enlargement ratio “200%” in the range “100 to 149”, the enlargement ratio “500%” in the range “150 to 179”, and the range “180 to 198”. Defines an enlargement ratio of “1000%”.

  In addition, the result of the determination is “out”, and the enlargement ratio “50%” is in the range of the value of the Ath effect counter pA of “0 to 14”, and the enlargement ratio of “100%” is in the range of “15 to 164”. , "200%" is defined in the range of "165 to 184", and "500%" is defined in the range of "185 to 198".

  As described above, the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1 is referred to when an enlargement ratio for displaying the top icon is selected, and when “50%” is selected as the enlargement ratio, The first icon is displayed in half the size of the icon display (see FIG. 134 (a)). When “100%” is selected, the top icon is displayed in the normal size displayed in FIG. 134A, and when “200%” is selected, the normal icon is doubled. The icon is displayed in the size of 5 times the normal size when "500%" is selected, and the icon is displayed in the size of 10 times the normal size when "1000%" is selected. Icons are displayed in size.

  Here, also in this modified example, a plurality of types of icons can be displayed in the same manner as in the above-described first control example. The display location covered by the display icon is different depending on the rate.

  For example, referring to FIG. 133 (a) and FIG. 164 (b), when the top icon is displayed in the area 811a, an enlargement ratio of 500% is selected for all icon types. Then, the area 811b is covered. When the top icon is displayed in the area 811b, when the enlargement ratio is 200%, the other area (area 811a) is covered and enlarged only when the “V-sign” icon is displayed. When a rate of 500% is selected, the “square” icon covers the area 811c and the area 811d, and the “circular”, “triangular”, and “diamond” icons cover only the area 811f. The “V-sign” icon is configured so that all areas are covered. Hereinafter, even if the display location where the top icon is displayed is any of the area 811c, the area 811d, the area 811e, and the area 811f, the other areas covered by the displayed icon type and the enlargement ratio are different. It is composed.

  Then, when the enlargement ratio of 1000% is selected, all the other areas are covered regardless of the type of the head icon and the display location.

  With this configuration, the display location where the icon can be displayed in the icon display notice can be changed based on the location where the top icon is displayed, the icon type, and the selection result of the enlargement ratio. It is possible to easily execute a randomized icon display notice.

  Also, in this modification, when the icon of the “V sign shape”, which is the icon type that is easily displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, is displayed as the first icon, other icons are displayed as the first icon. It is configured so that there are more other areas than in the case where it is performed. Specifically, in order to make it easier for the player to understand that the icon having a high expectation of the jackpot winning is displayed, the size of the icon of the “V-sign shape” (the size at an enlargement ratio of 100%) is different from that of the icon. It is configured to be larger than the icon. In this way, by providing a difference in the reference size of the displayed icons, different regions can be easily covered when the same enlargement ratio is selected.

  In the present modification, the same icon type as that of the above-described first control example is configured to be selectable. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, a specific display location (area Only when displayed as the top icon in 811b), an icon type that easily covers another area may be used. Thereby, the icon display notice is executed, and at the timing (see FIG. 133 (b)) in which only the position where the top icon is displayed is notified to the player (see FIG. 133 (b)), the player is expected to predict which icon will be displayed. Can be provided.

  In this modification and the above-described first control example, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), when the icon display notice effect is executed, the display location where the top icon is displayed first is given to the player. Although the notification is possible, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of the first icon may be notified first, or the enlargement ratio set for the first icon may be notified first. Further, the non-display area may be notified first.

  Next, a flow of a control process in the sound lamp control device 113 when setting the effect mode of the icon display notice in the present modified example will be described. This modification is different from the first control example in that a random display effect setting process A (see S3293 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207). Otherwise, they are the same. Note that the flow of the basic control process is the same as that of the above-described first control example, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the content of the random display effect setting process A (S3293). In the random display effect setting process A (S3293), the process of determining the enlargement ratio of the icon displayed as the first icon and the process of changing the display order of the icons based on the determined enlargement ratio are performed. This is different from the above-described random display effect setting processing (see S3203 in FIG. 207). The other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  When the random display effect setting process A (S3293) is executed, first, the same processes of S3301 to S3304 as the above-described random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207) are executed, and thereafter, the enlargement ratio selection table 223A1 , The enlargement rate of the first icon is determined (S3391), and the non-display area is extracted based on the enlargement rate of the first icon, the display location, and the type (S3392). In the process of S 3392, the non-display area (the area covered by the display of the top icon) is extracted based on the content specified in advance in the determination table (not shown) stored in ROM 222.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a non-display area based on the extraction result of S3392 (S3394). If it is determined that there is a non-display area (S3394: Yes), the removal permutation excluding the non-display area from the permutation determined in the processing of S3303. Is set (S3394), and then the same processing of S3305 and S3306 as the above-described random display effect setting processing (see S3203 in FIG. 207) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3393 that there is no non-display area (S3394: No), the permutation determined in the processing of S3303 can be used as it is, so the processing of S3394 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3305. Transition.

  With this configuration, even when the type and the permutation of the top icon are determined by the same pattern, the location where the icon is displayed can be changed by changing the enlargement ratio of the top icon. This makes it possible to execute a variety of icon display notices (random display effects) using a small amount of effect data.

  In this modification, when there is a non-display area, the removal permutation is set, and the number of icons determined in the process of S3304 is displayed based on the removal permutation. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute a process of not displaying the icon corresponding to the non-display area without setting the removal permutation. Even in this case, since a different number of icons are displayed for the determined number of displayed icons, a variety of icon display notices (random display effects) are executed using a small amount of effect data. can do.

<Modified example of launch role production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 277 to FIG. 280, a description will be given of a modification of the effect control using the firing accessory 400. In this modification, the special effect lottery of the firing role object 400 is configured to be executed in the demonstration effect executed in the standby state in which the special symbol lottery (special symbol change) is not executed. . Then, as the contents of the operation of the launching object 400, the operations located in the preparation operation A state and the preparation operation B state are executed as the preparatory operation until the actual firing operation is executed, and the timing when the demonstration effect ends At (timing at which the player enters a ball into the first entrance 64 and the special symbol change is started), the operation state of the firing accessory is determined, and a fluctuation effect to be executed is performed based on the determination result. Is different from the above-described second control example in that it is configured to be variable, and is otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the effect on the demonstration screen in this modification will be described. FIG. 277 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a case where the launch role 400 operates during the demonstration effect in which the demonstration screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 277 (a), a demonstration screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the projectile 400 is operated so that the granular member 320 is emitted so as to cover the display surface. .

  As described above, by operating the firing role object 400 during the demonstration screen, it becomes possible to interest the player, and the operation of the game can be enhanced. Although a detailed description is omitted, as an operation scenario for firing the launching object 400 during the demonstration effect, for example, after a specific period has elapsed since the demonstration effect was executed, that is, the third symbol display device 81 The operation scenario for operating the firing role object 400 can be set in accordance with the timing at which the effect display giving a sense of unity with the operation of the firing role object 400 is displayed on the display surface of the character.

  It should be noted that a plurality of effect patterns during the demonstration effect can be set, and, for example, in the above-described second control example, when a slight abnormality (abnormal level 1) is determined by the abnormality determination performed, It is preferable that the effect pattern including the operation scenario for operating the launcher 400 is easily set. With this configuration, the operation of the projectile 400 executed during the demonstration effect allows the granular member 320 to be normally stored in the projectile 400, thereby improving the effect of the effect and improving the effect of the effect device. And at the same time can be easily achieved. Further, while the demonstration effect is being executed, the player is not executing the game, so that the firing role object 400 can be operated without giving the player who is playing the game uncomfortable feeling.

  In the case where the launch role 400 is operated during the demonstration, the player can identify that the demonstration is being performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (in the figure, the comment is displayed as “demo display”). ) Is displayed. Thus, it is possible to easily notify the player that the demonstration is currently being performed, and thus, despite the demonstration being performed, the player is erroneously determined to be playing and the new player cannot execute the game. The occurrence of a state can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 277 (b), a description will be given of the effect contents when the special symbol change is executed during the demonstration effect. FIG. 277 (b) shows a case in which a special symbol change is started during a period from when the projectile 400 fires the granular member 320 as a demonstration effect and all the granular members 320 are stored in the projectile 400. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents in FIG.

  In the present modification, as the operation state of the firing role object 400, the preparatory operation A state for letting the player know that the granular member 320 stored in the storage area has moved downward, and the granular member 320 is fired. Therefore, a preparation operation B state in which a drag is applied to the elastic member, and a firing operation state in which the granular member 320 is fired by the restoring force of the elastic member by releasing the drag on the elastic member are configured to be distinguishable. I have.

  Then, when the special symbol variation is started (when the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied) in a case where the launch role 400 is in the firing operation state, the firing operation of the launch role 400 executed during the demonstration stage is completed. Before the operation (before the granular member 320 is stored in the launching object 400), a situation occurs in which a special symbol change is started, so that the player is informed that the special symbol lottery has been won. Even when the fluctuation effect is executed in response to the special symbol fluctuation, there is a problem that the granular member 320 is located on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and gives the player an unnecessary sense of expectation. there were.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, as shown in FIG. 277 (b), until the firing operation of the firing role object 400 ends (until the granular member 320 is stored in the storage area ra of the firing role object 400). During the period, demonstration production is continued. With such a configuration, after the operation of the projectile 400 in the demonstration effect is completed, the variable effect can be executed, so that a plurality of effects (demo effect, variable effect) are confused and the player It can be suppressed that an incomprehensible effect is provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 277 (b), in a state where the demonstration effect continues after the special symbol change is started, a display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, It is configured so that the player can be notified that the special symbol change is being executed. That is, it is configured that the player can be notified only that the special symbol change is being executed without executing the change effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being erroneously recognized that the special symbol change has not started even though the ball has entered the first entry opening 64. Further, the comment “Demo effect ending processing” is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to notify the player of the start of the special symbol change in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278, an operation state of the firing accessory 400 will be described. FIG. 278 (a) schematically shows a state in which the projectile 400 is located at the standby position (reference). FIG. 278 (b) shows a state in which the projectile 400 is in the preparation operation A state ( FIG. 278 (c) schematically illustrates a state in which the launcher 400 is located in the preparation operation B state (preparation B). It is a thing.

  First, the launcher 400 at the reference position will be described with reference to FIG. When it is located at this reference position, the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the firing accessory 400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 so that a player playing the game can visually recognize the granular member 320.

  Then, when the operation scenario of the launch role 400 is set, first, the launch role 400 moves to the position of the preparation A shown in FIG. 278 (b). The position of the preparation A is a position where the arch-shaped bottom surface has been moved downward so that a player who is playing the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile 400 is difficult to visually recognize. . The projectile 400 in the present modified example has the same configuration as the injection device (projectile) 400 in the first embodiment described above, and the arch-shaped bottom surface is formed by the operation of the drive motor 400 as an electric drive source. Moved down.

  In addition, since the drag is not applied to the elastic member at the position of the preparation A, the granular member 320 is fired from the position of the preparation A to the reference position by, for example, driving the drive motor 400 in the reverse direction. It can be moved without causing it to move.

  The launcher 400 needs to perform a preparatory operation when actually performing a firing operation. If the preparatory operation is performed only when performing a firing operation, the launching object 400 fires at the time when the preparatory operation is performed. There is a problem that the player can easily grasp that the operation is performed.

  On the other hand, in the second control example described above, an effect pattern for performing only the preparation operation is provided, and the player cannot predict whether or not the firing operation will be performed only by performing the preparation operation. Was configured. Further, since the firing role object 400 is a mechanism for firing the granular member 320 by the restoring force of the elastic member, the operation state shifts to a state where the preparation operation is completed, that is, a state where a sufficient drag is applied to the elastic member. Then, there is a problem that it is difficult to move the firing role object 400 to the reference position without performing the firing operation.

  Therefore, in the present modified example, the preparation operation A for emphasizing that the preparation operation has been performed for the player can be executed, and after the completion of the preparation operation A, the preparation operation B (operation of applying a drag to the elastic member). When an effect pattern for executing only the preparation operation is set, the operation control for moving the firing role object 400 to the reference position after the completion of the preparation operation A is performed. doing.

  With this configuration, when an effect pattern for executing only the preparation operation is set, while allowing the player to grasp that the firing role object 400 has moved downward and the preparation operation has been started, In addition, the preparation operation can be completed without imparting a drag to the elastic member.

  Also, by moving the firing role object 400 from the reference position (see FIG. 278 (a)) to the preparation A (see FIG. 278 (b)), the granular member 320 disappears from the field of view of the player during the game. Since the launch role 400 is assembled to the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 277), it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the preparation operation has been performed.

  Further, although detailed description is omitted, when the driving motor 400m as the driving source starts driving, a larger vibration is generated than when the driving motor 400m as the driving source is continuously driven. Make up. Therefore, when the preparatory operation is performed, the player can also be made aware that the preparatory operation has been performed by the vibration generated from the driving motor 400m that is the driving source.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278 (c), the firing combination 400 located in the preparation operation B state (preparation B) will be described. When the state shown in FIG. 278 (b) elapses for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the driving motor 400m as the driving source operates again, and the firing role object 400 moves to the preparation B position. The movement from the preparation A to the preparation B is executed in a state where the granular member 320 is already located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, so that the player can be made hard to notice. Upon moving to the preparation B, a drag is applied to the elastic member of the projectile 400. Then, in this state, when the operation of releasing the drag on the elastic member is performed by the drive motor 400m as the driving source (the locking member (claw) for locking the elastic member), the granular member is restored by the restoring force of the elastic member. 320 is fired.

  In this modification, the timing of moving from the state of preparation A to the state of preparation B in the effect of executing the firing operation, and the state of preparation A moving from the state of preparation A to the reference state in the effect of only the preparation operation The timing is configured to be the same. Accordingly, even when any of the effects is performed, the drive motor 400m, which is the driving source, is driven at the same timing, so that even if vibration is generated by the driving, it is determined which of the effects is being performed. This makes it difficult for the player to make predictions.

  Next, the relationship between the timing at which the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied and the operation state of the firing accessory 400 will be described. When the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the reference state shown in FIG. 278 (a), the operation state of the firing role object 400 does not affect the variable effect executed after the end of the demonstration effect. Immediately after the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied, a normal variable effect is executed.

  If the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation A state shown in FIG. 278 (b), the drag is not applied to the elastic member, and therefore the effect of the projectile 400 used for the demonstration effect is produced. The operation is interrupted, and the demonstration effect is extendedly displayed (see FIG. 277 (b)) until the launcher 400 is moved to the reference state, and thereafter, the variable effect is executed. In addition, since the preparation A state is a state in which the drag is not applied to the elastic member, the fluctuation effect may be executed while maintaining the preparation A state. In this case, when performing an effect using the projectile 400 that is first executed as a variable effect, the effect operation of the projectile 400 is performed based on the operation scenario from the time point of being in the preparation A state. You can do it.

  When the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation B state shown in FIG. 278 (c), since the drag is applied to the elastic member, the firing member without firing the granular member 320 is fired. 400 cannot be moved to the reference state. Therefore, when the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied, it is necessary to end the demonstration effect while maintaining the preparation B state. However, since the preparation B state is a state in which a drag is applied to the elastic member, if the preparation B state is maintained for a long time, an excessive resistance is applied to the elastic member, and the elastic member is restored. There is a possibility that the force may be reduced, leading to a failure of the firing accessory 400.

  Therefore, in this modified example, when the end condition of the demonstration effect is satisfied in the preparation B state, the effect using the launch role 400 is forcibly executed in the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the preparation B state continues for a long time and the firing accessory 400 breaks down.

  Next, among the control processing contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present modified example, the differences from the above-described second control example will be described. In the present modified example, in the second control example described above, a role effect management process B (refer to S2191 in FIG. 279) is replaced with a role effect management process (refer to S2151 in FIG. 242). The difference is that the effect mode setting process B (see S2697 in FIG. 280) is executed instead of the effect mode setting process B (see S2607 in FIG. 200), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the accessory effect management process B (S2191) will be described. This character effect production management process B (S2191) differs from the above-described second control example in that a control process when an interruption signal is received is added in a state where an operation scenario of the firing character 400 is set. . The other processing contents are the same as the above-described character effect effect management processing (see S2191 in FIG. 279), and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 279, when the character effect management process B (S2191) is executed, S3801 to S3804 and S3807 which are the same as the character effect management process of the second control example (see S2151 in FIG. 242). To S3810. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S3804 that there is an operation scenario of the firing accessory 400 (set) (S3804: Yes), it is determined whether an interruption signal has been received (S3891). In the process of S3891, when a command (variation pattern command) indicating that a new special symbol variation is started is received, it is determined that the interruption signal has been received.

  Here, in this modified example, similarly to the above-described second control example, during the fluctuation effect performed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, and during the standby period (demo period) in which the special symbol fluctuation is not performed. In both the demonstration effect to be executed, an effect using the firing accessory 400 can be executed (an operation scenario of the firing accessory 400 can be set). Further, in the present modified example, while one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is fluctuating, another special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is executed as in the second control example described above. It is configured not to be.

  That is, in the role effect management process B (S2191), the interruption signal is received in a state where it is determined that the operation scenario of the firing role is set (a state determined as Yes in the process of S3804) (variation). If it is determined that the pattern command has been received), it means that an effect using the firing accessory 400 is being executed in the demonstration effect.

  Then, when it is determined in the process of S3891 that the interruption signal has been received (S3891: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current operation state of the firing accessory 400 is the preparation A (see FIG. 278 (b)). If it is determined (S3892) that it is the preparation A (S3892: Yes), the interruption processing is executed (S3893), and this processing ends. In the processing of S3893, in order to interrupt the production using the projectile 400 that is executed during the demonstration, the projectile 400 located at the position of the preparation A is moved to the reference position (FIG. 278 (a)). (See Reference). Although a detailed description is omitted, an operation scenario for moving the firing accessory 400 from the position of the preparation A to the reference position is defined in advance in the accessory operation table 222aa (see FIG. 236 (a)). When executing the interruption process, the target operation scenario is read out from the accessory operation table 222aa (see FIG. 236 (a)) and executed.

  As described above, by executing the process of S3893, a preparation operation is performed to execute an effect using the accessory 400 during the demonstration effect, and the launching agent 400 is located at the position of the preparation A. When the end condition of the demonstration effect is executed, the demonstration effect can be ended early, so that the player can easily enjoy the variable effect.

  Returning to FIG. 279, the description will be continued. In the process of S3892, when it is determined that the present is not the preparation A (S3892: No), it is next determined whether the present is the preparation B (see FIG. 278 (c)) (S3894). If it is determined (S3894: Yes), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S3895), the operation scenario for the set firing object 400 is cleared (S3896), and the process ends.

  Here, the emergency standby flag 223Ba is a flag for indicating that the operation of the firing accessory 400 is temporarily stopped, and is turned on when the operation of the firing accessory 400 is temporarily stopped. Is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is referred to when performing a variable effect, and when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, the setting status is changed more than when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is configured such that an effect using the launch role 400 is easily executed as an effect.

  With this configuration, the state in which the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, that is, the state in which the projectile 400 is located in the preparation B (see FIG. 278 (c)) is unlikely to be continued for a long time. It is possible to make it easier for the firing role object 400 to prevent a failure.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3891 that the interruption signal has not been received (S3891: No), or if it is determined that the processing is not the preparation B in the processing of S3894 (S3894), the role of the second control example described above is obtained. The same processing as S3805 to S3807 (S3897) is performed as the object effect management processing (see S2151 in FIG. 242), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the rendering mode setting process B (S2697) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process B (S2697). The content of the effect mode setting process B (S2697) is different from the effect mode setting process of the second control example (see S2607 in FIG. 200) in that a process corresponding to the setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is added. And the others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect mode setting process B (S2697) is executed, first, it is determined whether the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S2791), and when it is determined that the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S2791: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the present variation pattern can execute a firing effect using the firing role object 400 (S2792). In the process of S2792, the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is determined, and if the length of the fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds or longer), it is determined that the shooting effect is possible.

  Then, when it is determined in the process of S2792 that the launching effect is possible (S2792: Yes), the launching effect is set (S2793), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is turned off (S2794), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2791 that the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON (S2791: No), the processing of S2701 to S2707, which is the same as the above-described effect mode setting processing (see S2607 in FIG. 200). To end the present process.

  As described above, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, when the length of the variation time satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect using the firing role object 400 is performed. By making it executable, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, an effect using the firing role object 400 is executed as a variable effect compared to when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON. It is configured to be easy. This makes it difficult for the state of preparation B to continue for a long time, and makes it easier to prevent the firing role object 400 from malfunctioning.

  The techniques used in the control examples described above may be appropriately combined, for example, for setting and managing the delay period in the button effect (see FIGS. 136 to 138) used in the first control example. May be executed on the display control device 114 side as in the third control example.

  Specifically, when the sound effect control device 113 sets the variable effect pattern (when executing the delayed effect setting process (see S2805 in FIG. 203) in the display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199)), As in the first control example described above, only the delay period for the audio output device 226 (the delay mode for the sound effect) is set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the button effect is executed without setting the delay method for the display effect. And a display command indicating the operation validity period (button validity period) in the button effect.

  The display control device 114 extracts and sets the execution timing of the button effect and the operation validity period in the button effect based on the received display command. Then, when a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the operation validity period in the button effect is received, whether or not to execute a delayed effect on the display effect and whether to execute the delayed effect Is determined, and a delay period corresponding to the determined content is set in the delay timer.

  Thereafter, when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, a display effect is executed (image data corresponding to the display effect is generated, and a display mode indicating a button effect effect based on the generated image data is changed to a third display mode). It is displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 81). Then, a display completion command indicating that the display effect has been executed is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the display completion command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the delay period of the display effect in the button effect performed in the current button effect, and determines the effect mode to be executed next based on the determination result. Set.

  In this case, a command indicating information about the delay effect is not output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 until the display effect is executed after the delay period which is executed and managed on the display control device 114 side. The configuration may be such that the delay period is set, that is, a delay generation command indicating that the predetermined value is set in the delay timer is output to the sound lamp control device 113. good. Thus, the sound ramp control device 113 can recognize that the delay period occurs before the delay period elapses, and thus it is possible to execute the control process corresponding to the delay period.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example has the operation means (the frame button 22, the first button 22za, the second button 22zb) that can be operated by the player, and the effect execution means ( As a part of the effect performed by the audio lamp control device 113), an operation effect based on an operation on the operation means can be executed. When an operation effect is executed, an operation validity period in which the operation performed by the player on the operation means is effectively determined is set, and the operation is performed according to the operation performed during the operation validity period. Since the effect mode of the operation effect is variable, the player can be motivated to execute the game.

  In the first control example described above, the operation effect of changing the effect mode based on the operation content (for example, the number of times of operation) to the operation means within the operation validity period set continuously has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of operation valid periods may be set within an effect period in which an operation effect is executed. In this case, the operation content to the operation means executed during the first operation valid period Is configured to be changeable to the first production mode based on the first operation mode, and the first operation mode is set based on the content of the operation performed on the operation means during the second operation valid period set after the first operation valid period. The production mode may be configured to be variable to a second production mode different from the first production mode. That is, the operation effect may be performed so that the effect mode is changed over a plurality of operation valid periods set within the operation effect effect period. In addition, the effect period of the operation effect may be set so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol changes or a plurality of jackpot games.

  In the first control example described above, when all the production modes set in the continuous-stroke production, that is, when the production mode is changed to the final production mode based on the operation on the operation device, the operation on the subsequent operation device is performed. According to the content, the continuous-stroke effect can be ended without waiting for a predetermined period of time during which the continuous-stroke effect is executed. With such a configuration, the player is caused to perform a long-period production without changing the production mode for a long time, and the player's willingness to play the game and, consequently, the willingness to operate the operation means are reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the above-described first control example, when the player enthusiastically operates the operation means within the operation effective period, the effect form of the operation effect is easily changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Without having to operate the operation means, the effect may be easily changed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select whether or not to operate the operation means during the operation valid period.

  Further, in the above-described first control example, the operation effect result is displayed once based on the operation content of the operation means within the operation effective period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of operation effect results may be displayed within the command. For example, when an operation validity period of 10 seconds is set as the operation validity period, a predetermined operation condition (for example, when the operation means is set to 3). When the operation condition that is satisfied when the operation is performed twice) is satisfied, the first operation effect result is displayed. After the first operation effect result is displayed, if there is a remaining period in the operation validity period, again, The second operation effect result may be displayed by satisfying a predetermined operation condition. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the display content of the operation effect result that is displayed a plurality of times is configured to be variable. More specifically, a true operation effect result and a pseudo operation effect result can be set. It is preferable to provide a determining means for determining whether or not to display the operation effect result, and to display any operation effect result each time the operation condition is satisfied. In this way, by configuring so that a plurality of operation effect results can be displayed within one operation effective period, a player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

  Further, in this case, a condition changing means for changing a predetermined operation condition every time the operation effect result is displayed, and a limiting means for limiting the number of display times in which the operation effect result can be displayed within one operation effective period are provided. Is also good. In addition, the number of times limited by the limiting unit may be configured to be variable based on the operation content of the operating unit that is executed during the production stage of the operation effect. The more the operation is performed, the more the number of display times that the operation effect result can be displayed may be configured, and the operation effect result can be displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period than when the operation means is operated. You may comprise so that display frequency may increase. Further, the probability that a true operation effect result is displayed may be varied based on the operation content of the operation means executed during the operation effect effect period.

  In the above-described second control example, an abnormality determination process is performed in which the abnormality determination (the abnormality determination as to whether or not the granular member 320 is housed) of the injection accessory (fire agent) 400 is performed at a specific timing, and the abnormality determination is performed. In accordance with the result of the processing, it is configured to execute an effect using the projectile 400, execute a retry process for performing abnormality determination again, or execute a process of switching to another effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing an effect using the ejecting accessory (firing accessory) 400, the ejecting accessory (firing accessory) 400 is in a normal state, that is, the granular member 320 is normal. May be configured to execute different processing depending on the length of the period required to be stored in, for example, a granular form within four seconds after the effect using the firing accessory 400 is executed. The member 320 is properly stored. If it is determined that the effect has been determined, a predetermined effect (for example, a series of character effects) is continued, and a delay period is set for 4 to 5 seconds after the effect using the firing role object 400 is executed. However, during the delay period, the execution of the series of character effects can be delayed, and if it is determined that the granular member 320 has been normally stored during the delay period, a series of after-effects may be performed immediately thereafter or after the delay period has elapsed. If the granular material 320 is not properly stored even after 5 seconds have passed (even after the delay period has elapsed) since the effect using the firing accessory 400 is restarted and the effect using the firing accessory 400 is executed, You may be comprised so that the production content of a series of public-effects production may be changed to the production mode which does not use the launcher 400. Also, in this case, if it is determined that the granular member 320 is normally stored within two seconds after the effect using the firing role object 400 is executed, the shortened storage state is set, and the specific effect is performed for a predetermined period (the firing time). It may be configured to be executed during a period from when the effect using the accessory 400 is executed until 4 seconds elapses).

  With this configuration, different effects can be executed according to the length of the period from when the effect using the projectile 400 is executed to when the granular member 320 is normally stored, It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the first to fourth control examples described above, the specific area (probable change switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery is set to the ball. Has passed, the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game has been described. In this manner, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player Is configured to be able to provide the player with a special game different from the privilege game based on the fact that the ball has passed the specific area in a state where is executed, for example, a special symbol lottery with a different lottery result than the jackpot winning When a small hit is won, a second bonus game (small jackpot game) different from the privilege game (big hit game) can be executed, and a variable ball that is opened during the second bonus game When a specific area through which the ball that has entered the ball is allowed to pass is provided at the step (the variable winning device 65 may be provided or another winning device may be provided separately), and the ball passes through the specific area during the second privilege game. Alternatively, a configuration in which a bonus game (big hit game) can be executed after the end of the second privilege game (small hit game) may be used.

  In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the number is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above control examples, the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is configured to hold a prize up to four times and the passage through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. The number of retained balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three times or less, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in the part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the reserved ball number. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to identify the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using the common image data of the display control device 114.

  In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for displaying the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol and the display means for displaying the slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to the player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display means.

  In each of the above-described control examples, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different depending on the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. State) and a gaming state (normal state) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the gaming board 13 may be executed. . Further, a left-handed game may be executed during the time reduction state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

  In each of the above-described control examples, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use a lever-shaped operation means that can determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and can determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching It is also possible to use a simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. For example, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect form of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player on the frame button 22 by, for example, displaying the frame button 22. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or input of an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) may be performed, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A control device that can generate an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of effect operation means can be centrally managed. The effect mode for the player's operation on the means can be set smoothly.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above control examples. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities relating to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed at the game store. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of the jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the probable change state) may be set in any of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Can be set as a typical example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of the jackpot probability, for example, implemented as a pachinko machine that can change the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot according to the setting You may. That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be changed according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. By changing the ratio according to the setting, the degree of advantage for each setting may be changed. In addition, for example, the rate at which a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the big hit is determined according to the setting, or a large number of time savings (for example, 0 times) is given. May be changed according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) ) May be changed according to the setting at which the jackpot determined to be (or easily shifted) is determined. In addition, a configuration in which a jackpot type in which the ratio determined only by a specific setting is significantly higher (almost not determined by other settings) may be provided. Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. In the setting 6, when the jackpot becomes a jackpot, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 becomes extremely high, so that the player pays attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot and plays the game. be able to. Alternatively, or additionally, for example, in setting 6, a configuration may be such that the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time savings are given after the end of the jackpot is higher than other settings. With this configuration, a game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the inside of the jackpot) of the jackpot operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types. The jackpot type may be provided so as to be easily determined by a specific setting (the determination ratio is increased). In addition, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probabilities according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the positive change state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a big hit probability high. This configuration is particularly of a type in which the number of special symbol lotteries increases, and the number of balls held tends to increase (the number of award balls to be paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired), particularly in the probable change state. It is effective for gaming machines. More specifically, for example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next big win is won, and in a probable change state, it is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a small probability with a high probability, thereby achieving an advantage of a high setting. Sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big hit is likely to increase, so that the chances of winning a small hit and obtaining a prize ball also increase. Therefore, in the probability change state, it becomes easier for the player to acquire more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a plurality of settings, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b referred to when the variation pattern is selected by the main control device 110 is set based on the set value. The variation effect, the variation of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when the variation pattern (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol is selected by the sound lamp control device 113, and the detailed rendering executed as the variation effect. Preferably, the types of the various selection tables referred to when selecting the mode are made different. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with the content of the fluctuating effect to be executed, so that the fluctuating effect that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

  When the data table to be referred to when selecting the operation mode of the operation effect is made different based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, the setting set as the operation mode of the operation effect is set. The production mode of “setting suggestion” for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, and is executed in the production mode of “setting suggestion”. The effect contents of the operation effect may be configured to be different according to each set value, and the selection ratio of other effect modes may be changed according to the set value. With this configuration, when an operation effect of “setting suggestion” that directly suggests a set value is executed, the effect content is displayed, and when other operation effects are executed, each effect mode is displayed. It is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 by grasping the selection ratio in a composite manner, so that the player is interested in various operation effects performed. be able to.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to be different depending on the set game state, for example, from the setting “1” disadvantageous to the player In the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value can be set in six steps up to the setting “6” that is advantageous to the player, the settings “1” to “3” are set, and the first game that is advantageous to the player The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (probable change state) is set and the settings “4” to “6” are set, and the second ratio is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. By setting the same selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the two game states (time saving state) are set, the player can play the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value disadvantageous to the player is set. Set value that is advantageous to the player Than is set can it is convincing.

  In addition, as in the first control example described above, the same effect mode is used when the first game state (probable change state) is set and when the second game state (time saving state) is set. In the case where a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set game state by using the “chance mode” is set, the above-described effect can be more remarkable. . Further, as in the above-described first control example, the pachinko machine 10 in which the second gaming state is set after the first gaming state is completed, and whether or not the first gaming state is actually set is determined. By making it difficult, the effect can be more remarkably exhibited.

  In this way, based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game situations (the jackpot lottery result, the set game state, and the selected variation pattern (variation time)), the effect mode of the production mode is determined. By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 by the player.

  In addition, the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Direction incorporating randomness>
A gaming machine comprising: an action means; and a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving an action from the action means, and an auxiliary means configured to have a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. A1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement means which is displaceably disposed on the front side of a liquid crystal display area and is displaced in accordance with driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, JP-A-2006-153095). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention gradually decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement of the displacement device can be complicated by the function of the supplement device in which the displacement device makes the displacement mode of the displacement device a plurality of modes. This can prevent the player from getting bored and keep the player's attention at a high level.

  Note that specific examples of the auxiliary means are not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be a box-shaped space constituting means constituting a displaceable space, or a push-in which changes the displacement mode of the displacement means by being displaced by a drive device different from the action means and pushing the displacement means. Means may be used. Further, the driving device of the pushing means may be used also as the driving device for driving the action means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured to have a first state in which a first action portion can act on the displacement means, and a second state in which a second action portion can act on the displacement means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the portion at which the action means acts on the displacement means can be made different, so that even if the action means has the same movement at the time of action, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be made different.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action unit includes a contact unit that applies a load by contacting the displacement unit, and the load can be generated in a plurality of types through the contact unit. A3. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, since there are a plurality of types of loads generated via the abutting means, the displacement modes of the displacement means can be made a plurality of types.

  In the gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable, and a first contact portion configured to be capable of contacting the displacement means, and a first contact part configured to be capable of contacting the displacement means. A second contact portion different from the first contact portion, and an angle in a predetermined direction between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or a tangent line of the first contact portion) is the aforementioned A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or the tangent to the second contact portion) is different from the angle as viewed in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be made different without changing the displacement direction of the contact means. Direction.

  In the gaming machine A4, the contacting means may be configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first contacting portion and the second contacting portion and parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contacting means. A gaming machine A5 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, a load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to a plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with little energy loss. Can be done. Thereby, a large displacement amount of the displacement means can be secured.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a load generating means configured to generate a load for displacing the action means is provided, and the load generating means is provided with a Gaming machine A6, which is configured to generate

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a supporting mode that allows a change in attitude, and the change in attitude occurs on a side where the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the action means is easy to maintain a balance. A gaming machine A7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, since the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained by changing the attitude of the acting means, an overload is locally applied to the acting means. Can be avoided.

  The cause of the change in the posture of the action means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by the balance of the load from the displacement means, or a drive device for changing the attitude of the action means may be provided. In the case where the posture change of the action means is caused by the balance of the load from the displacement means, by providing a plurality of types of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the action means, the posture of the action means can be easily changed. Can be generated in a plurality of types.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guide means configured to be capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means is capable of guiding the displacement in one direction. A first guide portion, and a second guide portion capable of guiding displacement of the displacement means in another direction, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion are surfaces facing the displacement means. Gaming machine A8, characterized in that the form of formation is different.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be made different depending on the displacement direction of the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, and the disposition thereof is configured to change the ease of keeping the balance of the displacement means, and at a position where the balance of the displacement means is easy to keep. A gaming machine A9, which is configured to be able to act on the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means can be easily maintained.

  The gaming machine A10 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means includes one or a plurality of members, which are configured not to be coupled to each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and solidified. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered can be easily realized.

  The gaming machine A11, wherein the one or more members have their centers of gravity different from the center of the member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A10, the posture of the displacement means when the displacement means is disposed in the action means can be stabilized.

  The method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially forming a hole in the member may be used.

<Change by the reciprocating means that moves forward and backward within the range of displacement of the displacing means>
An arranging unit configured to be disposable in a predetermined range; and an advancing / retracting unit configured to be displaceable in an advancing / retreating direction with respect to the range. The width of the width of the game machine B1 is variable, and the width of the width is changed in a plurality of types.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine having a first movable member displaced to the left and right and a second movable member entering a range created between the first movable members with the displacement of the first movable member. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing / retreating means comprises a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering the range, the displacing mode of the arranging means can be constituted by a plurality of types. Can be improved.

  Note that the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular effect member formed of a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

  Further, there is no particular limitation on the method of configuring a plurality of types of change modes of the range width due to the displacement of the advance / retreat means. For example, the entry side of the retreating means may be formed with an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion having a different width into the range, or the range may be changed by changing the displacement width of the retreating means. May be variable.

  In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-like unit configured to prevent the placement and exit of the arrangement unit, and is configured to be changeable, and the advance / retreat unit enters in a non-change state of the range. The gaming machine B2, which is configured to be displaceable in an aspect, and wherein the box-shaped means includes an opening portion through which the advancing / retreating means can be inserted and the placement means cannot be inserted.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the advancing / retreating means can enter the range through the opening portion, while preventing the arrangement means from falling out of the range.

  The arrangement of the opening is not limited at all. For example, you may arrange | position to the place where arrangement | positioning means does not reach easily. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the arranging unit accidentally falls outside the range. Further, the opening may be arranged at a place where a load from the arrangement means is unlikely to occur (for example, on the upper side opposite to the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent the load from the arranging unit from being applied to the moving unit that is being displaced, so that the displacement of the arranging unit is prevented from being disturbed, and the moving unit or the arranging unit is prevented from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advancing / retreating means is configured such that a direction in which the arranging means is guided is different depending on a direction in which the advancing / retreating means contacts the arranging means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible for the player to see the arrangement means being guided in different directions by the same advancing / retreating means. Thus, the number of types of effects can be increased, and the effect of the effects using the arrangement means and the forward / backward means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advance / retreat means is configured such that, when entering the range, a gap between the facing surface of the range and the width of the arrangement means is shorter. A gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even when the arranging means is arranged on the side far from the advancing / retreating means, the advancing / retreating means is set to the Can work.

  In addition, you may comprise so that there may be no clearance between the advancing / retreating means and the opposing surface of a range. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a gap in one part and no gap in another part.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advance / retreat means is configured to enter the range by a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and a representative distal end farthest from the axis is provided at a distal end on the approach side. A gaming machine B5, wherein the gap between the range and the game machine is configured to be the shortest.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip, which is most likely to be misaligned from the axis, first enters the range, thereby reducing It is possible to respond early to the displacement and reduce the resistance of the subsequent approach operation.

  In the gaming machine B5, the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined overhang portion, and is formed so as to be inclined toward a side retreating from the range as the distance from the overhang portion along the axial direction increases. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, in the process of entering the advancing / retreating means, the arranging means can be displaced so as to be kept away from the predetermined overhang.

  In the gaming machine B6, the advancing / retreating means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion in the axial direction.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, since the shape of the advancing / retreating means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhang portion, the arrangement means pushed away by the overhang portion Can be secured.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a shape in which the range side is opened. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is opened before the advance / retreat means enters, or the shape where the range side is opened when the advance / retreat means enters.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, there is provided a driving unit capable of generating a driving force, and a transmitting unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the advancing / retreating unit. The driving force is transmitted by contact, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmitting means and the advance / retreat means is configured to be changeable, and the contact area is such that the advance / retreat means enters the range. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is configured to be initially maximum and then decrease.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized in the early stage of entry where a large load is likely to occur due to the advancing / retreating means starting to contact the arrangement means. By doing so, the load applied per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced.
This makes it possible to improve the durability of the moving means and the transmitting means.

  The mode of the forward / backward means is not limited at all. For example, a means for displacing outside the game area or a means for displacing inside the game area may be used.

<Synchronize the two members with the transmission cam>
A driving unit, a displacement unit configured to be displaceable and configured by one or a plurality of members, and a transmission unit configured to be capable of transmitting a driving force of the driving unit to the displacement unit, wherein the transmission unit includes: A first transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving unit to a first target unit of the displacement unit in a first mode, and a first transmission unit configured to transmit the driving force of the driving unit in a second mode different from the first mode. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second transmission unit configured to transmit a driving force of the driving unit to a second target unit.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving device used for displacement of a displacement device, comprising a first drive device for vertically moving the displacement device and a second drive device for rotating and displacing the displacement device. There is a gaming machine (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-202210). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even when the plurality of displacement units are displaced in synchronization with the first drive unit and the second drive unit in order to execute the operation effect of the displacement unit, the drive timing is shifted. There was a problem that the possibility could not be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means was likely to be unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission unit is provided with the first transmission unit and the second transmission unit, and transmits the driving force to the first target unit or the second target unit of the displacement unit, respectively. With this configuration, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

  The timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partially transmitted at the same time).

  In the case where the driving force is simultaneously transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion, it is preferable that the driving force is arranged such that at least a part of the driving force is generated in the direction of gravity. As a result, the own weight can be used for transmitting the driving force.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the transmission of the driving force to the second target portion are configured to occur at different times.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving unit can be suppressed by suppressing the maximum value of the driving resistance to be low.

  Here, the driving force transmission may mean a load in the traveling direction in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or may be a load transmission caused by a displacement generated by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Is also good.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion, and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement trajectory of the first member and the second member The first member is configured to be able to abut on the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the abutted state, through the first member, A gaming machine C3 configured to be able to transmit a driving force to a second member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means can be configured. In other words, a case where the driving force is directly transmitted from the transmission unit to the second member and a case where the driving force is transmitted indirectly via the first member can be configured.

  In the gaming machine C3, in a state where the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member is configured to be able to retreat to a position where the second member does not come into contact with the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, it is possible to prevent the displaced first member from abutting on the second member. Accordingly, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs in a state where the first member has arrived at the predetermined position and stopped, so that the switching of the mode of transmission of the driving force to the second member can be smoothly performed. Can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, a state of the first member is associated with an arrangement of the transmission unit.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the switching of the driving force transmission mode can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. And unintended collision or contact of each member can be avoided.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the game machine further includes a biasing unit configured to bias the second member in a predetermined direction, and the driving force transmission to the second member is performed in a direction opposing the biasing force. The gaming machine C6, wherein the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined arrangement in a state where the second member is arranged on a side opposite to the predetermined direction with respect to the first member. Can be. Thus, it is possible to form a timing for displacing the second member against the urging force and a timing for retaining the second member against the urging force in accordance with the displacement of the transmission means.

  In the gaming machine C6, the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction. .

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, a part of the load required for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the urging force can be used in an auxiliary manner.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission unit can form a non-contact state in which the second transmission unit does not make contact with the second member. In the non-contact state, the second transmission unit displaces the second member. The gaming machine C8, wherein the second member is configured so that the second transmission unit does not interfere with the game.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, as the displacement state of the second member, the displacement state pushed by the second transmission unit and the displacement state separated from the second transmission unit And can be configured.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel to the predetermined direction from a contact point between the first member arranged in the predetermined arrangement and the transmission means changes the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating section for regulating.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission unit via the first member is blocked by the regulating unit, thereby reaching the driving unit. Can be prevented (the degree can be reduced).

  It should be noted that the mode of the regulating section is not limited at all. For example, a guide portion that restricts displacement to restrict the displacement mode to slide displacement may be used, or a shaft support portion that restricts displacement to rotational displacement may be used.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement unit receives a driving force of the driving unit to be displaced or stopped, and receives a load from the second target unit. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that the gaming machine C10 is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced and stopped.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Suppress load transmission by limiting the generation of load to when it is away>
A game machine comprising: a driving unit; a displacing unit configured to be displaceable; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit a driving force of the driving unit to the displacing unit, wherein the contact unit abuts on the displacing unit. A first means configured to be changeable between a state and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means, and an object to which a load applied from outside is transmitted to the first means is configured to be switchable. A gaming machine D1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a displacing means composed of one movable body that is displaced by the driving force of a driving means makes contact with another movable body at a displacement end position (upper end position) and can receive a load. (See, for example, JP-A-2006-028623). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that a load from another movable body is transmitted to the driving unit via the displacement unit, and the state of the driving unit (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) under control and Since there is a possibility that a difference may occur from the actual state of the driving unit, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

  It is also conceivable that the load applied to the driving means causes the operating resistance of the driving means to increase and decrease in an unstable manner, thereby accelerating the deterioration of the driving means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving unit can be stabilized. Further, by suppressing the unstable increase and decrease of the operating resistance of the driving means, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

  The method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed in the contact portion, or the displacement of the first means (for example, the first means being subjected to an external force) which causes the load may be caused by the first means. It may be configured to occur only in the non-contact state.

  The gaming machine D2, wherein the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means are directed to the same side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced as compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force are on the opposite side.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, an arrangement is provided so as to be able to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement is configured such that the transmission means and the displacement means are in a non-contact state. A gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, since the collision of the arranging means occurs in the non-contact state of the transmitting means and the displacing means, the load transmission between the transmitting means and the displacing means is performed. Can be shut off.

  The collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means or may occur in the non-contact state. When the collision of the disposing means occurs in the non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacing means can be interrupted. Regardless of), load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission unit includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement unit, and the contact portion bends in a direction of a load generated by the contact ( A gaming machine D4, which is flexible enough to be deformable).

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second contact portion configured to be contactable, and the second means of at least one of the first means and the displacement means is provided. The game machine D5, wherein the contact portion is formed of a material capable of absorbing shock.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the impact can be absorbed by the second contact portion, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, there is provided an urging means for urging the displacement means, and a standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of an urging direction displacement range of the urging means. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid the shift of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where the load is generated from the transmission means). It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position in the control for operating the transmission means at high speed until the one means and the displacement means are separated. This makes it possible to easily and appropriately control the driving unit.

  In addition, by reducing the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid careless contact between the first means and the displacement means.

  The gaming machine D7, wherein in any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the first means is allowed to change a posture accompanying a collision of the arranging means.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arranging unit can be used for changing the attitude of the first unit, so that the load transmission to the driving unit is suppressed. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means contacts the displacement means, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means reduces the urging force of the urging means. The received urging state, wherein the transmitting means is in contact with the displacing means, displacing the displacing means to the opposite side of the direction of the urging force of the urging means, and A gaming machine D8 characterized in that the state can be changed between an invalid contact state in which transmission to the means is invalidated and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated from each other.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6 or D7, a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of easiness of the attitude change with respect to the collision of the arranging means) can be configured.

<Conditionally restricts one of the forward and reverse rotations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position, the displacement means being configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point where a displacement mode changes, and from the reference position, a plurality of types are provided. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the aspect described above.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the same movable auditorium to perform different operations in a plurality of effects (for example, see JP-A-2006-73517). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the different operation corresponds to the presence or absence of the switching of the driving direction of the driving device, so that the type of the effect can be determined from the driving sound of the driving device, and the effect to be executed from now on However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player, because the player can predict about.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the effect to be executed by the determination involvement means. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it is good also as a different production accompanying the displacement of the displacement means in the accurate production and the departure production. In this case, if the displacement means is displaced to the predetermined position in one way, the displacement from the predetermined position is generated (for example, a driving sound is generated), so that it is possible to determine whether the displacement means is correct. On the other hand, by using a plurality of displacement modes, even if displacement occurs (for example, drive noise occurs), it is difficult to determine whether or not the displacement is correct.

  Further, the mode of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a driving unit for generating a driving force for displacing the displacing unit, and a restricting unit for restricting the displacement of the displacing unit. The restricting unit includes a driving force generated by the driving unit. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in a state where the gaming machine is not present.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving unit can be turned off when the displacement unit is restricted. Therefore, when the driving unit is re-driven afterward, whether the driving direction is the forward direction, This makes it difficult to determine whether the direction is the reverse direction.

  In addition, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate a driving force when performing an effect for a long time (such as long reach) in a state where the displacement of the displacement means is regulated, it is possible to suppress generation of heat by the driving means.

  The gaming machine E3, wherein in the gaming machine E1 or E2, the regulating means is displaced by a driving force of the driving means to a position where it can act on a displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving units provided can be reduced as compared with a case where a driving unit for driving the regulating unit is separately provided.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, comprising a discrimination-related means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to determine in which of the plurality of types the mode is displaced. E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to configure the discriminating means so that it is difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section. As compared with the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in the above, it is possible to make it easier to continue the displacement of the displacement means until it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine E4, the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving unit while maintaining the displacement unit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such that the drive unit is started to be driven before notification of the success or failure.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a detection unit capable of detecting the position of the displacement unit is provided, and the detection unit determines a change of an executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6, which is also used as determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the switching of the displacement mode can be used in combination. The number of arrangements can be reduced.

<A sense of unity of multiple members>
A gaming machine in which a first member and a second member are configured to be displaceable, wherein a mode in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different between the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls a first member and a second member that are configured to be displaceable to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, JP-A-2015-231434). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member may return after the contact depending on the approaching speed. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the production mode regardless of the displacement speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the first member and the second member may be displaced from each other by changing directions after approaching on another straight line and approaching each other without making the first member and the second member displace on the same straight line. It is possible to avoid reversion and to easily maintain the effect mode.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is at least divided into a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for abutting each other. The gaming machine F2, wherein the second member is configured to have different postures in the first section and the second section.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of the displacement.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a gaming machine F3 comprising a load generating means capable of generating a load directed to a side for maintaining the close proximity of the first member and the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

  The load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a certain direction or a load of a certain magnitude. For example, when a load (for example, an effect mode that generates an external force) that is likely to be received changes depending on a situation (for example, a game state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating unit may be changed accordingly.

  Further, the load by the load generating means does not need to be constantly generated. For example, generation of a load and elimination of a load may be switched in accordance with a change in the above-described situation. The load generating means may be external.

  In the gaming machine F3, there is provided a displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means A gaming machine F4, wherein the gaming machine F4 is formed integrally with the generating means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F3, the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generation means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be appropriately maintained, and the shifted timing Can prevent a load from occurring.

  Further, the function of the load generating means and the function of the displacement generating means can be mutually complemented. For example, the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generator can be assisted by utilizing the load of the load generator.

  In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least a part of the first member contacts the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily perform the effect of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in a state other than the predetermined state.

  The gaming machine F7 according to any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, wherein the load generating means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of places, so that the state is not limited to maintaining the state with respect to the displacement in one direction. Also, it is possible to maintain the state with respect to the change in the posture of the first member or the second member. Thereby, even when the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid noticeable positional deviation.

  In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of load units that receive a load from the load generating unit, and the plurality of load units include a first load unit and a first load unit. A second loaded portion having a larger displacement amount with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion, wherein the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded portion prior to the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in a stepwise manner. Further, the roles of the loads applied to the first loaded portion and the second loaded portion can be separated. For example, it is possible to use the first loaded part in the role of disposition at a predetermined position and the second loaded part in the role of posture adjustment.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F8, the load generating unit may be configured such that a portion that applies a load directed to a side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is compared with the other portion by the first member. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the facing surface facing the second member has a long attack length.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the hanging down of the first member or the second member due to its own weight. On the other hand, as for the other portions, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved, and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, the assembling of the first member and the second member is enabled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other. .

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily prevent the first member or the second member from being cracked or chipped by the load generated in the assembling work. That is, as compared with the case where the assembling operation is performed in the abutting state, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of load transmission between the first member and the second member, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without loss. it can.

  Accordingly, the first member and the second member can be provided with the contact surfaces as designed, so that a situation in which a displacement is easily caused by a load by the load generating means, such as when a gap is generated, is prevented. can do.

<Multiple types of wobble state of displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, wherein the action means is configured to suppress a change in attitude of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement unit configured to be capable of displacement constituted by a change in arrangement and rotation (for example, see JP-A-2006-116782). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the portion for supporting the displacement means provided at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, the position of the displacement means is required due to the necessity of providing a gap to secure the displacement. There is a problem that the measures against the change are not sufficient, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, a change in the posture of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. Thus, even when the space in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

  It should be noted that the direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), or may be horizontal swing about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  The gaming machine G1, wherein in the gaming machine G0, the action means is configured to be able to increase or decrease an action force for suppressing a change in the attitude of the displacement means in accordance with the position of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0, it is possible to change the degree of suppression of the change in the posture of the displacement means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. Thereby, the arrangement space of the displacement means can be narrowed while the degree of freedom of the effect of the displacement means is maintained high.

  For example, when the displacement means is reciprocally displaced, the position of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the switching of the displacement direction is performed. By increasing, it is possible to suppress collapse of the posture of the displacement unit.

  Also, for example, even when the displacement means itself is enlarged or reduced or rotated by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse. In this case, by increasing the acting force generation position, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

  The gaming machine G2, wherein in the gaming machine G0 or G1, the action means is configured to support the displacement means with a plurality of main support means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0 or G1, the action means supports the displacement means with the plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, thereby preventing the displacement means from tilting. It can be easier.

  The gaming machine G3, wherein in the gaming machine G2, the action means includes an auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from a horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine G2, the displacement means is supported by three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line with the main support means and the auxiliary support means. Posture change can be suppressed in all directions.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein in the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G3, the function of the auxiliary support means not only as a supporting force generation position but also as a position for guiding displacement can be added.

  In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means is capable of being displaced in a manner to increase or decrease the area as viewed in a predetermined direction, and the action means is configured such that an action force generation position is maximized at a displacement end position of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the acting force can be generated on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the area increase effect of the displacement means is most effective. In addition, a change in the posture of the displacement means can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, by relatively reducing the acting force generating position during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be made smooth. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, the posture is easily maintained due to the inertia accompanying the displacement, so if the acting force generating position is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive, and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases immediately. In addition, there is a problem that the driving device becomes large.

  On the other hand, by configuring so as to reduce the acting force generating position at a position other than the displacement end position, it is possible to prevent the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid an increase in the size of the driving device.

<Wiring guide of propeller unit>
Displacement means, electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and electric wiring displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring, wherein the electric wiring displacement means is such that the displacement means is the predetermined part. A gaming machine H1 configured to be capable of displacing the predetermined portion to a side avoiding the displacing means when displacing to a side approaching the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which electric wiring connected to a displacement means is attached to a long member interlocking with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electric wiring (for example, JP-A-2012-157474). Gazette). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to be displaced beyond the electric wiring for the purpose of avoiding contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, and it is more difficult than the displacement end of the displacement means. Since a space for arranging the electric wiring outside is required, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a predetermined portion of the electric wiring is configured to be displaceable to the side avoiding the displacing means by the electric wiring displacing means, so that the contact between the displacing means and the electric wiring is positively performed. Therefore, the displacement means can be configured to be displaced beyond the electric wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the displacement means can be increased.

  In addition, when a displacement means approaches a predetermined part, it is not limited at all. For example, when the predetermined portion is stopped, there may be a case where there is a danger that the displacement means will come into contact with the predetermined portion, or a case where the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means becomes shorter than the reference length.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is capable of being displaced in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid that the displacement amount of the displacement means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction is limited to the electric wiring.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane perpendicular to a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction in which the predetermined portion is displaced can be set to a direction along the predetermined direction. The effect on appearance can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the game machine further includes a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined part of the electric wiring disposed on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined part, wherein the electric wiring displacing means comprises: A gaming machine H4, wherein the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaced with respect to the stopping means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stopping means.

  The configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is spirally disposed in the stopping means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be inserted into the movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

  The gaming machine H5, wherein in the gaming machine H4, the stop means is disposed outside a displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is disposed outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction, so that the stopping means projects toward the plane on which the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. Thereby, the accommodation amount of the electric wiring of the stopping means can be increased, so that the displacement amount of the displacement means for compensating the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wiring displacement unit is integrally formed with the displacement unit, and includes a corresponding change unit that changes the arrangement of the electric wiring displacement unit in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement unit. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the correspondence changing means.

<Flow path of the ball through the electric tube>
A game area, and downflow means for flowing down the game balls discharged from the game area, and the downflow means includes a section configured so that the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. Gaming machine I0.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate constituting a gaming area is formed of a plywood plate (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot visually recognize the game ball. Therefore, it is easy for the player to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the discharge timing, the player may suddenly feel as if the game ball has disappeared from the game area.

  Also, even when paying attention to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning opening and the out opening are often arranged close to each other, and although the ball actually entered the out opening, It may be mistaken for the one that entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may be distrusted that no prize ball is paid out. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the game balls from the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the flow-down means is configured to include a section in which the game ball discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, so that the player views the game ball flowing down the section. Thereby, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. Thereby, discharge of the game ball from the game area can be improved.

  In addition, discharge of the game ball from the game area means the entirety of the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through a winning ball port or discharged through an out port without a winning ball.

  In the gaming machine I0, a game ball that has flowed down the game area is disposed so as to be able to pass therethrough, and the game ball has a profit giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to a player based on the game ball passing therethrough, The means includes a first component configured to guide a game ball to a side closer to the benefit providing means above the benefit providing means, and is disposed downstream of the first component, and the A gaming machine I1 comprising: a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit providing means above the providing means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I0, by visually recognizing the gaming balls flowing down the downflow means, the player can grasp how the gaming balls are discharged from the gaming area, It is possible to prevent the game ball from approaching the lower profit providing means. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the game balls already discharged from the game area from the game balls still flowing down the game area in the vicinity of the profit provision means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. It can be planned as possible.

  Note that the predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, a prize ball may be paid out, a lottery of a symbol such as a first symbol or a second symbol may be performed, or other profit may be obtained.

  In the gaming machine I0 or I1, there is provided a noticing means formed inside the game area, and a frame means disposed in a frame shape around the noticing means, and the flowing-down means is provided with the frame in front view. A gaming machine I2 configured to cause a game ball to flow inward of the means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flow-down means allows the game ball discharged from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means. Thereby, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

  Note that the attention means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate (illumination plate) may be used, a liquid crystal display means for changing and displaying a pattern may be used, a movable part which can be displaced by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

  In the gaming machine I2, the downflow means includes a deceleration means for decelerating a game ball inside the attention means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, the period during which the game ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means can be lengthened.

<The design of the board and the device around the light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate including a light emitting unit, and a placement unit disposed at least in front of at least a part of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction, and the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized in the predetermined direction, A gaming machine J0, wherein the light emitted from the light emitting means is arranged so as to be smaller than the visible area.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illuminated substrate having light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the back side of a base plate having a gaming area formed on a front surface, and a plate surface of the illuminated substrate and a plate surface of the base plate are arranged. There is a gaming machine in which are arranged substantially in parallel (for example, see JP-A-2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the area of the illuminated substrate viewed from the front is large, when illuminating the decorative member arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate with the LED light, the electric field is displayed in the field of view. There is a possibility that the decorative substrate enters and the decorative member and the electric decorative substrate are visually recognized as overlapping each other.

  On the surface of the illuminated substrate, only components necessary for functions such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and the design is usually not high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the illuminated board overlap and are visually recognized in front and back, the appearance is poor, and the interest of the player may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the effect of rendering the predetermined substrate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, since the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate viewed in a predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light, at least the predetermined substrate is disposed. A region where only light can be viewed without overlapping the substrate can be formed. Thereby, the effect of producing the predetermined substrate can be improved.

  The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, an area that can be visually recognized may be reduced by being partially hidden, or an aspect in which there is no area that can be visually recognized by being entirely shielded may be used.

  The optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be set arbitrarily. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. May be used.

  The light transmittance of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, the light transmittance may be configured to be good, the light transmittance may be reduced, or the degree of light transmittance may be changed for each part.

  In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both sides of the predetermined substrate to change a traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means, between the plurality of direction changing means. A low transmittance unit having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing unit is provided, and when viewed in a predetermined direction, the predetermined substrate is at least partially disposed inside the low transmittance unit. Gaming machine J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate can be viewed can be narrowed.

  The direction changing means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate or an illumination plate may be used, a movable member configured to be displaceable by a driving device, a game area or a flow path in which a game ball flows down, or a case member or a decorative member fixedly arranged. But it is good.

  In the gaming machine J1, the low-transmitting means is at least a part of a shape part forming a predetermined pattern or graphic shape.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J1, the low-transmitting means can be mixed into a predetermined pattern or figure shape, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  The shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone such as a window frame, a bone connecting a shaft of a rotating body such as a tire and a rotation outer peripheral portion, or a series of meanings composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

  In any of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the gaming board J3 is characterized in that the predetermined substrate is arranged with the end face of the board facing the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined substrate as viewed in the predetermined direction can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine J3, a display means for executing a display effect visually recognizable in a predetermined direction, and a game area arranged in front of the display means, wherein the predetermined substrate includes a display area of the display means, A gaming machine J4, which is arranged at a boundary with a game area when viewed in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined substrate at the boundary, light is emitted to the front side from the back of the game area, and the light effect is executed entirely, unlike the case where the light effect is performed entirely. And the effect of irradiating only the game area side with light can be executed.

  In the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board having the gaming area on the front side.

  According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, for example, the arrangement of the light emitting means is compared with the case where the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the rear case on which the movable role is arranged. Degree of freedom can be improved.

  Also, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the rear case along the back of the game board, the rear case side can be visually recognized from the window of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see up to the back of the game board unless it is looked around with a special wide field of view, it is easy to prevent the player from seeing the electric wiring.

  Further, when the liquid crystal display device is disposed in the center of the rear case, the arrangement space for the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device. If so, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate can be improved.

<Locking member to prevent misalignment of the accessory at the time of shipment>
Displacement means, and limiting means configured to be able to limit the displacement of the displacement means, the limiting means has a first state that can act on the displacement means, and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. The gaming machine K1 is configured to be capable of changing its state in the first state, and configured to suppress movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable role (displacement means) that is displaced downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of disposing and fixing the displacing means.

  That is, while the gaming machine is configured to be able to operate normally after being installed, the movable role can be fixed even in a situation where large vibration or external force can be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipment or the like. It is not configured to work.

  Therefore, as a countermeasure for fixing the movable role at the time of shipping, the displacement of the movable role is suppressed by filling the buffer in the range where the movable role is displaced, and the buffer is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, in the case of a configuration in which the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, and the load on the game hall may be large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be released by changing the state of the restriction means, the arrangement and release of the displacement means can be improved.

  On the other hand, unlike the case of extracting the cushioning material, since the restricting means is not extracted, it is difficult to continue the game if the state changes easily due to an external force that may occur during the game. On the other hand, when the limiting means is configured to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a malfunction during the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the limiting means is configured to be capable of changing states between the first state and the second state when power is not supplied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine K1, a change in the state of the limiting device can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that occurrence of a malfunction of the limiting device can be suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a worker's work from becoming difficult in a power failure state and in a recovery operation from the power failure state.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided urging means for urging the operating portion of the restricting device in a predetermined direction, and the restricting device displaces the operating portion by a predetermined amount from a reference position to a side opposite to the predetermined direction. The operating portion is configured to be displaceable by the urging force of the urging means so as to be separated from the reference position in the predetermined direction, and in the second state, from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3, which is arranged at a distance away from the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the operation unit is disposed at a position away from the reference position in the second state, so that it is provided to the installed gaming machine such as opening and closing a door. It is possible to prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for changing the state of the restricting means from being caused by the possible external force, and to easily prevent the restricting means from changing from the second state.

  The gaming machine K4 according to any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, wherein the operation unit of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means constituting an area where the displacement means can be displaced.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, since the operation unit is disposed outside the region forming means, even if the displacement means is displaced with the operation of the operation means, The displacement means can be prevented from contacting the worker.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, there is provided an urging means for urging the operating part of the restricting means in a predetermined direction, and the restricting means is configured such that the operating part moves a predetermined amount from a reference position to a side opposite to the predetermined direction. The restricting means includes a guide means for guiding the displacement of the operation section in the predetermined direction, and the guide means is configured to perform the operation in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K5 configured to secure an allowable displacement width (posture change width) of the section.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, since the displacement of the operation means is also made possible in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction, the operation unit When an unknown load is applied, displacement in a predetermined direction can be prevented easily, and displacement of the operation unit by a predetermined amount can be easily prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the state of the restricting unit from being changed by an unintended external force generated by opening and closing the door.

  In the gaming machine K5, the operation section includes an engagement section configured to be engageable with the guide section, the urging section is disposed at a center of the operation section, and the engagement section includes the operation section. A gaming machine K6, which is arranged at a position away from the center of the section.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine K5, in the first state of the restricting means, even if an external force whose direction is unknown is applied to the restricting means, the operation unit is displaced with the engaging part as a fulcrum. (Posture change), and the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiter from changing from the first state to the second state due to external force such as opening and closing of the door, vibration at the time of shipment, and the like.

  In the gaming machine K6, the restricting means is disposed on the back side of the area forming means which is rotatable with the left and right support shafts, and the engaging portion is disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, since the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, the clerk of the gaming hall opens the front door. This makes it easier to operate the control means. In other words, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width becomes large (the side opposite to the support shaft), so that the operation position of the restricting means can be made closer to the front.

  In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is provided on a support shaft side of the area forming means.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, since the restricting means is disposed on the support shaft side, it is possible to prevent a worker who opens the front door and works from accidentally touching the restricting means. can do.

  In addition, the load applied to the restricting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced as compared with the case where the restricting means is disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft. It can be prevented from changing.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide the displacement of the limiting means.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the guiding accuracy of the displacement when the limiting means acts on the displacing means while the guiding accuracy of the displacement of the limiting means alone is reduced. Can be improved.

  A game machine K10 comprising: a prevention notifying means for notifying the user of any of the game machines K1 to K9 when the power is supplied in the first state so as to prevent the power supply from being continued.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notifying means can notify the switching of the state of the limiting means from the first state.

  The mode of the notification is not limited at all. For example, the error display may be notified by displaying it on a liquid crystal display device, the notification may be output by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or a predetermined lighting unit may be illuminated (or maintained in an extinguished state). You may be notified by that.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
In a gaming machine provided with a container for accommodating an object, an operation means disposed on the object and operably formed is provided, and the container has an opening formed at a position corresponding to the operation means. A gaming machine L0.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a board box (housing body) for housing a control board (object) is known (JP-A-2005-205029). The board box is sealed, so that tampering with the control board is suppressed.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the control board is provided with an operation means, it is necessary to open the substrate box in order to operate the operation means. Therefore, there was a problem that it took time and effort.

According to the gaming machine L0, the operating means is provided on the object and is operably formed, and the opening is formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operating means. Can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operation means.
Therefore, labor can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention in which the substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (the covering portions A270 and A2270) are an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing includes an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. M1.

  According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine L0, the operating means has the first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing has an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the container can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by being inserted and displaced by an operating element, and the opposing portion is at least a part of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement trajectory of the operating element. A gaming machine M2, which is disposed to face a part thereof.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the opposing portion is disposed so as to oppose at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement trajectory of the operating element. Foreign matter, such as wires, can be reduced from the opening to the inside of the container from the opening by reducing the area of the opening by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operating element into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operating element. Insertion can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape having a base end fixed and one end free.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, so that the shape is simplified and the formability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine M3, a projection is protruded from the facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine M3, since the protruding portion is provided on the facing portion, the rigidity of the facing portion can be increased and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape.

  The gaming machine M5, wherein in the gaming machine M4, the protruding portion is provided so as to protrude from a surface of the opposing portion facing the first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine M4, the projection is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the opposing portion opposing the first surface of the operation means. The gap between the surface and the surface can be reduced to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the housing from the gap.

  In the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is in contact with a first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine M5, the projection is in contact with the first surface of the operation means. There is no gap between them, so that it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the inside of the container.

  In addition, since the projection is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, when the operator is inserted into the operating means, even if the opposing part is pushed in the insertion direction by the operating element, the opposing part is moved in the insertion direction. Can be suppressed from being deformed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base end side of the facing portion from being damaged.

  Since the opposed portion is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, the elastic portion of the opposed portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusions are in contact with each other. That is, the degree of adhesion is increased to prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted).

  The gaming machine M7, wherein in any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, since the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape, the rigidity of the facing portion can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as wire from being inserted into the housing.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element, and the opposing portion has an edge contacting the operation element inserted into the operation means. A gaming machine M8 formed so as to be capable of being formed.

  Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator inadvertently operates the operator in the lateral direction, or inadvertently opens and closes the member in which the housing is disposed). When the operating element that has collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operating means (the connection portion with the object) increases. Also, when the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operation element inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operation means (the connection portion with the object) becomes large. Become. In these cases, there is a possibility that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may be broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed so that the edge can abut on the operating element inserted into the operating means. The operator (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means tilts) is brought into contact with the edge of the opposing portion, so that tilting and excessive displacement of the operator can be suppressed. As a result, the tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be prevented from dropping from the object.

  The gaming machine M9 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, wherein the housing includes a covering portion that covers one end of the operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, since the housing has the covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, the clearance between the operating means and the covering portion is reduced. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the housing.

  Here, when the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, if the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator When the operator is laterally operated, or the member on which the container is disposed is opened and closed inadvertently, and the operator colliding with another member is pressed in the horizontal direction, the operating means is also tilted, and The load on the root of the means (the connection portion with the object) increases. In this case, there is a possibility that the operation means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operation means and the object may be broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers the one end side of the operating device, the operating device can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating device. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation means from falling off from the object.

  The gaming machine M10, wherein an outer shape of the operation means at a base end side opposite to the one end side is larger than an inner shape of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine M9, the outer shape at the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operation means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering portion. The gap between the wire and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the housing.

  In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means has a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operating means has a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means has Since the receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the housing.

  In the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in a circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M11, since the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are brought into contact with each other, and Excessive displacement (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation means from falling off from the object.

  The gaming machine M13 of any of the gaming machines M1 to M12, wherein the housing body includes an upright wall which is provided upright from an inner surface thereof and whose upstanding tip comes into contact with the object.

  According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the housing body has an upright wall that is provided upright from the inner surface and the upright tip abuts on the target object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the housing.

  In the gaming machine M13, the upright wall is formed so as to surround the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M13, since the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, it is possible to cut off a route for entering the inside of the housing. That is, even if a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the housing.

  In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and a surface connecting the electronic components to a circuit of the control board by soldering is connected to a side on which the operation unit is provided. Is a gaming machine M15 set on the opposite surface.

  According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface of the control board for connecting the electronic components to the circuit by soldering is operated by operating means. Is set on the surface opposite to the side on which the object is disposed, so that the standing end of the standing wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the standing wall can be connected to each other. The formation of a gap between them can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the standing wall surely function as a wall against which the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire inserted from the opening abuts, and it is possible to suppress the foreign matter such as the wire from being inserted into the container.

  The gaming machine M16 according to any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, wherein the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and a thickness dimension of a standing tip is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness of the standing tip is reduced, so that the standing wall is brought into contact with the object. By increasing the surface pressure at the standing tip, the insertion of foreign matter such as wire from between the target object and the standing tip can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the container.

  In the gaming machine M16, the upright end of the upright wall has a tapered surface formed on a surface on the operation means side, so that the thickness of the upright end is reduced.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine M16, the thickness of the standing tip of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the housing while improving the moldability. That is, with the tapered surface, the shape change is moderated, and the fluidity of the resin in the molding die can be secured. On the other hand, when the standing end of the standing wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-described groove. That is, it is difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from a first area and a second area located closer to the object than the first area, and A gaming machine M18, wherein the covering portion protrudes from two regions.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is one of the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion projects from the second region, the projecting height of the covering portion can be increased.
Therefore, the area covered by the covering portion on the operation means (the area where the insertion of foreign matter such as wire is suppressed, and the area where the operation means is in contact with the operation means and the inclination and displacement of the operation means are suppressed) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire into the inside of the container and to prevent the operation means from falling off the target object.

  The gaming machine M19 according to any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, wherein the covering portion protrudes from an outer surface of the housing, and the opening is formed at a protruding tip side of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is protruded from the outer surface of the container, and an opening is formed at the protruding tip side of the covering portion. The tip of the foreign matter can hardly reach the opening.

  For example, when it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening because the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield or the like, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. The method is performed. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign substance such as the wire is caused to abut against the outer surface of the covering portion, and further. Can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that restricts sliding of foreign matter such as wire. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the container.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the board box A100 (the standing walls A280 and A290) is an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element, and the housing is formed so as to be able to contact the outer surface of the operation means or the operation element. Gaming machine N1.

  Here, when the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator inadvertently operates the operator in the lateral direction, or inadvertently opens and closes the member provided with the housing body). When the operator colliding with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a possibility that the displaced (tilted) operating means is damaged (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the target object comes off or breaks).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L0, the housing is formed so as to be able to abut on the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. The displacement of the operation means can be suppressed by receiving the operation means. As a result, breakage of the operation means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N1, the accommodation body is provided with an upright wall which is provided upright from an inner surface thereof and whose upstanding tip comes into contact with the object.

  Here, if the container receives the displaced (tilted) operation means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine N1, the housing body has the upright wall which is provided upright from the inner surface thereof and the upright end of which comes into contact with the target object. Serves as a support and can suppress deformation of the container. As a result, breakage of the container can be suppressed.

  At the same time, since the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, the tilting of the operation means can be more reliably suppressed. As a result, breakage of the operation means can be easily suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N2, the upright wall is formed so as to surround the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the upright wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that the upright wall is formed even when the operating means is tilted in any direction. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, breakage of the container can be suppressed.

  In addition, a path for entering the inside of the container can be blocked by the standing wall. That is, even if a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the housing.

  In the gaming machine N3, the upstanding wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the housing body on which the upstanding wall is erected.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is erected. The rigidity of the standing wall can be increased by utilizing the structure, and the rigidity of the entire container can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppression means) of the standing wall that suppresses deformation of the container when the operation means is tilted can be enhanced. As a result, breakage of the container can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine N5 in any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, wherein the housing includes a covering portion that covers one end of the operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, since the housing has the covering portion that covers one end of the operating means, the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Thus, tilting of the operation means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation means from falling off from the object.

  According to the gaming machine N5, since the covering portion covers the one end of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as wire into the housing.

  In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is provided so as to protrude from an outer surface of the container, and the container has a ridge protruding from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape. A gaming machine N6 connected to the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is provided so as to protrude from the outer surface of the housing, and the housing is provided with a ridge protruding from the outer surface and extending in a stripe shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the cover, the ridge can function as a rib, and the cover can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the tilting of the operating means by bringing the operating means into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, and to suppress the damage of the covering portion at that time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation means from falling off from the object.

  In addition, since the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area covered by the covering portion on the operation means (the area where the insertion of foreign matter such as wire is suppressed, and the area where the operation means is in contact with the operation means and the inclination and displacement of the operation means are suppressed) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire into the inside of the container and to prevent the operation means from falling off the target object.

  In the gaming machine N6, the accommodation body includes a display portion formed on an outer surface thereof and displaying predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end of the ridge.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on the outer surface thereof for displaying predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end of the ridge. Therefore, the function as the indicating line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit can be used also as the ridge. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and an operating element is inserted into the first surface to be displaced, whereby the operating means is operated, and the housing is operated. The game includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed such that an edge can contact the operating element inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing has an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. Since the opening area can be reduced by the facing portion, the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the container can be suppressed.

  Further, since the edge portion is formed so that the edge can abut on the operation element inserted into the operation means, the operation element (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means is tilted) is moved to the edge of the opposition part. By contacting the control unit, tilting and excessive displacement of the operation element can be suppressed. As a result, the tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be prevented from dropping from the object.

  The gaming machine N9, wherein in the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is disposed so as to face at least a part of a first surface of the operation means excluding a displacement locus of the operation element.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is disposed on at least a part of the first surface of the operator except for the displacement trajectory of the operator. Foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening into the inside of the container because the area of the opening can be reduced by the opposing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operation member into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, by increasing the area of the facing portion that comes into contact with the displaced operation element, excessive displacement of the operation element (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be easily suppressed. As a result, excessive displacement of the operation means can be suppressed, and the operation means can be prevented from dropping from the object.

  In the gaming machine N9, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced to a first position, and the operation at which a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position is performed. A gaming machine N10 in which a child and an opposing portion are located at a contact position.

  In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operating element can be displaced to a second position different from the first position, and a position at which one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is the second position. The gaming machine N11, wherein the operation element displaced to the two positions is set at a position where the operation element comes into contact with the facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operating element can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion. The position where the operation element is displaced to the first position or the second position is a position where the operation element is displaced to the first position or the second position. Damage to the facing portion and the covering portion when they come into contact with each other can be effectively suppressed by using the ridge.

<About the concept of the invention in which the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 (operation wall section A210) are examples>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has an outer surface formed on one side from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. Is formed in the gaming machine O1.

  Here, since the operating means can be operated through the opening, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, labor can be reduced. However, there is a possibility that illegal insertion of a foreign matter such as a wire through the opening may be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the outer surface of the container is formed on one side from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the second region is formed. Since the opening is formed in the housing, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This makes it possible to increase the distance to the opening and make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as wire from the opening into the inside of the container can be suppressed. That is, fraud can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine O1, at least a part of a connection surface connecting the first region and the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region. O2.

  Here, in the container (board box), it is necessary to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface in consideration of heat radiation from the object (control board). On the other hand, if the opening is too far away from the operating means, the operability deteriorates. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, the operability of the operation means can be easily ensured, and as described above, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the container from the opening can be suppressed. . However, when the operating means is operated, the hand of the operator (operator) interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first area and the second area, which hinders the operation. Therefore, operability when operating the operation means may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, so that the gaming machine O2 is In addition to the effect of O1, the space connected to the second area is enlarged by the amount of the downward inclination, so that the operability when operating the operation means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a substantially rectangular area in a front view in which a length dimension along one direction is larger than a length dimension along another direction orthogonal to the one direction, and the operation unit includes an operation unit. A gaming machine O3 operated by a child being inserted and displaced, wherein the attitude of the operation element when inserted into or pulled out from the operation means is set to the attitude along the other direction. .

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine O2, the second area is a substantially rectangular area in front view in which the length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and the operating element is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means, so that the operating element has a posture along the other direction. With the surface for gripping the child directed in the longitudinal direction of the second region, a space can be secured on the side facing the surface to be gripped. Therefore, when the operation element is inserted into or pulled out of the operation means, it is possible to prevent the finger holding the operation element from interfering with the container. As a result, operability when operating the operation means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center in the second region, and the connection surface located on one longitudinal side in the second region is connected to the second region by the second region. A gaming machine O4 characterized by being inclined downward toward an area.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center in the second region, and the connection surface located on one longitudinal side in the second region is the second surface. Since it is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, it is possible to suppress interference of the fingers different from the grasped fingers with the container when the operator is grasped and displaced. For example, when the operator is gripped with the index finger and the thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface, and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, operability when operating the operation means can be improved.

  The gaming machine O5, wherein the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region in the gaming machine O4.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O4, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the operation is performed using the connection surface (the first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction. Means can be protected. For example, interference with other members during manufacturing can be suppressed, and damage to the operating means can be suppressed. Further, it is difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening, so that it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted from the opening into the inside of the container.

  In addition, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be increased accordingly, that is, to cope with heat radiation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction in the second region. A gaming machine O6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second region, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the short direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the short direction of the second region can be opened. Therefore, when performing an operation (insertion into the operation means, pulling out from the operation means, or displacement (e.g., rotation) of the operation element) by grasping the operation element with a finger, the grasped finger (e.g., thumb and index finger) The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for placing or displacing a finger different from the above. As a result, operability when operating the operation means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the other connection surface is the first connection surface. A gaming machine O7 substantially orthogonal to the region and the second region.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, Is substantially perpendicular to the first area and the second area, so that the effect of tilting the connection surface downward can be ensured, and the housing for responding to heat radiation from the object (control board). Can secure the volume of the internal space. That is, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward inclination of the connection surface.

  In the gaming machine O4 or O5, the game machine includes a base body on which the housing body is provided, and a rotation shaft rotatably supporting the base body, wherein a longitudinal direction in the second region is an axial direction of the rotation shaft. It is substantially orthogonal and the short direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is located farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Gaming machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 includes a base body on which the housing is provided, and a rotating shaft rotatably supporting the base body. The direction is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and the short direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal direction side in the second region is located farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal direction side. Therefore, when the operation means is operated in a space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface can be effectively utilized. That is, a space for allowing the hand of the operator (operator) to access the operation means can be secured by the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface. As a result, operability when operating the operation means can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
In a gaming machine provided with a container for accommodating an object, a display device arranged in a game area, and an operation means arranged on the object and operably formed, and related to the operation of the operation means A gaming machine P1 wherein information can be displayed on the display device.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a board box (housing body) for housing a control board (object) is known (JP-A-2005-205029). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that when operating means is provided on a control board (object), it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the display device disposed in the game area and the operation means disposed on the target and formed to be operable are provided, and information on the operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the operation means based on the display on the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information related to the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine P1, the accommodation body is formed so as to be displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the container is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the container is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, operation can be performed while checking the display (information), so that operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, in a state where the operation means is not operated, since it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is hardly visually recognized from the outside), improper operation can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine P2, the container is displaceable to a position where the surface of the container on which the operation means is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed. P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed. Therefore, the operation of operating the operation means while checking the display on the display device can be easily performed. As a result, operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed more reliably.

  The gaming machine P4, wherein in the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed farther from the center of the housing than the center of the housing.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported and the operation means is disposed farther from the position where the housing is supported than the center of the housing. In a state where the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device are simultaneously visible, the operation means is located farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the finger operating the operation means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body.
As a result, operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality, and the second operating means having a higher operation frequency than the first operating means is located on the side farther from the position supported by the shaft than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5, which is disposed in a game machine P5.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality, and the second operating means having a higher operating frequency than the first operating means is more effective than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the far side from the position where it is pivotally supported, the operation means (first operation means) with high operation frequency can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, when operating the operation means (the first operation means) having a high operation frequency, it is possible to prevent the finger from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine provided with a housing for housing an object, comprising: operating means disposed on the object and operably formed, wherein the object is connected to one or more electrical connection lines; A gaming machine Q1 wherein the operability of the operating means is changed according to the connection state of an electrical connection line with the object.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a board box (housing body) for housing a control board (object) is known (JP-A-2005-205029). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when operating means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in whether or not the operating means can be operated. That is, if the operation is permitted regardless of the connection state of the one or more electrical connection lines to the object, the operating means may be easily operated improperly, while the connection of the one or more electrical connection lines may be performed. If the operation is prohibited irrespective of the state, the workability of the operation accompanying the operation of the operation means may be deteriorated.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, there is provided an operating means disposed on the object and operably formed, the object is connected to one or more electric connection lines, and the electric connection line is connected to the object. Since the operability of the operation means is changed according to the state, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the accommodation body is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed so as to be displaceable, so that the container can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can be easily operated.
As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, in a state where the operation means is not operated, since it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is hardly visually recognized from the outside), improper operation can be suppressed. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, so that the operability of the operation means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is allowed in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is allowed in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, even if the other electrical connection lines are released (pulled out) from the object, the operation of the operation means is not performed. By permitting the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

  In particular, in a configuration in which the container is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled) from the object to displace the container (that is, dispose it easily for operation) is connected to the container. In order to allow the operation of the operating means after displacing the electric connection line, for example, an extension line is interposed between the object and another electric connection line, and the released (removed) other electric connection line The trouble of reconnecting to the object can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is prohibited when at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object. Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object (that is, all the electrical connections). If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that it is possible to suppress the operation of the operation means illegally.

  In the configuration in which the container is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to dispose it easily) is connected to the container. Is displaced, for example, if an extended line is interposed between the object and another electrical connection line and the released (disconnected) other electrical connection line is reconnected to the object, the operation can be performed. Since the operation of the means can be allowed, the operation by the operation of the operation means can be performed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Board Boxes A3100 and A4100 as an Example>
A gaming machine provided with a container for accommodating an object, comprising: operating means disposed on the object and operably formed, wherein the container is displaceably formed and disposed during a game. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operation means is easier to operate than a position.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a board box (housing body) for housing a control board (object) is known (JP-A-2005-205029). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that, when operating means is provided on a control board (object), the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine R1, there is provided an operating means disposed on the target and operably formed, and the container is formed so as to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than the position provided during the game. Since the position can be displaced, the operability of the operation means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the accommodation body is rotatably supported by a shaft, and is displaced by rotation about the rotatably supported portion.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the container is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivoted portion as the center of rotation, so that the container is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, a separate member faces the operating means at a position where the housing is disposed at the time of the game.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, at the position where the housing is arranged at the time of the game, since the separate member faces the operating means, the operating means is illegally operated. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element. In a state where the operation element is inserted, the operation element is brought into contact with the separate member, and A gaming machine R4, wherein the accommodation body cannot be displaced to a position provided during the game.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element. When the operating element is inserted, the operating element contacts another member. By being in contact, the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during the game, so that forgetting to remove the operation element can be suppressed. Therefore, unauthorized use of the operator can be suppressed.

<Characteristic AA group> (Information that the final display mode was displayed during the production period in the button continuous production)
Operation means that can be operated by the player, effect execution means that can execute an effect based on the operation of the operation means within the effective period, and effective period setting means that can set the effective period In the gaming machine, the effect execution means can execute the first effect as the effect after the validity period is at least in the first state based on the operation of the operation means during the validity period. The validity period is variably set to be in the first state when it is determined by the effect execution means that the first effect is to be executed. A gaming machine AA1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, there is an effect in which the display mode is changed by causing the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times (so-called continuous hit effect).

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, the display mode of the effect can be changed by the operation of the player himself, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in the above-described continuous-stroke effect, for example, the number of times that the display mode can be changed in the continuous-stroke effect (upper limit number) is set in advance according to the result of the special symbol lottery. No matter how many times the player operates the operation means during the operation validity period in which the operation is set to valid, if the display mode (upper limit display mode) that is changed by the preset upper limit number of times is displayed, Further, there is a problem that the display mode cannot be changed, and the remaining period of the operation effective period at the time when the upper limit display mode is displayed cannot be used for the effect. Also, in general, the number of times that the display mode can be changed in the continuous hitting effect (upper limit number) is larger when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when the result is a loss, In addition, the configuration is made so that the player cannot grasp the upper limit number set in the present continuous hitting performance, and the player is eagerly operated by the operation means, thereby improving the interest of the game. However, in this case, even though the upper limit display mode is displayed, the player continues to enthusiastically operate the operation unit until the operation effective period elapses, and the operation unit is operated multiple times. In spite of the operation, a situation where the display mode does not change frequently occurs, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by improving a player's willingness to play. I have.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the validity period is set so as to be in the first state when the first effect is determined to be executed by the effect executing means. Ambitious to decide that will be performed. There is an effect that the operating means can be operated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the first effect can be executed even if the preset validity period does not elapse, so that the effect performed by the effect executing means is delayed and the effect is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the game machine AA1 has an operation determining unit that can determine the operation content of the operating unit within the validity period, and the effect executing unit is configured to determine whether the operation determining unit has a specific determination result. A gaming machine AA2 capable of executing the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA1, when the determination result of the operation determining means is a specific determination result, it is possible to execute the first effect, so that the player Thus, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the operation means so as to obtain a specific determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AA2, the gaming machine AA2 has an operation count measuring unit capable of measuring the operation count of the operation unit within the valid period, and the operation determination unit determines that the operation count measured by the operation count measurement unit is a specific operation count. A game machine AA3 characterized in that it can be determined that the result of the determination is the specific result.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA2, when the number of times the operating means has been operated reaches the specific number of operations, the operation determining means determines that the result is a specific determination result. On the other hand, the operating means can be operated so that the number of times of the specific operation is increased as quickly as possible, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the number of operations is determined to be a specific determination result by the number of times of operation being the number of times of the specific operation by operating the operation unit eagerly, even though the operation unit is operated eagerly, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate without the result of the determination.

  In the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the effect executing means is capable of executing the effect in an effect mode including at least a first mode and a second mode that is variable from the first mode, and the operation determining means includes: A gaming machine AA4, characterized in that the content of operation on the operation means after the effect is executed in the second mode is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the discrimination by the operation discriminating means based on the operation content after the effect of the effect performed by the effect executing means is changed to the second mode. Is executed, the game can be played while expecting that the effect executed by the effect executing means changes to the second mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced and amusement of a game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AA5, further comprising a suggestion unit that can indicate that the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution unit is the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA4, the effect is suggested by the suggesting means in the second mode, so that an effect that can be provided easily to the player can be provided. There is.

<Characteristic AB group> (Display control of random display)
Discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and a privilege which is advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed And a plurality of displays capable of displaying a plurality of symbols on the display device, wherein the display device is capable of displaying a plurality of different symbols. A display position setting unit capable of setting a position; and a symbol determination unit for determining a type of the symbol to be displayed at the plurality of display positions by the symbol display unit, wherein the symbol determination unit includes the plurality of display units. Among the positions, the type of the symbol to be displayed at the predetermined display position is determined, and the type of the symbol to be displayed at the remaining display position is determined based on the determined type of the symbol, That the gaming machine AB1.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, there is a configuration in which a variety of effects can be executed by randomly displaying a plurality of types of icons at a plurality of positions on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing such an effect, in order to prevent a player from easily predicting the effect mode of the icon display effect, a portion where each icon is displayed in the icon display effect, A plurality of effect pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the effect of the icon display effect to be executed is determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery. However, when a method of preparing a plurality of effect pattern data in advance is used, there is a problem that the amount of effect data to be stored in advance increases according to the number of effect patterns.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute a suitable effect while suppressing an increase in the effect data amount.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to determine the type of the symbol to be displayed at the remaining display position based on the type of the symbol to be displayed at the predetermined display position. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effect.

  In the gaming machine AB1, there is a symbol type order storage unit that stores a plurality of types of the symbols in a specific order in advance, and the symbol determination unit is configured to store the specific type stored in the symbol type order storage unit. A game machine AB2 for determining the type of the symbol to be displayed at the remaining display position based on the order.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the type of the symbol displayed at the remaining display position is determined based on a predetermined specific order, so the type of the symbol is determined. Has the effect of simplifying the processing required for this.

  In the gaming machine AB2, the symbol type order storage means stores at least a first order and a second order different from the first order as the specific order. Game machine AB3.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB2, since the symbol type order storage means stores a plurality of orders in advance, the order used when the symbol type is determined by the symbol determining means is determined. By making them different, it is possible to execute an effect rich in variations and to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In the gaming machine AB3, the type of the symbols included in the first order and at least a part of the types of the symbols included in the second order are different from each other. .

  According to the gaming machine AB4, different types of symbols are determined depending on whether the type of the symbol is determined based on the first order or when the type of the symbol is determined based on the second order. There is an effect that a rich effect can be executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AB4, the symbol determination means can determine the type of the symbol based on the second order when the determination result of the determination means is a determination result in which the specific identification information is displayed. A gaming machine AB5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB4, when the result of the determination is that the privilege is provided by the privilege providing means, the symbol type can be determined based on the second order. The player can play the game while expecting that the type of the symbol included only in the order is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

<Feature AC Group> (Button delay effect)
An operating means operable by the player, a measuring means capable of measuring a predetermined period based on the operation of the operating means, and a length of the period measured by the measuring means satisfies the first condition. In this case, the gaming machine AC1 includes: an effect execution unit capable of executing an effect; and a condition setting unit capable of setting at least one of a plurality of different conditions as the first condition.

  Conventionally, by making only the execution timing different without changing the content of each effect to be executed (display effect for changing the display mode, sound effect for outputting sound), the effect is provided by providing the player with a sense of incongruity. There has been a gaming machine that performs an effect that enhances the effect (a so-called delayed effect). This delayed production allows only the player who has noticed a sense of incongruity to know that the delayed production has been performed, and as a benefit, a privilege (eg, a jackpot winning) advantageous to the player is given with a high probability. It has recently been used as an effect to show that

  However, the frequency of occurrence (execution frequency) is low because the advantage is used as an effect in which the advantageous privilege is given with a high probability, and even if the player plays the game all day, it is executed only once or twice. Was something. Conventionally, with respect to the delayed effect in which the execution frequency is low and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to each delayed effect pattern, that is, the display effect after the frame button 22 is operated. The display data including the display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the execution of the sound effect, and the production data dedicated to the delay effect having the sound data including the sound corresponding to the standby period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. There is a problem that the capacity of the effect data becomes large with respect to the execution frequency.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to execute the above-described delayed effect without increasing the amount of effect data.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, by setting different conditions by the condition setting means, the period from when the operation means is operated to when the effect is executed can be easily changed. There is an effect that the effect data can be executed without increasing the capacity of the effect data.

  In the gaming machine AC1, there is provided a first display mode display unit capable of causing the display unit to display a first display mode indicating that the operation unit has been operated based on the operation of the operation unit. The gaming machine AC2, wherein the first display mode display means is configured to continue displaying at least until the effect is executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1, even if there is an interval before the effect is executed, the first display mode is continuously displayed, so that the operation of the operation unit can be performed by the gaming machine. And that the game can be played with confidence.

  In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, there is provided a validity period setting unit in which the operation of the operation unit is set to be valid, and the effect executing unit is configured to be able to execute the effect even after the validity period has elapsed. A gaming machine AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the effect can be executed even after the expiration of the validity period.

<Characteristic AD group> (Gauge reduction control)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and display means for displaying the specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect changed in accordance with the number information, and subtracting or adding the number information Number setting means for determining the number of times to be performed, and setting means capable of determining the number information to be subtracted or added to once for each number of times corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of times determining means. A gaming machine AD1 characterized in that:

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, there is one that displays predetermined number information and executes an adjustment suggestion effect indicating a lottery result based on a result of adding or subtracting the number information a plurality of times.

  In a gaming machine capable of executing such an adjustment suggestion effect, a predetermined lottery result is displayed by varying the number of times the number information is added or subtracted in order to suggest the lottery result by the effect result of the adjustment suggestion effect. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect content of the effect suggested by the adjustment becomes one pattern, and the effect of the effect is reduced. Also, if the addition amount or the subtraction amount is determined randomly each time the number information is added or subtracted, the production result cannot suggest the lottery result, and a meaningless production will be performed. There is a problem that the effect is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of a game is improved by increasing the effect of the effect using numerical information. I do.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, after determining the number of times the number information is subtracted or added, the number information to be subtracted or added in each time is set, so that the effect number can be changed without changing the number of times the number information varies. It is possible to set appropriate number information. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of changing the number information can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AD1, the effect execution means is configured to be able to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined lower limit or upper limit of the number information when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine AD2 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, it is possible for the player to predict the determination result of the determination means in accordance with the variable result of the number information. Can be noticed. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the setting means determines the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or the number of times the minimum number information is added, out of the number information to be subtracted or added at one time, and then performs the subtraction or A gaming machine AD3 for setting number information to be subtracted or added to the remaining number of times based on number information that can be added.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or added is determined first, so that the number information to be subtracted or added exceeding the lower limit or the upper limit. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that is set.

<Characteristic AE group> (Symbol display control)
Discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and a privilege which is advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed A plurality of predetermined identification symbols are assigned to the identification information, and the gaming machine displays a symbol corresponding to each of the identification symbols. A determinable symbol determining unit, and a symbol updating unit capable of displaying a symbol newly determined by the symbol determining unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition in association with the corresponding identification symbol. A gaming machine AE1 characterized by having.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, a variable effect using a plurality of decorative symbols in which identification information (for example, a number) indicating a special symbol lottery result and a character that can be identified by a player are executed is enhanced to enhance the effect. There are things that are.

  In a gaming machine capable of performing such a fluctuation effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, so that it is possible to enhance the effect of the dramatic effect as compared with the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when playing the game continuously, the freshness is reduced and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that provides a novel effect to a player, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, a symbol corresponding to the identification symbol is determined by the symbol determining means, and a new symbol is displayed by the symbol updating means, so that a symbol display unexpected to the player can be executed. There is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AE1, the identification information is constituted by a plurality of symbol rows for displaying the symbols corresponding to the identification symbols in a predetermined order, and the privilege providing means includes a predetermined combination of the identification symbols. The gaming machine AE2, wherein the privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AE1, a privilege is given when the predetermined identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that it is possible to determine which identification symbol corresponds to the displayed symbol. By doing so, it is possible to provide a fun of predicting an identification symbol that can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, during the period until the identification information is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, a gaming machine AE3 having specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed as the identification information is a specific combination. .

  According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AE1 or AE1 or 2, a specific effect is executed in accordance with a combination of symbols, so that an identification symbol displayed as identification information to the player, It is possible to play a game while giving interest to each of the symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic AF group> (Pseudo-outlier fluctuation)
Determining means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the identification information is dynamically displayed; And an effect execution means capable of executing an effect within a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode, wherein the dynamic display mode determining means determines whether the determination result is a specific determination result or a case other than the specific determination result. Consists of the same dynamic display period The fixed period dynamic display mode is configured to be determined, and the specific period dynamic display mode is configured to execute a common specific effect until the execution of the dynamic display is started. A gaming machine AF1 characterized in that:

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a storage device that has a storage unit that can hold and hold a right to execute a special symbol change (a lottery right of a special symbol lottery) up to a predetermined number (four). Thereby, even if the lottery right (special figure reservation) of the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of the special symbol change, the lottery right (special figure reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so that the special symbol change can be continuously performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, there is a configuration in which the variation time of the special symbol change for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is made different according to the number of lottery rights (number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means. is there. Specifically, when the number of lottery rights (number of special figure reservations) stored in the storage means is 0 and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of range, a long fluctuation time out fluctuation is executed. Some are configured to be easier. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a period in which the special symbol change is not executed, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the special symbol change is not executed and a decrease in the player's willingness to play. .

  However, according to the conventional gaming machine using the above-described configuration, at the time when the out-of-conversion with a long fluctuating time is executed, the player can easily recognize that the lottery result of the running special symbol fluctuation is out of order. There is a problem that the player is able to grasp it, and the player's willingness to play decreases during the special symbol fluctuation period.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by improving a player's willingness to play. I have.

  According to the gaming machine AF1, the start of the dynamic display mode in the approximate period causes the player to predict the discrimination result, thereby reducing the willingness to play the game before the discrimination result is notified. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AF1, the dynamic display mode determining unit determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the determining unit, and the dynamic display mode regardless of the determination result of the determining unit. The gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the second state for determining is settable.

  According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the determination method of the dynamic display mode is switched between the first state and the second state, so that the determination result is identified to the player at the start of the dynamic display. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being easily played and play the game with interest in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  In the gaming machine AF2, when the second state is set, the content of the dynamic display mode is determined by determining the determination result at a predetermined timing when the determined dynamic display mode is executed. A gaming machine AF3, which is variable based on the result of the determination.

  According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AF2, by changing the content to the content based on the determination result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the variable timing.

  In the gaming machine AF3, when the determination by the determination unit is performed, the remaining period determination unit is capable of determining the remaining dynamic display period, and when the determination result by the remaining period determination unit satisfies the variable condition, Game machine AF4, comprising dynamic display mode changing means for changing a dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF3, the dynamic display mode can be varied according to the remaining dynamic display period. There is an effect that the player can be interested in both the length and the length of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period are set as the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. A possible dynamic display period setting unit, wherein the dynamic display period setting unit can set the first period when a determination result of the determination unit is other than the specific determination result; The dynamic display mode determining means is capable of determining the specific period dynamic display mode corresponding to the length of the first period, and the effect executing means is capable of determining the dynamic display mode in which the second period is set. The gaming machine AF5, wherein an effect including the specific period dynamic display mode can be executed as a part of the effect corresponding to the game machine AF5.

  According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, even if a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the specific period dynamic display mode is set, the specific period Since the effect using the dynamic display mode is performed, there is an effect that the game can be performed with interest in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  In the gaming machine AF5, the effect execution means can execute an effect in which the specific period dynamic display mode is set a plurality of times as an effect corresponding to the dynamic display in which the second period is set. A gaming machine AF6.

  According to the gaming machine AF6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF5, the dynamic display mode for a specific period can be executed a plurality of times for one dynamic display period. There is.

<Characteristic AG group> (Manage seconds on the liquid crystal side)
In a gaming machine having first control means for executing an effect, and second control means different from the first control means, the first control means includes a first control means capable of setting the effect contents of the effect. Setting means, and first output means capable of outputting a first signal based on the effect set by the first setting means to the second control means, wherein the second control means A second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect in response to the first signal output from the first output means, and a period for executing the second effect executed by the second effect execution means. Measuring means for measuring, and second output means capable of outputting a second signal to the first control means when a specific condition is satisfied by the measuring means, wherein the first control means Identification based on the second signal output from the second output means Gaming machine AG1, wherein the output is capable of executing.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show a result of a special symbol lottery. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to spend a predetermined period until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the effect to be executed, thereby suppressing the player from getting tired of the game early. It was something that could be done.

  Furthermore, in recent years, in order to show the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, the mainstream of amusement machines using a plurality of movable movable objects for decoration has become the mainstream. However, there is a problem in that the processing content of the control device that centrally manages the data increases.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is managed by using a plurality of control devices, so that the specific control device can be used. It is intended to suppress concentration of the processing load.

  According to the gaming machine AG1, there is an advantage that the first control means does not need to measure a period required for executing the second effect, and the control load of the first control means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine AG2 in the gaming machine AG1, wherein the measuring means is configured to be able to measure the end timing of the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG1, the end timing of the second effect is measured by the measuring means, so that the control for managing the end timing by the first control means becomes unnecessary, and the first control means Thus, there is an effect that the control load due to is reduced.

  In the gaming machine AG1 or AG2, the second control means has a mode changing means that can change the effect mode of the second effect when the variable condition is satisfied, and the second output means outputs the second measurement value. When the effect period measured by the means satisfies the end condition, the information command for indicating at least a part of the effect mode of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is also the first control means. And the first control means is capable of determining an effect form of a specific effect to be executed after the second effect based on the information command output from the second output means. A gaming machine AG3 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG1 or AG2, the effect form of the second effect changed by the second control means can be discriminated by the first control means, and specified based on the discrimination result. The effect mode of the effect is variable. As a result, the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AH group>
A discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the case, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player, an effect can be executed based on an operating means operable by the player and an operation of the operating means. A game machine AH1 comprising: an effect executing means; and a determining means capable of variably determining an execution timing at which the effect is executed by the effect executing means.

  Conventionally, by making only the execution timing different without changing the content of each effect to be executed (display effect for changing the display mode, sound effect for outputting sound), the effect is provided by providing the player with a sense of incongruity. There has been a gaming machine that performs an effect that enhances the effect (a so-called delayed effect). This delayed production allows only the player who has noticed a sense of incongruity to know that the delayed production has been performed, and as a benefit, a privilege (eg, a jackpot winning) advantageous to the player is given with a high probability. It has recently been used as an effect to show that

  However, the frequency of occurrence (execution frequency) is low because the advantage is used as an effect in which the advantageous privilege is given with a high probability, and even if the player plays the game all day, it is executed only once or twice. Was something. Conventionally, with respect to the delayed effect in which the execution frequency is low and the content of each effect does not change, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to each delayed effect pattern, that is, the display effect after the frame button 22 is operated. The display data including the display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the execution of the sound effect, and the production data dedicated to the delay effect having the sound data including the sound corresponding to the standby period until the sound effect is performed are prepared in advance. There is a problem that the capacity of the effect data becomes large with respect to the execution frequency.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to execute the above-described delayed effect without increasing the amount of effect data.

  According to the gaming machine AH1, the effect execution timing is variably determined by the determining means, so that it is not necessary to set a plurality of effect data in advance corresponding to the difference in effect execution timing, and the data capacity increases. This has the effect of suppressing inconveniences that occur.

  In the gaming machine AH1, movable means configured to be movable as the effect, and the movable means are configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern by the effect executing means. A gaming machine AH2, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AH2, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved by moving the movable means.

  The gaming machine AH3, wherein the gaming machine AH1 or AH2 has a notification mode execution unit capable of executing a notification mode during a period from when the operation unit is operated to when the execution of the effect is started. .

  According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, the notification mode is executed in a period until the start of the effect, so that the player can recognize that the operation of the operation means is effective, There is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the game machine has time counting means capable of starting time counting based on the operation of the operation means, and the determining means executes the effect based on the timing data of the time counting means. Gaming machine AH4, characterized in that the game machine AH4 is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, it is possible to time a period that has elapsed since the operating means was operated by the timer means. Thus, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the length of the period from the operation of the operation means to the start of the execution.

  In the gaming machine AH4, the effect executing means is at least constituted by output means capable of outputting a signal instructing execution of the effect, and setting means for setting execution of an effect based on a signal from the output means. The gaming machine AH5, wherein the output means outputs the signal based on the timing data of the timing means becoming a value corresponding to the content determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH4, no signal is output until the timed data reaches a corresponding value. It is possible to easily execute the game at the set timing, and it is possible to easily control the game.

<Characteristic AI group> (Crash control)
Determining means, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determining means, and display of the identification information for indicating the specific result of the determination, which is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege, the effect execution means capable of executing an effect, and the first setting necessary for the effect execution means to execute the effect A second setting that is executed after the first setting is executed, and at least an executable setting execution unit, wherein the first setting is performed before the execution of the second setting is started. Is releasable, and the setting execution means is configured to be able to execute the first setting by the setting execution means even when the effect is not executed.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect for a predetermined period in order to show a result of a special symbol lottery. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to spend a predetermined period until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed while enjoying the contents of the effect to be executed, thereby suppressing the player from getting tired of the game early. It was something that could be done.

  Furthermore, in recent gaming machines, in order to show the result of the special symbol lottery, in addition to the liquid crystal display, the one that performs an effect using a plurality of movable movable objects for decoration has become mainstream. By using the movable role, a powerful effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  However, in order to prevent the movable auditorium from breaking down, if the movable auditorium is not located at the execution position at the execution timing of the effect using the above-described movable auditorium, the movable auditorium is not located at the execution position. Is configured to prohibit the execution of the effect using the character, there is a problem that the execution frequency of the effect using the movable role is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance a staging effect by suitably executing a staging using a movable role. The purpose is.

  According to the gaming machine AI1, the first setting is executed even when the effect is not executed, so that the preparation for executing the effect can be completed early, and the effect can be executed in a short time. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine AI2, wherein the gaming machine AI1 is configured to be able to identify that the first setting has been executed.

  According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AI1, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement in which it is possible to expect the execution of the effect even when the effect is not executed by executing the first setting. is there.

  In the gaming machine AI1 or AI2, the gaming machine AI1 or AI2 has movable means that can be moved as at least a part of the effect, and the first setting is that a driving unit for moving the movable means is driven. A gaming machine AI3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine AI1 or AI2, even when the movable means is movable by driving the drive unit, the first setting is executed even when the movable means is not movable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the movable means is determined to move at an early stage by the first setting.

<Characteristic AJ group> (large set)
Determining means capable of performing the determination, display means for displaying an identification symbol for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification symbol on the display means; A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification symbol for indicating the specific determination result is displayed after the identification symbol is dynamically displayed; Wherein the dynamic display means dynamically displays a symbol sequence constituted by a plurality of the identification symbols. Wherein the gaming machine has a storage means in which identification display modes of more types than the plurality of identification symbols are stored, and the identification display mode stored in the storage means. Vs each Means for determining that a different identification display mode is to be displayed, and the identification display mode different from the identification symbol for indicating the specific determination result when a specific condition is satisfied. A game machine AJ1 comprising: effect display means for stopping and displaying the identification symbol on which is displayed, and executing an effect corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, a variable effect using a plurality of decorative symbols in which identification information (for example, a number) indicating a special symbol lottery result and a character that can be identified by a player are executed is enhanced to enhance the effect. There are things that are.

  In a gaming machine capable of performing such a fluctuation effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, so that it is possible to enhance the effect of the dramatic effect as compared with the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when playing the game continuously, the freshness is reduced and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that provides a novel effect to a player, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the effect performed when the specific condition is satisfied is changed by the identification display mode determined by the determination means, so that the player is interested in the identification display mode displayed on the identification symbol. By providing the game, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved even if the identification symbol indicating the specific determination result is not displayed.

  In the gaming machine AJ1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the effect executing means can re-display the identification symbol in which the identification display mode is displayed a plurality of times after stopping and displaying the identification symbol multiple times. The determination means is configured to be able to update the type of the identification display mode displayed on the identification symbol when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the effect execution unit. A gaming machine AJ2, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ1, the identification display mode is updated when the dynamic display is performed, so that various types of identification display modes can be stopped and displayed. There is an effect that the effect can be performed.

  In the gaming machine AJ2, the effect executing means may determine, as the effect, information corresponding to the identification display mode stopped and displayed each time the identification symbol is stopped and displayed when the specific condition is satisfied. It is configured to be able to execute a possible notification effect, and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified in the notification effect based on establishment of the effect condition. A gaming machine AJ3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ2, since the specific effect is changed by the identification display mode displayed each time the game is stopped, the identification display displayed over a plurality of times. There is an effect that interest can be given to the combination of aspects.

<Characteristic AK group> (Derived from large set system)
Display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes; display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means; and storing the identification display modes of a type greater than the predetermined number. Storage means, determination means capable of determining a predetermined number of the identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from the identification display modes stored in the storage means, and a specific condition being satisfied. The game machine AK1 further comprising: an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the identification display mode displayed on the display means when the game is performed.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, a variable effect using a plurality of decorative symbols in which identification information (for example, a number) indicating a special symbol lottery result and a character that can be identified by a player are executed is enhanced to enhance the effect. There are things that are.

  In a gaming machine capable of performing such a fluctuation effect, a plurality of characters are variably displayed, so that it is possible to enhance the effect of the dramatic effect as compared with the effect in which only numbers are variably displayed. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem that when playing the game continuously, the freshness is reduced and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving amusement of a game by providing a novel performance to a player to enhance a performance effect. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine AK1, a predetermined number of identification display modes to be displayed on the display unit are determined by the determination unit, and an effect corresponding to the displayed identification display mode is executed by the effect execution unit. Interest can be given to the type of the identification display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AK1 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a predetermined number of the identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means is dynamically controlled by the dynamic display means. A gaming machine AK2 characterized in that the effect can be executed in accordance with the identification display mode stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK1, the stop position of the identification display mode can also be of interest, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the dynamic display means is configured to stop-display the identification display mode and then re-dynamically display the identification display mode. A gaming machine AK3 characterized in that the type displayed is updated when the target is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the type of the identification display mode is updated when the stopped and displayed identification display mode is dynamically displayed. Every time, the type of identification display mode to be displayed can be newly interested. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect in which information corresponding to the identification display mode stopped and displayed can be identified each time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. A game machine AK4 configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified in the notification effect, based on establishment of the effect condition. .

  According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the stopped and displayed identification display mode is notified, so that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AL group> (Large set derived 2)
Display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes, display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means, and storage means for storing a plurality of types of the identification display modes; Determining means for determining a predetermined number of the identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from the identification display modes stored in the storage means, and displaying the identification display modes on the display means within a predetermined period A gaming machine AL1 comprising: an effect execution unit that can execute a specific effect when the type of the identified display mode reaches a predetermined number.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, a plurality of identification information (for example, numbers) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player by a combination of the identification information stopped and displayed. Some of the identification information displayed in a variable manner is of interest.

  In a gaming machine capable of performing such a fluctuation effect, while a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, the fluctuation effect is performed while expecting that the identification information indicating a lottery result advantageous to the player is stopped and displayed. Although it could be enjoyed, if the stop-displayed identification information was a combination indicating a lottery result other than the winning, the stop-displayed identification information would lose interest and the effect would be reduced There was a problem of doing it.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving amusement of a game by providing a novel performance to a player to enhance a performance effect. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine AL1, when the type of the displayed identification display mode reaches the predetermined number, the specific effect is executed. Until the period elapses, there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AL1 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a predetermined number of the identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the effect execution means is dynamically controlled by the dynamic display means. A gaming machine AL2 configured to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the identification display mode stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL1, the stop position of the identification display mode can also be of interest, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to display the identification display mode again after the identification display mode is stopped and displayed, and the identification display mode includes A gaming machine AL3 characterized in that the type displayed is updated when the target is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the type of the identification display mode is updated when the stopped and displayed identification display mode is dynamically displayed. Every time, the type of identification display mode to be displayed can be newly interested. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a notification effect in which information corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode can be identified each time the identification and display mode is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine AL4 is configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified in the notification effect based on establishment of the effect condition. .

  According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the stopped and displayed identification display mode is notified, so that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S305 determination means S904 privilege provision means S2705 effect execution means S3102 number of times determination means S3110 setting means

Claims (3)

Determining means capable of performing the determination;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means;
When identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, a privilege granting unit capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect changed in accordance with the number information,
Number determining means for determining the number of times to subtract or add the number information,
A gaming machine having setting means capable of determining number information to be subtracted or added at one time for each number of times corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of time determining means. .   The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined lower limit or upper limit of the number information, when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:   The setting means determines the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or the number of times the minimum number information is added, out of the number information to be subtracted or added at one time, and then, based on the number information that can be subtracted or added. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein number information to be subtracted or number information to be added to the remaining number is set.

Images